diff options
| author | Linus Torvalds <torvalds@ppc970.osdl.org> | 2005-04-17 02:20:36 +0400 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Linus Torvalds <torvalds@ppc970.osdl.org> | 2005-04-17 02:20:36 +0400 |
| commit | 1da177e4c3f41524e886b7f1b8a0c1fc7321cac2 (patch) | |
| tree | 0bba044c4ce775e45a88a51686b5d9f90697ea9d /Documentation/networking | |
| download | linux-1da177e4c3f41524e886b7f1b8a0c1fc7321cac2.tar.xz | |
Linux-2.6.12-rc2
Initial git repository build. I'm not bothering with the full history,
even though we have it. We can create a separate "historical" git
archive of that later if we want to, and in the meantime it's about
3.2GB when imported into git - space that would just make the early
git days unnecessarily complicated, when we don't have a lot of good
infrastructure for it.
Let it rip!
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation/networking')
83 files changed, 21285 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..834993d26730 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file +3c505.txt + - information on the 3Com EtherLink Plus (3c505) driver. +6pack.txt + - info on the 6pack protocol, an alternative to KISS for AX.25 +Configurable + - info on some of the configurable network parameters +DLINK.txt + - info on the D-Link DE-600/DE-620 parallel port pocket adapters +PLIP.txt + - PLIP: The Parallel Line Internet Protocol device driver +README.sb1000 + - info on General Instrument/NextLevel SURFboard1000 cable modem. +alias.txt + - info on using alias network devices +arcnet-hardware.txt + - tons of info on ARCnet, hubs, jumper settings for ARCnet cards, etc. +arcnet.txt + - info on the using the ARCnet driver itself. +atm.txt + - info on where to get ATM programs and support for Linux. +ax25.txt + - info on using AX.25 and NET/ROM code for Linux +baycom.txt + - info on the driver for Baycom style amateur radio modems +bridge.txt + - where to get user space programs for ethernet bridging with Linux. +comx.txt + - info on drivers for COMX line of synchronous serial adapters. +cops.txt + - info on the COPS LocalTalk Linux driver +cs89x0.txt + - the Crystal LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA adapter driver +de4x5.txt + - the Digital EtherWORKS DE4?? and DE5?? PCI Ethernet driver +decnet.txt + - info on using the DECnet networking layer in Linux. +depca.txt + - the Digital DEPCA/EtherWORKS DE1?? and DE2?? LANCE Ethernet driver +dgrs.txt + - the Digi International RightSwitch SE-X Ethernet driver +dmfe.txt + - info on the Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver. +e100.txt + - info on Intel's EtherExpress PRO/100 line of 10/100 boards +e1000.txt + - info on Intel's E1000 line of gigabit ethernet boards +eql.txt + - serial IP load balancing +ethertap.txt + - the Ethertap user space packet reception and transmission driver +ewrk3.txt + - the Digital EtherWORKS 3 DE203/4/5 Ethernet driver +filter.txt + - Linux Socket Filtering +fore200e.txt + - FORE Systems PCA-200E/SBA-200E ATM NIC driver info. +framerelay.txt + - info on using Frame Relay/Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). +ip-sysctl.txt + - /proc/sys/net/ipv4/* variables +ip_dynaddr.txt + - IP dynamic address hack e.g. for auto-dialup links +ipddp.txt + - AppleTalk-IP Decapsulation and AppleTalk-IP Encapsulation +iphase.txt + - Interphase PCI ATM (i)Chip IA Linux driver info. +irda.txt + - where to get IrDA (infrared) utilities and info for Linux. +lapb-module.txt + - programming information of the LAPB module. +ltpc.txt + - the Apple or Farallon LocalTalk PC card driver +multicast.txt + - Behaviour of cards under Multicast +ncsa-telnet + - notes on how NCSA telnet (DOS) breaks with MTU discovery enabled. +net-modules.txt + - info and "insmod" parameters for all network driver modules. +netdevices.txt + - info on network device driver functions exported to the kernel. +olympic.txt + - IBM PCI Pit/Pit-Phy/Olympic Token Ring driver info. +policy-routing.txt + - IP policy-based routing +pt.txt + - the Gracilis Packetwin AX.25 device driver +ray_cs.txt + - Raylink Wireless LAN card driver info. +routing.txt + - the new routing mechanism +shaper.txt + - info on the module that can shape/limit transmitted traffic. +sis900.txt + - SiS 900/7016 Fast Ethernet device driver info. +sk98lin.txt + - Marvell Yukon Chipset / SysKonnect SK-98xx compliant Gigabit + Ethernet Adapter family driver info +skfp.txt + - SysKonnect FDDI (SK-5xxx, Compaq Netelligent) driver info. +smc9.txt + - the driver for SMC's 9000 series of Ethernet cards +smctr.txt + - SMC TokenCard TokenRing Linux driver info. +tcp.txt + - short blurb on how TCP output takes place. +tlan.txt + - ThunderLAN (Compaq Netelligent 10/100, Olicom OC-2xxx) driver info. +tms380tr.txt + - SysKonnect Token Ring ISA/PCI adapter driver info. +tuntap.txt + - TUN/TAP device driver, allowing user space Rx/Tx of packets. +vortex.txt + - info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards. +wan-router.txt + - Wan router documentation +wanpipe.txt + - WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Driver for Linux WAN Router +wavelan.txt + - AT&T GIS (nee NCR) WaveLAN card: An Ethernet-like radio transceiver +x25.txt + - general info on X.25 development. +x25-iface.txt + - description of the X.25 Packet Layer to LAPB device interface. +z8530drv.txt + - info about Linux driver for Z8530 based HDLC cards for AX.25 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4af8071a6d18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + +3COM PCI TOKEN LINK VELOCITY XL TOKEN RING CARDS README + +Release 0.9.0 - Release + Jul 17th 2000 Mike Phillips + + 1.2.0 - Final + Feb 17th 2002 Mike Phillips + Updated for submission to the 2.4.x kernel. + +Thanks: + Terry Murphy from 3Com for tech docs and support, + Adam D. Ligas for testing the driver. + +Note: + This driver will NOT work with the 3C339 Token Ring cards, you need +to use the tms380 driver instead. + +Options: + +The driver accepts three options: ringspeed, pkt_buf_sz and message_level. + +These options can be specified differently for each card found. + +ringspeed: Has one of three settings 0 (default), 4 or 16. 0 will +make the card autosense the ringspeed and join at the appropriate speed, +this will be the default option for most people. 4 or 16 allow you to +explicitly force the card to operate at a certain speed. The card will fail +if you try to insert it at the wrong speed. (Although some hubs will allow +this so be *very* careful). The main purpose for explicitly setting the ring +speed is for when the card is first on the ring. In autosense mode, if the card +cannot detect any active monitors on the ring it will open at the same speed as +its last opening. This can be hazardous if this speed does not match the speed +you want the ring to operate at. + +pkt_buf_sz: This is this initial receive buffer allocation size. This will +default to 4096 if no value is entered. You may increase performance of the +driver by setting this to a value larger than the network packet size, although +the driver now re-sizes buffers based on MTU settings as well. + +message_level: Controls level of messages created by the driver. Defaults to 0: +which only displays start-up and critical messages. Presently any non-zero +value will display all soft messages as well. NB This does not turn +debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code. + +Variable MTU size: + +The driver can handle a MTU size upto either 4500 or 18000 depending upon +ring speed. The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part +of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able +to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring +position = 296,000 bytes of memory space, plus of course anything +necessary for the tx sk_buff's. Remember this is per card, so if you are +building routers, gateway's etc, you could start to use a lot of memory +real fast. + +2/17/02 Mike Phillips + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b9d5b7230118 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c505.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +The 3Com Etherlink Plus (3c505) driver. + +This driver now uses DMA. There is currently no support for PIO operation. +The default DMA channel is 6; this is _not_ autoprobed, so you must +make sure you configure it correctly. If loading the driver as a +module, you can do this with "modprobe 3c505 dma=n". If the driver is +linked statically into the kernel, you must either use an "ether=" +statement on the command line, or change the definition of ELP_DMA in 3c505.h. + +The driver will warn you if it has to fall back on the compiled in +default DMA channel. + +If no base address is given at boot time, the driver will autoprobe +ports 0x300, 0x280 and 0x310 (in that order). If no IRQ is given, the driver +will try to probe for it. + +The driver can be used as a loadable module. See net-modules.txt for details +of the parameters it can take. + +Theoretically, one instance of the driver can now run multiple cards, +in the standard way (when loading a module, say "modprobe 3c505 +io=0x300,0x340 irq=10,11 dma=6,7" or whatever). I have not tested +this, though. + +The driver may now support revision 2 hardware; the dependency on +being able to read the host control register has been removed. This +is also untested, since I don't have a suitable card. + +Known problems: + I still see "DMA upload timed out" messages from time to time. These +seem to be fairly non-fatal though. + The card is old and slow. + +To do: + Improve probe/setup code + Test multicast and promiscuous operation + +Authors: + The driver is mainly written by Craig Southeren, email + <craigs@ineluki.apana.org.au>. + Parts of the driver (adapting the driver to 1.1.4+ kernels, + IRQ/address detection, some changes) and this README by + Juha Laiho <jlaiho@ichaos.nullnet.fi>. + DMA mode, more fixes, etc, by Philip Blundell <pjb27@cam.ac.uk> + Multicard support, Software configurable DMA, etc., by + Christopher Collins <ccollins@pcug.org.au> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..867a99f88c68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c509.txt @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher) +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions +of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file. + +release 1.0 +28 February 2002 +Current maintainer (corrections to): + David Ruggiero <jdr@farfalle.com> + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +(0) Introduction + +The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series +ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used +card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't +be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905" +(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series. Kernel support for the 3c509 family is +provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following +models: + + 3c509 (original ISA card) + 3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex) + 3c589 (PCMCIA) + 3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex) + 3c529 (MCA) + 3c579 (EISA) + +Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide +written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master +copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver, +currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/network/3c509.html. + + +(1) Special Driver Features + +Overriding card settings + +The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR, +IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be +needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax +for LILO parameters for doing this: + + ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0 + +This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and +transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts +with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is +loaded as a module, only the IRQ and transceiver setting may be overridden. +For example, setting two cards to 10base2/IRQ10 and AUI/IRQ11 is done by using +the xcvr and irq module options: + + options 3c509 xcvr=3,1 irq=10,11 + + +(2) Full-duplex mode + +The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities. +In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions +must be met: + +(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full- +duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are +positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B +(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support +full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original +3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus). + +(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45 +connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces. +AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex +operation. + +(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is +itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full- +duplex-capable Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on +another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable. + +/////Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode///// +Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more +limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although +at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation, +the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way) +spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not +auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any +circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode +of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be +independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty +failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet +collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto- +negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch +would ever be necessary or desirable. + + +(3) Available Transceiver Types + +For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are: + +0 transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex +1 AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector) +2 (undefined) +3 10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector) +4 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode +8 transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings +12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode + +Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note +that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable +full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be. +This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would +never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation; +it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be +activated. + + +(4a) Interpretation of error messages and common problems + +Error Messages + +eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011. +These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much +work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving +packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare +or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are: + + - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no + keyboard activitiy. + + - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts. + Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick + interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others. + +No received packets +If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never +receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely +have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the +card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not +increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to +use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10 +or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different +interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work, +you have a routing problem. + +Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev +If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors" +field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you +likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected. + +3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS. +While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work +with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied +setup program. + +3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines +Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500, +to an absurdly high value, such as 5000. + + +(4b) Decoding Status and Error Messages + +The bits in the main status register are: + +value description +0x01 Interrupt latch +0x02 Tx overrun, or Rx underrun +0x04 Tx complete +0x08 Tx FIFO room available +0x10 A complete Rx packet has arrived +0x20 A Rx packet has started to arrive +0x40 The driver has requested an interrupt +0x80 Statistics counter nearly full + +The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are: + +value description +0x02 Out-of-window collision. +0x04 Status stack overflow (normally impossible). +0x08 16 collisions. +0x10 Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth). +0x20 Tx jabber. +0x40 Tx interrupt requested. +0x80 Status is valid (this should always be set). + + +When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as + + eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82 + +The two values typically seen here are: + +0x82 +Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet +host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network. + +0x88 +16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy +or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this +error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set +to full duplex (see above). + +Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be +corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction. + + +(5) Revision history (this file) + +28Feb02 v1.0 DR New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt b/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..48ed2b711bd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/6pack.txt @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +This is the 6pack-mini-HOWTO, written by + +Andreas Könsgen DG3KQ +Internet: ajk@iehk.rwth-aachen.de +AMPR-net: dg3kq@db0pra.ampr.org +AX.25: dg3kq@db0ach.#nrw.deu.eu + +Last update: April 7, 1998 + +1. What is 6pack, and what are the advantages to KISS? + +6pack is a transmission protocol for data exchange between the PC and +the TNC over a serial line. It can be used as an alternative to KISS. + +6pack has two major advantages: +- The PC is given full control over the radio + channel. Special control data is exchanged between the PC and the TNC so + that the PC knows at any time if the TNC is receiving data, if a TNC + buffer underrun or overrun has occurred, if the PTT is + set and so on. This control data is processed at a higher priority than + normal data, so a data stream can be interrupted at any time to issue an + important event. This helps to improve the channel access and timing + algorithms as everything is computed in the PC. It would even be possible + to experiment with something completely different from the known CSMA and + DAMA channel access methods. + This kind of real-time control is especially important to supply several + TNCs that are connected between each other and the PC by a daisy chain + (however, this feature is not supported yet by the Linux 6pack driver). + +- Each packet transferred over the serial line is supplied with a checksum, + so it is easy to detect errors due to problems on the serial line. + Received packets that are corrupt are not passed on to the AX.25 layer. + Damaged packets that the TNC has received from the PC are not transmitted. + +More details about 6pack are described in the file 6pack.ps that is located +in the doc directory of the AX.25 utilities package. + +2. Who has developed the 6pack protocol? + +The 6pack protocol has been developed by Ekki Plicht DF4OR, Henning Rech +DF9IC and Gunter Jost DK7WJ. A driver for 6pack, written by Gunter Jost and +Matthias Welwarsky DG2FEF, comes along with the PC version of FlexNet. +They have also written a firmware for TNCs to perform the 6pack +protocol (see section 4 below). + +3. Where can I get the latest version of 6pack for LinuX? + +At the moment, the 6pack stuff can obtained via anonymous ftp from +db0bm.automation.fh-aachen.de. In the directory /incoming/dg3kq, +there is a file named 6pack.tgz. + +4. Preparing the TNC for 6pack operation + +To be able to use 6pack, a special firmware for the TNC is needed. The EPROM +of a newly bought TNC does not contain 6pack, so you will have to +program an EPROM yourself. The image file for 6pack EPROMs should be +available on any packet radio box where PC/FlexNet can be found. The name of +the file is 6pack.bin. This file is copyrighted and maintained by the FlexNet +team. It can be used under the terms of the license that comes along +with PC/FlexNet. Please do not ask me about the internals of this file as I +don't know anything about it. I used a textual description of the 6pack +protocol to program the Linux driver. + +TNCs contain a 64kByte EPROM, the lower half of which is used for +the firmware/KISS. The upper half is either empty or is sometimes +programmed with software called TAPR. In the latter case, the TNC +is supplied with a DIP switch so you can easily change between the +two systems. When programming a new EPROM, one of the systems is replaced +by 6pack. It is useful to replace TAPR, as this software is rarely used +nowadays. If your TNC is not equipped with the switch mentioned above, you +can build in one yourself that switches over the highest address pin +of the EPROM between HIGH and LOW level. After having inserted the new EPROM +and switched to 6pack, apply power to the TNC for a first test. The connect +and the status LED are lit for about a second if the firmware initialises +the TNC correctly. + +5. Building and installing the 6pack driver + +The driver has been tested with kernel version 2.1.90. Use with older +kernels may lead to a compilation error because the interface to a kernel +function has been changed in the 2.1.8x kernels. + +How to turn on 6pack support: + +- In the linux kernel configuration program, select the code maturity level + options menu and turn on the prompting for development drivers. + +- Select the amateur radio support menu and turn on the serial port 6pack + driver. + +- Compile and install the kernel and the modules. + +To use the driver, the kissattach program delivered with the AX.25 utilities +has to be modified. + +- Do a cd to the directory that holds the kissattach sources. Edit the + kissattach.c file. At the top, insert the following lines: + + #ifndef N_6PACK + #define N_6PACK (N_AX25+1) + #endif + + Then find the line + + int disc = N_AX25; + + and replace N_AX25 by N_6PACK. + +- Recompile kissattach. Rename it to spattach to avoid confusions. + +Installing the driver: + +- Do an insmod 6pack. Look at your /var/log/messages file to check if the + module has printed its initialization message. + +- Do a spattach as you would launch kissattach when starting a KISS port. + Check if the kernel prints the message '6pack: TNC found'. + +- From here, everything should work as if you were setting up a KISS port. + The only difference is that the network device that represents + the 6pack port is called sp instead of sl or ax. So, sp0 would be the + first 6pack port. + +Although the driver has been tested on various platforms, I still declare it +ALPHA. BE CAREFUL! Sync your disks before insmoding the 6pack module +and spattaching. Watch out if your computer behaves strangely. Read section +6 of this file about known problems. + +Note that the connect and status LEDs of the TNC are controlled in a +different way than they are when the TNC is used with PC/FlexNet. When using +FlexNet, the connect LED is on if there is a connection; the status LED is +on if there is data in the buffer of the PC's AX.25 engine that has to be +transmitted. Under Linux, the 6pack layer is beyond the AX.25 layer, +so the 6pack driver doesn't know anything about connects or data that +has not yet been transmitted. Therefore the LEDs are controlled +as they are in KISS mode: The connect LED is turned on if data is transferred +from the PC to the TNC over the serial line, the status LED if data is +sent to the PC. + +6. Known problems + +When testing the driver with 2.0.3x kernels and +operating with data rates on the radio channel of 9600 Baud or higher, +the driver may, on certain systems, sometimes print the message '6pack: +bad checksum', which is due to data loss if the other station sends two +or more subsequent packets. I have been told that this is due to a problem +with the serial driver of 2.0.3x kernels. I don't know yet if the problem +still exists with 2.1.x kernels, as I have heard that the serial driver +code has been changed with 2.1.x. + +When shutting down the sp interface with ifconfig, the kernel crashes if +there is still an AX.25 connection left over which an IP connection was +running, even if that IP connection is already closed. The problem does not +occur when there is a bare AX.25 connection still running. I don't know if +this is a problem of the 6pack driver or something else in the kernel. + +The driver has been tested as a module, not yet as a kernel-builtin driver. + +The 6pack protocol supports daisy-chaining of TNCs in a token ring, which is +connected to one serial port of the PC. This feature is not implemented +and at least at the moment I won't be able to do it because I do not have +the opportunity to build a TNC daisy-chain and test it. + +Some of the comments in the source code are inaccurate. They are left from +the SLIP/KISS driver, from which the 6pack driver has been derived. +I haven't modified or removed them yet -- sorry! The code itself needs +some cleaning and optimizing. This will be done in a later release. + +If you encounter a bug or if you have a question or suggestion concerning the +driver, feel free to mail me, using the addresses given at the beginning of +this file. + +Have fun! + +Andreas diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Configurable b/Documentation/networking/Configurable new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..69c0dd466ead --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/Configurable @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + +There are a few network parameters that can be tuned to better match +the kernel to your system hardware and intended usage. The defaults +are usually a good choice for 99% of the people 99% of the time, but +you should be aware they do exist and can be changed. + +The current list of parameters can be found in the files: + + linux/net/TUNABLE + Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt + +Some of these are accessible via the sysctl interface, and many more are +scheduled to be added in this way. For example, some parameters related +to Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) are very easily viewed and altered. + + # cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/arp_timeout + 6000 + # echo 7000 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/arp_timeout + # cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/arp_timeout + 7000 + +Others are already accessible via the related user space programs. +For example, MAX_WINDOW has a default of 32 k which is a good choice for +modern hardware, but if you have a slow (8 bit) Ethernet card and/or a slow +machine, then this will be far too big for the card to keep up with fast +machines transmitting on the same net, resulting in overruns and receive errors. +A value of about 4 k would be more appropriate, which can be set via: + + # route add -net 192.168.3.0 window 4096 + +The remainder of these can only be presently changed by altering a #define +in the related header file. This means an edit and recompile cycle. + + Paul Gortmaker 06/96 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt b/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..083d24752b83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/DLINK.txt @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ +Released 1994-06-13 + + + CONTENTS: + + 1. Introduction. + 2. License. + 3. Files in this release. + 4. Installation. + 5. Problems and tuning. + 6. Using the drivers with earlier releases. + 7. Acknowledgments. + + + 1. INTRODUCTION. + + This is a set of Ethernet drivers for the D-Link DE-600/DE-620 + pocket adapters, for the parallel port on a Linux based machine. + Some adapter "clones" will also work. Xircom is _not_ a clone... + These drivers _can_ be used as loadable modules, + and were developed for use on Linux 1.1.13 and above. + For use on Linux 1.0.X, or earlier releases, see below. + + I have used these drivers for NFS, ftp, telnet and X-clients on + remote machines. Transmissions with ftp seems to work as + good as can be expected (i.e. > 80k bytes/sec) from a + parallel port...:-) Receive speeds will be about 60-80% of this. + Depending on your machine, somewhat higher speeds can be achieved. + + All comments/fixes to Bjorn Ekwall (bj0rn@blox.se). + + + 2. LICENSE. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it + and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either + version 2, or (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be + useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied + warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR + PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more + details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + License along with this program; if not, write to the Free + Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA + 02139, USA. + + + 3. FILES IN THIS RELEASE. + + README.DLINK This file. + de600.c The Source (may it be with You :-) for the DE-600 + de620.c ditto for the DE-620 + de620.h Macros for de620.c + + If you are upgrading from the d-link tar release, there will + also be a "dlink-patches" file that will patch Linux 1.1.18: + linux/drivers/net/Makefile + linux/drivers/net/CONFIG + linux/drivers/net/MODULES + linux/drivers/net/Space.c + linux/config.in + Apply the patch by: + "cd /usr/src; patch -p0 < linux/drivers/net/dlink-patches" + The old source, "linux/drivers/net/d_link.c", can be removed. + + + 4. INSTALLATION. + + o Get the latest net binaries, according to current net.wisdom. + + o Read the NET-2 and Ethernet HOWTOs and modify your setup. + + o If your parallel port has a strange address or irq, + modify "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG" accordingly, or adjust + the parameters in the "tuning" section in the sources. + + If you are going to use the drivers as loadable modules, do _not_ + enable them while doing "make config", but instead make sure that + the drivers are included in "linux/drivers/net/MODULES". + + If you are _not_ going to use the driver(s) as loadable modules, + but instead have them included in the kernel, remember to enable + the drivers while doing "make config". + + o To include networking and DE600/DE620 support in your kernel: + # cd /linux + (as modules:) + # make config (answer yes on CONFIG_NET and CONFIG_INET) + (else included in the kernel:) + # make config (answer yes on CONFIG _NET, _INET and _DE600 or _DE620) + # make clean + # make zImage (or whatever magic you usually do) + + o I use lilo to boot multiple kernels, so that I at least + can have one working kernel :-). If you do too, append + these lines to /etc/lilo/config: + + image = /linux/zImage + label = newlinux + root = /dev/hda2 (or whatever YOU have...) + + # /etc/lilo/install + + o Do "sync" and reboot the new kernel with a D-Link + DE-600/DE-620 pocket adapter connected. + + o The adapter can be configured with ifconfig eth? + where the actual number is decided by the kernel + when the drivers are initialized. + + + 5. "PROBLEMS" AND TUNING, + + o If you see error messages from the driver, and if the traffic + stops on the adapter, try to do "ifconfig" and "route" once + more, just as in "rc.inet1". This should take care of most + problems, including effects from power loss, or adapters that + aren't connected to the printer port in some way or another. + You can somewhat change the behaviour by enabling/disabling + the macro SHUTDOWN_WHEN_LOST in the "tuning" section. + For the DE-600 there is another macro, CHECK_LOST_DE600, + that you might want to read about in the "tuning" section. + + o Some machines have trouble handling the parallel port and + the adapter at high speed. If you experience problems: + + DE-600: + - The adapter is not recognized at boot, i.e. an Ethernet + address of 00:80:c8:... is not shown, try to add another + "; SLOW_DOWN_IO" + at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section. As a last resort, + uncomment: "#define REALLY_SLOW_IO" (see <asm/io.h> for hints). + + - You experience "timeout" messages: first try to add another + "; SLOW_DOWN_IO" + at DE600_SLOW_DOWN in the "tuning" section, _then_ try to + increase the value (original value: 5) at + "if (tickssofar < 5)" near line 422. + + DE-620: + - Your parallel port might be "sluggish". To cater for + this, there are the macros LOWSPEED and READ_DELAY/WRITE_DELAY + in the "tuning" section. Your first step should be to enable + LOWSPEED, and after that you can "tune" the XXX_DELAY values. + + o If the adapter _is_ recognized at boot but you get messages + about "Network Unreachable", then the problem is probably + _not_ with the driver. Check your net configuration instead + (ifconfig and route) in "rc.inet1". + + o There is some rudimentary support for debugging, look at + the source. Use "-DDE600_DEBUG=3" or "-DDE620_DEBUG=3" + when compiling, or include it in "linux/drivers/net/CONFIG". + IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS YOU CAN'T SOLVE: PLEASE COMPILE THE DRIVER + WITH DEBUGGING ENABLED, AND SEND ME THE RESULTING OUTPUT! + + + 6. USING THE DRIVERS WITH EARLIER RELEASES. + + The later 1.1.X releases of the Linux kernel include some + changes in the networking layer (a.k.a. NET3). This affects + these drivers in a few places. The hints that follow are + _not_ tested by me, since I don't have the disk space to keep + all releases on-line. + Known needed changes to date: + - release patchfile: some patches will fail, but they should + be easy to apply "by hand", since they are trivial. + (Space.c: d_link_init() is now called de600_probe()) + - de600.c: change "mark_bh(NET_BH)" to "mark_bh(INET_BH)". + - de620.c: (maybe) change the code around "netif_rx(skb);" to be + similar to the code around "dev_rint(...)" in de600.c + + + 7. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. + + These drivers wouldn't have been done without the base + (and support) from Ross Biro <bir7@leland.stanford.edu>, + and D-Link Systems Inc. The driver relies upon GPL-ed + source from D-Link Systems Inc. and from Russel Nelson at + Crynwr Software <nelson@crynwr.com>. + + Additional input also from: + Donald Becker <becker@super.org>, Alan Cox <A.Cox@swansea.ac.uk> + and Fred N. van Kempen <waltje@uWalt.NL.Mugnet.ORG> + + DE-600 alpha release primary victim^H^H^H^H^H^Htester: + - Erik Proper <erikp@cs.kun.nl>. + Good input also from several users, most notably + - Mark Burton <markb@ordern.demon.co.uk>. + + DE-620 alpha release victims^H^H^H^H^H^H^Htesters: + - J. Joshua Kopper <kopper@rtsg.mot.com> + - Olav Kvittem <Olav.Kvittem@uninett.no> + - Germano Caronni <caronni@nessie.cs.id.ethz.ch> + - Jeremy Fitzhardinge <jeremy@suite.sw.oz.au> + + + Happy hacking! + + Bjorn Ekwall == bj0rn@blox.se diff --git a/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..54376e8249c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt @@ -0,0 +1,766 @@ +HISTORY: +February 16/2002 -- revision 0.2.1: +COR typo corrected +February 10/2002 -- revision 0.2: +some spell checking ;-> +January 12/2002 -- revision 0.1 +This is still work in progress so may change. +To keep up to date please watch this space. + +Introduction to NAPI +==================== + +NAPI is a proven (www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz) technique +to improve network performance on Linux. For more details please +read that paper. +NAPI provides a "inherent mitigation" which is bound by system capacity +as can be seen from the following data collected by Robert on Gigabit +ethernet (e1000): + + Psize Ipps Tput Rxint Txint Done Ndone + --------------------------------------------------------------- + 60 890000 409362 17 27622 7 6823 + 128 758150 464364 21 9301 10 7738 + 256 445632 774646 42 15507 21 12906 + 512 232666 994445 241292 19147 241192 1062 + 1024 119061 1000003 872519 19258 872511 0 + 1440 85193 1000003 946576 19505 946569 0 + + +Legend: +"Ipps" stands for input packets per second. +"Tput" == packets out of total 1M that made it out. +"txint" == transmit completion interrupts seen +"Done" == The number of times that the poll() managed to pull all +packets out of the rx ring. Note from this that the lower the +load the more we could clean up the rxring +"Ndone" == is the converse of "Done". Note again, that the higher +the load the more times we couldnt clean up the rxring. + +Observe that: +when the NIC receives 890Kpackets/sec only 17 rx interrupts are generated. +The system cant handle the processing at 1 interrupt/packet at that load level. +At lower rates on the other hand, rx interrupts go up and therefore the +interrupt/packet ratio goes up (as observable from that table). So there is +possibility that under low enough input, you get one poll call for each +input packet caused by a single interrupt each time. And if the system +cant handle interrupt per packet ratio of 1, then it will just have to +chug along .... + + +0) Prerequisites: +================== +A driver MAY continue using the old 2.4 technique for interfacing +to the network stack and not benefit from the NAPI changes. +NAPI additions to the kernel do not break backward compatibility. +NAPI, however, requires the following features to be available: + +A) DMA ring or enough RAM to store packets in software devices. + +B) Ability to turn off interrupts or maybe events that send packets up +the stack. + +NAPI processes packet events in what is known as dev->poll() method. +Typically, only packet receive events are processed in dev->poll(). +The rest of the events MAY be processed by the regular interrupt handler +to reduce processing latency (justified also because there are not that +many of them). +Note, however, NAPI does not enforce that dev->poll() only processes +receive events. +Tests with the tulip driver indicated slightly increased latency if +all of the interrupt handler is moved to dev->poll(). Also MII handling +gets a little trickier. +The example used in this document is to move the receive processing only +to dev->poll(); this is shown with the patch for the tulip driver. +For an example of code that moves all the interrupt driver to +dev->poll() look at the ported e1000 code. + +There are caveats that might force you to go with moving everything to +dev->poll(). Different NICs work differently depending on their status/event +acknowledgement setup. +There are two types of event register ACK mechanisms. + I) what is known as Clear-on-read (COR). + when you read the status/event register, it clears everything! + The natsemi and sunbmac NICs are known to do this. + In this case your only choice is to move all to dev->poll() + + II) Clear-on-write (COW) + i) you clear the status by writing a 1 in the bit-location you want. + These are the majority of the NICs and work the best with NAPI. + Put only receive events in dev->poll(); leave the rest in + the old interrupt handler. + ii) whatever you write in the status register clears every thing ;-> + Cant seem to find any supported by Linux which do this. If + someone knows such a chip email us please. + Move all to dev->poll() + +C) Ability to detect new work correctly. +NAPI works by shutting down event interrupts when theres work and +turning them on when theres none. +New packets might show up in the small window while interrupts were being +re-enabled (refer to appendix 2). A packet might sneak in during the period +we are enabling interrupts. We only get to know about such a packet when the +next new packet arrives and generates an interrupt. +Essentially, there is a small window of opportunity for a race condition +which for clarity we'll refer to as the "rotting packet". + +This is a very important topic and appendix 2 is dedicated for more +discussion. + +Locking rules and environmental guarantees +========================================== + +-Guarantee: Only one CPU at any time can call dev->poll(); this is because +only one CPU can pick the initial interrupt and hence the initial +netif_rx_schedule(dev); +- The core layer invokes devices to send packets in a round robin format. +This implies receive is totaly lockless because of the guarantee only that +one CPU is executing it. +- contention can only be the result of some other CPU accessing the rx +ring. This happens only in close() and suspend() (when these methods +try to clean the rx ring); +****guarantee: driver authors need not worry about this; synchronization +is taken care for them by the top net layer. +-local interrupts are enabled (if you dont move all to dev->poll()). For +example link/MII and txcomplete continue functioning just same old way. +This improves the latency of processing these events. It is also assumed that +the receive interrupt is the largest cause of noise. Note this might not +always be true. +[according to Manfred Spraul, the winbond insists on sending one +txmitcomplete interrupt for each packet (although this can be mitigated)]. +For these broken drivers, move all to dev->poll(). + +For the rest of this text, we'll assume that dev->poll() only +processes receive events. + +new methods introduce by NAPI +============================= + +a) netif_rx_schedule(dev) +Called by an IRQ handler to schedule a poll for device + +b) netif_rx_schedule_prep(dev) +puts the device in a state which allows for it to be added to the +CPU polling list if it is up and running. You can look at this as +the first half of netif_rx_schedule(dev) above; the second half +being c) below. + +c) __netif_rx_schedule(dev) +Add device to the poll list for this CPU; assuming that _prep above +has already been called and returned 1. + +d) netif_rx_reschedule(dev, undo) +Called to reschedule polling for device specifically for some +deficient hardware. Read Appendix 2 for more details. + +e) netif_rx_complete(dev) + +Remove interface from the CPU poll list: it must be in the poll list +on current cpu. This primitive is called by dev->poll(), when +it completes its work. The device cannot be out of poll list at this +call, if it is then clearly it is a BUG(). You'll know ;-> + +All these above nethods are used below. So keep reading for clarity. + +Device driver changes to be made when porting NAPI +================================================== + +Below we describe what kind of changes are required for NAPI to work. + +1) introduction of dev->poll() method +===================================== + +This is the method that is invoked by the network core when it requests +for new packets from the driver. A driver is allowed to send upto +dev->quota packets by the current CPU before yielding to the network +subsystem (so other devices can also get opportunity to send to the stack). + +dev->poll() prototype looks as follows: +int my_poll(struct net_device *dev, int *budget) + +budget is the remaining number of packets the network subsystem on the +current CPU can send up the stack before yielding to other system tasks. +*Each driver is responsible for decrementing budget by the total number of +packets sent. + Total number of packets cannot exceed dev->quota. + +dev->poll() method is invoked by the top layer, the driver just sends if it +can to the stack the packet quantity requested. + +more on dev->poll() below after the interrupt changes are explained. + +2) registering dev->poll() method +=================================== + +dev->poll should be set in the dev->probe() method. +e.g: +dev->open = my_open; +. +. +/* two new additions */ +/* first register my poll method */ +dev->poll = my_poll; +/* next register my weight/quanta; can be overridden in /proc */ +dev->weight = 16; +. +. +dev->stop = my_close; + + + +3) scheduling dev->poll() +============================= +This involves modifying the interrupt handler and the code +path which takes the packet off the NIC and sends them to the +stack. + +it's important at this point to introduce the classical D Becker +interrupt processor: + +------------------ +static irqreturn_t +netdevice_interrupt(int irq, void *dev_id, struct pt_regs *regs) +{ + + struct net_device *dev = (struct net_device *)dev_instance; + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + + int work_count = my_work_count; + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + if (status == 0) + return IRQ_NONE; /* Shared IRQ: not us */ + if (status == 0xffff) + return IRQ_HANDLED; /* Hot unplug */ + if (status & error) + do_some_error_handling() + + do { + acknowledge_ints_ASAP(); + + if (status & link_interrupt) { + spin_lock(&tp->link_lock); + do_some_link_stat_stuff(); + spin_lock(&tp->link_lock); + } + + if (status & rx_interrupt) { + receive_packets(dev); + } + + if (status & rx_nobufs) { + make_rx_buffs_avail(); + } + + if (status & tx_related) { + spin_lock(&tp->lock); + tx_ring_free(dev); + if (tx_died) + restart_tx(); + spin_unlock(&tp->lock); + } + + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + + } while (!(status & error) || more_work_to_be_done); + return IRQ_HANDLED; +} + +---------------------------------------------------------------------- + +We now change this to what is shown below to NAPI-enable it: + +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +static irqreturn_t +netdevice_interrupt(int irq, void *dev_id, struct pt_regs *regs) +{ + struct net_device *dev = (struct net_device *)dev_instance; + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + if (status == 0) + return IRQ_NONE; /* Shared IRQ: not us */ + if (status == 0xffff) + return IRQ_HANDLED; /* Hot unplug */ + if (status & error) + do_some_error_handling(); + + do { +/************************ start note *********************************/ + acknowledge_ints_ASAP(); // dont ack rx and rxnobuff here +/************************ end note *********************************/ + + if (status & link_interrupt) { + spin_lock(&tp->link_lock); + do_some_link_stat_stuff(); + spin_unlock(&tp->link_lock); + } +/************************ start note *********************************/ + if (status & rx_interrupt || (status & rx_nobuffs)) { + if (netif_rx_schedule_prep(dev)) { + + /* disable interrupts caused + * by arriving packets */ + disable_rx_and_rxnobuff_ints(); + /* tell system we have work to be done. */ + __netif_rx_schedule(dev); + } else { + printk("driver bug! interrupt while in poll\n"); + /* FIX by disabling interrupts */ + disable_rx_and_rxnobuff_ints(); + } + } +/************************ end note note *********************************/ + + if (status & tx_related) { + spin_lock(&tp->lock); + tx_ring_free(dev); + + if (tx_died) + restart_tx(); + spin_unlock(&tp->lock); + } + + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + +/************************ start note *********************************/ + } while (!(status & error) || more_work_to_be_done(status)); +/************************ end note note *********************************/ + return IRQ_HANDLED; +} + +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +We note several things from above: + +I) Any interrupt source which is caused by arriving packets is now +turned off when it occurs. Depending on the hardware, there could be +several reasons that arriving packets would cause interrupts; these are the +interrupt sources we wish to avoid. The two common ones are a) a packet +arriving (rxint) b) a packet arriving and finding no DMA buffers available +(rxnobuff) . +This means also acknowledge_ints_ASAP() will not clear the status +register for those two items above; clearing is done in the place where +proper work is done within NAPI; at the poll() and refill_rx_ring() +discussed further below. +netif_rx_schedule_prep() returns 1 if device is in running state and +gets successfully added to the core poll list. If we get a zero value +we can _almost_ assume are already added to the list (instead of not running. +Logic based on the fact that you shouldn't get interrupt if not running) +We rectify this by disabling rx and rxnobuf interrupts. + +II) that receive_packets(dev) and make_rx_buffs_avail() may have disappeared. +These functionalities are still around actually...... + +infact, receive_packets(dev) is very close to my_poll() and +make_rx_buffs_avail() is invoked from my_poll() + +4) converting receive_packets() to dev->poll() +=============================================== + +We need to convert the classical D Becker receive_packets(dev) to my_poll() + +First the typical receive_packets() below: +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +/* this is called by interrupt handler */ +static void receive_packets (struct net_device *dev) +{ + + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + rx_ring = tp->rx_ring; + cur_rx = tp->cur_rx; + int entry = cur_rx % RX_RING_SIZE; + int received = 0; + int rx_work_limit = tp->dirty_rx + RX_RING_SIZE - tp->cur_rx; + + while (rx_ring_not_empty) { + u32 rx_status; + unsigned int rx_size; + unsigned int pkt_size; + struct sk_buff *skb; + /* read size+status of next frame from DMA ring buffer */ + /* the number 16 and 4 are just examples */ + rx_status = le32_to_cpu (*(u32 *) (rx_ring + ring_offset)); + rx_size = rx_status >> 16; + pkt_size = rx_size - 4; + + /* process errors */ + if ((rx_size > (MAX_ETH_FRAME_SIZE+4)) || + (!(rx_status & RxStatusOK))) { + netdrv_rx_err (rx_status, dev, tp, ioaddr); + return; + } + + if (--rx_work_limit < 0) + break; + + /* grab a skb */ + skb = dev_alloc_skb (pkt_size + 2); + if (skb) { + . + . + netif_rx (skb); + . + . + } else { /* OOM */ + /*seems very driver specific ... some just pass + whatever is on the ring already. */ + } + + /* move to the next skb on the ring */ + entry = (++tp->cur_rx) % RX_RING_SIZE; + received++ ; + + } + + /* store current ring pointer state */ + tp->cur_rx = cur_rx; + + /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */ + refill_rx_ring(); + . + . + +} +------------------------------------------------------------------- +We change it to a new one below; note the additional parameter in +the call. + +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +/* this is called by the network core */ +static int my_poll (struct net_device *dev, int *budget) +{ + + struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv; + rx_ring = tp->rx_ring; + cur_rx = tp->cur_rx; + int entry = cur_rx % RX_BUF_LEN; + /* maximum packets to send to the stack */ +/************************ note note *********************************/ + int rx_work_limit = dev->quota; + +/************************ end note note *********************************/ + do { // outer beginning loop starts here + + clear_rx_status_register_bit(); + + while (rx_ring_not_empty) { + u32 rx_status; + unsigned int rx_size; + unsigned int pkt_size; + struct sk_buff *skb; + /* read size+status of next frame from DMA ring buffer */ + /* the number 16 and 4 are just examples */ + rx_status = le32_to_cpu (*(u32 *) (rx_ring + ring_offset)); + rx_size = rx_status >> 16; + pkt_size = rx_size - 4; + + /* process errors */ + if ((rx_size > (MAX_ETH_FRAME_SIZE+4)) || + (!(rx_status & RxStatusOK))) { + netdrv_rx_err (rx_status, dev, tp, ioaddr); + return 1; + } + +/************************ note note *********************************/ + if (--rx_work_limit < 0) { /* we got packets, but no quota */ + /* store current ring pointer state */ + tp->cur_rx = cur_rx; + + /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */ + refill_rx_ring(dev); + goto not_done; + } +/********************** end note **********************************/ + + /* grab a skb */ + skb = dev_alloc_skb (pkt_size + 2); + if (skb) { + . + . +/************************ note note *********************************/ + netif_receive_skb (skb); +/********************** end note **********************************/ + . + . + } else { /* OOM */ + /*seems very driver specific ... common is just pass + whatever is on the ring already. */ + } + + /* move to the next skb on the ring */ + entry = (++tp->cur_rx) % RX_RING_SIZE; + received++ ; + + } + + /* store current ring pointer state */ + tp->cur_rx = cur_rx; + + /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */ + refill_rx_ring(dev); + + /* no packets on ring; but new ones can arrive since we last + checked */ + status = read_interrupt_status_reg(); + if (rx status is not set) { + /* If something arrives in this narrow window, + an interrupt will be generated */ + goto done; + } + /* done! at least thats what it looks like ;-> + if new packets came in after our last check on status bits + they'll be caught by the while check and we go back and clear them + since we havent exceeded our quota */ + } while (rx_status_is_set); + +done: + +/************************ note note *********************************/ + dev->quota -= received; + *budget -= received; + + /* If RX ring is not full we are out of memory. */ + if (tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + goto oom; + + /* we are happy/done, no more packets on ring; put us back + to where we can start processing interrupts again */ + netif_rx_complete(dev); + enable_rx_and_rxnobuf_ints(); + + /* The last op happens after poll completion. Which means the following: + * 1. it can race with disabling irqs in irq handler (which are done to + * schedule polls) + * 2. it can race with dis/enabling irqs in other poll threads + * 3. if an irq raised after the begining of the outer beginning + * loop(marked in the code above), it will be immediately + * triggered here. + * + * Summarizing: the logic may results in some redundant irqs both + * due to races in masking and due to too late acking of already + * processed irqs. The good news: no events are ever lost. + */ + + return 0; /* done */ + +not_done: + if (tp->cur_rx - tp->dirty_rx > RX_RING_SIZE/2 || + tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + refill_rx_ring(dev); + + if (!received) { + printk("received==0\n"); + received = 1; + } + dev->quota -= received; + *budget -= received; + return 1; /* not_done */ + +oom: + /* Start timer, stop polling, but do not enable rx interrupts. */ + start_poll_timer(dev); + return 0; /* we'll take it from here so tell core "done"*/ + +/************************ End note note *********************************/ +} +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +From above we note that: +0) rx_work_limit = dev->quota +1) refill_rx_ring() is in charge of clearing the bit for rxnobuff when +it does the work. +2) We have a done and not_done state. +3) instead of netif_rx() we call netif_receive_skb() to pass the skb. +4) we have a new way of handling oom condition +5) A new outer for (;;) loop has been added. This serves the purpose of +ensuring that if a new packet has come in, after we are all set and done, +and we have not exceeded our quota that we continue sending packets up. + + +----------------------------------------------------------- +Poll timer code will need to do the following: + +a) + + if (tp->cur_rx - tp->dirty_rx > RX_RING_SIZE/2 || + tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + refill_rx_ring(dev); + + /* If RX ring is not full we are still out of memory. + Restart the timer again. Else we re-add ourselves + to the master poll list. + */ + + if (tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) + restart_timer(); + + else netif_rx_schedule(dev); /* we are back on the poll list */ + +5) dev->close() and dev->suspend() issues +========================================== +The driver writter neednt worry about this. The top net layer takes +care of it. + +6) Adding new Stats to /proc +============================= +In order to debug some of the new features, we introduce new stats +that need to be collected. +TODO: Fill this later. + +APPENDIX 1: discussion on using ethernet HW FC +============================================== +Most chips with FC only send a pause packet when they run out of Rx buffers. +Since packets are pulled off the DMA ring by a softirq in NAPI, +if the system is slow in grabbing them and we have a high input +rate (faster than the system's capacity to remove packets), then theoretically +there will only be one rx interrupt for all packets during a given packetstorm. +Under low load, we might have a single interrupt per packet. +FC should be programmed to apply in the case when the system cant pull out +packets fast enough i.e send a pause only when you run out of rx buffers. +Note FC in itself is a good solution but we have found it to not be +much of a commodity feature (both in NICs and switches) and hence falls +under the same category as using NIC based mitigation. Also experiments +indicate that its much harder to resolve the resource allocation +issue (aka lazy receiving that NAPI offers) and hence quantify its usefullness +proved harder. In any case, FC works even better with NAPI but is not +necessary. + + +APPENDIX 2: the "rotting packet" race-window avoidance scheme +============================================================= + +There are two types of associations seen here + +1) status/int which honors level triggered IRQ + +If a status bit for receive or rxnobuff is set and the corresponding +interrupt-enable bit is not on, then no interrupts will be generated. However, +as soon as the "interrupt-enable" bit is unmasked, an immediate interrupt is +generated. [assuming the status bit was not turned off]. +Generally the concept of level triggered IRQs in association with a status and +interrupt-enable CSR register set is used to avoid the race. + +If we take the example of the tulip: +"pending work" is indicated by the status bit(CSR5 in tulip). +the corresponding interrupt bit (CSR7 in tulip) might be turned off (but +the CSR5 will continue to be turned on with new packet arrivals even if +we clear it the first time) +Very important is the fact that if we turn on the interrupt bit on when +status is set that an immediate irq is triggered. + +If we cleared the rx ring and proclaimed there was "no more work +to be done" and then went on to do a few other things; then when we enable +interrupts, there is a possibility that a new packet might sneak in during +this phase. It helps to look at the pseudo code for the tulip poll +routine: + +-------------------------- + do { + ACK; + while (ring_is_not_empty()) { + work-work-work + if quota is exceeded: exit, no touching irq status/mask + } + /* No packets, but new can arrive while we are doing this*/ + CSR5 := read + if (CSR5 is not set) { + /* If something arrives in this narrow window here, + * where the comments are ;-> irq will be generated */ + unmask irqs; + exit poll; + } + } while (rx_status_is_set); +------------------------ + +CSR5 bit of interest is only the rx status. +If you look at the last if statement: +you just finished grabbing all the packets from the rx ring .. you check if +status bit says theres more packets just in ... it says none; you then +enable rx interrupts again; if a new packet just came in during this check, +we are counting that CSR5 will be set in that small window of opportunity +and that by re-enabling interrupts, we would actually triger an interrupt +to register the new packet for processing. + +[The above description nay be very verbose, if you have better wording +that will make this more understandable, please suggest it.] + +2) non-capable hardware + +These do not generally respect level triggered IRQs. Normally, +irqs may be lost while being masked and the only way to leave poll is to do +a double check for new input after netif_rx_complete() is invoked +and re-enable polling (after seeing this new input). + +Sample code: + +--------- + . + . +restart_poll: + while (ring_is_not_empty()) { + work-work-work + if quota is exceeded: exit, not touching irq status/mask + } + . + . + . + enable_rx_interrupts() + netif_rx_complete(dev); + if (ring_has_new_packet() && netif_rx_reschedule(dev, received)) { + disable_rx_and_rxnobufs() + goto restart_poll + } while (rx_status_is_set); +--------- + +Basically netif_rx_complete() removes us from the poll list, but because a +new packet which will never be caught due to the possibility of a race +might come in, we attempt to re-add ourselves to the poll list. + + + + +APPENDIX 3: Scheduling issues. +============================== +As seen NAPI moves processing to softirq level. Linux uses the ksoftirqd as the +general solution to schedule softirq's to run before next interrupt and by putting +them under scheduler control. Also this prevents consecutive softirq's from +monopolize the CPU. This also have the effect that the priority of ksoftirq needs +to be considered when running very CPU-intensive applications and networking to +get the proper balance of softirq/user balance. Increasing ksoftirq priority to 0 +(eventually more) is reported cure problems with low network performance at high +CPU load. + +Most used processes in a GIGE router: +USER PID %CPU %MEM SIZE RSS TTY STAT START TIME COMMAND +root 3 0.2 0.0 0 0 ? RWN Aug 15 602:00 (ksoftirqd_CPU0) +root 232 0.0 7.9 41400 40884 ? S Aug 15 74:12 gated + +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +relevant sites: +================== +ftp://robur.slu.se/pub/Linux/net-development/NAPI/ + + +-------------------------------------------------------------------- +TODO: Write net-skeleton.c driver. +------------------------------------------------------------- + +Authors: +======== +Alexey Kuznetsov <kuznet@ms2.inr.ac.ru> +Jamal Hadi Salim <hadi@cyberus.ca> +Robert Olsson <Robert.Olsson@data.slu.se> + +Acknowledgements: +================ +People who made this document better: + +Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@gnu.org> +Andrew Morton <akpm@zip.com.au> +Manfred Spraul <manfred@colorfullife.com> +Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com> +Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt b/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad7e3f7c3bbf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/PLIP.txt @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ +PLIP: The Parallel Line Internet Protocol Device + +Donald Becker (becker@super.org) +I.D.A. Supercomputing Research Center, Bowie MD 20715 + +At some point T. Thorn will probably contribute text, +Tommy Thorn (tthorn@daimi.aau.dk) + +PLIP Introduction +----------------- + +This document describes the parallel port packet pusher for Net/LGX. +This device interface allows a point-to-point connection between two +parallel ports to appear as a IP network interface. + +What is PLIP? +============= + +PLIP is Parallel Line IP, that is, the transportation of IP packages +over a parallel port. In the case of a PC, the obvious choice is the +printer port. PLIP is a non-standard, but [can use] uses the standard +LapLink null-printer cable [can also work in turbo mode, with a PLIP +cable]. [The protocol used to pack IP packages, is a simple one +initiated by Crynwr.] + +Advantages of PLIP +================== + +It's cheap, it's available everywhere, and it's easy. + +The PLIP cable is all that's needed to connect two Linux boxes, and it +can be built for very few bucks. + +Connecting two Linux boxes takes only a second's decision and a few +minutes' work, no need to search for a [supported] netcard. This might +even be especially important in the case of notebooks, where netcards +are not easily available. + +Not requiring a netcard also means that apart from connecting the +cables, everything else is software configuration [which in principle +could be made very easy.] + +Disadvantages of PLIP +===================== + +Doesn't work over a modem, like SLIP and PPP. Limited range, 15 m. +Can only be used to connect three (?) Linux boxes. Doesn't connect to +an existing Ethernet. Isn't standard (not even de facto standard, like +SLIP). + +Performance +=========== + +PLIP easily outperforms Ethernet cards....(ups, I was dreaming, but +it *is* getting late. EOB) + +PLIP driver details +------------------- + +The Linux PLIP driver is an implementation of the original Crynwr protocol, +that uses the parallel port subsystem of the kernel in order to properly +share parallel ports between PLIP and other services. + +IRQs and trigger timeouts +========================= + +When a parallel port used for a PLIP driver has an IRQ configured to it, the +PLIP driver is signaled whenever data is sent to it via the cable, such that +when no data is available, the driver isn't being used. + +However, on some machines it is hard, if not impossible, to configure an IRQ +to a certain parallel port, mainly because it is used by some other device. +On these machines, the PLIP driver can be used in IRQ-less mode, where +the PLIP driver would constantly poll the parallel port for data waiting, +and if such data is available, process it. This mode is less efficient than +the IRQ mode, because the driver has to check the parallel port many times +per second, even when no data at all is sent. Some rough measurements +indicate that there isn't a noticeable performance drop when using IRQ-less +mode as compared to IRQ mode as far as the data transfer speed is involved. +There is a performance drop on the machine hosting the driver. + +When the PLIP driver is used in IRQ mode, the timeout used for triggering a +data transfer (the maximal time the PLIP driver would allow the other side +before announcing a timeout, when trying to handshake a transfer of some +data) is, by default, 500usec. As IRQ delivery is more or less immediate, +this timeout is quite sufficient. + +When in IRQ-less mode, the PLIP driver polls the parallel port HZ times +per second (where HZ is typically 100 on most platforms, and 1024 on an +Alpha, as of this writing). Between two such polls, there are 10^6/HZ usecs. +On an i386, for example, 10^6/100 = 10000usec. It is easy to see that it is +quite possible for the trigger timeout to expire between two such polls, as +the timeout is only 500usec long. As a result, it is required to change the +trigger timeout on the *other* side of a PLIP connection, to about +10^6/HZ usecs. If both sides of a PLIP connection are used in IRQ-less mode, +this timeout is required on both sides. + +It appears that in practice, the trigger timeout can be shorter than in the +above calculation. It isn't an important issue, unless the wire is faulty, +in which case a long timeout would stall the machine when, for whatever +reason, bits are dropped. + +A utility that can perform this change in Linux is plipconfig, which is part +of the net-tools package (its location can be found in the +Documentation/Changes file). An example command would be +'plipconfig plipX trigger 10000', where plipX is the appropriate +PLIP device. + +PLIP hardware interconnection +----------------------------- + +PLIP uses several different data transfer methods. The first (and the +only one implemented in the early version of the code) uses a standard +printer "null" cable to transfer data four bits at a time using +data bit outputs connected to status bit inputs. + +The second data transfer method relies on both machines having +bi-directional parallel ports, rather than output-only ``printer'' +ports. This allows byte-wide transfers and avoids reconstructing +nibbles into bytes, leading to much faster transfers. + +Parallel Transfer Mode 0 Cable +============================== + +The cable for the first transfer mode is a standard +printer "null" cable which transfers data four bits at a time using +data bit outputs of the first port (machine T) connected to the +status bit inputs of the second port (machine R). There are five +status inputs, and they are used as four data inputs and a clock (data +strobe) input, arranged so that the data input bits appear as contiguous +bits with standard status register implementation. + +A cable that implements this protocol is available commercially as a +"Null Printer" or "Turbo Laplink" cable. It can be constructed with +two DB-25 male connectors symmetrically connected as follows: + + STROBE output 1* + D0->ERROR 2 - 15 15 - 2 + D1->SLCT 3 - 13 13 - 3 + D2->PAPOUT 4 - 12 12 - 4 + D3->ACK 5 - 10 10 - 5 + D4->BUSY 6 - 11 11 - 6 + D5,D6,D7 are 7*, 8*, 9* + AUTOFD output 14* + INIT output 16* + SLCTIN 17 - 17 + extra grounds are 18*,19*,20*,21*,22*,23*,24* + GROUND 25 - 25 +* Do not connect these pins on either end + +If the cable you are using has a metallic shield it should be +connected to the metallic DB-25 shell at one end only. + +Parallel Transfer Mode 1 +======================== + +The second data transfer method relies on both machines having +bi-directional parallel ports, rather than output-only ``printer'' +ports. This allows byte-wide transfers, and avoids reconstructing +nibbles into bytes. This cable should not be used on unidirectional +``printer'' (as opposed to ``parallel'') ports or when the machine +isn't configured for PLIP, as it will result in output driver +conflicts and the (unlikely) possibility of damage. + +The cable for this transfer mode should be constructed as follows: + + STROBE->BUSY 1 - 11 + D0->D0 2 - 2 + D1->D1 3 - 3 + D2->D2 4 - 4 + D3->D3 5 - 5 + D4->D4 6 - 6 + D5->D5 7 - 7 + D6->D6 8 - 8 + D7->D7 9 - 9 + INIT -> ACK 16 - 10 + AUTOFD->PAPOUT 14 - 12 + SLCT->SLCTIN 13 - 17 + GND->ERROR 18 - 15 + extra grounds are 19*,20*,21*,22*,23*,24* + GROUND 25 - 25 +* Do not connect these pins on either end + +Once again, if the cable you are using has a metallic shield it should +be connected to the metallic DB-25 shell at one end only. + +PLIP Mode 0 transfer protocol +============================= + +The PLIP driver is compatible with the "Crynwr" parallel port transfer +standard in Mode 0. That standard specifies the following protocol: + + send header nibble '0x8' + count-low octet + count-high octet + ... data octets + checksum octet + +Each octet is sent as + <wait for rx. '0x1?'> <send 0x10+(octet&0x0F)> + <wait for rx. '0x0?'> <send 0x00+((octet>>4)&0x0F)> + +To start a transfer the transmitting machine outputs a nibble 0x08. +That raises the ACK line, triggering an interrupt in the receiving +machine. The receiving machine disables interrupts and raises its own ACK +line. + +Restated: + +(OUT is bit 0-4, OUT.j is bit j from OUT. IN likewise) +Send_Byte: + OUT := low nibble, OUT.4 := 1 + WAIT FOR IN.4 = 1 + OUT := high nibble, OUT.4 := 0 + WAIT FOR IN.4 = 0 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 b/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f82d42584e98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/README.sb1000 @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ +sb1000 is a module network device driver for the General Instrument (also known +as NextLevel) SURFboard1000 internal cable modem board. This is an ISA card +which is used by a number of cable TV companies to provide cable modem access. +It's a one-way downstream-only cable modem, meaning that your upstream net link +is provided by your regular phone modem. + +This driver was written by Franco Venturi <fventuri@mediaone.net>. He deserves +a great deal of thanks for this wonderful piece of code! + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Support for this device is now a part of the standard Linux kernel. The +driver source code file is drivers/net/sb1000.c. In addition to this +you will need: + +1.) The "cmconfig" program. This is a utility which supplements "ifconfig" +to configure the cable modem and network interface (usually called "cm0"); +and + +2.) Several PPP scripts which live in /etc/ppp to make connecting via your +cable modem easy. + + These utilities can be obtained from: + + http://www.jacksonville.net/~fventuri/ + + in Franco's original source code distribution .tar.gz file. Support for + the sb1000 driver can be found at: + + http://home.adelphia.net/~siglercm/sb1000.html + http://linuxpower.cx/~cable/ + + along with these utilities. + +3.) The standard isapnp tools. These are necessary to configure your SB1000 +card at boot time (or afterwards by hand) since it's a PnP card. + + If you don't have these installed as a standard part of your Linux + distribution, you can find them at: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/ + + or check your Linux distribution binary CD or their web site. For help with + isapnp, pnpdump, or /etc/isapnp.conf, go to: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/isapnpfaq.html + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +To make the SB1000 card work, follow these steps: + +1.) Run `make config', or `make menuconfig', or `make xconfig', whichever +you prefer, in the top kernel tree directory to set up your kernel +configuration. Make sure to say "Y" to "Prompt for development drivers" +and to say "M" to the sb1000 driver. Also say "Y" or "M" to all the standard +networking questions to get TCP/IP and PPP networking support. + +2.) *BEFORE* you build the kernel, edit drivers/net/sb1000.c. Make sure +to redefine the value of READ_DATA_PORT to match the I/O address used +by isapnp to access your PnP cards. This is the value of READPORT in +/etc/isapnp.conf or given by the output of pnpdump. + +3.) Build and install the kernel and modules as usual. + +4.) Boot your new kernel following the usual procedures. + +5.) Set up to configure the new SB1000 PnP card by capturing the output +of "pnpdump" to a file and editing this file to set the correct I/O ports, +IRQ, and DMA settings for all your PnP cards. Make sure none of the settings +conflict with one another. Then test this configuration by running the +"isapnp" command with your new config file as the input. Check for +errors and fix as necessary. (As an aside, I use I/O ports 0x110 and +0x310 and IRQ 11 for my SB1000 card and these work well for me. YMMV.) +Then save the finished config file as /etc/isapnp.conf for proper configuration +on subsequent reboots. + +6.) Download the original file sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz from Franco's site or one of +the others referenced above. As root, unpack it into a temporary directory and +do a `make cmconfig' and then `install -c cmconfig /usr/local/sbin'. Don't do +`make install' because it expects to find all the utilities built and ready for +installation, not just cmconfig. + +7.) As root, copy all the files under the ppp/ subdirectory in Franco's +tar file into /etc/ppp, being careful not to overwrite any files that are +already in there. Then modify ppp@gi-on to set the correct login name, +phone number, and frequency for the cable modem. Also edit pap-secrets +to specify your login name and password and any site-specific information +you need. + +8.) Be sure to modify /etc/ppp/firewall to use ipchains instead of +the older ipfwadm commands from the 2.0.x kernels. There's a neat utility to +convert ipfwadm commands to ipchains commands: + + http://users.dhp.com/~whisper/ipfwadm2ipchains/ + +You may also wish to modify the firewall script to implement a different +firewalling scheme. + +9.) Start the PPP connection via the script /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on. You must be +root to do this. It's better to use a utility like sudo to execute +frequently used commands like this with root permissions if possible. If you +connect successfully the cable modem interface will come up and you'll see a +driver message like this at the console: + + cm0: sb1000 at (0x110,0x310), csn 1, S/N 0x2a0d16d8, IRQ 11. + sb1000.c:v1.1.2 6/01/98 (fventuri@mediaone.net) + +The "ifconfig" command should show two new interfaces, ppp0 and cm0. +The command "cmconfig cm0" will give you information about the cable modem +interface. + +10.) Try pinging a site via `ping -c 5 www.yahoo.com', for example. You should +see packets received. + +11.) If you can't get site names (like www.yahoo.com) to resolve into +IP addresses (like 204.71.200.67), be sure your /etc/resolv.conf file +has no syntax errors and has the right nameserver IP addresses in it. +If this doesn't help, try something like `ping -c 5 204.71.200.67' to +see if the networking is running but the DNS resolution is where the +problem lies. + +12.) If you still have problems, go to the support web sites mentioned above +and read the information and documentation there. + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Common problems: + +1.) Packets go out on the ppp0 interface but don't come back on the cm0 +interface. It looks like I'm connected but I can't even ping any +numerical IP addresses. (This happens predominantly on Debian systems due +to a default boot-time configuration script.) + +Solution -- As root `echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/cm0/rp_filter' so it +can share the same IP address as the ppp0 interface. Note that this +command should probably be added to the /etc/ppp/cablemodem script +*right*between* the "/sbin/ifconfig" and "/sbin/cmconfig" commands. +You may need to do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/ppp0/rp_filter as well. +If you do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/default/rp_filter on each reboot +(in rc.local or some such) then any interfaces can share the same IP +addresses. + +2.) I get "unresolved symbol" error messages on executing `insmod sb1000.o'. + +Solution -- You probably have a non-matching kernel source tree and +/usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm header files. Make sure you +install the correct versions of the header files in these two directories. +Then rebuild and reinstall the kernel. + +3.) When isapnp runs it reports an error, and my SB1000 card isn't working. + +Solution -- There's a problem with later versions of isapnp using the "(CHECK)" +option in the lines that allocate the two I/O addresses for the SB1000 card. +This first popped up on RH 6.0. Delete "(CHECK)" for the SB1000 I/O addresses. +Make sure they don't conflict with any other pieces of hardware first! Then +rerun isapnp and go from there. + +4.) I can't execute the /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on file. + +Solution -- As root do `chmod ug+x /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on'. + +5.) The firewall script isn't working (with 2.2.x and higher kernels). + +Solution -- Use the ipfwadm2ipchains script referenced above to convert the +/etc/ppp/firewall script from the deprecated ipfwadm commands to ipchains. + +6.) I'm getting *tons* of firewall deny messages in the /var/kern.log, +/var/messages, and/or /var/syslog files, and they're filling up my /var +partition!!! + +Solution -- First, tell your ISP that you're receiving DoS (Denial of Service) +and/or portscanning (UDP connection attempts) attacks! Look over the deny +messages to figure out what the attack is and where it's coming from. Next, +edit /etc/ppp/cablemodem and make sure the ",nobroadcast" option is turned on +to the "cmconfig" command (uncomment that line). If you're not receiving these +denied packets on your broadcast interface (IP address xxx.yyy.zzz.255 +typically), then someone is attacking your machine in particular. Be careful +out there.... + +7.) Everything seems to work fine but my computer locks up after a while +(and typically during a lengthy download through the cable modem)! + +Solution -- You may need to add a short delay in the driver to 'slow down' the +SURFboard because your PC might not be able to keep up with the transfer rate +of the SB1000. To do this, it's probably best to download Franco's +sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz archive and build and install sb1000.o manually. You'll +want to edit the 'Makefile' and look for the 'SB1000_DELAY' +define. Uncomment those 'CFLAGS' lines (and comment out the default ones) +and try setting the delay to something like 60 microseconds with: +'-DSB1000_DELAY=60'. Then do `make' and as root `make install' and try +it out. If it still doesn't work or you like playing with the driver, you may +try other numbers. Remember though that the higher the delay, the slower the +driver (which slows down the rest of the PC too when it is actively +used). Thanks to Ed Daiga for this tip! + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Credits: This README came from Franco Venturi's original README file which is +still supplied with his driver .tar.gz archive. I and all other sb1000 users +owe Franco a tremendous "Thank you!" Additional thanks goes to Carl Patten +and Ralph Bonnell who are now managing the Linux SB1000 web site, and to +the SB1000 users who reported and helped debug the common problems listed +above. + + + Clemmitt Sigler + csigler@vt.edu diff --git a/Documentation/networking/TODO b/Documentation/networking/TODO new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..66d36ff14bae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/TODO @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +To-do items for network drivers +------------------------------- + +* Move ethernet crc routine to generic code + +* (for 2.5) Integrate Jamal Hadi Salim's netdev Rx polling API change + +* Audit all net drivers to make sure magic packet / wake-on-lan / + similar features are disabled in the driver by default. + +* Audit all net drivers to make sure the module always prints out a + version string when loaded as a module, but only prints a version + string when built into the kernel if a device is detected. + +* Add ETHTOOL_GDRVINFO ioctl support to all ethernet drivers. + +* dmfe PCI DMA is totally wrong and only works on x86 + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/alias.txt b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cd12c2ff518a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + +IP-Aliasing: +============ + +IP-aliases are additional IP-addresses/masks hooked up to a base +interface by adding a colon and a string when running ifconfig. +This string is usually numeric, but this is not a must. + +IP-Aliases are avail if CONFIG_INET (`standard' IPv4 networking) +is configured in the kernel. + + +o Alias creation. + Alias creation is done by 'magic' interface naming: eg. to create a + 200.1.1.1 alias for eth0 ... + + # ifconfig eth0:0 200.1.1.1 etc,etc.... + ~~ -> request alias #0 creation (if not yet exists) for eth0 + + The corresponding route is also set up by this command. + Please note: The route always points to the base interface. + + +o Alias deletion. + The alias is removed by shutting the alias down: + + # ifconfig eth0:0 down + ~~~~~~~~~~ -> will delete alias + + +o Alias (re-)configuring + + Aliases are not real devices, but programs should be able to configure and + refer to them as usual (ifconfig, route, etc). + + +o Relationship with main device + + If the base device is shut down the added aliases will be deleted + too. + + +Contact +------- +Please finger or e-mail me: + Juan Jose Ciarlante <jjciarla@raiz.uncu.edu.ar> + +Updated by Erik Schoenfelder <schoenfr@gaertner.DE> + +; local variables: +; mode: indented-text +; mode: auto-fill +; end: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt b/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..30a5f01403d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/arcnet-hardware.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3133 @@ + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +1) This file is a supplement to arcnet.txt. Please read that for general + driver configuration help. +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +2) This file is no longer Linux-specific. It should probably be moved out of + the kernel sources. Ideas? +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Because so many people (myself included) seem to have obtained ARCnet cards +without manuals, this file contains a quick introduction to ARCnet hardware, +some cabling tips, and a listing of all jumper settings I can find. Please +e-mail apenwarr@worldvisions.ca with any settings for your particular card, +or any other information you have! + + +INTRODUCTION TO ARCNET +---------------------- + +ARCnet is a network type which works in a way similar to popular Ethernet +networks but which is also different in some very important ways. + +First of all, you can get ARCnet cards in at least two speeds: 2.5 Mbps +(slower than Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (faster than normal Ethernet). In fact, +there are others as well, but these are less common. The different hardware +types, as far as I'm aware, are not compatible and so you cannot wire a +100 Mbps card to a 2.5 Mbps card, and so on. From what I hear, my driver does +work with 100 Mbps cards, but I haven't been able to verify this myself, +since I only have the 2.5 Mbps variety. It is probably not going to saturate +your 100 Mbps card. Stop complaining. :) + +You also cannot connect an ARCnet card to any kind of Ethernet card and +expect it to work. + +There are two "types" of ARCnet - STAR topology and BUS topology. This +refers to how the cards are meant to be wired together. According to most +available documentation, you can only connect STAR cards to STAR cards and +BUS cards to BUS cards. That makes sense, right? Well, it's not quite +true; see below under "Cabling." + +Once you get past these little stumbling blocks, ARCnet is actually quite a +well-designed standard. It uses something called "modified token passing" +which makes it completely incompatible with so-called "Token Ring" cards, +but which makes transfers much more reliable than Ethernet does. In fact, +ARCnet will guarantee that a packet arrives safely at the destination, and +even if it can't possibly be delivered properly (ie. because of a cable +break, or because the destination computer does not exist) it will at least +tell the sender about it. + +Because of the carefully defined action of the "token", it will always make +a pass around the "ring" within a maximum length of time. This makes it +useful for realtime networks. + +In addition, all known ARCnet cards have an (almost) identical programming +interface. This means that with one ARCnet driver you can support any +card, whereas with Ethernet each manufacturer uses what is sometimes a +completely different programming interface, leading to a lot of different, +sometimes very similar, Ethernet drivers. Of course, always using the same +programming interface also means that when high-performance hardware +facilities like PCI bus mastering DMA appear, it's hard to take advantage of +them. Let's not go into that. + +One thing that makes ARCnet cards difficult to program for, however, is the +limit on their packet sizes; standard ARCnet can only send packets that are +up to 508 bytes in length. This is smaller than the Internet "bare minimum" +of 576 bytes, let alone the Ethernet MTU of 1500. To compensate, an extra +level of encapsulation is defined by RFC1201, which I call "packet +splitting," that allows "virtual packets" to grow as large as 64K each, +although they are generally kept down to the Ethernet-style 1500 bytes. + +For more information on the advantages and disadvantages (mostly the +advantages) of ARCnet networks, you might try the "ARCnet Trade Association" +WWW page: + http://www.arcnet.com + + +CABLING ARCNET NETWORKS +----------------------- + +This section was rewritten by + Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> +using information from several people, including: + Avery Pennraun <apenwarr@worldvisions.ca> + Stephen A. Wood <saw@hallc1.cebaf.gov> + John Paul Morrison <jmorriso@bogomips.ee.ubc.ca> + Joachim Koenig <jojo@repas.de> +and Avery touched it up a bit, at Vojtech's request. + +ARCnet (the classic 2.5 Mbps version) can be connected by two different +types of cabling: coax and twisted pair. The other ARCnet-type networks +(100 Mbps TCNS and 320 kbps - 32 Mbps ARCnet Plus) use different types of +cabling (Type1, Fiber, C1, C4, C5). + +For a coax network, you "should" use 93 Ohm RG-62 cable. But other cables +also work fine, because ARCnet is a very stable network. I personally use 75 +Ohm TV antenna cable. + +Cards for coax cabling are shipped in two different variants: for BUS and +STAR network topologies. They are mostly the same. The only difference +lies in the hybrid chip installed. BUS cards use high impedance output, +while STAR use low impedance. Low impedance card (STAR) is electrically +equal to a high impedance one with a terminator installed. + +Usually, the ARCnet networks are built up from STAR cards and hubs. There +are two types of hubs - active and passive. Passive hubs are small boxes +with four BNC connectors containing four 47 Ohm resistors: + + | | wires + R + junction +-R-+-R- R 47 Ohm resistors + R + | + +The shielding is connected together. Active hubs are much more complicated; +they are powered and contain electronics to amplify the signal and send it +to other segments of the net. They usually have eight connectors. Active +hubs come in two variants - dumb and smart. The dumb variant just +amplifies, but the smart one decodes to digital and encodes back all packets +coming through. This is much better if you have several hubs in the net, +since many dumb active hubs may worsen the signal quality. + +And now to the cabling. What you can connect together: + +1. A card to a card. This is the simplest way of creating a 2-computer + network. + +2. A card to a passive hub. Remember that all unused connectors on the hub + must be properly terminated with 93 Ohm (or something else if you don't + have the right ones) terminators. + (Avery's note: oops, I didn't know that. Mine (TV cable) works + anyway, though.) + +3. A card to an active hub. Here is no need to terminate the unused + connectors except some kind of aesthetic feeling. But, there may not be + more than eleven active hubs between any two computers. That of course + doesn't limit the number of active hubs on the network. + +4. An active hub to another. + +5. An active hub to passive hub. + +Remember, that you can not connect two passive hubs together. The power loss +implied by such a connection is too high for the net to operate reliably. + +An example of a typical ARCnet network: + + R S - STAR type card + S------H--------A-------S R - Terminator + | | H - Hub + | | A - Active hub + | S----H----S + S | + | + S + +The BUS topology is very similar to the one used by Ethernet. The only +difference is in cable and terminators: they should be 93 Ohm. Ethernet +uses 50 Ohm impedance. You use T connectors to put the computers on a single +line of cable, the bus. You have to put terminators at both ends of the +cable. A typical BUS ARCnet network looks like: + + RT----T------T------T------T------TR + B B B B B B + + B - BUS type card + R - Terminator + T - T connector + +But that is not all! The two types can be connected together. According to +the official documentation the only way of connecting them is using an active +hub: + + A------T------T------TR + | B B B + S---H---S + | + S + +The official docs also state that you can use STAR cards at the ends of +BUS network in place of a BUS card and a terminator: + + S------T------T------S + B B + +But, according to my own experiments, you can simply hang a BUS type card +anywhere in middle of a cable in a STAR topology network. And more - you +can use the bus card in place of any star card if you use a terminator. Then +you can build very complicated networks fulfilling all your needs! An +example: + + S + | + RT------T-------T------H------S + B B B | + | R + S------A------T-------T-------A-------H------TR + | B B | | B + | S BT | + | | | S----A-----S + S------H---A----S | | + | | S------T----H---S | + S S B R S + +A basically different cabling scheme is used with Twisted Pair cabling. Each +of the TP cards has two RJ (phone-cord style) connectors. The cards are +then daisy-chained together using a cable connecting every two neighboring +cards. The ends are terminated with RJ 93 Ohm terminators which plug into +the empty connectors of cards on the ends of the chain. An example: + + ___________ ___________ + _R_|_ _|_|_ _|_R_ + | | | | | | + |Card | |Card | |Card | + |_____| |_____| |_____| + + +There are also hubs for the TP topology. There is nothing difficult +involved in using them; you just connect a TP chain to a hub on any end or +even at both. This way you can create almost any network configuration. +The maximum of 11 hubs between any two computers on the net applies here as +well. An example: + + RP-------P--------P--------H-----P------P-----PR + | + RP-----H--------P--------H-----P------PR + | | + PR PR + + R - RJ Terminator + P - TP Card + H - TP Hub + +Like any network, ARCnet has a limited cable length. These are the maximum +cable lengths between two active ends (an active end being an active hub or +a STAR card). + + RG-62 93 Ohm up to 650 m + RG-59/U 75 Ohm up to 457 m + RG-11/U 75 Ohm up to 533 m + IBM Type 1 150 Ohm up to 200 m + IBM Type 3 100 Ohm up to 100 m + +The maximum length of all cables connected to a passive hub is limited to 65 +meters for RG-62 cabling; less for others. You can see that using passive +hubs in a large network is a bad idea. The maximum length of a single "BUS +Trunk" is about 300 meters for RG-62. The maximum distance between the two +most distant points of the net is limited to 3000 meters. The maximum length +of a TP cable between two cards/hubs is 650 meters. + + +SETTING THE JUMPERS +------------------- + +All ARCnet cards should have a total of four or five different settings: + + - the I/O address: this is the "port" your ARCnet card is on. Probed + values in the Linux ARCnet driver are only from 0x200 through 0x3F0. (If + your card has additional ones, which is possible, please tell me.) This + should not be the same as any other device on your system. According to + a doc I got from Novell, MS Windows prefers values of 0x300 or more, + eating net connections on my system (at least) otherwise. My guess is + this may be because, if your card is at 0x2E0, probing for a serial port + at 0x2E8 will reset the card and probably mess things up royally. + - Avery's favourite: 0x300. + + - the IRQ: on 8-bit cards, it might be 2 (9), 3, 4, 5, or 7. + on 16-bit cards, it might be 2 (9), 3, 4, 5, 7, or 10-15. + + Make sure this is different from any other card on your system. Note + that IRQ2 is the same as IRQ9, as far as Linux is concerned. You can + "cat /proc/interrupts" for a somewhat complete list of which ones are in + use at any given time. Here is a list of common usages from Vojtech + Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>: + ("Not on bus" means there is no way for a card to generate this + interrupt) + IRQ 0 - Timer 0 (Not on bus) + IRQ 1 - Keyboard (Not on bus) + IRQ 2 - IRQ Controller 2 (Not on bus, nor does interrupt the CPU) + IRQ 3 - COM2 + IRQ 4 - COM1 + IRQ 5 - FREE (LPT2 if you have it; sometimes COM3; maybe PLIP) + IRQ 6 - Floppy disk controller + IRQ 7 - FREE (LPT1 if you don't use the polling driver; PLIP) + IRQ 8 - Realtime Clock Interrupt (Not on bus) + IRQ 9 - FREE (VGA vertical sync interrupt if enabled) + IRQ 10 - FREE + IRQ 11 - FREE + IRQ 12 - FREE + IRQ 13 - Numeric Coprocessor (Not on bus) + IRQ 14 - Fixed Disk Controller + IRQ 15 - FREE (Fixed Disk Controller 2 if you have it) + + Note: IRQ 9 is used on some video cards for the "vertical retrace" + interrupt. This interrupt would have been handy for things like + video games, as it occurs exactly once per screen refresh, but + unfortunately IBM cancelled this feature starting with the original + VGA and thus many VGA/SVGA cards do not support it. For this + reason, no modern software uses this interrupt and it can almost + always be safely disabled, if your video card supports it at all. + + If your card for some reason CANNOT disable this IRQ (usually there + is a jumper), one solution would be to clip the printed circuit + contact on the board: it's the fourth contact from the left on the + back side. I take no responsibility if you try this. + + - Avery's favourite: IRQ2 (actually IRQ9). Watch that VGA, though. + + - the memory address: Unlike most cards, ARCnets use "shared memory" for + copying buffers around. Make SURE it doesn't conflict with any other + used memory in your system! + A0000 - VGA graphics memory (ok if you don't have VGA) + B0000 - Monochrome text mode + C0000 \ One of these is your VGA BIOS - usually C0000. + E0000 / + F0000 - System BIOS + + Anything less than 0xA0000 is, well, a BAD idea since it isn't above + 640k. + - Avery's favourite: 0xD0000 + + - the station address: Every ARCnet card has its own "unique" network + address from 0 to 255. Unlike Ethernet, you can set this address + yourself with a jumper or switch (or on some cards, with special + software). Since it's only 8 bits, you can only have 254 ARCnet cards + on a network. DON'T use 0 or 255, since these are reserved (although + neat stuff will probably happen if you DO use them). By the way, if you + haven't already guessed, don't set this the same as any other ARCnet on + your network! + - Avery's favourite: 3 and 4. Not that it matters. + + - There may be ETS1 and ETS2 settings. These may or may not make a + difference on your card (many manuals call them "reserved"), but are + used to change the delays used when powering up a computer on the + network. This is only necessary when wiring VERY long range ARCnet + networks, on the order of 4km or so; in any case, the only real + requirement here is that all cards on the network with ETS1 and ETS2 + jumpers have them in the same position. Chris Hindy <chrish@io.org> + sent in a chart with actual values for this: + ET1 ET2 Response Time Reconfiguration Time + --- --- ------------- -------------------- + open open 74.7us 840us + open closed 283.4us 1680us + closed open 561.8us 1680us + closed closed 1118.6us 1680us + + Make sure you set ETS1 and ETS2 to the SAME VALUE for all cards on your + network. + +Also, on many cards (not mine, though) there are red and green LED's. +Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> tells me this is what they mean: + GREEN RED Status + ----- --- ------ + OFF OFF Power off + OFF Short flashes Cabling problems (broken cable or not + terminated) + OFF (short) ON Card init + ON ON Normal state - everything OK, nothing + happens + ON Long flashes Data transfer + ON OFF Never happens (maybe when wrong ID) + + +The following is all the specific information people have sent me about +their own particular ARCnet cards. It is officially a mess, and contains +huge amounts of duplicated information. I have no time to fix it. If you +want to, PLEASE DO! Just send me a 'diff -u' of all your changes. + +The model # is listed right above specifics for that card, so you should be +able to use your text viewer's "search" function to find the entry you want. +If you don't KNOW what kind of card you have, try looking through the +various diagrams to see if you can tell. + +If your model isn't listed and/or has different settings, PLEASE PLEASE +tell me. I had to figure mine out without the manual, and it WASN'T FUN! + +Even if your ARCnet model isn't listed, but has the same jumpers as another +model that is, please e-mail me to say so. + +Cards Listed in this file (in this order, mostly): + + Manufacturer Model # Bits + ------------ ------- ---- + SMC PC100 8 + SMC PC110 8 + SMC PC120 8 + SMC PC130 8 + SMC PC270E 8 + SMC PC500 16 + SMC PC500Longboard 16 + SMC PC550Longboard 16 + SMC PC600 16 + SMC PC710 8 + SMC? LCS-8830(-T) 8/16 + Puredata PDI507 8 + CNet Tech CN120-Series 8 + CNet Tech CN160-Series 16 + Lantech? UM9065L chipset 8 + Acer 5210-003 8 + Datapoint? LAN-ARC-8 8 + Topware TA-ARC/10 8 + Thomas-Conrad 500-6242-0097 REV A 8 + Waterloo? (C)1985 Waterloo Micro. 8 + No Name -- 8/16 + No Name Taiwan R.O.C? 8 + No Name Model 9058 8 + Tiara Tiara Lancard? 8 + + +** SMC = Standard Microsystems Corp. +** CNet Tech = CNet Technology, Inc. + + +Unclassified Stuff +------------------ + - Please send any other information you can find. + + - And some other stuff (more info is welcome!): + From: root@ultraworld.xs4all.nl (Timo Hilbrink) + To: apenwarr@foxnet.net (Avery Pennarun) + Date: Wed, 26 Oct 1994 02:10:32 +0000 (GMT) + Reply-To: timoh@xs4all.nl + + [...parts deleted...] + + About the jumpers: On my PC130 there is one more jumper, located near the + cable-connector and it's for changing to star or bus topology; + closed: star - open: bus + On the PC500 are some more jumper-pins, one block labeled with RX,PDN,TXI + and another with ALE,LA17,LA18,LA19 these are undocumented.. + + [...more parts deleted...] + + --- CUT --- + + +** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) ** +PC100, PC110, PC120, PC130 (8-bit cards) +PC500, PC600 (16-bit cards) +--------------------------------- + - mainly from Avery Pennarun <apenwarr@worldvisions.ca>. Values depicted + are from Avery's setup. + - special thanks to Timo Hilbrink <timoh@xs4all.nl> for noting that PC120, + 130, 500, and 600 all have the same switches as Avery's PC100. + PC500/600 have several extra, undocumented pins though. (?) + - PC110 settings were verified by Stephen A. Wood <saw@cebaf.gov> + - Also, the JP- and S-numbers probably don't match your card exactly. Try + to find jumpers/switches with the same number of settings - it's + probably more reliable. + + + JP5 [|] : : : : +(IRQ Setting) IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7 + Put exactly one jumper on exactly one set of pins. + + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 + S1 /----------------------------------\ +(I/O and Memory | 1 1 * 0 0 0 0 * 1 1 0 1 | + addresses) \----------------------------------/ + |--| |--------| |--------| + (a) (b) (m) + + WARNING. It's very important when setting these which way + you're holding the card, and which way you think is '1'! + + If you suspect that your settings are not being made + correctly, try reversing the direction or inverting the + switch positions. + + a: The first digit of the I/O address. + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 00 0 + 01 1 + 10 2 + 11 3 + + b: The second digit of the I/O address. + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 0000 0 + 0001 1 + 0010 2 + ... ... + 1110 E + 1111 F + + The I/O address is in the form ab0. For example, if + a is 0x2 and b is 0xE, the address will be 0x2E0. + + DO NOT SET THIS LESS THAN 0x200!!!!! + + + m: The first digit of the memory address. + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 0000 0 + 0001 1 + 0010 2 + ... ... + 1110 E + 1111 F + + The memory address is in the form m0000. For example, if + m is D, the address will be 0xD0000. + + DO NOT SET THIS TO C0000, F0000, OR LESS THAN A0000! + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + S2 /--------------------------\ +(Station Address) | 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 | + \--------------------------/ + + Setting Value + ------- ----- + 00000000 00 + 10000000 01 + 01000000 02 + ... + 01111111 FE + 11111111 FF + + Note that this is binary with the digits reversed! + + DO NOT SET THIS TO 0 OR 255 (0xFF)! + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) ** +PC130E/PC270E (8-bit cards) +--------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> + + +STANDARD MICROSYSTEMS CORPORATION (SMC) ARCNET(R)-PC130E/PC270E +=============================================================== + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> +using information from the following Original SMC Manual + + "Configuration Guide for + ARCNET(R)-PC130E/PC270 + Network Controller Boards + Pub. # 900.044A + June, 1989" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation +SMC is a registered trademark of the Standard Microsystems Corporation + +The PC130E is an enhanced version of the PC130 board, is equipped with a +standard BNC female connector for connection to RG-62/U coax cable. +Since this board is designed both for point-to-point connection in star +networks and for connection to bus networks, it is downwardly compatible +with all the other standard boards designed for coax networks (that is, +the PC120, PC110 and PC100 star topology boards and the PC220, PC210 and +PC200 bus topology boards). + +The PC270E is an enhanced version of the PC260 board, is equipped with two +modular RJ11-type jacks for connection to twisted pair wiring. +It can be used in a star or a daisy-chained network. + + + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + ________________________________________________________________ + | | S1 | | + | |_________________| | + | Offs|Base |I/O Addr | + | RAM Addr | ___| + | ___ ___ CR3 |___| + | | \/ | CR4 |___| + | | PROM | ___| + | | | N | | 8 + | | SOCKET | o | | 7 + | |________| d | | 6 + | ___________________ e | | 5 + | | | A | S | 4 + | |oo| EXT2 | | d | 2 | 3 + | |oo| EXT1 | SMC | d | | 2 + | |oo| ROM | 90C63 | r |___| 1 + | |oo| IRQ7 | | |o| _____| + | |oo| IRQ5 | | |o| | J1 | + | |oo| IRQ4 | | STAR |_____| + | |oo| IRQ3 | | | J2 | + | |oo| IRQ2 |___________________| |_____| + |___ ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +SMC 90C63 ARCNET Controller / Transceiver /Logic +S1 1-3: I/O Base Address Select + 4-6: Memory Base Address Select + 7-8: RAM Offset Select +S2 1-8: Node ID Select +EXT Extended Timeout Select +ROM ROM Enable Select +STAR Selected - Star Topology (PC130E only) + Deselected - Bus Topology (PC130E only) +CR3/CR4 Diagnostic LEDs +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (PC130E only) +J1 6-position Telephone Jack (PC270E only) +J2 6-position Telephone Jack (PC270E only) + +Setting one of the switches to Off/Open means "1", On/Closed means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group S2 are used to set the node ID. +These switches work in a way similar to the PC100-series cards; see that +entry for more information. + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first three switches in switch group S1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 1 2 3 | Address + -------|-------- + 0 0 0 | 260 + 0 0 1 | 290 + 0 1 0 | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 | 2F0 + 1 0 0 | 300 + 1 0 1 | 350 + 1 1 0 | 380 + 1 1 1 | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 4-6 of switch group S1 select the Base of the 16K block. +Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four +positions, determined by the offset, switches 7 and 8 of group S1. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 4 5 6 7 8 | Address | Address *) + -----------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 0 0 | C0000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 0 1 | C0800 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 0 | C1000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 1 | C1800 | C2000 + | | + 0 0 1 0 0 | C4000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 0 1 | C4800 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 0 | C5000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 1 | C5800 | C6000 + | | + 0 1 0 0 0 | CC000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 0 1 | CC800 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 0 | CD000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 1 | CD800 | CE000 + | | + 0 1 1 0 0 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 0 1 | D0800 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 0 | D1000 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 1 | D1800 | D2000 + | | + 1 0 0 0 0 | D4000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 0 1 | D4800 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 0 | D5000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 1 | D5800 | D6000 + | | + 1 0 1 0 0 | D8000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 0 1 | D8800 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 0 | D9000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 1 | D9800 | DA000 + | | + 1 1 0 0 0 | DC000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 0 1 | DC800 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 0 | DD000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 1 | DD800 | DE000 + | | + 1 1 1 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 0 1 | E0800 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 0 | E1000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 1 | E1800 | E2000 + +*) To enable the 8K Boot PROM install the jumper ROM. + The default is jumper ROM not installed. + + +Setting the Timeouts and Interrupt +---------------------------------- + +The jumpers labeled EXT1 and EXT2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open. + +To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the jumpers +IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7. The Manufacturer's default is IRQ2. + + +Configuring the PC130E for Star or Bus Topology +----------------------------------------------- + +The single jumper labeled STAR is used to configure the PC130E board for +star or bus topology. +When the jumper is installed, the board may be used in a star network, when +it is removed, the board can be used in a bus topology. + + +Diagnostic LEDs +--------------- + +Two diagnostic LEDs are visible on the rear bracket of the board. +The green LED monitors the network activity: the red one shows the +board activity: + + Green | Status Red | Status + -------|------------------- ---------|------------------- + on | normal activity flash/on | data transfer + blink | reconfiguration off | no data transfer; + off | defective board or | incorrect memory or + | node ID is zero | I/O address + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Standard Microsystems Corp (SMC) ** +PC500/PC550 Longboard (16-bit cards) +------------------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> + + +STANDARD MICROSYSTEMS CORPORATION (SMC) ARCNET-PC500/PC550 Long Board +===================================================================== + +Note: There is another Version of the PC500 called Short Version, which + is different in hard- and software! The most important differences + are: + - The long board has no Shared memory. + - On the long board the selection of the interrupt is done by binary + coded switch, on the short board directly by jumper. + +[Avery's note: pay special attention to that: the long board HAS NO SHARED +MEMORY. This means the current Linux-ARCnet driver can't use these cards. +I have obtained a PC500Longboard and will be doing some experiments on it in +the future, but don't hold your breath. Thanks again to Juergen Seifert for +his advice about this!] + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> +using information from the following Original SMC Manual + + "Configuration Guide for + SMC ARCNET-PC500/PC550 + Series Network Controller Boards + Pub. # 900.033 Rev. A + November, 1989" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation +SMC is a registered trademark of the Standard Microsystems Corporation + +The PC500 is equipped with a standard BNC female connector for connection +to RG-62/U coax cable. +The board is designed both for point-to-point connection in star networks +and for connection to bus networks. + +The PC550 is equipped with two modular RJ11-type jacks for connection +to twisted pair wiring. +It can be used in a star or a daisy-chained (BUS) network. + + 1 + 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 + ____________________________________________________________________ + < | SW1 | | SW2 | | + > |_____________________| |_____________| | + < IRQ |I/O Addr | + > ___| + < CR4 |___| + > CR3 |___| + < ___| + > N | | 8 + < o | | 7 + > d | S | 6 + < e | W | 5 + > A | 3 | 4 + < d | | 3 + > d | | 2 + < r |___| 1 + > |o| _____| + < |o| | J1 | + > 3 1 JP6 |_____| + < |o|o| JP2 | J2 | + > |o|o| |_____| + < 4 2__ ______________| + > | | | + <____| |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +SW1 1-6: I/O Base Address Select + 7-10: Interrupt Select +SW2 1-6: Reserved for Future Use +SW3 1-8: Node ID Select +JP2 1-4: Extended Timeout Select +JP6 Selected - Star Topology (PC500 only) + Deselected - Bus Topology (PC500 only) +CR3 Green Monitors Network Activity +CR4 Red Monitors Board Activity +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (PC500 only) +J1 6-position Telephone Jack (PC550 only) +J2 6-position Telephone Jack (PC550 only) + +Setting one of the switches to Off/Open means "1", On/Closed means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW3 are used to set the node ID. Each node +attached to the network must have an unique node ID which must be +different from 0. +Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first six switches in switch group SW1 are used to select one +of 32 possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Address + -------------|-------- + 0 1 0 0 0 0 | 200 + 0 1 0 0 0 1 | 210 + 0 1 0 0 1 0 | 220 + 0 1 0 0 1 1 | 230 + 0 1 0 1 0 0 | 240 + 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 250 + 0 1 0 1 1 0 | 260 + 0 1 0 1 1 1 | 270 + 0 1 1 0 0 0 | 280 + 0 1 1 0 0 1 | 290 + 0 1 1 0 1 0 | 2A0 + 0 1 1 0 1 1 | 2B0 + 0 1 1 1 0 0 | 2C0 + 0 1 1 1 0 1 | 2D0 + 0 1 1 1 1 0 | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 1 1 1 | 2F0 + 1 1 0 0 0 0 | 300 + 1 1 0 0 0 1 | 310 + 1 1 0 0 1 0 | 320 + 1 1 0 0 1 1 | 330 + 1 1 0 1 0 0 | 340 + 1 1 0 1 0 1 | 350 + 1 1 0 1 1 0 | 360 + 1 1 0 1 1 1 | 370 + 1 1 1 0 0 0 | 380 + 1 1 1 0 0 1 | 390 + 1 1 1 0 1 0 | 3A0 + 1 1 1 0 1 1 | 3B0 + 1 1 1 1 0 0 | 3C0 + 1 1 1 1 0 1 | 3D0 + 1 1 1 1 1 0 | 3E0 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 | 3F0 + + +Setting the Interrupt +--------------------- + +Switches seven through ten of switch group SW1 are used to select the +interrupt level. The interrupt level is binary coded, so selections +from 0 to 15 would be possible, but only the following eight values will +be supported: 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12. + + Switch | IRQ + 10 9 8 7 | + ---------|-------- + 0 0 1 1 | 3 + 0 1 0 0 | 4 + 0 1 0 1 | 5 + 0 1 1 1 | 7 + 1 0 0 1 | 9 (=2) (default) + 1 0 1 0 | 10 + 1 0 1 1 | 11 + 1 1 0 0 | 12 + + +Setting the Timeouts +-------------------- + +The two jumpers JP2 (1-4) are used to determine the timeout parameters. +These two jumpers are normally left open. +Refer to the COM9026 Data Sheet for alternate configurations. + + +Configuring the PC500 for Star or Bus Topology +---------------------------------------------- + +The single jumper labeled JP6 is used to configure the PC500 board for +star or bus topology. +When the jumper is installed, the board may be used in a star network, when +it is removed, the board can be used in a bus topology. + + +Diagnostic LEDs +--------------- + +Two diagnostic LEDs are visible on the rear bracket of the board. +The green LED monitors the network activity: the red one shows the +board activity: + + Green | Status Red | Status + -------|------------------- ---------|------------------- + on | normal activity flash/on | data transfer + blink | reconfiguration off | no data transfer; + off | defective board or | incorrect memory or + | node ID is zero | I/O address + + +***************************************************************************** + +** SMC ** +PC710 (8-bit card) +------------------ + - from J.S. van Oosten <jvoosten@compiler.tdcnet.nl> + +Note: this data is gathered by experimenting and looking at info of other +cards. However, I'm sure I got 99% of the settings right. + +The SMC710 card resembles the PC270 card, but is much more basic (i.e. no +LEDs, RJ11 jacks, etc.) and 8 bit. Here's a little drawing: + + _______________________________________ + | +---------+ +---------+ |____ + | | S2 | | S1 | | + | +---------+ +---------+ | + | | + | +===+ __ | + | | R | | | X-tal ###___ + | | O | |__| ####__'| + | | M | || ### + | +===+ | + | | + | .. JP1 +----------+ | + | .. | big chip | | + | .. | 90C63 | | + | .. | | | + | .. +----------+ | + ------- ----------- + ||||||||||||||||||||| + +The row of jumpers at JP1 actually consists of 8 jumpers, (sometimes +labelled) the same as on the PC270, from top to bottom: EXT2, EXT1, ROM, +IRQ7, IRQ5, IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ2 (gee, wonder what they would do? :-) ) + +S1 and S2 perform the same function as on the PC270, only their numbers +are swapped (S1 is the nodeaddress, S2 sets IO- and RAM-address). + +I know it works when connected to a PC110 type ARCnet board. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Possibly SMC ** +LCS-8830(-T) (8 and 16-bit cards) +--------------------------------- + - from Mathias Katzer <mkatzer@HRZ.Uni-Bielefeld.DE> + - Marek Michalkiewicz <marekm@i17linuxb.ists.pwr.wroc.pl> says the + LCS-8830 is slightly different from LCS-8830-T. These are 8 bit, BUS + only (the JP0 jumper is hardwired), and BNC only. + +This is a LCS-8830-T made by SMC, I think ('SMC' only appears on one PLCC, +nowhere else, not even on the few Xeroxed sheets from the manual). + +SMC ARCnet Board Type LCS-8830-T + + ------------------------------------ + | | + | JP3 88 8 JP2 | + | ##### | \ | + | ##### ET1 ET2 ###| + | 8 ###| + | U3 SW 1 JP0 ###| Phone Jacks + | -- ###| + | | | | + | | | SW2 | + | | | | + | | | ##### | + | -- ##### #### BNC Connector + | #### + | 888888 JP1 | + | 234567 | + -- ------- + ||||||||||||||||||||||||||| + -------------------------- + + +SW1: DIP-Switches for Station Address +SW2: DIP-Switches for Memory Base and I/O Base addresses + +JP0: If closed, internal termination on (default open) +JP1: IRQ Jumpers +JP2: Boot-ROM enabled if closed +JP3: Jumpers for response timeout + +U3: Boot-ROM Socket + + +ET1 ET2 Response Time Idle Time Reconfiguration Time + + 78 86 840 + X 285 316 1680 + X 563 624 1680 + X X 1130 1237 1680 + +(X means closed jumper) + +(DIP-Switch downwards means "0") + +The station address is binary-coded with SW1. + +The I/O base address is coded with DIP-Switches 6,7 and 8 of SW2: + +Switches Base +678 Address +000 260-26f +100 290-29f +010 2e0-2ef +110 2f0-2ff +001 300-30f +101 350-35f +011 380-38f +111 3e0-3ef + + +DIP Switches 1-5 of SW2 encode the RAM and ROM Address Range: + +Switches RAM ROM +12345 Address Range Address Range +00000 C:0000-C:07ff C:2000-C:3fff +10000 C:0800-C:0fff +01000 C:1000-C:17ff +11000 C:1800-C:1fff +00100 C:4000-C:47ff C:6000-C:7fff +10100 C:4800-C:4fff +01100 C:5000-C:57ff +11100 C:5800-C:5fff +00010 C:C000-C:C7ff C:E000-C:ffff +10010 C:C800-C:Cfff +01010 C:D000-C:D7ff +11010 C:D800-C:Dfff +00110 D:0000-D:07ff D:2000-D:3fff +10110 D:0800-D:0fff +01110 D:1000-D:17ff +11110 D:1800-D:1fff +00001 D:4000-D:47ff D:6000-D:7fff +10001 D:4800-D:4fff +01001 D:5000-D:57ff +11001 D:5800-D:5fff +00101 D:8000-D:87ff D:A000-D:bfff +10101 D:8800-D:8fff +01101 D:9000-D:97ff +11101 D:9800-D:9fff +00011 D:C000-D:c7ff D:E000-D:ffff +10011 D:C800-D:cfff +01011 D:D000-D:d7ff +11011 D:D800-D:dfff +00111 E:0000-E:07ff E:2000-E:3fff +10111 E:0800-E:0fff +01111 E:1000-E:17ff +11111 E:1800-E:1fff + + +***************************************************************************** + +** PureData Corp ** +PDI507 (8-bit card) +-------------------- + - from Mark Rejhon <mdrejhon@magi.com> (slight modifications by Avery) + - Avery's note: I think PDI508 cards (but definitely NOT PDI508Plus cards) + are mostly the same as this. PDI508Plus cards appear to be mainly + software-configured. + +Jumpers: + There is a jumper array at the bottom of the card, near the edge + connector. This array is labelled J1. They control the IRQs and + something else. Put only one jumper on the IRQ pins. + + ETS1, ETS2 are for timing on very long distance networks. See the + more general information near the top of this file. + + There is a J2 jumper on two pins. A jumper should be put on them, + since it was already there when I got the card. I don't know what + this jumper is for though. + + There is a two-jumper array for J3. I don't know what it is for, + but there were already two jumpers on it when I got the card. It's + a six pin grid in a two-by-three fashion. The jumpers were + configured as follows: + + .-------. + o | o o | + :-------: ------> Accessible end of card with connectors + o | o o | in this direction -------> + `-------' + +Carl de Billy <CARL@carainfo.com> explains J3 and J4: + + J3 Diagram: + + .-------. + o | o o | + :-------: TWIST Technology + o | o o | + `-------' + .-------. + | o o | o + :-------: COAX Technology + | o o | o + `-------' + + - If using coax cable in a bus topology the J4 jumper must be removed; + place it on one pin. + + - If using bus topology with twisted pair wiring move the J3 + jumpers so they connect the middle pin and the pins closest to the RJ11 + Connectors. Also the J4 jumper must be removed; place it on one pin of + J4 jumper for storage. + + - If using star topology with twisted pair wiring move the J3 + jumpers so they connect the middle pin and the pins closest to the RJ11 + connectors. + + +DIP Switches: + + The DIP switches accessible on the accessible end of the card while + it is installed, is used to set the ARCnet address. There are 8 + switches. Use an address from 1 to 254. + + Switch No. + 12345678 ARCnet address + ----------------------------------------- + 00000000 FF (Don't use this!) + 00000001 FE + 00000010 FD + .... + 11111101 2 + 11111110 1 + 11111111 0 (Don't use this!) + + There is another array of eight DIP switches at the top of the + card. There are five labelled MS0-MS4 which seem to control the + memory address, and another three labelled IO0-IO2 which seem to + control the base I/O address of the card. + + This was difficult to test by trial and error, and the I/O addresses + are in a weird order. This was tested by setting the DIP switches, + rebooting the computer, and attempting to load ARCETHER at various + addresses (mostly between 0x200 and 0x400). The address that caused + the red transmit LED to blink, is the one that I thought works. + + Also, the address 0x3D0 seem to have a special meaning, since the + ARCETHER packet driver loaded fine, but without the red LED + blinking. I don't know what 0x3D0 is for though. I recommend using + an address of 0x300 since Windows may not like addresses below + 0x300. + + IO Switch No. + 210 I/O address + ------------------------------- + 111 0x260 + 110 0x290 + 101 0x2E0 + 100 0x2F0 + 011 0x300 + 010 0x350 + 001 0x380 + 000 0x3E0 + + The memory switches set a reserved address space of 0x1000 bytes + (0x100 segment units, or 4k). For example if I set an address of + 0xD000, it will use up addresses 0xD000 to 0xD100. + + The memory switches were tested by booting using QEMM386 stealth, + and using LOADHI to see what address automatically became excluded + from the upper memory regions, and then attempting to load ARCETHER + using these addresses. + + I recommend using an ARCnet memory address of 0xD000, and putting + the EMS page frame at 0xC000 while using QEMM stealth mode. That + way, you get contiguous high memory from 0xD100 almost all the way + the end of the megabyte. + + Memory Switch 0 (MS0) didn't seem to work properly when set to OFF + on my card. It could be malfunctioning on my card. Experiment with + it ON first, and if it doesn't work, set it to OFF. (It may be a + modifier for the 0x200 bit?) + + MS Switch No. + 43210 Memory address + -------------------------------- + 00001 0xE100 (guessed - was not detected by QEMM) + 00011 0xE000 (guessed - was not detected by QEMM) + 00101 0xDD00 + 00111 0xDC00 + 01001 0xD900 + 01011 0xD800 + 01101 0xD500 + 01111 0xD400 + 10001 0xD100 + 10011 0xD000 + 10101 0xCD00 + 10111 0xCC00 + 11001 0xC900 (guessed - crashes tested system) + 11011 0xC800 (guessed - crashes tested system) + 11101 0xC500 (guessed - crashes tested system) + 11111 0xC400 (guessed - crashes tested system) + + +***************************************************************************** + +** CNet Technology Inc. ** +120 Series (8-bit cards) +------------------------ + - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> + + +CNET TECHNOLOGY INC. (CNet) ARCNET 120A SERIES +============================================== + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> +using information from the following Original CNet Manual + + "ARCNET + USER'S MANUAL + for + CN120A + CN120AB + CN120TP + CN120ST + CN120SBT + P/N:12-01-0007 + Revision 3.00" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation + +P/N 120A ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star +P/N 120AB ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Bus +P/N 120TP ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Twisted Pair +P/N 120ST ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star, Twisted Pair +P/N 120SBT ARCNET 8 bit XT/AT Star, Bus, Twisted Pair + + __________________________________________________________________ + | | + | ___| + | LED |___| + | ___| + | N | | ID7 + | o | | ID6 + | d | S | ID5 + | e | W | ID4 + | ___________________ A | 2 | ID3 + | | | d | | ID2 + | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 d | | ID1 + | | | _________________ r |___| ID0 + | | 90C65 || SW1 | ____| + | JP 8 7 | ||_________________| | | + | |o|o| JP1 | | | J2 | + | |o|o| |oo| | | JP 1 1 1 | | + | ______________ | | 0 1 2 |____| + | | PROM | |___________________| |o|o|o| _____| + | > SOCKET | JP 6 5 4 3 2 |o|o|o| | J1 | + | |______________| |o|o|o|o|o| |o|o|o| |_____| + |_____ |o|o|o|o|o| ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Probe +S1 1-5: Base Memory Address Select + 6-8: Base I/O Address Select +S2 1-8: Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +JP1 ROM Enable Select +JP2 IRQ2 +JP3 IRQ3 +JP4 IRQ4 +JP5 IRQ5 +JP6 IRQ7 +JP7/JP8 ET1, ET2 Timeout Parameters +JP10/JP11 Coax / Twisted Pair Select (CN120ST/SBT only) +JP12 Terminator Select (CN120AB/ST/SBT only) +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (all except CN120TP) +J2 Two 6-position Telephone Jack (CN120TP/ST/SBT only) + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must be different from 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 8K or memory base + 0x2000. +Switches 1-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM install the jumper JP1 + +Note: Since the switches 1 and 2 are always set to ON it may be possible + that they can be used to add an offset of 2K, 4K or 6K to the base + address, but this feature is not documented in the manual and I + haven't tested it yet. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level install one (only one!) of the jumpers +JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6. JP2 is the default. + + Jumper | IRQ + -------|----- + 2 | 2 + 3 | 3 + 4 | 4 + 5 | 5 + 6 | 7 + + +Setting the Internal Terminator on CN120AB/TP/SBT +-------------------------------------------------- + +The jumper JP12 is used to enable the internal terminator. + + ----- + 0 | 0 | + ----- ON | | ON + | 0 | | 0 | + | | OFF ----- OFF + | 0 | 0 + ----- + Terminator Terminator + disabled enabled + + +Selecting the Connector Type on CN120ST/SBT +------------------------------------------- + + JP10 JP11 JP10 JP11 + ----- ----- + 0 0 | 0 | | 0 | + ----- ----- | | | | + | 0 | | 0 | | 0 | | 0 | + | | | | ----- ----- + | 0 | | 0 | 0 0 + ----- ----- + Coaxial Cable Twisted Pair Cable + (Default) + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers labeled EXT1 and EXT2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open. + + + +***************************************************************************** + +** CNet Technology Inc. ** +160 Series (16-bit cards) +------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> + +CNET TECHNOLOGY INC. (CNet) ARCNET 160A SERIES +============================================== + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> +using information from the following Original CNet Manual + + "ARCNET + USER'S MANUAL + for + CN160A + CN160AB + CN160TP + P/N:12-01-0006 + Revision 3.00" + +ARCNET is a registered trademark of the Datapoint Corporation + +P/N 160A ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Star +P/N 160AB ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Bus +P/N 160TP ARCNET 16 bit XT/AT Twisted Pair + + ___________________________________________________________________ + < _________________________ ___| + > |oo| JP2 | | LED |___| + < |oo| JP1 | 9026 | LED |___| + > |_________________________| ___| + < N | | ID7 + > 1 o | | ID6 + < 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 d | S | ID5 + > _______________ _____________________ e | W | ID4 + < | PROM | | SW1 | A | 2 | ID3 + > > SOCKET | |_____________________| d | | ID2 + < |_______________| | IO-Base | MEM | d | | ID1 + > r |___| ID0 + < ____| + > | | + < | J1 | + > | | + < |____| + > 1 1 1 1 | + < 3 4 5 6 7 JP 8 9 0 1 2 3 | + > |o|o|o|o|o| |o|o|o|o|o|o| | + < |o|o|o|o|o| __ |o|o|o|o|o|o| ___________| + > | | | + <____________| |_______________________________________| + +Legend: + +9026 ARCNET Probe +SW1 1-6: Base I/O Address Select + 7-10: Base Memory Address Select +SW2 1-8: Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +JP1/JP2 ET1, ET2 Timeout Parameters +JP3-JP13 Interrupt Select +J1 BNC RG62/U Connector (CN160A/AB only) +J1 Two 6-position Telephone Jack (CN160TP only) +LED + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must be different from 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first six switches in switch block SW1 are used to select the I/O Base +address using the following table: + + Switch | Hex I/O + 1 2 3 4 5 6 | Address + ------------------------|-------- + OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON | 260 + OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF | 290 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 2F0 + OFF OFF ON ON ON ON | 300 + OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF | 350 + OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON | 380 + OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 3E0 + +Note: Other IO-Base addresses seem to be selectable, but only the above + combinations are documented. + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The switches 7-10 of switch block SW1 are used to select the Memory +Base address of the RAM (2K) and the PROM. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 7 8 9 10 | Address | Address + ----------------|---------|----------- + OFF OFF ON ON | C0000 | C8000 + OFF OFF ON OFF | D0000 | D8000 (Default) + OFF OFF OFF ON | E0000 | E8000 + +Note: Other MEM-Base addresses seem to be selectable, but only the above + combinations are documented. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level install one (only one!) of the jumpers +JP3 through JP13 using the following table: + + Jumper | IRQ + -------|----------------- + 3 | 14 + 4 | 15 + 5 | 12 + 6 | 11 + 7 | 10 + 8 | 3 + 9 | 4 + 10 | 5 + 11 | 6 + 12 | 7 + 13 | 2 (=9) Default! + +Note: - Do not use JP11=IRQ6, it may conflict with your Floppy Disk + Controller + - Use JP3=IRQ14 only, if you don't have an IDE-, MFM-, or RLL- + Hard Disk, it may conflict with their controllers + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers labeled JP1 and JP2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left open. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Lantech ** +8-bit card, unknown model +------------------------- + - from Vlad Lungu <vlungu@ugal.ro> - his e-mail address seemed broken at + the time I tried to reach him. Sorry Vlad, if you didn't get my reply. + + ________________________________________________________________ + | 1 8 | + | ___________ __| + | | SW1 | LED |__| + | |__________| | + | ___| + | _____________________ |S | 8 + | | | |W | + | | | |2 | + | | | |__| 1 + | | UM9065L | |o| JP4 ____|____ + | | | |o| | CN | + | | | |________| + | | | | + | |___________________| | + | | + | | + | _____________ | + | | | | + | | PROM | |ooooo| JP6 | + | |____________| |ooooo| | + |_____________ _ _| + |____________________________________________| |__| + + +UM9065L : ARCnet Controller + +SW 1 : Shared Memory Address and I/O Base + + ON=0 + + 12345|Memory Address + -----|-------------- + 00001| D4000 + 00010| CC000 + 00110| D0000 + 01110| D1000 + 01101| D9000 + 10010| CC800 + 10011| DC800 + 11110| D1800 + +It seems that the bits are considered in reverse order. Also, you must +observe that some of those addresses are unusual and I didn't probe them; I +used a memory dump in DOS to identify them. For the 00000 configuration and +some others that I didn't write here the card seems to conflict with the +video card (an S3 GENDAC). I leave the full decoding of those addresses to +you. + + 678| I/O Address + ---|------------ + 000| 260 + 001| failed probe + 010| 2E0 + 011| 380 + 100| 290 + 101| 350 + 110| failed probe + 111| 3E0 + +SW 2 : Node ID (binary coded) + +JP 4 : Boot PROM enable CLOSE - enabled + OPEN - disabled + +JP 6 : IRQ set (ONLY ONE jumper on 1-5 for IRQ 2-6) + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Acer ** +8-bit card, Model 5210-003 +-------------------------- + - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> using portions of the existing + arcnet-hardware file. + +This is a 90C26 based card. Its configuration seems similar to the SMC +PC100, but has some additional jumpers I don't know the meaning of. + + __ + | | + ___________|__|_________________________ + | | | | + | | BNC | | + | |______| ___| + | _____________________ |___ + | | | | + | | Hybrid IC | | + | | | o|o J1 | + | |_____________________| 8|8 | + | 8|8 J5 | + | o|o | + | 8|8 | + |__ 8|8 | + (|__| LED o|o | + | 8|8 | + | 8|8 J15 | + | | + | _____ | + | | | _____ | + | | | | | ___| + | | | | | | + | _____ | ROM | | UFS | | + | | | | | | | | + | | | ___ | | | | | + | | | | | |__.__| |__.__| | + | | NCR | |XTL| _____ _____ | + | | | |___| | | | | | + | |90C26| | | | | | + | | | | RAM | | UFS | | + | | | J17 o|o | | | | | + | | | J16 o|o | | | | | + | |__.__| |__.__| |__.__| | + | ___ | + | | |8 | + | |SW2| | + | | | | + | |___|1 | + | ___ | + | | |10 J18 o|o | + | | | o|o | + | |SW1| o|o | + | | | J21 o|o | + | |___|1 | + | | + |____________________________________| + + +Legend: + +90C26 ARCNET Chip +XTL 20 MHz Crystal +SW1 1-6 Base I/O Address Select + 7-10 Memory Address Select +SW2 1-8 Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +J1-J5 IRQ Select +J6-J21 Unknown (Probably extra timeouts & ROM enable ...) +LED1 Activity LED +BNC Coax connector (STAR ARCnet) +RAM 2k of SRAM +ROM Boot ROM socket +UFS Unidentified Flying Sockets + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to OFF means "1", ON means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + +Don't set this to 0 or 255; these values are reserved. + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The switches 1 to 6 of switch block SW1 are used to select one +of 32 possible I/O Base addresses using the following tables + + | Hex + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 200 + 2 | 100 + 3 | 80 + 4 | 40 + 5 | 20 + 6 | 10 + +The I/O address is sum of all switches set to "1". Remember that +the I/O address space bellow 0x200 is RESERVED for mainboard, so +switch 1 should be ALWAYS SET TO OFF. + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of sixteen positions. However, the addresses below +A0000 are likely to cause system hang because there's main RAM. + +Jumpers 7-10 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM + 7 8 9 10 | Address + ----------------|--------- + OFF OFF OFF OFF | F0000 (conflicts with main BIOS) + OFF OFF OFF ON | E0000 + OFF OFF ON OFF | D0000 + OFF OFF ON ON | C0000 (conflicts with video BIOS) + OFF ON OFF OFF | B0000 (conflicts with mono video) + OFF ON OFF ON | A0000 (conflicts with graphics) + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block J1 control the IRQ level. ON means +shorted, OFF means open. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 7 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 5 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 3 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 2 + + +Unknown jumpers & sockets +------------------------- + +I know nothing about these. I just guess that J16&J17 are timeout +jumpers and maybe one of J18-J21 selects ROM. Also J6-J10 and +J11-J15 are connecting IRQ2-7 to some pins on the UFSs. I can't +guess the purpose. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Datapoint? ** +LAN-ARC-8, an 8-bit card +------------------------ + - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> + +This is another SMC 90C65-based ARCnet card. I couldn't identify the +manufacturer, but it might be DataPoint, because the card has the +original arcNet logo in its upper right corner. + + _______________________________________________________ + | _________ | + | | SW2 | ON arcNet | + | |_________| OFF ___| + | _____________ 1 ______ 8 | | 8 + | | | SW1 | XTAL | ____________ | S | + | > RAM (2k) | |______|| | | W | + | |_____________| | H | | 3 | + | _________|_____ y | |___| 1 + | _________ | | |b | | + | |_________| | | |r | | + | | SMC | |i | | + | | 90C65| |d | | + | _________ | | | | | + | | SW1 | ON | | |I | | + | |_________| OFF |_________|_____/C | _____| + | 1 8 | | | |___ + | ______________ | | | BNC |___| + | | | |____________| |_____| + | > EPROM SOCKET | _____________ | + | |______________| |_____________| | + | ______________| + | | + |________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Chip +SW1 1-5: Base Memory Address Select + 6-8: Base I/O Address Select +SW2 1-8: Node ID Select +SW3 1-5: IRQ Select + 6-7: Extra Timeout + 8 : ROM Enable +BNC Coax connector +XTAL 20 MHz Crystal + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW3 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. +Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 0x2000. +Jumpers 3-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM set the switch 8 of switch block SW3 to position ON. + +The switches 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800 and 0x1000 to RAM base address. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Switches 1-5 of the switch block SW3 control the IRQ level. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 3 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 5 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 7 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 2 + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The switches 6-7 of the switch block SW3 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two switches are normally left in the OFF position. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Topware ** +8-bit card, TA-ARC/10 +------------------------- + - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> + +This is another very similar 90C65 card. Most of the switches and jumpers +are the same as on other clones. + + _____________________________________________________________________ +| ___________ | | ______ | +| |SW2 NODE ID| | | | XTAL | | +| |___________| | Hybrid IC | |______| | +| ___________ | | __| +| |SW1 MEM+I/O| |_________________________| LED1|__|) +| |___________| 1 2 | +| J3 |o|o| TIMEOUT ______| +| ______________ |o|o| | | +| | | ___________________ | RJ | +| > EPROM SOCKET | | \ |------| +|J2 |______________| | | | | +||o| | | |______| +||o| ROM ENABLE | SMC | _________ | +| _____________ | 90C65 | |_________| _____| +| | | | | | |___ +| > RAM (2k) | | | | BNC |___| +| |_____________| | | |_____| +| |____________________| | +| ________ IRQ 2 3 4 5 7 ___________ | +||________| |o|o|o|o|o| |___________| | +|________ J1|o|o|o|o|o| ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Chip +XTAL 20 MHz Crystal +SW1 1-5 Base Memory Address Select + 6-8 Base I/O Address Select +SW2 1-8 Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +J1 IRQ Select +J2 ROM Enable +J3 Extra Timeout +LED1 Activity LED +BNC Coax connector (BUS ARCnet) +RJ Twisted Pair Connector (daisy chain) + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached to +the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. Switch 1 (ID0) +serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table: + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 0x2000. +Jumpers 3-5 of switch block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM short the jumper J2. + +The jumpers 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800 and 0x1000 to RAM address. + + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block J1 control the IRQ level. ON means +shorted, OFF means open. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 2 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 3 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 5 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 7 + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers J3 are used to set the timeout parameters. These two +jumpers are normally left open. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Thomas-Conrad ** +Model #500-6242-0097 REV A (8-bit card) +--------------------------------------- + - from Lars Karlsson <100617.3473@compuserve.com> + + ________________________________________________________ + | ________ ________ |_____ + | |........| |........| | + | |________| |________| ___| + | SW 3 SW 1 | | + | Base I/O Base Addr. Station | | + | address | | + | ______ switch | | + | | | | | + | | | |___| + | | | ______ |___._ + | |______| |______| ____| BNC + | Jumper- _____| Connector + | Main chip block _ __| ' + | | | | RJ Connector + | |_| | with 110 Ohm + | |__ Terminator + | ___________ __| + | |...........| | RJ-jack + | |...........| _____ | (unused) + | |___________| |_____| |__ + | Boot PROM socket IRQ-jumpers |_ Diagnostic + |________ __ _| LED (red) + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |________| + | + | + +And here are the settings for some of the switches and jumpers on the cards. + + + I/O + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + +2E0----- 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 +2F0----- 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 +300----- 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 +350----- 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 + +"0" in the above example means switch is off "1" means that it is on. + + + ShMem address. + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + +CX00--0 0 1 1 | | | +DX00--0 0 1 0 | +X000--------- 1 1 | +X400--------- 1 0 | +X800--------- 0 1 | +XC00--------- 0 0 +ENHANCED----------- 1 +COMPATIBLE--------- 0 + + + IRQ + + + 3 4 5 7 2 + . . . . . + . . . . . + + +There is a DIP-switch with 8 switches, used to set the shared memory address +to be used. The first 6 switches set the address, the 7th doesn't have any +function, and the 8th switch is used to select "compatible" or "enhanced". +When I got my two cards, one of them had this switch set to "enhanced". That +card didn't work at all, it wasn't even recognized by the driver. The other +card had this switch set to "compatible" and it behaved absolutely normally. I +guess that the switch on one of the cards, must have been changed accidentally +when the card was taken out of its former host. The question remains +unanswered, what is the purpose of the "enhanced" position? + +[Avery's note: "enhanced" probably either disables shared memory (use IO +ports instead) or disables IO ports (use memory addresses instead). This +varies by the type of card involved. I fail to see how either of these +enhance anything. Send me more detailed information about this mode, or +just use "compatible" mode instead.] + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Waterloo Microsystems Inc. ?? ** +8-bit card (C) 1985 +------------------- + - from Robert Michael Best <rmb117@cs.usask.ca> + +[Avery's note: these don't work with my driver for some reason. These cards +SEEM to have settings similar to the PDI508Plus, which is +software-configured and doesn't work with my driver either. The "Waterloo +chip" is a boot PROM, probably designed specifically for the University of +Waterloo. If you have any further information about this card, please +e-mail me.] + +The probe has not been able to detect the card on any of the J2 settings, +and I tried them again with the "Waterloo" chip removed. + + _____________________________________________________________________ +| \/ \/ ___ __ __ | +| C4 C4 |^| | M || ^ ||^| | +| -- -- |_| | 5 || || | C3 | +| \/ \/ C10 |___|| ||_| | +| C4 C4 _ _ | | ?? | +| -- -- | \/ || | | +| | || | | +| | || C1 | | +| | || | \/ _____| +| | C6 || | C9 | |___ +| | || | -- | BNC |___| +| | || | >C7| |_____| +| | || | | +| __ __ |____||_____| 1 2 3 6 | +|| ^ | >C4| |o|o|o|o|o|o| J2 >C4| | +|| | |o|o|o|o|o|o| | +|| C2 | >C4| >C4| | +|| | >C8| | +|| | 2 3 4 5 6 7 IRQ >C4| | +||_____| |o|o|o|o|o|o| J3 | +|_______ |o|o|o|o|o|o| _______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +C1 -- "COM9026 + SMC 8638" + In a chip socket. + +C2 -- "@Copyright + Waterloo Microsystems Inc. + 1985" + In a chip Socket with info printed on a label covering a round window + showing the circuit inside. (The window indicates it is an EPROM chip.) + +C3 -- "COM9032 + SMC 8643" + In a chip socket. + +C4 -- "74LS" + 9 total no sockets. + +M5 -- "50006-136 + 20.000000 MHZ + MTQ-T1-S3 + 0 M-TRON 86-40" + Metallic case with 4 pins, no socket. + +C6 -- "MOSTEK@TC8643 + MK6116N-20 + MALAYSIA" + No socket. + +C7 -- No stamp or label but in a 20 pin chip socket. + +C8 -- "PAL10L8CN + 8623" + In a 20 pin socket. + +C9 -- "PAl16R4A-2CN + 8641" + In a 20 pin socket. + +C10 -- "M8640 + NMC + 9306N" + In an 8 pin socket. + +?? -- Some components on a smaller board and attached with 20 pins all + along the side closest to the BNC connector. The are coated in a dark + resin. + +On the board there are two jumper banks labeled J2 and J3. The +manufacturer didn't put a J1 on the board. The two boards I have both +came with a jumper box for each bank. + +J2 -- Numbered 1 2 3 4 5 6. + 4 and 5 are not stamped due to solder points. + +J3 -- IRQ 2 3 4 5 6 7 + +The board itself has a maple leaf stamped just above the irq jumpers +and "-2 46-86" beside C2. Between C1 and C6 "ASS 'Y 300163" and "@1986 +CORMAN CUSTOM ELECTRONICS CORP." stamped just below the BNC connector. +Below that "MADE IN CANADA" + + +***************************************************************************** + +** No Name ** +8-bit cards, 16-bit cards +------------------------- + - from Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> + +NONAME 8-BIT ARCNET +=================== + +I have named this ARCnet card "NONAME", since there is no name of any +manufacturer on the Installation manual nor on the shipping box. The only +hint to the existence of a manufacturer at all is written in copper, +it is "Made in Taiwan" + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> +using information from the Original + "ARCnet Installation Manual" + + + ________________________________________________________________ + | |STAR| BUS| T/P| | + | |____|____|____| | + | _____________________ | + | | | | + | | | | + | | | | + | | SMC | | + | | | | + | | COM90C65 | | + | | | | + | | | | + | |__________-__________| | + | _____| + | _______________ | CN | + | | PROM | |_____| + | > SOCKET | | + | |_______________| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | + | _______________ _______________ | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| | SW1 || SW2 || + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| |_______________||_______________|| + |___ 2 3 4 5 7 E E R Node ID IOB__|__MEM____| + | \ IRQ / T T O | + |__________________1_2_M______________________| + +Legend: + +COM90C65: ARCnet Probe +S1 1-8: Node ID Select +S2 1-3: I/O Base Address Select + 4-6: Memory Base Address Select + 7-8: RAM Offset Select +ET1, ET2 Extended Timeout Select +ROM ROM Enable Select +CN RG62 Coax Connector +STAR| BUS | T/P Three fields for placing a sign (colored circle) + indicating the topology of the card + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW1 are used to set the node ID. +Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which +must be different from 0. +Switch 8 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 8 | 1 + 7 | 2 + 6 | 4 + 5 | 8 + 4 | 16 + 3 | 32 + 2 | 64 + 1 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first three switches in switch group SW2 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + Switch | Hex I/O + 1 2 3 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + ON ON OFF | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + ON OFF OFF | 2F0 + OFF ON ON | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + OFF OFF ON | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 4-6 of switch group SW2 select the Base of the 16K block. +Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four +positions, determined by the offset, switches 7 and 8 of group SW2. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 4 5 6 7 8 | Address | Address *) + -----------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 0 0 | C0000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 0 1 | C0800 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 0 | C1000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 1 | C1800 | C2000 + | | + 0 0 1 0 0 | C4000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 0 1 | C4800 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 0 | C5000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 1 | C5800 | C6000 + | | + 0 1 0 0 0 | CC000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 0 1 | CC800 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 0 | CD000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 1 | CD800 | CE000 + | | + 0 1 1 0 0 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 0 1 | D0800 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 0 | D1000 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 1 | D1800 | D2000 + | | + 1 0 0 0 0 | D4000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 0 1 | D4800 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 0 | D5000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 1 | D5800 | D6000 + | | + 1 0 1 0 0 | D8000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 0 1 | D8800 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 0 | D9000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 1 | D9800 | DA000 + | | + 1 1 0 0 0 | DC000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 0 1 | DC800 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 0 | DD000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 1 | DD800 | DE000 + | | + 1 1 1 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 0 1 | E0800 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 0 | E1000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 1 | E1800 | E2000 + +*) To enable the 8K Boot PROM install the jumper ROM. + The default is jumper ROM not installed. + + +Setting Interrupt Request Lines (IRQ) +------------------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the jumpers +IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5 or IRQ7. The manufacturer's default is IRQ2. + + +Setting the Timeouts +-------------------- + +The two jumpers labeled ET1 and ET2 are used to determine the timeout +parameters (response and reconfiguration time). Every node in a network +must be set to the same timeout values. + + ET1 ET2 | Response Time (us) | Reconfiguration Time (ms) + --------|--------------------|-------------------------- + Off Off | 78 | 840 (Default) + Off On | 285 | 1680 + On Off | 563 | 1680 + On On | 1130 | 1680 + +On means jumper installed, Off means jumper not installed + + +NONAME 16-BIT ARCNET +==================== + +The manual of my 8-Bit NONAME ARCnet Card contains another description +of a 16-Bit Coax / Twisted Pair Card. This description is incomplete, +because there are missing two pages in the manual booklet. (The table +of contents reports pages ... 2-9, 2-11, 2-12, 3-1, ... but inside +the booklet there is a different way of counting ... 2-9, 2-10, A-1, +(empty page), 3-1, ..., 3-18, A-1 (again), A-2) +Also the picture of the board layout is not as good as the picture of +8-Bit card, because there isn't any letter like "SW1" written to the +picture. +Should somebody have such a board, please feel free to complete this +description or to send a mail to me! + +This description has been written by Juergen Seifert <seifert@htwm.de> +using information from the Original + "ARCnet Installation Manual" + + + ___________________________________________________________________ + < _________________ _________________ | + > | SW? || SW? | | + < |_________________||_________________| | + > ____________________ | + < | | | + > | | | + < | | | + > | | | + < | | | + > | | | + < | | | + > |____________________| | + < ____| + > ____________________ | | + < | | | J1 | + > | < | | + < |____________________| ? ? ? ? ? ? |____| + > |o|o|o|o|o|o| | + < |o|o|o|o|o|o| | + > | + < __ ___________| + > | | | + <____________| |_______________________________________| + + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW2 are used to set the node ID. +Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which +must be different from 0. +Switch 8 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 8 | 1 + 7 | 2 + 6 | 4 + 5 | 8 + 4 | 16 + 3 | 32 + 2 | 64 + 1 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The first three switches in switch group SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + Switch | Hex I/O + 3 2 1 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + ON ON OFF | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + ON OFF OFF | 2F0 + OFF ON ON | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + OFF OFF ON | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 6-8 of switch group SW1 select the Base of the 16K block. +Within that 16K address space, the buffer may be assigned any one of four +positions, determined by the offset, switches 4 and 5 of group SW1. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 8 7 6 5 4 | Address | Address + -----------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 0 0 | C0000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 0 1 | C0800 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 0 | C1000 | C2000 + 0 0 0 1 1 | C1800 | C2000 + | | + 0 0 1 0 0 | C4000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 0 1 | C4800 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 0 | C5000 | C6000 + 0 0 1 1 1 | C5800 | C6000 + | | + 0 1 0 0 0 | CC000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 0 1 | CC800 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 0 | CD000 | CE000 + 0 1 0 1 1 | CD800 | CE000 + | | + 0 1 1 0 0 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 0 1 | D0800 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 0 | D1000 | D2000 + 0 1 1 1 1 | D1800 | D2000 + | | + 1 0 0 0 0 | D4000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 0 1 | D4800 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 0 | D5000 | D6000 + 1 0 0 1 1 | D5800 | D6000 + | | + 1 0 1 0 0 | D8000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 0 1 | D8800 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 0 | D9000 | DA000 + 1 0 1 1 1 | D9800 | DA000 + | | + 1 1 0 0 0 | DC000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 0 1 | DC800 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 0 | DD000 | DE000 + 1 1 0 1 1 | DD800 | DE000 + | | + 1 1 1 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 0 1 | E0800 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 0 | E1000 | E2000 + 1 1 1 1 1 | E1800 | E2000 + + +Setting Interrupt Request Lines (IRQ) +------------------------------------- + +?????????????????????????????????????? + + +Setting the Timeouts +-------------------- + +?????????????????????????????????????? + + +***************************************************************************** + +** No Name ** +8-bit cards ("Made in Taiwan R.O.C.") +----------- + - from Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> + +I have named this ARCnet card "NONAME", since I got only the card with +no manual at all and the only text identifying the manufacturer is +"MADE IN TAIWAN R.O.C" printed on the card. + + ____________________________________________________________ + | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | + | |o|o| JP1 o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ON | + | + o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ___| + | _____________ o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| OFF _____ | | ID7 + | | | SW1 | | | | ID6 + | > RAM (2k) | ____________________ | H | | S | ID5 + | |_____________| | || y | | W | ID4 + | | || b | | 2 | ID3 + | | || r | | | ID2 + | | || i | | | ID1 + | | 90C65 || d | |___| ID0 + | SW3 | || | | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| ON | || I | | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| | || C | | + | |o|o|o|o|o|o|o|o| OFF |____________________|| | _____| + | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | | | |___ + | ______________ | | | BNC |___| + | | | |_____| |_____| + | > EPROM SOCKET | | + | |______________| | + | ______________| + | | + |_____________________________________________| + +Legend: + +90C65 ARCNET Chip +SW1 1-5: Base Memory Address Select + 6-8: Base I/O Address Select +SW2 1-8: Node ID Select (ID0-ID7) +SW3 1-5: IRQ Select + 6-7: Extra Timeout + 8 : ROM Enable +JP1 Led connector +BNC Coax connector + +Although the jumpers SW1 and SW3 are marked SW, not JP, they are jumpers, not +switches. + +Setting the jumpers to ON means connecting the upper two pins, off the bottom +two - or - in case of IRQ setting, connecting none of them at all. + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in SW2 are used to set the node ID. Each node attached +to the network must have an unique node ID which must not be 0. +Switch 1 (ID0) serves as the least significant bit (LSB). + +Setting one of the switches to Off means "1", On means "0". + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + + Switch | Label | Value + -------|-------|------- + 1 | ID0 | 1 + 2 | ID1 | 2 + 3 | ID2 | 4 + 4 | ID3 | 8 + 5 | ID4 | 16 + 6 | ID5 | 32 + 7 | ID6 | 64 + 8 | ID7 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch | Hex | Decimal + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID + ----------------|---------|--------- + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 + . . . | | + 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 + . . . | | + 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 + . . . | | + 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch block SW1 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 6 7 8 | Address + ------------|-------- + ON ON ON | 260 + OFF ON ON | 290 + ON OFF ON | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + OFF OFF ON | 2F0 + ON ON OFF | 300 + OFF ON OFF | 350 + ON OFF OFF | 380 + OFF OFF OFF | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory (RAM) buffer Address +-------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer (RAM) requires 2K. The base of this buffer can be +located in any of eight positions. The address of the Boot Prom is +memory base + 0x2000. +Jumpers 3-5 of jumper block SW1 select the Memory Base address. + + Switch | Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 4 5 | Address | Address *) + --------------------|---------|----------- + ON ON ON ON ON | C0000 | C2000 + ON ON OFF ON ON | C4000 | C6000 + ON ON ON OFF ON | CC000 | CE000 + ON ON OFF OFF ON | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + ON ON ON ON OFF | D4000 | D6000 + ON ON OFF ON OFF | D8000 | DA000 + ON ON ON OFF OFF | DC000 | DE000 + ON ON OFF OFF OFF | E0000 | E2000 + +*) To enable the Boot ROM set the jumper 8 of jumper block SW3 to position ON. + +The jumpers 1 and 2 probably add 0x0800, 0x1000 and 0x1800 to RAM adders. + +Setting the Interrupt Line +-------------------------- + +Jumpers 1-5 of the jumper block SW3 control the IRQ level. + + Jumper | IRQ + 1 2 3 4 5 | + ---------------------------- + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF | 2 + OFF ON OFF OFF OFF | 3 + OFF OFF ON OFF OFF | 4 + OFF OFF OFF ON OFF | 5 + OFF OFF OFF OFF ON | 7 + + +Setting the Timeout Parameters +------------------------------ + +The jumpers 6-7 of the jumper block SW3 are used to determine the timeout +parameters. These two jumpers are normally left in the OFF position. + + +***************************************************************************** + +** No Name ** +(Generic Model 9058) +-------------------- + - from Andrew J. Kroll <ag784@freenet.buffalo.edu> + - Sorry this sat in my to-do box for so long, Andrew! (yikes - over a + year!) + _____ + | < + | .---' + ________________________________________________________________ | | + | | SW2 | | | + | ___________ |_____________| | | + | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 ___| | + | > 6116 RAM | _________ 8 | | | + | |___________| |20MHzXtal| 7 | | | + | |_________| __________ 6 | S | | + | 74LS373 | |- 5 | W | | + | _________ | E |- 4 | | | + | >_______| ______________|..... P |- 3 | 3 | | + | | | : O |- 2 | | | + | | | : X |- 1 |___| | + | ________________ | | : Y |- | | + | | SW1 | | SL90C65 | : |- | | + | |________________| | | : B |- | | + | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | | : O |- | | + | |_________o____|..../ A |- _______| | + | ____________________ | R |- | |------, + | | | | D |- | BNC | # | + | > 2764 PROM SOCKET | |__________|- |_______|------' + | |____________________| _________ | | + | >________| <- 74LS245 | | + | | | + |___ ______________| | + |H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H| | | + |U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U_U| | | + \| +Legend: + +SL90C65 ARCNET Controller / Transceiver /Logic +SW1 1-5: IRQ Select + 6: ET1 + 7: ET2 + 8: ROM ENABLE +SW2 1-3: Memory Buffer/PROM Address + 3-6: I/O Address Map +SW3 1-8: Node ID Select +BNC BNC RG62/U Connection + *I* have had success using RG59B/U with *NO* terminators! + What gives?! + +SW1: Timeouts, Interrupt and ROM +--------------------------------- + +To select a hardware interrupt level set one (only one!) of the dip switches +up (on) SW1...(switches 1-5) +IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ2. The Manufacturer's default is IRQ2. + +The switches on SW1 labeled EXT1 (switch 6) and EXT2 (switch 7) +are used to determine the timeout parameters. These two dip switches +are normally left off (down). + + To enable the 8K Boot PROM position SW1 switch 8 on (UP) labeled ROM. + The default is jumper ROM not installed. + + +Setting the I/O Base Address +---------------------------- + +The last three switches in switch group SW2 are used to select one +of eight possible I/O Base addresses using the following table + + + Switch | Hex I/O + 4 5 6 | Address + -------|-------- + 0 0 0 | 260 + 0 0 1 | 290 + 0 1 0 | 2E0 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 1 | 2F0 + 1 0 0 | 300 + 1 0 1 | 350 + 1 1 0 | 380 + 1 1 1 | 3E0 + + +Setting the Base Memory Address (RAM & ROM) +------------------------------------------- + +The memory buffer requires 2K of a 16K block of RAM. The base of this +16K block can be located in any of eight positions. +Switches 1-3 of switch group SW2 select the Base of the 16K block. +(0 = DOWN, 1 = UP) +I could, however, only verify two settings... + + Switch| Hex RAM | Hex ROM + 1 2 3 | Address | Address + ------|---------|----------- + 0 0 0 | E0000 | E2000 + 0 0 1 | D0000 | D2000 (Manufacturer's default) + 0 1 0 | ????? | ????? + 0 1 1 | ????? | ????? + 1 0 0 | ????? | ????? + 1 0 1 | ????? | ????? + 1 1 0 | ????? | ????? + 1 1 1 | ????? | ????? + + +Setting the Node ID +------------------- + +The eight switches in group SW3 are used to set the node ID. +Each node attached to the network must have an unique node ID which +must be different from 0. +Switch 1 serves as the least significant bit (LSB). +switches in the DOWN position are OFF (0) and in the UP position are ON (1) + +The node ID is the sum of the values of all switches set to "1" +These values are: + Switch | Value + -------|------- + 1 | 1 + 2 | 2 + 3 | 4 + 4 | 8 + 5 | 16 + 6 | 32 + 7 | 64 + 8 | 128 + +Some Examples: + + Switch# | Hex | Decimal +8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | Node ID | Node ID +----------------|---------|--------- +0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | not allowed <-. +0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 1 | 1 | +0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 2 | 2 | +0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 | 3 | 3 | + . . . | | | +0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 | 55 | 85 | + . . . | | + Don't use 0 or 255! +1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 | AA | 170 | + . . . | | | +1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 | FD | 253 | +1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 | FE | 254 | +1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 | FF | 255 <-' + + +***************************************************************************** + +** Tiara ** +(model unknown) +------------------------- + - from Christoph Lameter <christoph@lameter.com> + + +Here is information about my card as far as I could figure it out: +----------------------------------------------- tiara +Tiara LanCard of Tiara Computer Systems. + ++----------------------------------------------+ +! ! Transmitter Unit ! ! +! +------------------+ ------- +! MEM Coax Connector +! ROM 7654321 <- I/O ------- +! : : +--------+ ! +! : : ! 90C66LJ! +++ +! : : ! ! !D Switch to set +! : : ! ! !I the Nodenumber +! : : +--------+ !P +! !++ +! 234567 <- IRQ ! ++------------!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!--------+ + !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! + +0 = Jumper Installed +1 = Open + +Top Jumper line Bit 7 = ROM Enable 654=Memory location 321=I/O + +Settings for Memory Location (Top Jumper Line) +456 Address selected +000 C0000 +001 C4000 +010 CC000 +011 D0000 +100 D4000 +101 D8000 +110 DC000 +111 E0000 + +Settings for I/O Address (Top Jumper Line) +123 Port +000 260 +001 290 +010 2E0 +011 2F0 +100 300 +101 350 +110 380 +111 3E0 + +Settings for IRQ Selection (Lower Jumper Line) +234567 +011111 IRQ 2 +101111 IRQ 3 +110111 IRQ 4 +111011 IRQ 5 +111110 IRQ 7 + +***************************************************************************** + + +Other Cards +----------- + +I have no information on other models of ARCnet cards at the moment. Please +send any and all info to: + apenwarr@worldvisions.ca + +Thanks. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..770fc41a78e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,555 @@ +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +NOTE: See also arcnet-hardware.txt in this directory for jumper-setting +and cabling information if you're like many of us and didn't happen to get a +manual with your ARCnet card. +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Since no one seems to listen to me otherwise, perhaps a poem will get your +attention: + This driver's getting fat and beefy, + But my cat is still named Fifi. + +Hmm, I think I'm allowed to call that a poem, even though it's only two +lines. Hey, I'm in Computer Science, not English. Give me a break. + +The point is: I REALLY REALLY REALLY REALLY REALLY want to hear from you if +you test this and get it working. Or if you don't. Or anything. + +ARCnet 0.32 ALPHA first made it into the Linux kernel 1.1.80 - this was +nice, but after that even FEWER people started writing to me because they +didn't even have to install the patch. <sigh> + +Come on, be a sport! Send me a success report! + +(hey, that was even better than my original poem... this is getting bad!) + + +-------- +WARNING: +-------- + +If you don't e-mail me about your success/failure soon, I may be forced to +start SINGING. And we don't want that, do we? + +(You know, it might be argued that I'm pushing this point a little too much. +If you think so, why not flame me in a quick little e-mail? Please also +include the type of card(s) you're using, software, size of network, and +whether it's working or not.) + +My e-mail address is: apenwarr@worldvisions.ca + + +--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +These are the ARCnet drivers for Linux. + + +This new release (2.91) has been put together by David Woodhouse +<dwmw2@cam.ac.uk>, in an attempt to tidy up the driver after adding support +for yet another chipset. Now the generic support has been separated from the +individual chipset drivers, and the source files aren't quite so packed with +#ifdefs! I've changed this file a bit, but kept it in the first person from +Avery, because I didn't want to completely rewrite it. + +The previous release resulted from many months of on-and-off effort from me +(Avery Pennarun), many bug reports/fixes and suggestions from others, and in +particular a lot of input and coding from Tomasz Motylewski. Starting with +ARCnet 2.10 ALPHA, Tomasz's all-new-and-improved RFC1051 support has been +included and seems to be working fine! + + +Where do I discuss these drivers? +--------------------------------- + +Tomasz has been so kind as to set up a new and improved mailing list. +Subscribe by sending a message with the BODY "subscribe linux-arcnet YOUR +REAL NAME" to listserv@tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl. Then, to submit messages to the +list, mail to linux-arcnet@tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl. + +There are archives of the mailing list at: + http://tichy.ch.uj.edu.pl/lists/linux-arcnet + +The people on linux-net@vger.kernel.org have also been known to be very +helpful, especially when we're talking about ALPHA Linux kernels that may or +may not work right in the first place. + + +Other Drivers and Info +---------------------- + +You can try my ARCNET page on the World Wide Web at: + http://www.worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/arcnet/ + +Also, SMC (one of the companies that makes ARCnet cards) has a WWW site you +might be interested in, which includes several drivers for various cards +including ARCnet. Try: + http://www.smc.com/ + +Performance Technologies makes various network software that supports +ARCnet: + http://www.perftech.com/ or ftp to ftp.perftech.com. + +Novell makes a networking stack for DOS which includes ARCnet drivers. Try +FTPing to ftp.novell.com. + +You can get the Crynwr packet driver collection (including arcether.com, the +one you'll want to use with ARCnet cards) from +oak.oakland.edu:/simtel/msdos/pktdrvr. It won't work perfectly on a 386+ +without patches, though, and also doesn't like several cards. Fixed +versions are available on my WWW page, or via e-mail if you don't have WWW +access. + + +Installing the Driver +--------------------- + +All you will need to do in order to install the driver is: + make config + (be sure to choose ARCnet in the network devices + and at least one chipset driver.) + make clean + make zImage + +If you obtained this ARCnet package as an upgrade to the ARCnet driver in +your current kernel, you will need to first copy arcnet.c over the one in +the linux/drivers/net directory. + +You will know the driver is installed properly if you get some ARCnet +messages when you reboot into the new Linux kernel. + +There are four chipset options: + + 1. Standard ARCnet COM90xx chipset. + +This is the normal ARCnet card, which you've probably got. This is the only +chipset driver which will autoprobe if not told where the card is. +It following options on the command line: + com90xx=[<io>[,<irq>[,<shmem>]]][,<name>] | <name> + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + io=<io> irq=<irq> shmem=<shmem> device=<name> + +To disable the autoprobe, just specify "com90xx=" on the kernel command line. +To specify the name alone, but allow autoprobe, just put "com90xx=<name>" + + 2. ARCnet COM20020 chipset. + +This is the new chipset from SMC with support for promiscuous mode (packet +sniffing), extra diagnostic information, etc. Unfortunately, there is no +sensible method of autoprobing for these cards. You must specify the I/O +address on the kernel command line. +The command line options are: + com20020=<io>[,<irq>[,<node_ID>[,backplane[,CKP[,timeout]]]]][,name] + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + io=<io> irq=<irq> node=<node_ID> backplane=<backplane> clock=<CKP> + timeout=<timeout> device=<name> + +The COM20020 chipset allows you to set the node ID in software, overriding the +default which is still set in DIP switches on the card. If you don't have the +COM20020 data sheets, and you don't know what the other three options refer +to, then they won't interest you - forget them. + + 3. ARCnet COM90xx chipset in IO-mapped mode. + +This will also work with the normal ARCnet cards, but doesn't use the shared +memory. It performs less well than the above driver, but is provided in case +you have a card which doesn't support shared memory, or (strangely) in case +you have so many ARCnet cards in your machine that you run out of shmem slots. +If you don't give the IO address on the kernel command line, then the driver +will not find the card. +The command line options are: + com90io=<io>[,<irq>][,<name>] + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + io=<io> irq=<irq> device=<name> + + 4. ARCnet RIM I cards. + +These are COM90xx chips which are _completely_ memory mapped. The support for +these is not tested. If you have one, please mail the author with a success +report. All options must be specified, except the device name. +Command line options: + arcrimi=<shmem>,<irq>,<node_ID>[,<name>] + +If you load the chipset support as a module, the options are: + shmem=<shmem> irq=<irq> node=<node_ID> device=<name> + + +Loadable Module Support +----------------------- + +Configure and rebuild Linux. When asked, answer 'm' to "Generic ARCnet +support" and to support for your ARCnet chipset if you want to use the +loadable module. You can also say 'y' to "Generic ARCnet support" and 'm' +to the chipset support if you wish. + + make config + make clean + make zImage + make modules + +If you're using a loadable module, you need to use insmod to load it, and +you can specify various characteristics of your card on the command +line. (In recent versions of the driver, autoprobing is much more reliable +and works as a module, so most of this is now unnecessary.) + +For example: + cd /usr/src/linux/modules + insmod arcnet.o + insmod com90xx.o + insmod com20020.o io=0x2e0 device=eth1 + + +Using the Driver +---------------- + +If you build your kernel with ARCnet COM90xx support included, it should +probe for your card automatically when you boot. If you use a different +chipset driver complied into the kernel, you must give the necessary options +on the kernel command line, as detailed above. + +Go read the NET-2-HOWTO and ETHERNET-HOWTO for Linux; they should be +available where you picked up this driver. Think of your ARCnet as a +souped-up (or down, as the case may be) Ethernet card. + +By the way, be sure to change all references from "eth0" to "arc0" in the +HOWTOs. Remember that ARCnet isn't a "true" Ethernet, and the device name +is DIFFERENT. + + +Multiple Cards in One Computer +------------------------------ + +Linux has pretty good support for this now, but since I've been busy, the +ARCnet driver has somewhat suffered in this respect. COM90xx support, if +compiled into the kernel, will (try to) autodetect all the installed cards. + +If you have other cards, with support compiled into the kernel, then you can +just repeat the options on the kernel command line, e.g.: +LILO: linux com20020=0x2e0 com20020=0x380 com90io=0x260 + +If you have the chipset support built as a loadable module, then you need to +do something like this: + insmod -o arc0 com90xx + insmod -o arc1 com20020 io=0x2e0 + insmod -o arc2 com90xx +The ARCnet drivers will now sort out their names automatically. + + +How do I get it to work with...? +-------------------------------- + +NFS: Should be fine linux->linux, just pretend you're using Ethernet cards. + oak.oakland.edu:/simtel/msdos/nfs has some nice DOS clients. There + is also a DOS-based NFS server called SOSS. It doesn't multitask + quite the way Linux does (actually, it doesn't multitask AT ALL) but + you never know what you might need. + + With AmiTCP (and possibly others), you may need to set the following + options in your Amiga nfstab: MD 1024 MR 1024 MW 1024 + (Thanks to Christian Gottschling <ferksy@indigo.tng.oche.de> + for this.) + + Probably these refer to maximum NFS data/read/write block sizes. I + don't know why the defaults on the Amiga didn't work; write to me if + you know more. + +DOS: If you're using the freeware arcether.com, you might want to install + the driver patch from my web page. It helps with PC/TCP, and also + can get arcether to load if it timed out too quickly during + initialization. In fact, if you use it on a 386+ you REALLY need + the patch, really. + +Windows: See DOS :) Trumpet Winsock works fine with either the Novell or + Arcether client, assuming you remember to load winpkt of course. + +LAN Manager and Windows for Workgroups: These programs use protocols that + are incompatible with the Internet standard. They try to pretend + the cards are Ethernet, and confuse everyone else on the network. + + However, v2.00 and higher of the Linux ARCnet driver supports this + protocol via the 'arc0e' device. See the section on "Multiprotocol + Support" for more information. + + Using the freeware Samba server and clients for Linux, you can now + interface quite nicely with TCP/IP-based WfWg or Lan Manager + networks. + +Windows 95: Tools are included with Win95 that let you use either the LANMAN + style network drivers (NDIS) or Novell drivers (ODI) to handle your + ARCnet packets. If you use ODI, you'll need to use the 'arc0' + device with Linux. If you use NDIS, then try the 'arc0e' device. + See the "Multiprotocol Support" section below if you need arc0e, + you're completely insane, and/or you need to build some kind of + hybrid network that uses both encapsulation types. + +OS/2: I've been told it works under Warp Connect with an ARCnet driver from + SMC. You need to use the 'arc0e' interface for this. If you get + the SMC driver to work with the TCP/IP stuff included in the + "normal" Warp Bonus Pack, let me know. + + ftp.microsoft.com also has a freeware "Lan Manager for OS/2" client + which should use the same protocol as WfWg does. I had no luck + installing it under Warp, however. Please mail me with any results. + +NetBSD/AmiTCP: These use an old version of the Internet standard ARCnet + protocol (RFC1051) which is compatible with the Linux driver v2.10 + ALPHA and above using the arc0s device. (See "Multiprotocol ARCnet" + below.) ** Newer versions of NetBSD apparently support RFC1201. + + +Using Multiprotocol ARCnet +-------------------------- + +The ARCnet driver v2.10 ALPHA supports three protocols, each on its own +"virtual network device": + + arc0 - RFC1201 protocol, the official Internet standard which just + happens to be 100% compatible with Novell's TRXNET driver. + Version 1.00 of the ARCnet driver supported _only_ this + protocol. arc0 is the fastest of the three protocols (for + whatever reason), and allows larger packets to be used + because it supports RFC1201 "packet splitting" operations. + Unless you have a specific need to use a different protocol, + I strongly suggest that you stick with this one. + + arc0e - "Ethernet-Encapsulation" which sends packets over ARCnet + that are actually a lot like Ethernet packets, including the + 6-byte hardware addresses. This protocol is compatible with + Microsoft's NDIS ARCnet driver, like the one in WfWg and + LANMAN. Because the MTU of 493 is actually smaller than the + one "required" by TCP/IP (576), there is a chance that some + network operations will not function properly. The Linux + TCP/IP layer can compensate in most cases, however, by + automatically fragmenting the TCP/IP packets to make them + fit. arc0e also works slightly more slowly than arc0, for + reasons yet to be determined. (Probably it's the smaller + MTU that does it.) + + arc0s - The "[s]imple" RFC1051 protocol is the "previous" Internet + standard that is completely incompatible with the new + standard. Some software today, however, continues to + support the old standard (and only the old standard) + including NetBSD and AmiTCP. RFC1051 also does not support + RFC1201's packet splitting, and the MTU of 507 is still + smaller than the Internet "requirement," so it's quite + possible that you may run into problems. It's also slower + than RFC1201 by about 25%, for the same reason as arc0e. + + The arc0s support was contributed by Tomasz Motylewski + and modified somewhat by me. Bugs are probably my fault. + +You can choose not to compile arc0e and arc0s into the driver if you want - +this will save you a bit of memory and avoid confusion when eg. trying to +use the "NFS-root" stuff in recent Linux kernels. + +The arc0e and arc0s devices are created automatically when you first +ifconfig the arc0 device. To actually use them, though, you need to also +ifconfig the other virtual devices you need. There are a number of ways you +can set up your network then: + + +1. Single Protocol. + + This is the simplest way to configure your network: use just one of the + two available protocols. As mentioned above, it's a good idea to use + only arc0 unless you have a good reason (like some other software, ie. + WfWg, that only works with arc0e). + + If you need only arc0, then the following commands should get you going: + ifconfig arc0 MY.IP.ADD.RESS + route add MY.IP.ADD.RESS arc0 + route add -net SUB.NET.ADD.RESS arc0 + [add other local routes here] + + If you need arc0e (and only arc0e), it's a little different: + ifconfig arc0 MY.IP.ADD.RESS + ifconfig arc0e MY.IP.ADD.RESS + route add MY.IP.ADD.RESS arc0e + route add -net SUB.NET.ADD.RESS arc0e + + arc0s works much the same way as arc0e. + + +2. More than one protocol on the same wire. + + Now things start getting confusing. To even try it, you may need to be + partly crazy. Here's what *I* did. :) Note that I don't include arc0s in + my home network; I don't have any NetBSD or AmiTCP computers, so I only + use arc0s during limited testing. + + I have three computers on my home network; two Linux boxes (which prefer + RFC1201 protocol, for reasons listed above), and one XT that can't run + Linux but runs the free Microsoft LANMAN Client instead. + + Worse, one of the Linux computers (freedom) also has a modem and acts as + a router to my Internet provider. The other Linux box (insight) also has + its own IP address and needs to use freedom as its default gateway. The + XT (patience), however, does not have its own Internet IP address and so + I assigned it one on a "private subnet" (as defined by RFC1597). + + To start with, take a simple network with just insight and freedom. + Insight needs to: + - talk to freedom via RFC1201 (arc0) protocol, because I like it + more and it's faster. + - use freedom as its Internet gateway. + + That's pretty easy to do. Set up insight like this: + ifconfig arc0 insight + route add insight arc0 + route add freedom arc0 /* I would use the subnet here (like I said + to to in "single protocol" above), + but the rest of the subnet + unfortunately lies across the PPP + link on freedom, which confuses + things. */ + route add default gw freedom + + And freedom gets configured like so: + ifconfig arc0 freedom + route add freedom arc0 + route add insight arc0 + /* and default gateway is configured by pppd */ + + Great, now insight talks to freedom directly on arc0, and sends packets + to the Internet through freedom. If you didn't know how to do the above, + you should probably stop reading this section now because it only gets + worse. + + Now, how do I add patience into the network? It will be using LANMAN + Client, which means I need the arc0e device. It needs to be able to talk + to both insight and freedom, and also use freedom as a gateway to the + Internet. (Recall that patience has a "private IP address" which won't + work on the Internet; that's okay, I configured Linux IP masquerading on + freedom for this subnet). + + So patience (necessarily; I don't have another IP number from my + provider) has an IP address on a different subnet than freedom and + insight, but needs to use freedom as an Internet gateway. Worse, most + DOS networking programs, including LANMAN, have braindead networking + schemes that rely completely on the netmask and a 'default gateway' to + determine how to route packets. This means that to get to freedom or + insight, patience WILL send through its default gateway, regardless of + the fact that both freedom and insight (courtesy of the arc0e device) + could understand a direct transmission. + + I compensate by giving freedom an extra IP address - aliased 'gatekeeper' + - that is on my private subnet, the same subnet that patience is on. I + then define gatekeeper to be the default gateway for patience. + + To configure freedom (in addition to the commands above): + ifconfig arc0e gatekeeper + route add gatekeeper arc0e + route add patience arc0e + + This way, freedom will send all packets for patience through arc0e, + giving its IP address as gatekeeper (on the private subnet). When it + talks to insight or the Internet, it will use its "freedom" Internet IP + address. + + You will notice that we haven't configured the arc0e device on insight. + This would work, but is not really necessary, and would require me to + assign insight another special IP number from my private subnet. Since + both insight and patience are using freedom as their default gateway, the + two can already talk to each other. + + It's quite fortunate that I set things up like this the first time (cough + cough) because it's really handy when I boot insight into DOS. There, it + runs the Novell ODI protocol stack, which only works with RFC1201 ARCnet. + In this mode it would be impossible for insight to communicate directly + with patience, since the Novell stack is incompatible with Microsoft's + Ethernet-Encap. Without changing any settings on freedom or patience, I + simply set freedom as the default gateway for insight (now in DOS, + remember) and all the forwarding happens "automagically" between the two + hosts that would normally not be able to communicate at all. + + For those who like diagrams, I have created two "virtual subnets" on the + same physical ARCnet wire. You can picture it like this: + + + [RFC1201 NETWORK] [ETHER-ENCAP NETWORK] + (registered Internet subnet) (RFC1597 private subnet) + + (IP Masquerade) + /---------------\ * /---------------\ + | | * | | + | +-Freedom-*-Gatekeeper-+ | + | | | * | | + \-------+-------/ | * \-------+-------/ + | | | + Insight | Patience + (Internet) + + + +It works: what now? +------------------- + +Send mail describing your setup, preferably including driver version, kernel +version, ARCnet card model, CPU type, number of systems on your network, and +list of software in use to me at the following address: + apenwarr@worldvisions.ca + +I do send (sometimes automated) replies to all messages I receive. My email +can be weird (and also usually gets forwarded all over the place along the +way to me), so if you don't get a reply within a reasonable time, please +resend. + + +It doesn't work: what now? +-------------------------- + +Do the same as above, but also include the output of the ifconfig and route +commands, as well as any pertinent log entries (ie. anything that starts +with "arcnet:" and has shown up since the last reboot) in your mail. + +If you want to try fixing it yourself (I strongly recommend that you mail me +about the problem first, since it might already have been solved) you may +want to try some of the debug levels available. For heavy testing on +D_DURING or more, it would be a REALLY good idea to kill your klogd daemon +first! D_DURING displays 4-5 lines for each packet sent or received. D_TX, +D_RX, and D_SKB actually DISPLAY each packet as it is sent or received, +which is obviously quite big. + +Starting with v2.40 ALPHA, the autoprobe routines have changed +significantly. In particular, they won't tell you why the card was not +found unless you turn on the D_INIT_REASONS debugging flag. + +Once the driver is running, you can run the arcdump shell script (available +from me or in the full ARCnet package, if you have it) as root to list the +contents of the arcnet buffers at any time. To make any sense at all out of +this, you should grab the pertinent RFCs. (some are listed near the top of +arcnet.c). arcdump assumes your card is at 0xD0000. If it isn't, edit the +script. + +Buffers 0 and 1 are used for receiving, and Buffers 2 and 3 are for sending. +Ping-pong buffers are implemented both ways. + +If your debug level includes D_DURING and you did NOT define SLOW_XMIT_COPY, +the buffers are cleared to a constant value of 0x42 every time the card is +reset (which should only happen when you do an ifconfig up, or when Linux +decides that the driver is broken). During a transmit, unused parts of the +buffer will be cleared to 0x42 as well. This is to make it easier to figure +out which bytes are being used by a packet. + +You can change the debug level without recompiling the kernel by typing: + ifconfig arc0 down metric 1xxx + /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 +where "xxx" is the debug level you want. For example, "metric 1015" would put +you at debug level 15. Debug level 7 is currently the default. + +Note that the debug level is (starting with v1.90 ALPHA) a binary +combination of different debug flags; so debug level 7 is really 1+2+4 or +D_NORMAL+D_EXTRA+D_INIT. To include D_DURING, you would add 16 to this, +resulting in debug level 23. + +If you don't understand that, you probably don't want to know anyway. +E-mail me about your problem. + + +I want to send money: what now? +------------------------------- + +Go take a nap or something. You'll feel better in the morning. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/atm.txt b/Documentation/networking/atm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..82921cee77fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/atm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +In order to use anything but the most primitive functions of ATM, +several user-mode programs are required to assist the kernel. These +programs and related material can be found via the ATM on Linux Web +page at http://linux-atm.sourceforge.net/ + +If you encounter problems with ATM, please report them on the ATM +on Linux mailing list. Subscription information, archives, etc., +can be found on http://linux-atm.sourceforge.net/ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt b/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..37c25b0925f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ax25.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +To use the amateur radio protocols within Linux you will need to get a +suitable copy of the AX.25 Utilities. More detailed information about these +and associated programs can be found on http://zone.pspt.fi/~jsn/. + +For more information about the AX.25, NET/ROM and ROSE protocol stacks, see +the AX25-HOWTO written by Terry Dawson <terry@perf.no.itg.telstra.com.au> +who is also the AX.25 Utilities maintainer. + +There is an active mailing list for discussing Linux amateur radio matters +called linux-hams. To subscribe to it, send a message to +majordomo@vger.kernel.org with the words "subscribe linux-hams" in the body +of the message, the subject field is ignored. + +Jonathan G4KLX + +g4klx@g4klx.demon.co.uk diff --git a/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4e68849d5639 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/baycom.txt @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + LINUX DRIVERS FOR BAYCOM MODEMS + + Thomas M. Sailer, HB9JNX/AE4WA, <sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch> + +!!NEW!! (04/98) The drivers for the baycom modems have been split into +separate drivers as they did not share any code, and the driver +and device names have changed. + +This document describes the Linux Kernel Drivers for simple Baycom style +amateur radio modems. + +The following drivers are available: + +baycom_ser_fdx: + This driver supports the SER12 modems either full or half duplex. + Its baud rate may be changed via the `baud' module parameter, + therefore it supports just about every bit bang modem on a + serial port. Its devices are called bcsf0 through bcsf3. + This is the recommended driver for SER12 type modems, + however if you have a broken UART clone that does not have working + delta status bits, you may try baycom_ser_hdx. + +baycom_ser_hdx: + This is an alternative driver for SER12 type modems. + It only supports half duplex, and only 1200 baud. Its devices + are called bcsh0 through bcsh3. Use this driver only if baycom_ser_fdx + does not work with your UART. + +baycom_par: + This driver supports the par96 and picpar modems. + Its devices are called bcp0 through bcp3. + +baycom_epp: + This driver supports the EPP modem. + Its devices are called bce0 through bce3. + This driver is work-in-progress. + +The following modems are supported: + +ser12: This is a very simple 1200 baud AFSK modem. The modem consists only + of a modulator/demodulator chip, usually a TI TCM3105. The computer + is responsible for regenerating the receiver bit clock, as well as + for handling the HDLC protocol. The modem connects to a serial port, + hence the name. Since the serial port is not used as an async serial + port, the kernel driver for serial ports cannot be used, and this + driver only supports standard serial hardware (8250, 16450, 16550) + +par96: This is a modem for 9600 baud FSK compatible to the G3RUH standard. + The modem does all the filtering and regenerates the receiver clock. + Data is transferred from and to the PC via a shift register. + The shift register is filled with 16 bits and an interrupt is signalled. + The PC then empties the shift register in a burst. This modem connects + to the parallel port, hence the name. The modem leaves the + implementation of the HDLC protocol and the scrambler polynomial to + the PC. + +picpar: This is a redesign of the par96 modem by Henning Rech, DF9IC. The modem + is protocol compatible to par96, but uses only three low power ICs + and can therefore be fed from the parallel port and does not require + an additional power supply. Furthermore, it incorporates a carrier + detect circuitry. + +EPP: This is a high-speed modem adaptor that connects to an enhanced parallel port. + Its target audience is users working over a high speed hub (76.8kbit/s). + +eppfpga: This is a redesign of the EPP adaptor. + + + +All of the above modems only support half duplex communications. However, +the driver supports the KISS (see below) fullduplex command. It then simply +starts to send as soon as there's a packet to transmit and does not care +about DCD, i.e. it starts to send even if there's someone else on the channel. +This command is required by some implementations of the DAMA channel +access protocol. + + +The Interface of the drivers + +Unlike previous drivers, these drivers are no longer character devices, +but they are now true kernel network interfaces. Installation is therefore +simple. Once installed, four interfaces named bc{sf,sh,p,e}[0-3] are available. +sethdlc from the ax25 utilities may be used to set driver states etc. +Users of userland AX.25 stacks may use the net2kiss utility (also available +in the ax25 utilities package) to convert packets of a network interface +to a KISS stream on a pseudo tty. There's also a patch available from +me for WAMPES which allows attaching a kernel network interface directly. + + +Configuring the driver + +Every time a driver is inserted into the kernel, it has to know which +modems it should access at which ports. This can be done with the setbaycom +utility. If you are only using one modem, you can also configure the +driver from the insmod command line (or by means of an option line in +/etc/modprobe.conf). + +Examples: + modprobe baycom_ser_fdx mode="ser12*" iobase=0x3f8 irq=4 + sethdlc -i bcsf0 -p mode "ser12*" io 0x3f8 irq 4 + +Both lines configure the first port to drive a ser12 modem at the first +serial port (COM1 under DOS). The * in the mode parameter instructs the driver to use +the software DCD algorithm (see below). + + insmod baycom_par mode="picpar" iobase=0x378 + sethdlc -i bcp0 -p mode "picpar" io 0x378 + +Both lines configure the first port to drive a picpar modem at the +first parallel port (LPT1 under DOS). (Note: picpar implies +hardware DCD, par96 implies software DCD). + +The channel access parameters can be set with sethdlc -a or kissparms. +Note that both utilities interpret the values slightly differently. + + +Hardware DCD versus Software DCD + +To avoid collisions on the air, the driver must know when the channel is +busy. This is the task of the DCD circuitry/software. The driver may either +utilise a software DCD algorithm (options=1) or use a DCD signal from +the hardware (options=0). + +ser12: if software DCD is utilised, the radio's squelch should always be + open. It is highly recommended to use the software DCD algorithm, + as it is much faster than most hardware squelch circuitry. The + disadvantage is a slightly higher load on the system. + +par96: the software DCD algorithm for this type of modem is rather poor. + The modem simply does not provide enough information to implement + a reasonable DCD algorithm in software. Therefore, if your radio + feeds the DCD input of the PAR96 modem, the use of the hardware + DCD circuitry is recommended. + +picpar: the picpar modem features a builtin DCD hardware, which is highly + recommended. + + + +Compatibility with the rest of the Linux kernel + +The serial driver and the baycom serial drivers compete +for the same hardware resources. Of course only one driver can access a given +interface at a time. The serial driver grabs all interfaces it can find at +startup time. Therefore the baycom drivers subsequently won't be able to +access a serial port. You might therefore find it necessary to release +a port owned by the serial driver with 'setserial /dev/ttyS# uart none', where +# is the number of the interface. The baycom drivers do not reserve any +ports at startup, unless one is specified on the 'insmod' command line. Another +method to solve the problem is to compile all drivers as modules and +leave it to kmod to load the correct driver depending on the application. + +The parallel port drivers (baycom_par, baycom_epp) now use the parport subsystem +to arbitrate the ports between different client drivers. + +vy 73s de +Tom Sailer, sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch +hb9jnx @ hb9w.ampr.org diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0bc2ed136a38 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1618 @@ + + Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO + +Initial release : Thomas Davis <tadavis at lbl.gov> +Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 : + - Willy Tarreau <willy at meta-x.org> + - Constantine Gavrilov <const-g at xpert.com> + - Chad N. Tindel <ctindel at ieee dot org> + - Janice Girouard <girouard at us dot ibm dot com> + - Jay Vosburgh <fubar at us dot ibm dot com> + +Reorganized and updated Feb 2005 by Jay Vosburgh + +Note : +------ + +The bonding driver originally came from Donald Becker's beowulf patches for +kernel 2.0. It has changed quite a bit since, and the original tools from +extreme-linux and beowulf sites will not work with this version of the driver. + +For new versions of the driver, patches for older kernels and the updated +userspace tools, please follow the links at the end of this file. + +Table of Contents +================= + +1. Bonding Driver Installation + +2. Bonding Driver Options + +3. Configuring Bonding Devices +3.1 Configuration with sysconfig support +3.2 Configuration with initscripts support +3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually +3.4 Configuring Multiple Bonds + +5. Querying Bonding Configuration +5.1 Bonding Configuration +5.2 Network Configuration + +6. Switch Configuration + +7. 802.1q VLAN Support + +8. Link Monitoring +8.1 ARP Monitor Operation +8.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets +8.3 MII Monitor Operation + +9. Potential Trouble Sources +9.1 Adventures in Routing +9.2 Ethernet Device Renaming +9.3 Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon + +10. SNMP agents + +11. Promiscuous mode + +12. High Availability Information +12.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology +12.1.1 Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology +12.1.2 Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology +12.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology +12.2.1 Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology +12.2.2 Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology +12.3 Switch Behavior Issues for High Availability + +13. Hardware Specific Considerations +13.1 IBM BladeCenter + +14. Frequently Asked Questions + +15. Resources and Links + + +1. Bonding Driver Installation +============================== + + Most popular distro kernels ship with the bonding driver +already available as a module and the ifenslave user level control +program installed and ready for use. If your distro does not, or you +have need to compile bonding from source (e.g., configuring and +installing a mainline kernel from kernel.org), you'll need to perform +the following steps: + +1.1 Configure and build the kernel with bonding +----------------------------------------------- + + The latest version of the bonding driver is available in the +drivers/net/bonding subdirectory of the most recent kernel source +(which is available on http://kernel.org). + + Prior to the 2.4.11 kernel, the bonding driver was maintained +largely outside the kernel tree; patches for some earlier kernels are +available on the bonding sourceforge site, although those patches are +still several years out of date. Most users will want to use either +the most recent kernel from kernel.org or whatever kernel came with +their distro. + + Configure kernel with "make menuconfig" (or "make xconfig" or +"make config"), then select "Bonding driver support" in the "Network +device support" section. It is recommended that you configure the +driver as module since it is currently the only way to pass parameters +to the driver or configure more than one bonding device. + + Build and install the new kernel and modules, then proceed to +step 2. + +1.2 Install ifenslave Control Utility +------------------------------------- + + The ifenslave user level control program is included in the +kernel source tree, in the file Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c. +It is generally recommended that you use the ifenslave that +corresponds to the kernel that you are using (either from the same +source tree or supplied with the distro), however, ifenslave +executables from older kernels should function (but features newer +than the ifenslave release are not supported). Running an ifenslave +that is newer than the kernel is not supported, and may or may not +work. + + To install ifenslave, do the following: + +# gcc -Wall -O -I/usr/src/linux/include ifenslave.c -o ifenslave +# cp ifenslave /sbin/ifenslave + + If your kernel source is not in "/usr/src/linux," then replace +"/usr/src/linux/include" in the above with the location of your kernel +source include directory. + + You may wish to back up any existing /sbin/ifenslave, or, for +testing or informal use, tag the ifenslave to the kernel version +(e.g., name the ifenslave executable /sbin/ifenslave-2.6.10). + +IMPORTANT NOTE: + + If you omit the "-I" or specify an incorrect directory, you +may end up with an ifenslave that is incompatible with the kernel +you're trying to build it for. Some distros (e.g., Red Hat from 7.1 +onwards) do not have /usr/include/linux symbolically linked to the +default kernel source include directory. + + +2. Bonding Driver Options +========================= + + Options for the bonding driver are supplied as parameters to +the bonding module at load time. They may be given as command line +arguments to the insmod or modprobe command, but are usually specified +in either the /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file, or in a +distro-specific configuration file (some of which are detailed in the +next section). + + The available bonding driver parameters are listed below. If a +parameter is not specified the default value is used. When initially +configuring a bond, it is recommended "tail -f /var/log/messages" be +run in a separate window to watch for bonding driver error messages. + + It is critical that either the miimon or arp_interval and +arp_ip_target parameters be specified, otherwise serious network +degradation will occur during link failures. Very few devices do not +support at least miimon, so there is really no reason not to use it. + + Options with textual values will accept either the text name + or, for backwards compatibility, the option value. E.g., + "mode=802.3ad" and "mode=4" set the same mode. + + The parameters are as follows: + +arp_interval + + Specifies the ARP monitoring frequency in milli-seconds. If + ARP monitoring is used in a load-balancing mode (mode 0 or 2), + the switch should be configured in a mode that evenly + distributes packets across all links - such as round-robin. If + the switch is configured to distribute the packets in an XOR + fashion, all replies from the ARP targets will be received on + the same link which could cause the other team members to + fail. ARP monitoring should not be used in conjunction with + miimon. A value of 0 disables ARP monitoring. The default + value is 0. + +arp_ip_target + + Specifies the ip addresses to use when arp_interval is > 0. + These are the targets of the ARP request sent to determine the + health of the link to the targets. Specify these values in + ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd format. Multiple ip adresses must be + seperated by a comma. At least one IP address must be given + for ARP monitoring to function. The maximum number of targets + that can be specified is 16. The default value is no IP + addresses. + +downdelay + + Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before disabling + a slave after a link failure has been detected. This option + is only valid for the miimon link monitor. The downdelay + value should be a multiple of the miimon value; if not, it + will be rounded down to the nearest multiple. The default + value is 0. + +lacp_rate + + Option specifying the rate in which we'll ask our link partner + to transmit LACPDU packets in 802.3ad mode. Possible values + are: + + slow or 0 + Request partner to transmit LACPDUs every 30 seconds (default) + + fast or 1 + Request partner to transmit LACPDUs every 1 second + +max_bonds + + Specifies the number of bonding devices to create for this + instance of the bonding driver. E.g., if max_bonds is 3, and + the bonding driver is not already loaded, then bond0, bond1 + and bond2 will be created. The default value is 1. + +miimon + + Specifies the frequency in milli-seconds that MII link + monitoring will occur. A value of zero disables MII link + monitoring. A value of 100 is a good starting point. The + use_carrier option, below, affects how the link state is + determined. See the High Availability section for additional + information. The default value is 0. + +mode + + Specifies one of the bonding policies. The default is + balance-rr (round robin). Possible values are: + + balance-rr or 0 + + Round-robin policy: Transmit packets in sequential + order from the first available slave through the + last. This mode provides load balancing and fault + tolerance. + + active-backup or 1 + + Active-backup policy: Only one slave in the bond is + active. A different slave becomes active if, and only + if, the active slave fails. The bond's MAC address is + externally visible on only one port (network adapter) + to avoid confusing the switch. This mode provides + fault tolerance. The primary option affects the + behavior of this mode. + + balance-xor or 2 + + XOR policy: Transmit based on [(source MAC address + XOR'd with destination MAC address) modulo slave + count]. This selects the same slave for each + destination MAC address. This mode provides load + balancing and fault tolerance. + + broadcast or 3 + + Broadcast policy: transmits everything on all slave + interfaces. This mode provides fault tolerance. + + 802.3ad or 4 + + IEEE 802.3ad Dynamic link aggregation. Creates + aggregation groups that share the same speed and + duplex settings. Utilizes all slaves in the active + aggregator according to the 802.3ad specification. + + Pre-requisites: + + 1. Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving + the speed and duplex of each slave. + + 2. A switch that supports IEEE 802.3ad Dynamic link + aggregation. + + Most switches will require some type of configuration + to enable 802.3ad mode. + + balance-tlb or 5 + + Adaptive transmit load balancing: channel bonding that + does not require any special switch support. The + outgoing traffic is distributed according to the + current load (computed relative to the speed) on each + slave. Incoming traffic is received by the current + slave. If the receiving slave fails, another slave + takes over the MAC address of the failed receiving + slave. + + Prerequisite: + + Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving the + speed of each slave. + + balance-alb or 6 + + Adaptive load balancing: includes balance-tlb plus + receive load balancing (rlb) for IPV4 traffic, and + does not require any special switch support. The + receive load balancing is achieved by ARP negotiation. + The bonding driver intercepts the ARP Replies sent by + the local system on their way out and overwrites the + source hardware address with the unique hardware + address of one of the slaves in the bond such that + different peers use different hardware addresses for + the server. + + Receive traffic from connections created by the server + is also balanced. When the local system sends an ARP + Request the bonding driver copies and saves the peer's + IP information from the ARP packet. When the ARP + Reply arrives from the peer, its hardware address is + retrieved and the bonding driver initiates an ARP + reply to this peer assigning it to one of the slaves + in the bond. A problematic outcome of using ARP + negotiation for balancing is that each time that an + ARP request is broadcast it uses the hardware address + of the bond. Hence, peers learn the hardware address + of the bond and the balancing of receive traffic + collapses to the current slave. This is handled by + sending updates (ARP Replies) to all the peers with + their individually assigned hardware address such that + the traffic is redistributed. Receive traffic is also + redistributed when a new slave is added to the bond + and when an inactive slave is re-activated. The + receive load is distributed sequentially (round robin) + among the group of highest speed slaves in the bond. + + When a link is reconnected or a new slave joins the + bond the receive traffic is redistributed among all + active slaves in the bond by intiating ARP Replies + with the selected mac address to each of the + clients. The updelay parameter (detailed below) must + be set to a value equal or greater than the switch's + forwarding delay so that the ARP Replies sent to the + peers will not be blocked by the switch. + + Prerequisites: + + 1. Ethtool support in the base drivers for retrieving + the speed of each slave. + + 2. Base driver support for setting the hardware + address of a device while it is open. This is + required so that there will always be one slave in the + team using the bond hardware address (the + curr_active_slave) while having a unique hardware + address for each slave in the bond. If the + curr_active_slave fails its hardware address is + swapped with the new curr_active_slave that was + chosen. + +primary + + A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the + primary device. The specified device will always be the + active slave while it is available. Only when the primary is + off-line will alternate devices be used. This is useful when + one slave is preferred over another, e.g., when one slave has + higher throughput than another. + + The primary option is only valid for active-backup mode. + +updelay + + Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before enabling a + slave after a link recovery has been detected. This option is + only valid for the miimon link monitor. The updelay value + should be a multiple of the miimon value; if not, it will be + rounded down to the nearest multiple. The default value is 0. + +use_carrier + + Specifies whether or not miimon should use MII or ETHTOOL + ioctls vs. netif_carrier_ok() to determine the link + status. The MII or ETHTOOL ioctls are less efficient and + utilize a deprecated calling sequence within the kernel. The + netif_carrier_ok() relies on the device driver to maintain its + state with netif_carrier_on/off; at this writing, most, but + not all, device drivers support this facility. + + If bonding insists that the link is up when it should not be, + it may be that your network device driver does not support + netif_carrier_on/off. The default state for netif_carrier is + "carrier on," so if a driver does not support netif_carrier, + it will appear as if the link is always up. In this case, + setting use_carrier to 0 will cause bonding to revert to the + MII / ETHTOOL ioctl method to determine the link state. + + A value of 1 enables the use of netif_carrier_ok(), a value of + 0 will use the deprecated MII / ETHTOOL ioctls. The default + value is 1. + + + +3. Configuring Bonding Devices +============================== + + There are, essentially, two methods for configuring bonding: +with support from the distro's network initialization scripts, and +without. Distros generally use one of two packages for the network +initialization scripts: initscripts or sysconfig. Recent versions of +these packages have support for bonding, while older versions do not. + + We will first describe the options for configuring bonding for +distros using versions of initscripts and sysconfig with full or +partial support for bonding, then provide information on enabling +bonding without support from the network initialization scripts (i.e., +older versions of initscripts or sysconfig). + + If you're unsure whether your distro uses sysconfig or +initscripts, or don't know if it's new enough, have no fear. +Determining this is fairly straightforward. + + First, issue the command: + +$ rpm -qf /sbin/ifup + + It will respond with a line of text starting with either +"initscripts" or "sysconfig," followed by some numbers. This is the +package that provides your network initialization scripts. + + Next, to determine if your installation supports bonding, +issue the command: + +$ grep ifenslave /sbin/ifup + + If this returns any matches, then your initscripts or +sysconfig has support for bonding. + +3.1 Configuration with sysconfig support +---------------------------------------- + + This section applies to distros using a version of sysconfig +with bonding support, for example, SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9. + + SuSE SLES 9's networking configuration system does support +bonding, however, at this writing, the YaST system configuration +frontend does not provide any means to work with bonding devices. +Bonding devices can be managed by hand, however, as follows. + + First, if they have not already been configured, configure the +slave devices. On SLES 9, this is most easily done by running the +yast2 sysconfig configuration utility. The goal is for to create an +ifcfg-id file for each slave device. The simplest way to accomplish +this is to configure the devices for DHCP. The name of the +configuration file for each device will be of the form: + +ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx + + Where the "xx" portion will be replaced with the digits from +the device's permanent MAC address. + + Once the set of ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx files has been +created, it is necessary to edit the configuration files for the slave +devices (the MAC addresses correspond to those of the slave devices). +Before editing, the file will contain muliple lines, and will look +something like this: + +BOOTPROTO='dhcp' +STARTMODE='on' +USERCTL='no' +UNIQUE='XNzu.WeZGOGF+4wE' +_nm_name='bus-pci-0001:61:01.0' + + Change the BOOTPROTO and STARTMODE lines to the following: + +BOOTPROTO='none' +STARTMODE='off' + + Do not alter the UNIQUE or _nm_name lines. Remove any other +lines (USERCTL, etc). + + Once the ifcfg-id-xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx files have been modified, +it's time to create the configuration file for the bonding device +itself. This file is named ifcfg-bondX, where X is the number of the +bonding device to create, starting at 0. The first such file is +ifcfg-bond0, the second is ifcfg-bond1, and so on. The sysconfig +network configuration system will correctly start multiple instances +of bonding. + + The contents of the ifcfg-bondX file is as follows: + +BOOTPROTO="static" +BROADCAST="10.0.2.255" +IPADDR="10.0.2.10" +NETMASK="255.255.0.0" +NETWORK="10.0.2.0" +REMOTE_IPADDR="" +STARTMODE="onboot" +BONDING_MASTER="yes" +BONDING_MODULE_OPTS="mode=active-backup miimon=100" +BONDING_SLAVE0="eth0" +BONDING_SLAVE1="eth1" + + Replace the sample BROADCAST, IPADDR, NETMASK and NETWORK +values with the appropriate values for your network. + + Note that configuring the bonding device with BOOTPROTO='dhcp' +does not work; the scripts attempt to obtain the device address from +DHCP prior to adding any of the slave devices. Without active slaves, +the DHCP requests are not sent to the network. + + The STARTMODE specifies when the device is brought online. +The possible values are: + + onboot: The device is started at boot time. If you're not + sure, this is probably what you want. + + manual: The device is started only when ifup is called + manually. Bonding devices may be configured this + way if you do not wish them to start automatically + at boot for some reason. + + hotplug: The device is started by a hotplug event. This is not + a valid choice for a bonding device. + + off or ignore: The device configuration is ignored. + + The line BONDING_MASTER='yes' indicates that the device is a +bonding master device. The only useful value is "yes." + + The contents of BONDING_MODULE_OPTS are supplied to the +instance of the bonding module for this device. Specify the options +for the bonding mode, link monitoring, and so on here. Do not include +the max_bonds bonding parameter; this will confuse the configuration +system if you have multiple bonding devices. + + Finally, supply one BONDING_SLAVEn="ethX" for each slave, +where "n" is an increasing value, one for each slave, and "ethX" is +the name of the slave device (eth0, eth1, etc). + + When all configuration files have been modified or created, +networking must be restarted for the configuration changes to take +effect. This can be accomplished via the following: + +# /etc/init.d/network restart + + Note that the network control script (/sbin/ifdown) will +remove the bonding module as part of the network shutdown processing, +so it is not necessary to remove the module by hand if, e.g., the +module paramters have changed. + + Also, at this writing, YaST/YaST2 will not manage bonding +devices (they do not show bonding interfaces on its list of network +devices). It is necessary to edit the configuration file by hand to +change the bonding configuration. + + Additional general options and details of the ifcfg file +format can be found in an example ifcfg template file: + +/etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg.template + + Note that the template does not document the various BONDING_ +settings described above, but does describe many of the other options. + +3.2 Configuration with initscripts support +------------------------------------------ + + This section applies to distros using a version of initscripts +with bonding support, for example, Red Hat Linux 9 or Red Hat +Enterprise Linux version 3. On these systems, the network +initialization scripts have some knowledge of bonding, and can be +configured to control bonding devices. + + These distros will not automatically load the network adapter +driver unless the ethX device is configured with an IP address. +Because of this constraint, users must manually configure a +network-script file for all physical adapters that will be members of +a bondX link. Network script files are located in the directory: + +/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts + + The file name must be prefixed with "ifcfg-eth" and suffixed +with the adapter's physical adapter number. For example, the script +for eth0 would be named /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0. +Place the following text in the file: + +DEVICE=eth0 +USERCTL=no +ONBOOT=yes +MASTER=bond0 +SLAVE=yes +BOOTPROTO=none + + The DEVICE= line will be different for every ethX device and +must correspond with the name of the file, i.e., ifcfg-eth1 must have +a device line of DEVICE=eth1. The setting of the MASTER= line will +also depend on the final bonding interface name chosen for your bond. +As with other network devices, these typically start at 0, and go up +one for each device, i.e., the first bonding instance is bond0, the +second is bond1, and so on. + + Next, create a bond network script. The file name for this +script will be /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-bondX where X is +the number of the bond. For bond0 the file is named "ifcfg-bond0", +for bond1 it is named "ifcfg-bond1", and so on. Within that file, +place the following text: + +DEVICE=bond0 +IPADDR=192.168.1.1 +NETMASK=255.255.255.0 +NETWORK=192.168.1.0 +BROADCAST=192.168.1.255 +ONBOOT=yes +BOOTPROTO=none +USERCTL=no + + Be sure to change the networking specific lines (IPADDR, +NETMASK, NETWORK and BROADCAST) to match your network configuration. + + Finally, it is necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf to load the +bonding module when the bond0 interface is brought up. The following +sample lines in /etc/modules.conf will load the bonding module, and +select its options: + +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 mode=balance-alb miimon=100 + + Replace the sample parameters with the appropriate set of +options for your configuration. + + Finally run "/etc/rc.d/init.d/network restart" as root. This +will restart the networking subsystem and your bond link should be now +up and running. + + +3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually +-------------------------------- + + This section applies to distros whose network initialization +scripts (the sysconfig or initscripts package) do not have specific +knowledge of bonding. One such distro is SuSE Linux Enterprise Server +version 8. + + The general methodology for these systems is to place the +bonding module parameters into /etc/modprobe.conf, then add modprobe +and/or ifenslave commands to the system's global init script. The +name of the global init script differs; for sysconfig, it is +/etc/init.d/boot.local and for initscripts it is /etc/rc.d/rc.local. + + For example, if you wanted to make a simple bond of two e100 +devices (presumed to be eth0 and eth1), and have it persist across +reboots, edit the appropriate file (/etc/init.d/boot.local or +/etc/rc.d/rc.local), and add the following: + +modprobe bonding -obond0 mode=balance-alb miimon=100 +modprobe e100 +ifconfig bond0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up +ifenslave bond0 eth0 +ifenslave bond0 eth1 + + Replace the example bonding module parameters and bond0 +network configuration (IP address, netmask, etc) with the appropriate +values for your configuration. The above example loads the bonding +module with the name "bond0," this simplifies the naming if multiple +bonding modules are loaded (each successive instance of the module is +given a different name, and the module instance names match the +bonding interface names). + + Unfortunately, this method will not provide support for the +ifup and ifdown scripts on the bond devices. To reload the bonding +configuration, it is necessary to run the initialization script, e.g., + +# /etc/init.d/boot.local + + or + +# /etc/rc.d/rc.local + + It may be desirable in such a case to create a separate script +which only initializes the bonding configuration, then call that +separate script from within boot.local. This allows for bonding to be +enabled without re-running the entire global init script. + + To shut down the bonding devices, it is necessary to first +mark the bonding device itself as being down, then remove the +appropriate device driver modules. For our example above, you can do +the following: + +# ifconfig bond0 down +# rmmod bond0 +# rmmod e100 + + Again, for convenience, it may be desirable to create a script +with these commands. + + +3.4 Configuring Multiple Bonds +------------------------------ + + This section contains information on configuring multiple +bonding devices with differing options. If you require multiple +bonding devices, but all with the same options, see the "max_bonds" +module paramter, documented above. + + To create multiple bonding devices with differing options, it +is necessary to load the bonding driver multiple times. Note that +current versions of the sysconfig network initialization scripts +handle this automatically; if your distro uses these scripts, no +special action is needed. See the section Configuring Bonding +Devices, above, if you're not sure about your network initialization +scripts. + + To load multiple instances of the module, it is necessary to +specify a different name for each instance (the module loading system +requires that every loaded module, even multiple instances of the same +module, have a unique name). This is accomplished by supplying +multiple sets of bonding options in /etc/modprobe.conf, for example: + +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 -o bond0 mode=balance-rr miimon=100 + +alias bond1 bonding +options bond1 -o bond1 mode=balance-alb miimon=50 + + will load the bonding module two times. The first instance is +named "bond0" and creates the bond0 device in balance-rr mode with an +miimon of 100. The second instance is named "bond1" and creates the +bond1 device in balance-alb mode with an miimon of 50. + + This may be repeated any number of times, specifying a new and +unique name in place of bond0 or bond1 for each instance. + + When the appropriate module paramters are in place, then +configure bonding according to the instructions for your distro. + +5. Querying Bonding Configuration +================================= + +5.1 Bonding Configuration +------------------------- + + Each bonding device has a read-only file residing in the +/proc/net/bonding directory. The file contents include information +about the bonding configuration, options and state of each slave. + + For example, the contents of /proc/net/bonding/bond0 after the +driver is loaded with parameters of mode=0 and miimon=1000 is +generally as follows: + + Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver: 2.6.1 (October 29, 2004) + Bonding Mode: load balancing (round-robin) + Currently Active Slave: eth0 + MII Status: up + MII Polling Interval (ms): 1000 + Up Delay (ms): 0 + Down Delay (ms): 0 + + Slave Interface: eth1 + MII Status: up + Link Failure Count: 1 + + Slave Interface: eth0 + MII Status: up + Link Failure Count: 1 + + The precise format and contents will change depending upon the +bonding configuration, state, and version of the bonding driver. + +5.2 Network configuration +------------------------- + + The network configuration can be inspected using the ifconfig +command. Bonding devices will have the MASTER flag set; Bonding slave +devices will have the SLAVE flag set. The ifconfig output does not +contain information on which slaves are associated with which masters. + + In the example below, the bond0 interface is the master +(MASTER) while eth0 and eth1 are slaves (SLAVE). Notice all slaves of +bond0 have the same MAC address (HWaddr) as bond0 for all modes except +TLB and ALB that require a unique MAC address for each slave. + +# /sbin/ifconfig +bond0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4 + inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 + RX packets:7224794 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:3286647 errors:1 dropped:0 overruns:1 carrier:0 + collisions:0 txqueuelen:0 + +eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4 + inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 + RX packets:3573025 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:1643167 errors:1 dropped:0 overruns:1 carrier:0 + collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 + Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1080 + +eth1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4 + inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 + RX packets:3651769 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:1643480 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 + collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 + Interrupt:9 Base address:0x1400 + +6. Switch Configuration +======================= + + For this section, "switch" refers to whatever system the +bonded devices are directly connected to (i.e., where the other end of +the cable plugs into). This may be an actual dedicated switch device, +or it may be another regular system (e.g., another computer running +Linux), + + The active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes do not +require any specific configuration of the switch. + + The 802.3ad mode requires that the switch have the appropriate +ports configured as an 802.3ad aggregation. The precise method used +to configure this varies from switch to switch, but, for example, a +Cisco 3550 series switch requires that the appropriate ports first be +grouped together in a single etherchannel instance, then that +etherchannel is set to mode "lacp" to enable 802.3ad (instead of +standard EtherChannel). + + The balance-rr, balance-xor and broadcast modes generally +require that the switch have the appropriate ports grouped together. +The nomenclature for such a group differs between switches, it may be +called an "etherchannel" (as in the Cisco example, above), a "trunk +group" or some other similar variation. For these modes, each switch +will also have its own configuration options for the switch's transmit +policy to the bond. Typical choices include XOR of either the MAC or +IP addresses. The transmit policy of the two peers does not need to +match. For these three modes, the bonding mode really selects a +transmit policy for an EtherChannel group; all three will interoperate +with another EtherChannel group. + + +7. 802.1q VLAN Support +====================== + + It is possible to configure VLAN devices over a bond interface +using the 8021q driver. However, only packets coming from the 8021q +driver and passing through bonding will be tagged by default. Self +generated packets, for example, bonding's learning packets or ARP +packets generated by either ALB mode or the ARP monitor mechanism, are +tagged internally by bonding itself. As a result, bonding must +"learn" the VLAN IDs configured above it, and use those IDs to tag +self generated packets. + + For reasons of simplicity, and to support the use of adapters +that can do VLAN hardware acceleration offloding, the bonding +interface declares itself as fully hardware offloaing capable, it gets +the add_vid/kill_vid notifications to gather the necessary +information, and it propagates those actions to the slaves. In case +of mixed adapter types, hardware accelerated tagged packets that +should go through an adapter that is not offloading capable are +"un-accelerated" by the bonding driver so the VLAN tag sits in the +regular location. + + VLAN interfaces *must* be added on top of a bonding interface +only after enslaving at least one slave. The bonding interface has a +hardware address of 00:00:00:00:00:00 until the first slave is added. +If the VLAN interface is created prior to the first enslavement, it +would pick up the all-zeroes hardware address. Once the first slave +is attached to the bond, the bond device itself will pick up the +slave's hardware address, which is then available for the VLAN device. + + Also, be aware that a similar problem can occur if all slaves +are released from a bond that still has one or more VLAN interfaces on +top of it. When a new slave is added, the bonding interface will +obtain its hardware address from the first slave, which might not +match the hardware address of the VLAN interfaces (which was +ultimately copied from an earlier slave). + + There are two methods to insure that the VLAN device operates +with the correct hardware address if all slaves are removed from a +bond interface: + + 1. Remove all VLAN interfaces then recreate them + + 2. Set the bonding interface's hardware address so that it +matches the hardware address of the VLAN interfaces. + + Note that changing a VLAN interface's HW address would set the +underlying device -- i.e. the bonding interface -- to promiscouos +mode, which might not be what you want. + + +8. Link Monitoring +================== + + The bonding driver at present supports two schemes for +monitoring a slave device's link state: the ARP monitor and the MII +monitor. + + At the present time, due to implementation restrictions in the +bonding driver itself, it is not possible to enable both ARP and MII +monitoring simultaneously. + +8.1 ARP Monitor Operation +------------------------- + + The ARP monitor operates as its name suggests: it sends ARP +queries to one or more designated peer systems on the network, and +uses the response as an indication that the link is operating. This +gives some assurance that traffic is actually flowing to and from one +or more peers on the local network. + + The ARP monitor relies on the device driver itself to verify +that traffic is flowing. In particular, the driver must keep up to +date the last receive time, dev->last_rx, and transmit start time, +dev->trans_start. If these are not updated by the driver, then the +ARP monitor will immediately fail any slaves using that driver, and +those slaves will stay down. If networking monitoring (tcpdump, etc) +shows the ARP requests and replies on the network, then it may be that +your device driver is not updating last_rx and trans_start. + +8.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets +------------------------------------ + + While ARP monitoring can be done with just one target, it can +be useful in a High Availability setup to have several targets to +monitor. In the case of just one target, the target itself may go +down or have a problem making it unresponsive to ARP requests. Having +an additional target (or several) increases the reliability of the ARP +monitoring. + + Multiple ARP targets must be seperated by commas as follows: + +# example options for ARP monitoring with three targets +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.1,192.168.0.3,192.168.0.9 + + For just a single target the options would resemble: + +# example options for ARP monitoring with one target +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.100 + + +8.3 MII Monitor Operation +------------------------- + + The MII monitor monitors only the carrier state of the local +network interface. It accomplishes this in one of three ways: by +depending upon the device driver to maintain its carrier state, by +querying the device's MII registers, or by making an ethtool query to +the device. + + If the use_carrier module parameter is 1 (the default value), +then the MII monitor will rely on the driver for carrier state +information (via the netif_carrier subsystem). As explained in the +use_carrier parameter information, above, if the MII monitor fails to +detect carrier loss on the device (e.g., when the cable is physically +disconnected), it may be that the driver does not support +netif_carrier. + + If use_carrier is 0, then the MII monitor will first query the +device's (via ioctl) MII registers and check the link state. If that +request fails (not just that it returns carrier down), then the MII +monitor will make an ethtool ETHOOL_GLINK request to attempt to obtain +the same information. If both methods fail (i.e., the driver either +does not support or had some error in processing both the MII register +and ethtool requests), then the MII monitor will assume the link is +up. + +9. Potential Sources of Trouble +=============================== + +9.1 Adventures in Routing +------------------------- + + When bonding is configured, it is important that the slave +devices not have routes that supercede routes of the master (or, +generally, not have routes at all). For example, suppose the bonding +device bond0 has two slaves, eth0 and eth1, and the routing table is +as follows: + +Kernel IP routing table +Destination Gateway Genmask Flags MSS Window irtt Iface +10.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 40 0 0 eth0 +10.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 40 0 0 eth1 +10.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 40 0 0 bond0 +127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 U 40 0 0 lo + + This routing configuration will likely still update the +receive/transmit times in the driver (needed by the ARP monitor), but +may bypass the bonding driver (because outgoing traffic to, in this +case, another host on network 10 would use eth0 or eth1 before bond0). + + The ARP monitor (and ARP itself) may become confused by this +configuration, because ARP requests (generated by the ARP monitor) +will be sent on one interface (bond0), but the corresponding reply +will arrive on a different interface (eth0). This reply looks to ARP +as an unsolicited ARP reply (because ARP matches replies on an +interface basis), and is discarded. The MII monitor is not affected +by the state of the routing table. + + The solution here is simply to insure that slaves do not have +routes of their own, and if for some reason they must, those routes do +not supercede routes of their master. This should generally be the +case, but unusual configurations or errant manual or automatic static +route additions may cause trouble. + +9.2 Ethernet Device Renaming +---------------------------- + + On systems with network configuration scripts that do not +associate physical devices directly with network interface names (so +that the same physical device always has the same "ethX" name), it may +be necessary to add some special logic to either /etc/modules.conf or +/etc/modprobe.conf (depending upon which is installed on the system). + + For example, given a modules.conf containing the following: + +alias bond0 bonding +options bond0 mode=some-mode miimon=50 +alias eth0 tg3 +alias eth1 tg3 +alias eth2 e1000 +alias eth3 e1000 + + If neither eth0 and eth1 are slaves to bond0, then when the +bond0 interface comes up, the devices may end up reordered. This +happens because bonding is loaded first, then its slave device's +drivers are loaded next. Since no other drivers have been loaded, +when the e1000 driver loads, it will receive eth0 and eth1 for its +devices, but the bonding configuration tries to enslave eth2 and eth3 +(which may later be assigned to the tg3 devices). + + Adding the following: + +add above bonding e1000 tg3 + + causes modprobe to load e1000 then tg3, in that order, when +bonding is loaded. This command is fully documented in the +modules.conf manual page. + + On systems utilizing modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local), +an equivalent problem can occur. In this case, the following can be +added to modprobe.conf (or modprobe.conf.local, as appropriate), as +follows (all on one line; it has been split here for clarity): + +install bonding /sbin/modprobe tg3; /sbin/modprobe e1000; + /sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding + + This will, when loading the bonding module, rather than +performing the normal action, instead execute the provided command. +This command loads the device drivers in the order needed, then calls +modprobe with --ingore-install to cause the normal action to then take +place. Full documentation on this can be found in the modprobe.conf +and modprobe manual pages. + +9.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon +--------------------------------------------------------- + + By default, bonding enables the use_carrier option, which +instructs bonding to trust the driver to maintain carrier state. + + As discussed in the options section, above, some drivers do +not support the netif_carrier_on/_off link state tracking system. +With use_carrier enabled, bonding will always see these links as up, +regardless of their actual state. + + Additionally, other drivers do support netif_carrier, but do +not maintain it in real time, e.g., only polling the link state at +some fixed interval. In this case, miimon will detect failures, but +only after some long period of time has expired. If it appears that +miimon is very slow in detecting link failures, try specifying +use_carrier=0 to see if that improves the failure detection time. If +it does, then it may be that the driver checks the carrier state at a +fixed interval, but does not cache the MII register values (so the +use_carrier=0 method of querying the registers directly works). If +use_carrier=0 does not improve the failover, then the driver may cache +the registers, or the problem may be elsewhere. + + Also, remember that miimon only checks for the device's +carrier state. It has no way to determine the state of devices on or +beyond other ports of a switch, or if a switch is refusing to pass +traffic while still maintaining carrier on. + +10. SNMP agents +=============== + + If running SNMP agents, the bonding driver should be loaded +before any network drivers participating in a bond. This requirement +is due to the the interface index (ipAdEntIfIndex) being associated to +the first interface found with a given IP address. That is, there is +only one ipAdEntIfIndex for each IP address. For example, if eth0 and +eth1 are slaves of bond0 and the driver for eth0 is loaded before the +bonding driver, the interface for the IP address will be associated +with the eth0 interface. This configuration is shown below, the IP +address 192.168.1.1 has an interface index of 2 which indexes to eth0 +in the ifDescr table (ifDescr.2). + + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.1 = lo + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.2 = eth0 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.3 = eth1 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.4 = eth2 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.5 = eth3 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.6 = bond0 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.10.10.10 = 5 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.192.168.1.1 = 2 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.74.20.94 = 4 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.127.0.0.1 = 1 + + This problem is avoided by loading the bonding driver before +any network drivers participating in a bond. Below is an example of +loading the bonding driver first, the IP address 192.168.1.1 is +correctly associated with ifDescr.2. + + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.1 = lo + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.2 = bond0 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.3 = eth0 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.4 = eth1 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.5 = eth2 + interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr.6 = eth3 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.10.10.10 = 6 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.192.168.1.1 = 2 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.10.74.20.94 = 5 + ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex.127.0.0.1 = 1 + + While some distributions may not report the interface name in +ifDescr, the association between the IP address and IfIndex remains +and SNMP functions such as Interface_Scan_Next will report that +association. + +11. Promiscuous mode +==================== + + When running network monitoring tools, e.g., tcpdump, it is +common to enable promiscuous mode on the device, so that all traffic +is seen (instead of seeing only traffic destined for the local host). +The bonding driver handles promiscuous mode changes to the bonding +master device (e.g., bond0), and propogates the setting to the slave +devices. + + For the balance-rr, balance-xor, broadcast, and 802.3ad modes, +the promiscuous mode setting is propogated to all slaves. + + For the active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes, the +promiscuous mode setting is propogated only to the active slave. + + For balance-tlb mode, the active slave is the slave currently +receiving inbound traffic. + + For balance-alb mode, the active slave is the slave used as a +"primary." This slave is used for mode-specific control traffic, for +sending to peers that are unassigned or if the load is unbalanced. + + For the active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes, when +the active slave changes (e.g., due to a link failure), the +promiscuous setting will be propogated to the new active slave. + +12. High Availability Information +================================= + + High Availability refers to configurations that provide +maximum network availability by having redundant or backup devices, +links and switches between the host and the rest of the world. + + There are currently two basic methods for configuring to +maximize availability. They are dependent on the network topology and +the primary goal of the configuration, but in general, a configuration +can be optimized for maximum available bandwidth, or for maximum +network availability. + +12.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology +-------------------------------------------------- + + If two hosts (or a host and a switch) are directly connected +via multiple physical links, then there is no network availability +penalty for optimizing for maximum bandwidth: there is only one switch +(or peer), so if it fails, you have no alternative access to fail over +to. + +Example 1 : host to switch (or other host) + + +----------+ +----------+ + | |eth0 eth0| switch | + | Host A +--------------------------+ or | + | +--------------------------+ other | + | |eth1 eth1| host | + +----------+ +----------+ + + +12.1.1 Bonding Mode Selection for single switch topology +-------------------------------------------------------- + + This configuration is the easiest to set up and to understand, +although you will have to decide which bonding mode best suits your +needs. The tradeoffs for each mode are detailed below: + +balance-rr: This mode is the only mode that will permit a single + TCP/IP connection to stripe traffic across multiple + interfaces. It is therefore the only mode that will allow a + single TCP/IP stream to utilize more than one interface's + worth of throughput. This comes at a cost, however: the + striping often results in peer systems receiving packets out + of order, causing TCP/IP's congestion control system to kick + in, often by retransmitting segments. + + It is possible to adjust TCP/IP's congestion limits by + altering the net.ipv4.tcp_reordering sysctl parameter. The + usual default value is 3, and the maximum useful value is 127. + For a four interface balance-rr bond, expect that a single + TCP/IP stream will utilize no more than approximately 2.3 + interface's worth of throughput, even after adjusting + tcp_reordering. + + If you are utilizing protocols other than TCP/IP, UDP for + example, and your application can tolerate out of order + delivery, then this mode can allow for single stream datagram + performance that scales near linearly as interfaces are added + to the bond. + + This mode requires the switch to have the appropriate ports + configured for "etherchannel" or "trunking." + +active-backup: There is not much advantage in this network topology to + the active-backup mode, as the inactive backup devices are all + connected to the same peer as the primary. In this case, a + load balancing mode (with link monitoring) will provide the + same level of network availability, but with increased + available bandwidth. On the plus side, it does not require + any configuration of the switch. + +balance-xor: This mode will limit traffic such that packets destined + for specific peers will always be sent over the same + interface. Since the destination is determined by the MAC + addresses involved, this may be desirable if you have a large + network with many hosts. It is likely to be suboptimal if all + your traffic is passed through a single router, however. As + with balance-rr, the switch ports need to be configured for + "etherchannel" or "trunking." + +broadcast: Like active-backup, there is not much advantage to this + mode in this type of network topology. + +802.3ad: This mode can be a good choice for this type of network + topology. The 802.3ad mode is an IEEE standard, so all peers + that implement 802.3ad should interoperate well. The 802.3ad + protocol includes automatic configuration of the aggregates, + so minimal manual configuration of the switch is needed + (typically only to designate that some set of devices is + usable for 802.3ad). The 802.3ad standard also mandates that + frames be delivered in order (within certain limits), so in + general single connections will not see misordering of + packets. The 802.3ad mode does have some drawbacks: the + standard mandates that all devices in the aggregate operate at + the same speed and duplex. Also, as with all bonding load + balance modes other than balance-rr, no single connection will + be able to utilize more than a single interface's worth of + bandwidth. Additionally, the linux bonding 802.3ad + implementation distributes traffic by peer (using an XOR of + MAC addresses), so in general all traffic to a particular + destination will use the same interface. Finally, the 802.3ad + mode mandates the use of the MII monitor, therefore, the ARP + monitor is not available in this mode. + +balance-tlb: This mode is also a good choice for this type of + topology. It has no special switch configuration + requirements, and balances outgoing traffic by peer, in a + vaguely intelligent manner (not a simple XOR as in balance-xor + or 802.3ad mode), so that unlucky MAC addresses will not all + "bunch up" on a single interface. Interfaces may be of + differing speeds. On the down side, in this mode all incoming + traffic arrives over a single interface, this mode requires + certain ethtool support in the network device driver of the + slave interfaces, and the ARP monitor is not available. + +balance-alb: This mode is everything that balance-tlb is, and more. It + has all of the features (and restrictions) of balance-tlb, and + will also balance incoming traffic from peers (as described in + the Bonding Module Options section, above). The only extra + down side to this mode is that the network device driver must + support changing the hardware address while the device is + open. + +12.1.2 Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology +------------------------------------------------- + + The choice of link monitoring may largely depend upon which +mode you choose to use. The more advanced load balancing modes do not +support the use of the ARP monitor, and are thus restricted to using +the MII monitor (which does not provide as high a level of assurance +as the ARP monitor). + + +12.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology +---------------------------------------------------- + + With multiple switches, the configuration of bonding and the +network changes dramatically. In multiple switch topologies, there is +a tradeoff between network availability and usable bandwidth. + + Below is a sample network, configured to maximize the +availability of the network: + + | | + |port3 port3| + +-----+----+ +-----+----+ + | |port2 ISL port2| | + | switch A +--------------------------+ switch B | + | | | | + +-----+----+ +-----++---+ + |port1 port1| + | +-------+ | + +-------------+ host1 +---------------+ + eth0 +-------+ eth1 + + In this configuration, there is a link between the two +switches (ISL, or inter switch link), and multiple ports connecting to +the outside world ("port3" on each switch). There is no technical +reason that this could not be extended to a third switch. + +12.2.1 Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology +---------------------------------------------------------- + + In a topology such as this, the active-backup and broadcast +modes are the only useful bonding modes; the other modes require all +links to terminate on the same peer for them to behave rationally. + +active-backup: This is generally the preferred mode, particularly if + the switches have an ISL and play together well. If the + network configuration is such that one switch is specifically + a backup switch (e.g., has lower capacity, higher cost, etc), + then the primary option can be used to insure that the + preferred link is always used when it is available. + +broadcast: This mode is really a special purpose mode, and is suitable + only for very specific needs. For example, if the two + switches are not connected (no ISL), and the networks beyond + them are totally independant. In this case, if it is + necessary for some specific one-way traffic to reach both + independent networks, then the broadcast mode may be suitable. + +12.2.2 Link Monitoring Selection for Multiple Switch Topology +------------------------------------------------------------- + + The choice of link monitoring ultimately depends upon your +switch. If the switch can reliably fail ports in response to other +failures, then either the MII or ARP monitors should work. For +example, in the above example, if the "port3" link fails at the remote +end, the MII monitor has no direct means to detect this. The ARP +monitor could be configured with a target at the remote end of port3, +thus detecting that failure without switch support. + + In general, however, in a multiple switch topology, the ARP +monitor can provide a higher level of reliability in detecting link +failures. Additionally, it should be configured with multiple targets +(at least one for each switch in the network). This will insure that, +regardless of which switch is active, the ARP monitor has a suitable +target to query. + + +12.3 Switch Behavior Issues for High Availability +------------------------------------------------- + + You may encounter issues with the timing of link up and down +reporting by the switch. + + First, when a link comes up, some switches may indicate that +the link is up (carrier available), but not pass traffic over the +interface for some period of time. This delay is typically due to +some type of autonegotiation or routing protocol, but may also occur +during switch initialization (e.g., during recovery after a switch +failure). If you find this to be a problem, specify an appropriate +value to the updelay bonding module option to delay the use of the +relevant interface(s). + + Second, some switches may "bounce" the link state one or more +times while a link is changing state. This occurs most commonly while +the switch is initializing. Again, an appropriate updelay value may +help, but note that if all links are down, then updelay is ignored +when any link becomes active (the slave closest to completing its +updelay is chosen). + + Note that when a bonding interface has no active links, the +driver will immediately reuse the first link that goes up, even if +updelay parameter was specified. If there are slave interfaces +waiting for the updelay timeout to expire, the interface that first +went into that state will be immediately reused. This reduces down +time of the network if the value of updelay has been overestimated. + + In addition to the concerns about switch timings, if your +switches take a long time to go into backup mode, it may be desirable +to not activate a backup interface immediately after a link goes down. +Failover may be delayed via the downdelay bonding module option. + +13. Hardware Specific Considerations +==================================== + + This section contains additional information for configuring +bonding on specific hardware platforms, or for interfacing bonding +with particular switches or other devices. + +13.1 IBM BladeCenter +-------------------- + + This applies to the JS20 and similar systems. + + On the JS20 blades, the bonding driver supports only +balance-rr, active-backup, balance-tlb and balance-alb modes. This is +largely due to the network topology inside the BladeCenter, detailed +below. + +JS20 network adapter information +-------------------------------- + + All JS20s come with two Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet ports +integrated on the planar. In the BladeCenter chassis, the eth0 port +of all JS20 blades is hard wired to I/O Module #1; similarly, all eth1 +ports are wired to I/O Module #2. An add-on Broadcom daughter card +can be installed on a JS20 to provide two more Gigabit Ethernet ports. +These ports, eth2 and eth3, are wired to I/O Modules 3 and 4, +respectively. + + Each I/O Module may contain either a switch or a passthrough +module (which allows ports to be directly connected to an external +switch). Some bonding modes require a specific BladeCenter internal +network topology in order to function; these are detailed below. + + Additional BladeCenter-specific networking information can be +found in two IBM Redbooks (www.ibm.com/redbooks): + +"IBM eServer BladeCenter Networking Options" +"IBM eServer BladeCenter Layer 2-7 Network Switching" + +BladeCenter networking configuration +------------------------------------ + + Because a BladeCenter can be configured in a very large number +of ways, this discussion will be confined to describing basic +configurations. + + Normally, Ethernet Switch Modules (ESM) are used in I/O +modules 1 and 2. In this configuration, the eth0 and eth1 ports of a +JS20 will be connected to different internal switches (in the +respective I/O modules). + + An optical passthru module (OPM) connects the I/O module +directly to an external switch. By using OPMs in I/O module #1 and +#2, the eth0 and eth1 interfaces of a JS20 can be redirected to the +outside world and connected to a common external switch. + + Depending upon the mix of ESM and OPM modules, the network +will appear to bonding as either a single switch topology (all OPM +modules) or as a multiple switch topology (one or more ESM modules, +zero or more OPM modules). It is also possible to connect ESM modules +together, resulting in a configuration much like the example in "High +Availability in a multiple switch topology." + +Requirements for specifc modes +------------------------------ + + The balance-rr mode requires the use of OPM modules for +devices in the bond, all connected to an common external switch. That +switch must be configured for "etherchannel" or "trunking" on the +appropriate ports, as is usual for balance-rr. + + The balance-alb and balance-tlb modes will function with +either switch modules or passthrough modules (or a mix). The only +specific requirement for these modes is that all network interfaces +must be able to reach all destinations for traffic sent over the +bonding device (i.e., the network must converge at some point outside +the BladeCenter). + + The active-backup mode has no additional requirements. + +Link monitoring issues +---------------------- + + When an Ethernet Switch Module is in place, only the ARP +monitor will reliably detect link loss to an external switch. This is +nothing unusual, but examination of the BladeCenter cabinet would +suggest that the "external" network ports are the ethernet ports for +the system, when it fact there is a switch between these "external" +ports and the devices on the JS20 system itself. The MII monitor is +only able to detect link failures between the ESM and the JS20 system. + + When a passthrough module is in place, the MII monitor does +detect failures to the "external" port, which is then directly +connected to the JS20 system. + +Other concerns +-------------- + + The Serial Over LAN link is established over the primary +ethernet (eth0) only, therefore, any loss of link to eth0 will result +in losing your SoL connection. It will not fail over with other +network traffic. + + It may be desirable to disable spanning tree on the switch +(either the internal Ethernet Switch Module, or an external switch) to +avoid fail-over delays issues when using bonding. + + +14. Frequently Asked Questions +============================== + +1. Is it SMP safe? + + Yes. The old 2.0.xx channel bonding patch was not SMP safe. +The new driver was designed to be SMP safe from the start. + +2. What type of cards will work with it? + + Any Ethernet type cards (you can even mix cards - a Intel +EtherExpress PRO/100 and a 3com 3c905b, for example). They need not +be of the same speed. + +3. How many bonding devices can I have? + + There is no limit. + +4. How many slaves can a bonding device have? + + This is limited only by the number of network interfaces Linux +supports and/or the number of network cards you can place in your +system. + +5. What happens when a slave link dies? + + If link monitoring is enabled, then the failing device will be +disabled. The active-backup mode will fail over to a backup link, and +other modes will ignore the failed link. The link will continue to be +monitored, and should it recover, it will rejoin the bond (in whatever +manner is appropriate for the mode). See the section on High +Availability for additional information. + + Link monitoring can be enabled via either the miimon or +arp_interval paramters (described in the module paramters section, +above). In general, miimon monitors the carrier state as sensed by +the underlying network device, and the arp monitor (arp_interval) +monitors connectivity to another host on the local network. + + If no link monitoring is configured, the bonding driver will +be unable to detect link failures, and will assume that all links are +always available. This will likely result in lost packets, and a +resulting degredation of performance. The precise performance loss +depends upon the bonding mode and network configuration. + +6. Can bonding be used for High Availability? + + Yes. See the section on High Availability for details. + +7. Which switches/systems does it work with? + + The full answer to this depends upon the desired mode. + + In the basic balance modes (balance-rr and balance-xor), it +works with any system that supports etherchannel (also called +trunking). Most managed switches currently available have such +support, and many unmananged switches as well. + + The advanced balance modes (balance-tlb and balance-alb) do +not have special switch requirements, but do need device drivers that +support specific features (described in the appropriate section under +module paramters, above). + + In 802.3ad mode, it works with with systems that support IEEE +802.3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation. Most managed and many unmanaged +switches currently available support 802.3ad. + + The active-backup mode should work with any Layer-II switch. + +8. Where does a bonding device get its MAC address from? + + If not explicitly configured with ifconfig, the MAC address of +the bonding device is taken from its first slave device. This MAC +address is then passed to all following slaves and remains persistent +(even if the the first slave is removed) until the bonding device is +brought down or reconfigured. + + If you wish to change the MAC address, you can set it with +ifconfig: + +# ifconfig bond0 hw ether 00:11:22:33:44:55 + + The MAC address can be also changed by bringing down/up the +device and then changing its slaves (or their order): + +# ifconfig bond0 down ; modprobe -r bonding +# ifconfig bond0 .... up +# ifenslave bond0 eth... + + This method will automatically take the address from the next +slave that is added. + + To restore your slaves' MAC addresses, you need to detach them +from the bond (`ifenslave -d bond0 eth0'). The bonding driver will +then restore the MAC addresses that the slaves had before they were +enslaved. + +15. Resources and Links +======================= + +The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest +version of the linux kernel, found on http://kernel.org + +Discussions regarding the bonding driver take place primarily on the +bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have +questions or problems, post them to the list. + +bonding-devel@lists.sourceforge.net + +https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel + +There is also a project site on sourceforge. + +http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/bonding + +Donald Becker's Ethernet Drivers and diag programs may be found at : + - http://www.scyld.com/network/ + +You will also find a lot of information regarding Ethernet, NWay, MII, +etc. at www.scyld.com. + +-- END -- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bdae2db4119c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +In order to use the Ethernet bridging functionality, you'll need the +userspace tools. These programs and documentation are available +at http://bridge.sourceforge.net. The download page is +http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/bridge. + +If you still have questions, don't hesitate to post to the mailing list +(more info http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge). + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/comx.txt b/Documentation/networking/comx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d1526eba2645 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/comx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ + + COMX drivers for the 2.2 kernel + +Originally written by: Tivadar Szemethy, <tiv@itc.hu> +Currently maintained by: Gergely Madarasz <gorgo@itc.hu> + +Last change: 21/06/1999. + +INTRODUCTION + +This document describes the software drivers and their use for the +COMX line of synchronous serial adapters for Linux version 2.2.0 and +above. +The cards are produced and sold by ITC-Pro Ltd. Budapest, Hungary +For further info contact <info@itc.hu> +or http://www.itc.hu (mostly in Hungarian). +The firmware files and software are available from ftp://ftp.itc.hu + +Currently, the drivers support the following cards and protocols: + +COMX (2x64 kbps intelligent board) +CMX (1x256 + 1x128 kbps intelligent board) +HiCOMX (2x2Mbps intelligent board) +LoCOMX (1x512 kbps passive board) +MixCOM (1x512 or 2x512kbps passive board with a hardware watchdog an + optional BRI interface and optional flashROM (1-32M)) +SliceCOM (1x2Mbps channelized E1 board) +PciCOM (X21) + +At the moment of writing this document, the (Cisco)-HDLC, LAPB, SyncPPP and +Frame Relay (DTE, rfc1294 IP encapsulation with partially implemented Q933a +LMI) protocols are available as link-level protocol. +X.25 support is being worked on. + +USAGE + +Load the comx.o module and the hardware-specific and protocol-specific +modules you'll need into the running kernel using the insmod utility. +This creates the /proc/comx directory. +See the example scripts in the 'etc' directory. + +/proc INTERFACE INTRO + +The COMX driver set has a new type of user interface based on the /proc +filesystem which eliminates the need for external user-land software doing +IOCTL calls. +Each network interface or device (i.e. those ones you configure with 'ifconfig' +and 'route' etc.) has a corresponding directory under /proc/comx. You can +dynamically create a new interface by saying 'mkdir /proc/comx/comx0' (or you +can name it whatever you want up to 8 characters long, comx[n] is just a +convention). +Generally the files contained in these directories are text files, which can +be viewed by 'cat filename' and you can write a string to such a file by +saying 'echo _string_ >filename'. This is very similar to the sysctl interface. +Don't use a text editor to edit these files, always use 'echo' (or 'cat' +where appropriate). +When you've created the comx[n] directory, two files are created automagically +in it: 'boardtype' and 'protocol'. You have to fill in these files correctly +for your board and protocol you intend to use (see the board and protocol +descriptions in this file below or the example scripts in the 'etc' directory). +After filling in these files, other files will appear in the directory for +setting the various hardware- and protocol-related informations (for example +irq and io addresses, keepalive values etc.) These files are set to default +values upon creation, so you don't necessarily have to change all of them. + +When you're ready with filling in the files in the comx[n] directory, you can +configure the corresponding network interface with the standard network +configuration utilities. If you're unable to bring the interfaces up, look up +the various kernel log files on your system, and consult the messages for +a probable reason. + +EXAMPLE + +To create the interface 'comx0' which is the first channel of a COMX card: + +insmod comx +# insmod comx-hw-comx ; insmod comx-proto-ppp (these are usually +autoloaded if you use the kernel module loader) + +mkdir /proc/comx/comx0 +echo comx >/proc/comx/comx0/boardtype +echo 0x360 >/proc/comx/comx0/io <- jumper-selectable I/O port +echo 0x0a >/proc/comx/comx0/irq <- jumper-selectable IRQ line +echo 0xd000 >/proc/comx/comx0/memaddr <- software-configurable memory + address. COMX uses 64 KB, and this + can be: 0xa000, 0xb000, 0xc000, + 0xd000, 0xe000. Avoid conflicts + with other hardware. +cat </etc/siol1.rom >/proc/comx/comx0/firmware <- the firmware for the card +echo HDLC >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol <- the data-link protocol +echo 10 >/proc/comx/comx0/keepalive <- the keepalive for the protocol +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 <- + finally configure it with ifconfig +Check its status: +cat /proc/comx/comx0/status + +If you want to use the second channel of this board: + +mkdir /proc/comx/comx1 +echo comx >/proc/comx/comx1/boardtype +echo 0x360 >/proc/comx/comx1/io +echo 10 >/proc/comx/comx1/irq +echo 0xd000 >/proc/comx/comx1/memaddr +echo 1 >/proc/comx/comx1/channel <- channels are numbered + as 0 (default) and 1 + +Now, check if the driver recognized that you're going to use the other +channel of the same adapter: + +cat /proc/comx/comx0/twin +comx1 +cat /proc/comx/comx1/twin +comx0 + +You don't have to load the firmware twice, if you use both channels of +an adapter, just write it into the channel 0's /proc firmware file. + +Default values: io 0x360 for COMX, 0x320 (HICOMX), irq 10, memaddr 0xd0000 + +THE LOCOMX HARDWARE DRIVER + +The LoCOMX driver doesn't require firmware, and it doesn't use memory either, +but it uses DMA channels 1 and 3. You can set the clock rate (if enabled by +jumpers on the board) by writing the kbps value into the file named 'clock'. +Set it to 'external' (it is the default) if you have external clock source. + +(Note: currently the LoCOMX driver does not support the internal clock) + +THE COMX, CMX AND HICOMX DRIVERS + +On the HICOMX, COMX and CMX, you have to load the firmware (it is different for +the three cards!). All these adapters can share the same memory +address (we usually use 0xd0000). On the CMX you can set the internal +clock rate (if enabled by jumpers on the small adapter boards) by writing +the kbps value into the 'clock' file. You have to do this before initializing +the card. If you use both HICOMX and CMX/COMX cards, initialize the HICOMX +first. The I/O address of the HICOMX board is not configurable by any +method available to the user: it is hardwired to 0x320, and if you have to +change it, consult ITC-Pro Ltd. + +THE MIXCOM DRIVER + +The MixCOM board doesn't require firmware, the driver communicates with +it through I/O ports. You can have three of these cards in one machine. + +THE SLICECOM DRIVER + +The SliceCOM board doesn't require firmware. You can have 4 of these cards +in one machine. The driver doesn't (yet) support shared interrupts, so +you will need a separate IRQ line for every board. +Read Documentation/networking/slicecom.txt for help on configuring +this adapter. + +THE HDLC/PPP LINE PROTOCOL DRIVER + +The HDLC/SyncPPP line protocol driver uses the kernel's built-in syncppp +driver (syncppp.o). You don't have to manually select syncppp.o when building +the kernel, the dependencies compile it in automatically. + + + + +EXAMPLE +(setting up hw parameters, see above) + +# using HDLC: +echo hdlc >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol +echo 10 >/proc/comx/comx0/keepalive <- not necessary, 10 is the default +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 + +(setting up hw parameters, see above) + +# using PPP: +echo ppp >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol +ifconfig comx0 up +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 + + +THE LAPB LINE PROTOCOL DRIVER + +For this, you'll need to configure LAPB support (See 'LAPB Data Link Driver' in +'Network options' section) into your kernel (thanks to Jonathan Naylor for his +excellent implementation). +comx-proto-lapb.o provides the following files in the appropriate directory +(the default values in parens): t1 (5), t2 (1), n2 (20), mode (DTE, STD) and +window (7). Agree with the administrator of your peer router on these +settings (most people use defaults, but you have to know if you are DTE or +DCE). + +EXAMPLE + +(setting up hw parameters, see above) +echo lapb >/proc/comx/comx0/protocol +echo dce >/proc/comx/comx0/mode <- DCE interface in this example +ifconfig comx0 1.2.3.4 pointopoint 5.6.7.8 netmask 255.255.255.255 + + +THE FRAME RELAY PROTOCOL DRIVER + +You DON'T need any other frame relay related modules from the kernel to use +COMX-Frame Relay. This protocol is a bit more complicated than the others, +because it allows to use 'subinterfaces' or DLCIs within one physical device. +First you have to create the 'master' device (the actual physical interface) +as you would do for other protocols. Specify 'frad' as protocol type. +Now you can bring this interface up by saying 'ifconfig comx0 up' (or whatever +you've named the interface). Do not assign any IP address to this interface +and do not set any routes through it. +Then, set up your DLCIs the following way: create a comx interface for each +DLCI you intend to use (with mkdir), and write 'dlci' to the 'boardtype' file, +and 'ietf-ip' to the 'protocol' file. Currently, the only supported +encapsulation type is this (also called as RFC1294/1490 IP encapsulation). +Write the DLCI number to the 'dlci' file, and write the name of the physical +COMX device to the file called 'master'. +Now you can assign an IP address to this interface and set routes using it. +See the example file for further info and example config script. +Notes: this driver implements a DTE interface with partially implemented +Q933a LMI. +You can find an extensively commented example in the 'etc' directory. + +FURTHER /proc FILES + +boardtype: +Type of the hardware. Valid values are: + 'comx', 'hicomx', 'locomx', 'cmx', 'slicecom'. + +protocol: +Data-link protocol on this channel. Can be: HDLC, LAPB, PPP, FRAD + +status: +You can read the channel's actual status from the 'status' file, for example +'cat /proc/comx/comx3/status'. + +lineup_delay: +Interpreted in seconds (default is 1). Used to avoid line jitter: the system +will consider the line status 'UP' only if it is up for at least this number +of seconds. + +debug: +You can set various debug options through this file. Valid options are: +'comx_events', 'comx_tx', 'comx_rx', 'hw_events', 'hw_tx', 'hw_rx'. +You can enable a debug options by writing its name prepended by a '+' into +the debug file, for example 'echo +comx_rx >comx0/debug'. +Disabling an option happens similarly, use the '-' prefix +(e.g. 'echo -hw_rx >debug'). +Debug results can be read from the debug file, for example: +tail -f /proc/comx/comx2/debug + + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cops.txt b/Documentation/networking/cops.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3e344b448e07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/cops.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +Text File for the COPS LocalTalk Linux driver (cops.c). + By Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org> + +This driver has two modes and they are: Dayna mode and Tangent mode. +Each mode corresponds with the type of card. It has been found +that there are 2 main types of cards and all other cards are +the same and just have different names or only have minor differences +such as more IO ports. As this driver is tested it will +become more clear exactly what cards are supported. + +Right now these cards are known to work with the COPS driver. The +LT-200 cards work in a somewhat more limited capacity than the +DL200 cards, which work very well and are in use by many people. + +TANGENT driver mode: + Tangent ATB-II, Novell NL-1000, Daystar Digital LT-200 +DAYNA driver mode: + Dayna DL2000/DaynaTalk PC (Half Length), COPS LT-95, + Farallon PhoneNET PC III, Farallon PhoneNET PC II +Other cards possibly supported mode unknown though: + Dayna DL2000 (Full length) + +The COPS driver defaults to using Dayna mode. To change the driver's +mode if you built a driver with dual support use board_type=1 or +board_type=2 for Dayna or Tangent with insmod. + +** Operation/loading of the driver. +Use modprobe like this: /sbin/modprobe cops.o (IO #) (IRQ #) +If you do not specify any options the driver will try and use the IO = 0x240, +IRQ = 5. As of right now I would only use IRQ 5 for the card, if autoprobing. + +To load multiple COPS driver Localtalk cards you can do one of the following. + +insmod cops io=0x240 irq=5 +insmod -o cops2 cops io=0x260 irq=3 + +Or in lilo.conf put something like this: + append="ether=5,0x240,lt0 ether=3,0x260,lt1" + +Then bring up the interface with ifconfig. It will look something like this: +lt0 Link encap:UNSPEC HWaddr 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-F7-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00 + inet addr:192.168.1.2 Bcast:192.168.1.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 + UP BROADCAST RUNNING NOARP MULTICAST MTU:600 Metric:1 + RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 + TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 coll:0 + +** Netatalk Configuration +You will need to configure atalkd with something like the following to make +it work with the cops.c driver. + +* For single LTalk card use. +dummy -seed -phase 2 -net 2000 -addr 2000.10 -zone "1033" +lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033" + +* For multiple cards, Ethernet and LocalTalk. +eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.20 -zone "1033" +lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033" + +* For multiple LocalTalk cards, and an Ethernet card. +* Order seems to matter here, Ethernet last. +lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.10 -zone "LocalTalk1" +lt1 -seed -phase 1 -net 2000 -addr 2000.20 -zone "LocalTalk2" +eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.30 -zone "EtherTalk" diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..188beb7d6a17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/cs89x0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ + +NOTE +---- + +This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version +has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au> + +Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as +described below. In general, you should use the driver version which +comes with your Linux distribution. + + + +CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS +Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 <kernel 2.3.48> +=============================================================================== + + +TABLE OF CONTENTS + +1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS + 1.1 Product Overview + 1.2 Driver Description + 1.2.1 Driver Name + 1.2.2 File in the Driver Package + 1.3 System Requirements + 1.4 Licensing Information + +2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION + 2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration + 2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration + +3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE + +4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER + 4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module + 4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode + 4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA + 4.4 Compiling the Driver into the Kernel + +5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING + 5.1 Known Defects and Limitations + 5.2 Testing the Adapter + 5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test + 5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test + 5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs + 5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts + +6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT + 6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support + 6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support + 6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version + 6.4 Current maintainer + 6.5 Kernel boot parameters + + +1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS +=============================================================================== + + +1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW + +The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow +IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus +computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks. The adapters are designed for operation +in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in +10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5 +or fiber networks). + +CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional +features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition. As +such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of +adapters. Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on +configuring both types of adapters. + + +1.2 DRIVER DESCRIPTION + +The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux +v2.3.48 or greater kernel. It can be compiled directly into the kernel +or loaded at run-time as a device driver module. + +1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0 + +1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive: + +The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include: + + readme.txt - this file + build - batch file to compile cs89x0.c. + cs89x0.c - driver C code + cs89x0.h - driver header file + cs89x0.o - pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel) + config/Config.in - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Makefile - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Space.c - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + + + +1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS + +The following hardware is required: + + * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter + + * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with: + * An 80386 or higher processor + * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h + * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920). + + * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network + topology. + +The following software is required: + +* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher + + * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based) + + * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel) + + * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel + or a module) + + + +1.4 LICENSING INFORMATION + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation, version 1. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +more details. + +For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + + +2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION +=============================================================================== + +Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters +stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup +Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM. + +When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's +configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings +or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based +adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE. + +Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install +and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility before installation in the target LINUX system. (Not required if +installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.) + + +2.1 CS8900-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION + +CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured +with the following "default" settings: + + Operation Mode: Memory Mode + IRQ: 10 + Base I/O Address: 300 + Memory Base Address: D0000 + Optimization: DOS Client + Transmission Mode: Half-duplex + BootProm: None + Media Type: Autodetect (3-media cards) or + 10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter) + +You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with +another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + +2.2 CS8920-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION + +CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug +and Play (PnP) enabled. However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT +support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and +run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the +adapter before installation in the target Linux system. Failure to do +this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to +communicate with the adapter. + + + **************************************************************** + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS: * + * * + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT. * + * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST * + * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND * + * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER. * + **************************************************************** + + + + +3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE +=============================================================================== + +If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module +with the 'modprobe' command. Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can +be specified as command-line arguments to the load command. This facility +provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface +configuration when an EEPROM is not used. + +Example: + + insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui + +This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base +address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection. The following +configuration options are available on the command line: + +* io=### - specify IO address (200h-360h) +* irq=## - specify interrupt level +* use_dma=1 - Enable DMA +* dma=# - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support + Rx DMA only) +* dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K. Default value is set to 16. +* media=rj45 - specify media type + or media=bnc + or media=aui + or medai=auto +* duplex=full - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex + or duplex=half + or duplex=auto +* debug=# - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled + for debugging) + +NOTES: + +a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter + will override the corresponding configuration value stored in + EEPROM. + +b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line. + +c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid + writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0 + card at the written addresses. This could cause problems + with device probing. To avoid this behaviour, add one + to the `io=' module parameter. This doesn't actually change + the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver + topartially initialise the hardware before trying to + identify the card. This could be dangerous if you are + not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address. + + For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300, + specify an IO address of 0x301. + +d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920. + +e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is + not present is: + + io + irq + media type (no autodetect) + +f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values + used with no EEPROM or command-line argument). + + * DMA Burst = enabled + * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled + * UseSA = enabled + * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line + * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line + * Use reset defaults for other config parameters + * dma_mode = 0 + +g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address. + +h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load + modules. This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to + determine configuration information which is passed to a driver + module when it is loaded. All the configuration options which are + described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules. + + For example: + + > cat /etc/conf.modules + ... + alias eth0 cs89x0 + options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1 + ... + + In this example we are telling the module system that the + ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver. We + are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma' + arguments to the driver when it is loaded. + +i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or + 7. You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work. + +j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only. DMA mode is + significantly more efficient. Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine + with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA + mode. With DMA this is reduced to 45%. + +k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play + support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card + with the command + + cat /proc/isapnp + +l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data + corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock. + +m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel + (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by + ISA bus probing. The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined + from the card's EEPROM. + +n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA + mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option + 'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7). + + Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line: + + LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5 + + or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf: + + image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48 + append="cs89x0_dma=5" + label=linux + root=/dev/hda5 + read-only + + The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode. + (64k mode is not available). + + +4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER +=============================================================================== + +The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into +a loadable device driver module. + + +4.1 COMPILING THE DRIVER AS A LOADABLE MODULE + +To compile the driver into a loadable module, use the following command +(single command line, without quotes): + +"gcc -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/include -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall +-Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer -DMODULE -DCONFIG_MODVERSIONS +-c cs89x0.c" + +4.2 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT MEMORY MODE + +Support for memory mode was not carried over into the 2.3 series kernels. + +4.3 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT Rx DMA + +The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel +series. DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver. It is +enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option. + +4.4 COMPILING THE DRIVER INTO THE KERNEL + +If your Linux distribution already has support for the cs89x0 driver +then simply copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net +directory to replace the original ones and run the make utility to +rebuild the kernel. See Step 3 for rebuilding the kernel. + +If your Linux does not include the cs89x0 driver, you need to edit three +configuration files, copy the source file to the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net +directory, and then run the make utility to rebuild the kernel. + +1. Edit the following configuration files by adding the statements as +indicated. (When possible, try to locate the added text to the section of the +file containing similar statements). + + +a.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Config.in, add: + +tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0 + +Example: + + if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then + tristate 'ICL EtherTeam 16i/32 support' CONFIG_ETH16I + fi + + tristate 'CS89x0 support' CONFIG_CS89x0 + + tristate 'NE2000/NE1000 support' CONFIG_NE2000 + if [ "$CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL" = "y" ]; then + tristate 'NI5210 support' CONFIG_NI52 + + +b.) In /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/Makefile, add the following lines: + +ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),y) +L_OBJS += cs89x0.o +else + ifeq ($(CONFIG_CS89x0),m) + M_OBJS += cs89x0.o + endif +endif + + +c.) In /linux/drivers/net/Space.c file, add the line: + +extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev); + + +Example: + + extern int ultra_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int wd_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int el2_probe(struct device *dev); + + extern int cs89x0_probe(struct device *dev); + + extern int ne_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int hp_probe(struct device *dev); + extern int hp_plus_probe(struct device *dev); + + +Also add: + + #ifdef CONFIG_CS89x0 + { cs89x0_probe,0 }, + #endif + + +2.) Copy the driver source files (cs89x0.c and cs89x0.h) +into the /usr/src/linux/drivers/net directory. + + +3.) Go to /usr/src/linux directory and run 'make config' followed by 'make' +(or make bzImage) to rebuild the kernel. + +4.) Use the DOS 'setup' utility to disable plug and play on the NIC. + + +5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING +=============================================================================== + +5.1 KNOWN DEFECTS and LIMITATIONS + +Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of +known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds. + + +5.2 TESTING THE ADAPTER + +Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of +the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the +adapter and its network connection. Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to +test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have +assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the +adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a +CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility). + + NOTE: The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a + DOS-only operating system environment. DO NOT run the diagnostics + from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT, + OS/2, or other operating system. + +To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter: + + 1.) Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 2.) The adapter's current configuration is displayed. Hit the ENTER key to + get to the main menu. + + 4.) Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu. + * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality. + * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling. + + +5.2.1 DIAGNOSTIC SELF-TEST + +The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as +its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources +assigned during hardware configuration. The following tests are performed: + + * IO Register Read/Write Test + The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be + accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct. + + * Shared Memory Test + The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory + mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict + with other devices in the system. + + * Interrupt Test + The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ + signal. + + * EEPROM Test + The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read. + + * Chip RAM Test + The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is + working properly. + + * Internal Loop-back Test + The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and + receiver are operating properly. If this test fails, make sure the + adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for + example). + + * Boot PROM Test + The Boot PROM test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read. + Failure indicates the Boot PROM was not successfully read due to a + hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address + assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the + Boot PROM option.) + +Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with +another device on the ISA bus. In this case, you should use the Manual Setup +option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system +resource that failed. + + +5.2.2 DIAGNOSTIC NETWORK TEST + +The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by +transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs +on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run +between two nodes across a router.) + +This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter +installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running. The first PC is +configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator. +Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which +returns the frames to the Initiator. + +The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the +Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and +transmitted OK or in error. The test can be terminated anytime by the user at +either PC. + +To setup the Diagnostic Network Test: + + 1.) Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network + connection to act as the Responder. Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility + and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main + menu. Hit ENTER to start the Responder. + + 2.) Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and + start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 3.) From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'. + Hit ENTER to start the test. + +You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder +to continue running. In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test +them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the +Responder. + + + +5.3 USING THE ADAPTER'S LEDs + +The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board +located near the 10Base-T connector. + +Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T +connection. (Only applies to 10Base-T. The green LED has no significance for +a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.) + +TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or +receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.) + + +5.4 RESOLVING I/O CONFLICTS + +An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO +address, memory address or IRQ). You can usually detect an IO conflict in one +of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter: + + 1.) The system does not boot properly (or at all). + + 2.) The driver can not communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter + not found" error message. + + 3.) You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load. + + 4.) If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver + reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a + memory address conflict. + +If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a +diagnostic self-test. Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the +self-test. If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the +resource in conflict. Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO +conflicts. + +In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove +the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. Once reinstalled in the target system, run the +diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts +before loading the driver again. + +When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system +resource usage as indicated in the tables below. + +I/O Address Device IRQ Device +----------- -------- --- -------- + 200-20F Game I/O adapter 3 COM2, Bus Mouse + 230-23F Bus Mouse 4 COM1 + 270-27F LPT3: third parallel port 5 LPT2 + 2F0-2FF COM2: second serial port 6 Floppy Disk controller + 320-32F Fixed disk controller 7 LPT1 + 8 Real-time Clock + 9 EGA/VGA display adapter + 12 Mouse (PS/2) +Memory Address Device 13 Math Coprocessor +-------------- --------------------- 14 Hard Disk controller +A000-BFFF EGA Graphics Adpater +A000-C7FF VGA Graphics Adpater +B000-BFFF Mono Graphics Adapter +B800-BFFF Color Graphics Adapter +E000-FFFF AT BIOS + + + + +6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT +=============================================================================== + +6.1 CONTACTING CIRRUS LOGIC'S TECHNICAL SUPPORT + +Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at: + +Telephone :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada) + :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada) +Fax :(512) 912-3871 +Email :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com +WWW :http://www.cirrus.com + + +6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED BEFORE CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT + +Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as +Much of the following information as possible. + +1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.) + +2.) Adapter configuration + + * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel + * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only) + * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type). + +3.) PC System's Configuration + + * Plug and Play system (yes/no) + * BIOS (make and version) + * System make and model + * CPU (type and speed) + * System RAM + * SCSI Adapter + +4.) Software + + * CS89XX driver and version + * Your network operating system and version + * Your system's OS version + * Version of all protocol support files + +5.) Any Error Message displayed. + + + +6.3 OBTAINING THE LATEST DRIVER VERSION + +You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's +Web site. You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email: +ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic +software-update notification. + +Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the +the latest drivers and technical publications. + + +6.4 Current maintainer + +In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew +Morton <akpm@zip.com.au> + +6.5 Kernel module parameters + +For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot +parameter `cs89x0_media=' has been implemented. Usage is: + + cs89x0_media=rj45 or + cs89x0_media=aui or + cs89x0_media=bnc + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt b/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c8e4ca9b2c3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/de4x5.txt @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + Originally, this driver was written for the Digital Equipment + Corporation series of EtherWORKS Ethernet cards: + + DE425 TP/COAX EISA + DE434 TP PCI + DE435 TP/COAX/AUI PCI + DE450 TP/COAX/AUI PCI + DE500 10/100 PCI Fasternet + + but it will now attempt to support all cards which conform to the + Digital Semiconductor SROM Specification. The driver currently + recognises the following chips: + + DC21040 (no SROM) + DC21041[A] + DC21140[A] + DC21142 + DC21143 + + So far the driver is known to work with the following cards: + + KINGSTON + Linksys + ZNYX342 + SMC8432 + SMC9332 (w/new SROM) + ZNYX31[45] + ZNYX346 10/100 4 port (can act as a 10/100 bridge!) + + The driver has been tested on a relatively busy network using the DE425, + DE434, DE435 and DE500 cards and benchmarked with 'ttcp': it transferred + 16M of data to a DECstation 5000/200 as follows: + + TCP UDP + TX RX TX RX + DE425 1030k 997k 1170k 1128k + DE434 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k + DE435 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k + DE500 1063k 998k 1170k 1125k in 10Mb/s mode + + All values are typical (in kBytes/sec) from a sample of 4 for each + measurement. Their error is +/-20k on a quiet (private) network and also + depend on what load the CPU has. + + ========================================================================= + + The ability to load this driver as a loadable module has been included + and used extensively during the driver development (to save those long + reboot sequences). Loadable module support under PCI and EISA has been + achieved by letting the driver autoprobe as if it were compiled into the + kernel. Do make sure you're not sharing interrupts with anything that + cannot accommodate interrupt sharing! + + To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things: + + 0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system. + 1) copy de4x5.c from the /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite + temporary directory. + 2) for fixed autoprobes (not recommended), edit the source code near + line 5594 to reflect the I/O address you're using, or assign these when + loading by: + + insmod de4x5 io=0xghh where g = bus number + hh = device number + + NB: autoprobing for modules is now supported by default. You may just + use: + + insmod de4x5 + + to load all available boards. For a specific board, still use + the 'io=?' above. + 3) compile de4x5.c, but include -DMODULE in the command line to ensure + that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code). + 4) if you are wanting to add a new card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a + kernel with the de4x5 configuration turned off and reboot. + 5) insmod de4x5 [io=0xghh] + 6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface(s) manually + (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). + 7) enjoy! + + To unload a module, turn off the associated interface(s) + 'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod de4x5'. + + Automedia detection is included so that in principle you can disconnect + from, e.g. TP, reconnect to BNC and things will still work (after a + pause whilst the driver figures out where its media went). My tests + using ping showed that it appears to work.... + + By default, the driver will now autodetect any DECchip based card. + Should you have a need to restrict the driver to DIGITAL only cards, you + can compile with a DEC_ONLY define, or if loading as a module, use the + 'dec_only=1' parameter. + + I've changed the timing routines to use the kernel timer and scheduling + functions so that the hangs and other assorted problems that occurred + while autosensing the media should be gone. A bonus for the DC21040 + auto media sense algorithm is that it can now use one that is more in + line with the rest (the DC21040 chip doesn't have a hardware timer). + The downside is the 1 'jiffies' (10ms) resolution. + + IEEE 802.3u MII interface code has been added in anticipation that some + products may use it in the future. + + The SMC9332 card has a non-compliant SROM which needs fixing - I have + patched this driver to detect it because the SROM format used complies + to a previous DEC-STD format. + + I have removed the buffer copies needed for receive on Intels. I cannot + remove them for Alphas since the Tulip hardware only does longword + aligned DMA transfers and the Alphas get alignment traps with non + longword aligned data copies (which makes them really slow). No comment. + + I have added SROM decoding routines to make this driver work with any + card that supports the Digital Semiconductor SROM spec. This will help + all cards running the dc2114x series chips in particular. Cards using + the dc2104x chips should run correctly with the basic driver. I'm in + debt to <mjacob@feral.com> for the testing and feedback that helped get + this feature working. So far we have tested KINGSTON, SMC8432, SMC9332 + (with the latest SROM complying with the SROM spec V3: their first was + broken), ZNYX342 and LinkSys. ZNYX314 (dual 21041 MAC) and ZNYX 315 + (quad 21041 MAC) cards also appear to work despite their incorrectly + wired IRQs. + + I have added a temporary fix for interrupt problems when some SCSI cards + share the same interrupt as the DECchip based cards. The problem occurs + because the SCSI card wants to grab the interrupt as a fast interrupt + (runs the service routine with interrupts turned off) vs. this card + which really needs to run the service routine with interrupts turned on. + This driver will now add the interrupt service routine as a fast + interrupt if it is bounced from the slow interrupt. THIS IS NOT A + RECOMMENDED WAY TO RUN THE DRIVER and has been done for a limited time + until people sort out their compatibility issues and the kernel + interrupt service code is fixed. YOU SHOULD SEPARATE OUT THE FAST + INTERRUPT CARDS FROM THE SLOW INTERRUPT CARDS to ensure that they do not + run on the same interrupt. PCMCIA/CardBus is another can of worms... + + Finally, I think I have really fixed the module loading problem with + more than one DECchip based card. As a side effect, I don't mess with + the device structure any more which means that if more than 1 card in + 2.0.x is installed (4 in 2.1.x), the user will have to edit + linux/drivers/net/Space.c to make room for them. Hence, module loading + is the preferred way to use this driver, since it doesn't have this + limitation. + + Where SROM media detection is used and full duplex is specified in the + SROM, the feature is ignored unless lp->params.fdx is set at compile + time OR during a module load (insmod de4x5 args='eth??:fdx' [see + below]). This is because there is no way to automatically detect full + duplex links except through autonegotiation. When I include the + autonegotiation feature in the SROM autoconf code, this detection will + occur automatically for that case. + + Command line arguments are now allowed, similar to passing arguments + through LILO. This will allow a per adapter board set up of full duplex + and media. The only lexical constraints are: the board name (dev->name) + appears in the list before its parameters. The list of parameters ends + either at the end of the parameter list or with another board name. The + following parameters are allowed: + + fdx for full duplex + autosense to set the media/speed; with the following + sub-parameters: + TP, TP_NW, BNC, AUI, BNC_AUI, 100Mb, 10Mb, AUTO + + Case sensitivity is important for the sub-parameters. They *must* be + upper case. Examples: + + insmod de4x5 args='eth1:fdx autosense=BNC eth0:autosense=100Mb'. + + For a compiled in driver, in linux/drivers/net/CONFIG, place e.g. + DE4X5_OPTS = -DDE4X5_PARM='"eth0:fdx autosense=AUI eth2:autosense=TP"' + + Yes, I know full duplex isn't permissible on BNC or AUI; they're just + examples. By default, full duplex is turned off and AUTO is the default + autosense setting. In reality, I expect only the full duplex option to + be used. Note the use of single quotes in the two examples above and the + lack of commas to separate items. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c6bd25f5d61d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/decnet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ + Linux DECnet Networking Layer Information + =========================================== + +1) Other documentation.... + + o Project Home Pages + http://www.chygwyn.com/DECnet/ - Kernel info + http://linux-decnet.sourceforge.net/ - Userland tools + http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/linux-decnet/ - Status page + +2) Configuring the kernel + +Be sure to turn on the following options: + + CONFIG_DECNET (obviously) + CONFIG_PROC_FS (to see what's going on) + CONFIG_SYSCTL (for easy configuration) + +if you want to try out router support (not properly debugged yet) +you'll need the following options as well... + + CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTER (to be able to add/delete routes) + CONFIG_NETFILTER (will be required for the DECnet routing daemon) + + CONFIG_DECNET_ROUTE_FWMARK is optional + +Don't turn on SIOCGIFCONF support for DECnet unless you are really sure +that you need it, in general you won't and it can cause ifconfig to +malfunction. + +Run time configuration has changed slightly from the 2.4 system. If you +want to configure an endnode, then the simplified procedure is as follows: + + o Set the MAC address on your ethernet card before starting _any_ other + network protocols. + +As soon as your network card is brought into the UP state, DECnet should +start working. If you need something more complicated or are unsure how +to set the MAC address, see the next section. Also all configurations which +worked with 2.4 will work under 2.5 with no change. + +3) Command line options + +You can set a DECnet address on the kernel command line for compatibility +with the 2.4 configuration procedure, but in general it's not needed any more. +If you do st a DECnet address on the command line, it has only one purpose +which is that its added to the addresses on the loopback device. + +With 2.4 kernels, DECnet would only recognise addresses as local if they +were added to the loopback device. In 2.5, any local interface address +can be used to loop back to the local machine. Of course this does not +prevent you adding further addresses to the loopback device if you +want to. + +N.B. Since the address list of an interface determines the addresses for +which "hello" messages are sent, if you don't set an address on the loopback +interface then you won't see any entries in /proc/net/neigh for the local +host until such time as you start a connection. This doesn't affect the +operation of the local communications in any other way though. + +The kernel command line takes options looking like the following: + + decnet=1,2 + +the two numbers are the node address 1,2 = 1.2 For 2.2.xx kernels +and early 2.3.xx kernels, you must use a comma when specifying the +DECnet address like this. For more recent 2.3.xx kernels, you may +use almost any character except space, although a `.` would be the most +obvious choice :-) + +There used to be a third number specifying the node type. This option +has gone away in favour of a per interface node type. This is now set +using /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf/<dev>/forwarding. This file can be +set with a single digit, 0=EndNode, 1=L1 Router and 2=L2 Router. + +There are also equivalent options for modules. The node address can +also be set through the /proc/sys/net/decnet/ files, as can other system +parameters. + +Currently the only supported devices are ethernet and ip_gre. The +ethernet address of your ethernet card has to be set according to the DECnet +address of the node in order for it to be autoconfigured (and then appear in +/proc/net/decnet_dev). There is a utility available at the above +FTP sites called dn2ethaddr which can compute the correct ethernet +address to use. The address can be set by ifconfig either before at +at the time the device is brought up. If you are using RedHat you can +add the line: + + MACADDR=AA:00:04:00:03:04 + +or something similar, to /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0 or +wherever your network card's configuration lives. Setting the MAC address +of your ethernet card to an address starting with "hi-ord" will cause a +DECnet address which matches to be added to the interface (which you can +verify with iproute2). + +The default device for routing can be set through the /proc filesystem +by setting /proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device to the +device you want DECnet to route packets out of when no specific route +is available. Usually this will be eth0, for example: + + echo -n "eth0" >/proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device + +If you don't set the default device, then it will default to the first +ethernet card which has been autoconfigured as described above. You can +confirm that by looking in the default_device file of course. + +There is a list of what the other files under /proc/sys/net/decnet/ do +on the kernel patch web site (shown above). + +4) Run time kernel configuration + +This is either done through the sysctl/proc interface (see the kernel web +pages for details on what the various options do) or through the iproute2 +package in the same way as IPv4/6 configuration is performed. + +Documentation for iproute2 is included with the package, although there is +as yet no specific section on DECnet, most of the features apply to both +IP and DECnet, albeit with DECnet addresses instead of IP addresses and +a reduced functionality. + +If you want to configure a DECnet router you'll need the iproute2 package +since its the _only_ way to add and delete routes currently. Eventually +there will be a routing daemon to send and receive routing messages for +each interface and update the kernel routing tables accordingly. The +routing daemon will use netfilter to listen to routing packets, and +rtnetlink to update the kernels routing tables. + +The DECnet raw socket layer has been removed since it was there purely +for use by the routing daemon which will now use netfilter (a much cleaner +and more generic solution) instead. + +5) How can I tell if its working ? + +Here is a quick guide of what to look for in order to know if your DECnet +kernel subsystem is working. + + - Is the node address set (see /proc/sys/net/decnet/node_address) + - Is the node of the correct type + (see /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf/<dev>/forwarding) + - Is the Ethernet MAC address of each Ethernet card set to match + the DECnet address. If in doubt use the dn2ethaddr utility available + at the ftp archive. + - If the previous two steps are satisfied, and the Ethernet card is up, + you should find that it is listed in /proc/net/decnet_dev and also + that it appears as a directory in /proc/sys/net/decnet/conf/. The + loopback device (lo) should also appear and is required to communicate + within a node. + - If you have any DECnet routers on your network, they should appear + in /proc/net/decnet_neigh, otherwise this file will only contain the + entry for the node itself (if it doesn't check to see if lo is up). + - If you want to send to any node which is not listed in the + /proc/net/decnet_neigh file, you'll need to set the default device + to point to an Ethernet card with connection to a router. This is + again done with the /proc/sys/net/decnet/default_device file. + - Try starting a simple server and client, like the dnping/dnmirror + over the loopback interface. With luck they should communicate. + For this step and those after, you'll need the DECnet library + which can be obtained from the above ftp sites as well as the + actual utilities themselves. + - If this seems to work, then try talking to a node on your local + network, and see if you can obtain the same results. + - At this point you are on your own... :-) + +6) How to send a bug report + +If you've found a bug and want to report it, then there are several things +you can do to help me work out exactly what it is that is wrong. Useful +information (_most_ of which _is_ _essential_) includes: + + - What kernel version are you running ? + - What version of the patch are you running ? + - How far though the above set of tests can you get ? + - What is in the /proc/decnet* files and /proc/sys/net/decnet/* files ? + - Which services are you running ? + - Which client caused the problem ? + - How much data was being transferred ? + - Was the network congested ? + - If there was a kernel panic, please run the output through ksymoops + before sending it to me, otherwise its _useless_. + - How can the problem be reproduced ? + - Can you use tcpdump to get a trace ? (N.B. Most (all?) versions of + tcpdump don't understand how to dump DECnet properly, so including + the hex listing of the packet contents is _essential_, usually the -x flag. + You may also need to increase the length grabbed with the -s flag. The + -e flag also provides very useful information (ethernet MAC addresses)) + +7) MAC FAQ + +A quick FAQ on ethernet MAC addresses to explain how Linux and DECnet +interact and how to get the best performance from your hardware. + +Ethernet cards are designed to normally only pass received network frames +to a host computer when they are addressed to it, or to the broadcast address. + +Linux has an interface which allows the setting of extra addresses for +an ethernet card to listen to. If the ethernet card supports it, the +filtering operation will be done in hardware, if not the extra unwanted packets +received will be discarded by the host computer. In the latter case, +significant processor time and bus bandwidth can be used up on a busy +network (see the NAPI documentation for a longer explanation of these +effects). + +DECnet makes use of this interface to allow running DECnet on an ethernet +card which has already been configured using TCP/IP (presumably using the +built in MAC address of the card, as usual) and/or to allow multiple DECnet +addresses on each physical interface. If you do this, be aware that if your +ethernet card doesn't support perfect hashing in its MAC address filter +then your computer will be doing more work than required. Some cards +will simply set themselves into promiscuous mode in order to receive +packets from the DECnet specified addresses. So if you have one of these +cards its better to set the MAC address of the card as described above +to gain the best efficiency. Better still is to use a card which supports +NAPI as well. + + +8) Mailing list + +If you are keen to get involved in development, or want to ask questions +about configuration, or even just report bugs, then there is a mailing +list that you can join, details are at: + +http://sourceforge.net/mail/?group_id=4993 + +9) Legal Info + +The Linux DECnet project team have placed their code under the GPL. The +software is provided "as is" and without warranty express or implied. +DECnet is a trademark of Compaq. This software is not a product of +Compaq. We acknowledge the help of people at Compaq in providing extra +documentation above and beyond what was previously publicly available. + +Steve Whitehouse <SteveW@ACM.org> + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/depca.txt b/Documentation/networking/depca.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..24c6b26e5658 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/depca.txt @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + +DE10x +===== + +Memory Addresses: + + SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 +64K on on on on d0000 dbfff + off on on on c0000 cbfff + off off on on e0000 ebfff + +32K on on off on d8000 dbfff + off on off on c8000 cbfff + off off off on e8000 ebfff + +DBR ROM on on dc000 dffff + off on cc000 cffff + off off ec000 effff + +Note that the 2K mode is set by SW3/SW4 on/off or off/off. Address +assignment is through the RBSA register. + +I/O Address: + SW5 +0x300 on +0x200 off + +Remote Boot: + SW6 +Disable on +Enable off + +Remote Boot Timeout: + SW7 +2.5min on +30s off + +IRQ: + SW8 SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12 +2 on off off off off +3 off on off off off +4 off off on off off +5 off off off on off +7 off off off off on + +DE20x +===== + +Memory Size: + + SW3 SW4 +64K on on +32K off on +2K on off +2K off off + +Start Addresses: + + SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 +64K on on on on c0000 cffff + on off on on d0000 dffff + off on on on e0000 effff + +32K on on off off c8000 cffff + on off off off d8000 dffff + off on off off e8000 effff + +Illegal off off - - - - + +I/O Address: + SW5 +0x300 on +0x200 off + +Remote Boot: + SW6 +Disable on +Enable off + +Remote Boot Timeout: + SW7 +2.5min on +30s off + +IRQ: + SW8 SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12 +5 on off off off off +9 off on off off off +10 off off on off off +11 off off off on off +15 off off off off on + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt b/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1aa1bb3f94ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + The Digi International RightSwitch SE-X (dgrs) Device Driver + +This is a Linux driver for the Digi International RightSwitch SE-X +EISA and PCI boards. These are 4 (EISA) or 6 (PCI) port Ethernet +switches and a NIC combined into a single board. This driver can +be compiled into the kernel statically or as a loadable module. + +There is also a companion management tool, called "xrightswitch". +The management tool lets you watch the performance graphically, +as well as set the SNMP agent IP and IPX addresses, IEEE Spanning +Tree, and Aging time. These can also be set from the command line +when the driver is loaded. The driver command line options are: + + debug=NNN Debug printing level + dma=0/1 Disable/Enable DMA on PCI card + spantree=0/1 Disable/Enable IEEE spanning tree + hashexpire=NNN Change address aging time (default 300 seconds) + ipaddr=A,B,C,D Set SNMP agent IP address i.e. 199,86,8,221 + iptrap=A,B,C,D Set SNMP agent IP trap address i.e. 199,86,8,221 + ipxnet=NNN Set SNMP agent IPX network number + nicmode=0/1 Disable/Enable multiple NIC mode + +There is also a tool for setting up input and output packet filters +on each port, called "dgrsfilt". + +Both the management tool and the filtering tool are available +separately from the following FTP site: + + ftp://ftp.dgii.com/drivers/rightswitch/linux/ + +When nicmode=1, the board and driver operate as 4 or 6 individual +NIC ports (eth0...eth5) instead of as a switch. All switching +functions are disabled. In the future, the board firmware may include +a routing cache when in this mode. + +Copyright 1995-1996 Digi International Inc. + +This software may be used and distributed according to the terms +of the GNU General Public License, incorporated herein by reference. + +For information on purchasing a RightSwitch SE-4 or SE-6 +board, please contact Digi's sales department at 1-612-912-3444 +or 1-800-DIGIBRD. Outside the U.S., please check our Web page at: + + http://www.dgii.com + +for sales offices worldwide. Tech support is also available through +the channels listed on the Web site, although as long as I am +employed on networking products at Digi I will be happy to provide +any bug fixes that may be needed. + +-Rick Richardson, rick@dgii.com diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d460492037ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/dl2k.txt @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ + + D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation + for Linux + May 23, 2002 + +Contents +======== + - Compatibility List + - Quick Install + - Compiling the Driver + - Installing the Driver + - Option parameter + - Configuration Script Sample + - Troubleshooting + + +Compatibility List +================= +Adapter Support: + +D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. + + +The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it +on the environments below. + + . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10) + + +Quick Install +============= +Install linux driver as following command: + +1. make all +2. insmod dl2k.ko +3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0 + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\ ^^^^^^^^\ + IP NETMASK +Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by +"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step. + +4. cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net +5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.conf: + alias eth0 dl2k +6. Run "netconfig" or "netconf" to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0 + located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually. + [see - Configuration Script Sample] +7. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time. + +Compiling the Driver +==================== + In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules. +The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver +can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged. +The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module. +In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the +source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides +better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or +kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation. + +The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and +Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler, +the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux +Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command +to compile and link the driver: + +CD-ROM drive +------------ + +[root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom +[root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom +[root@XXX /] cd root +[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k +[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz +[root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Floppy disc drive +----------------- + +[root@XXX /] cd root +[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k +[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz +[root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Installing the Driver +===================== + + Manual Installation + ------------------- + Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound + to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a + module enter the command: + + insmod dl2k.o + + or + + insmod dl2k.o <optional parameter> ; add parameter + + =============================================================== + example: insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd + or insmod dl2k.o media=3 + or insmod dl2k.o media=3,2 ; for 2 cards + =============================================================== + + Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by + the Linux device driver below. + + The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form + eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state, + it is necessary to issue the following command: + + ifconfig eth0 up + + Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with + Linux), enter the following command: + + ifup eth0 + + Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration + script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be + given in the next paragraph. + + The commands to unload a driver are as follows: + + ifdown eth0 + ifconfig eth0 down + rmmod dl2k.o + + The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and + to see the current network configuration. + + lsmod + ifconfig + + + Automated Installation + ---------------------- + This section describes how to install the driver such that it is + automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description + is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to + other distributions as well. + + Red Hat v6.x/v7.x + ----------------- + 1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically + /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net. + 2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly modprobe.conf + or modules.conf (for 2.4) in the /etc directory. Add the following lines: + + alias ethx dl2k + options dl2k <optional parameters> + + where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if + one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the + previous section for the list of optional parameters. + 3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the + /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration + script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information. + 4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration + utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2 + and 3 above. + + +Parameter Description +===================== +You can install this driver without any addtional parameter. However, if you +are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra +parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the +Linux device +driver. + +mtu=packet_size - Specifies the maximum packet size. default + is 1500. + +media=media_type - Specifies the media type the NIC operates at. + autosense Autosensing active media. + 10mbps_hd 10Mbps half duplex. + 10mbps_fd 10Mbps full duplex. + 100mbps_hd 100Mbps half duplex. + 100mbps_fd 100Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_fd 1000Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_hd 1000Mbps half duplex. + 0 Autosensing active media. + 1 10Mbps half duplex. + 2 10Mbps full duplex. + 3 100Mbps half duplex. + 4 100Mbps full duplex. + 5 1000Mbps half duplex. + 6 1000Mbps full duplex. + + By default, the NIC operates at autosense. + 1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only + available for fiber adapter. + +vlan=n - Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the + Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is + disable. + +jumbo=[0|1] - Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1, + the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this + function is disabled. + Jumbo frame usually improve the performance + int gigabit. + This feature need jumbo frame compatible + remote. + +rx_coalesce=m - Number of rx frame handled each interrupt. +rx_timeout=n - Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt. + If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert + an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't + assert rx interrupt until m frames received or + reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds. + Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can + reduce congestion collapse and overload which + has been a bottlenect for high speed network. + + For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800. + that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt + for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us. + +tx_coalesce=n - Number of tx frame handled each interrupt. + Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts + congestion usually lower performance of + high speed network card. Default is 16. + +tx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0, + the Tx flow control disable else driver + autodetect. +rx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0, + the Rx flow control enable else driver + autodetect. + + +Configuration Script Sample +=========================== +Here is a sample of a simple configuration script: + +DEVICE=eth0 +USERCTL=no +ONBOOT=yes +POOTPROTO=none +BROADCAST=207.200.5.255 +NETWORK=207.200.5.0 +NETMASK=255.255.255.0 +IPADDR=207.200.5.2 + + +Troubleshooting +=============== +Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line. + Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following + shell command to convert files. + + cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + + OR + + cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + +Q2: Could not find header files (*.h) ? + To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After + installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in + /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured + in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in + /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the + INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source. + Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include, + including those files will make a wrong version driver. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c0e8398674ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + dmfe.c: Version 1.28 01/18/2000 + + A Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. + Copyright (C) 1997 Sten Wang + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or + modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License + as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 + of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + + A. Compiler command: + + A-1: For normal single or multiple processor kernel + "gcc -DMODULE -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall + -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c" + + A-2: For single or multiple processor with kernel module version function + "gcc -DMODULE -DMODVERSIONS -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet + -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c" + + + B. The following steps teach you how to activate a DM9102 board: + + 1. Used the upper compiler command to compile dmfe.c + + 2. Insert dmfe module into kernel + "insmod dmfe" ;;Auto Detection Mode (Suggest) + "insmod dmfe mode=0" ;;Force 10M Half Duplex + "insmod dmfe mode=1" ;;Force 100M Half Duplex + "insmod dmfe mode=4" ;;Force 10M Full Duplex + "insmod dmfe mode=5" ;;Force 100M Full Duplex + + 3. Config a dm9102 network interface + "ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18" + ^^^^^^^^^^^ Your IP address + + 4. Activate the IP routing table. For some distributions, it is not + necessary. You can type "route" to check. + + "route add default eth0" + + + 5. Well done. Your DM9102 adapter is now activated. + + + C. Object files description: + 1. dmfe_rh61.o: For Redhat 6.1 + + If you can make sure your kernel version, you can rename + to dmfe.o and directly use it without re-compiling. + + + Author: Sten Wang, 886-3-5798797-8517, E-mail: sten_wang@davicom.com.tw diff --git a/Documentation/networking/driver.txt b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..11fd0ef5ff57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +Documents about softnet driver issues in general can be found +at: + + http://www.firstfloor.org/~andi/softnet/ + +Transmit path guidelines: + +1) The hard_start_xmit method must never return '1' under any + normal circumstances. It is considered a hard error unless + there is no way your device can tell ahead of time when it's + transmit function will become busy. + + Instead it must maintain the queue properly. For example, + for a driver implementing scatter-gather this means: + + static int drv_hard_start_xmit(struct sk_buff *skb, + struct net_device *dev) + { + struct drv *dp = dev->priv; + + lock_tx(dp); + ... + /* This is a hard error log it. */ + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= (skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags + 1)) { + netif_stop_queue(dev); + unlock_tx(dp); + printk(KERN_ERR PFX "%s: BUG! Tx Ring full when queue awake!\n", + dev->name); + return 1; + } + + ... queue packet to card ... + ... update tx consumer index ... + + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= (MAX_SKB_FRAGS + 1)) + netif_stop_queue(dev); + + ... + unlock_tx(dp); + ... + } + + And then at the end of your TX reclaimation event handling: + + if (netif_queue_stopped(dp->dev) && + TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) > (MAX_SKB_FRAGS + 1)) + netif_wake_queue(dp->dev); + + For a non-scatter-gather supporting card, the three tests simply become: + + /* This is a hard error log it. */ + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) <= 0) + + and: + + if (TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) == 0) + + and: + + if (netif_queue_stopped(dp->dev) && + TX_BUFFS_AVAIL(dp) > 0) + netif_wake_queue(dp->dev); + +2) Do not forget to update netdev->trans_start to jiffies after + each new tx packet is given to the hardware. + +3) Do not forget that once you return 0 from your hard_start_xmit + method, it is your driver's responsibility to free up the SKB + and in some finite amount of time. + + For example, this means that it is not allowed for your TX + mitigation scheme to let TX packets "hang out" in the TX + ring unreclaimed forever if no new TX packets are sent. + This error can deadlock sockets waiting for send buffer room + to be freed up. + + If you return 1 from the hard_start_xmit method, you must not keep + any reference to that SKB and you must not attempt to free it up. + +Probing guidelines: + +1) Any hardware layer address you obtain for your device should + be verified. For example, for ethernet check it with + linux/etherdevice.h:is_valid_ether_addr() + +Close/stop guidelines: + +1) After the dev->stop routine has been called, the hardware must + not receive or transmit any data. All in flight packets must + be aborted. If necessary, poll or wait for completion of + any reset commands. + +2) The dev->stop routine will be called by unregister_netdevice + if device is still UP. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4ef9f7cd5dc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters +============================================================== + +November 17, 2004 + + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Driver Configuration Parameters +- Additional Configurations +- Support + + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of +Adapters, version 3.3.x. This driver supports 2.4.x and 2.6.x kernels. + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm + +For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following +website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the +networking link on the left to search for your adapter: + + http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp + +Driver Configuration Parameters +=============================== + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +Rx Descriptors: Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data + structure that describes a receive buffer and its attributes to the network + controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to write + data from the controller to host memory. In the 3.0.x driver the valid + range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 64. This parameter + can be changed using the command + + ethtool -G eth? rx n, where n is the number of desired rx descriptors. + +Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a + data structure that describes a transmit buffer and its attributes to the + network controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to + read data from the host memory to the controller. In the 3.0.x driver the + valid range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 64. This + parameter can be changed using the command + + ethtool -G eth? tx n, where n is the number of desired tx descriptors. + +Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by + default. Ethtool can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. + + ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} + + NOTE: setting the speed/duplex to incorrect values will cause the link to + fail. + +Event Log Message Level: The driver uses the message level flag to log events + to syslog. The message level can be set at driver load time. It can also be + set using the command + + ethtool -s eth? msglvl n + +Additional Configurations +========================= + + Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions + ------------------------------------------------- + + Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is + distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding + an alias line to /etc/modules.conf as well as editing other system startup + scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux distributions ship + with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the proper way to + configure a network device for your system, refer to your distribution + documentation. If during this process you are asked for the driver or module + name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel PRO/100 Family of + Adapters is e100. + + As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters + (eth0 and eth1), add the following to modules.conf: + + alias eth0 e100 + alias eth1 e100 + + Viewing Link Messages + --------------------- + In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your + console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by + entering the following on the command line before loading the e100 driver: + + dmesg -n 8 + + If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug + messages, set the dmesg level to eight. + + NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + + Ethtool + ------- + + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. + + The latest release of ethtool can be found at: + http://sf.net/projects/gkernel. + + NOTE: This driver uses mii support from the kernel. As a result, when + there is no link, ethtool will report speed/duplex to be 10/half. + + NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support + for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading + ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1. + + Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) + --------------------------- + WoL is provided through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with Red + Hat* 8.0. For other Linux distributions, download and install Ethtool from + the following website: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + + For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man + page. + + WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For + this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be + loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. + + NAPI + ---- + + NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver. + + See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. + +Support +======= + +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + + http://support.intel.com + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to +the issue to linux.nics@intel.com. + + +License +======= + +This software program is released under the terms of a license agreement +between you ('Licensee') and Intel. Do not use or load this software or any +associated materials (collectively, the 'Software') until you have carefully +read the full terms and conditions of the LICENSE located in this software +package. By loading or using the Software, you agree to the terms of this +Agreement. If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, do not +install or use the Software. + +* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2ebd4058d46d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt @@ -0,0 +1,401 @@ +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family of Adapters +=============================================================== + +November 17, 2004 + + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Speed and Duplex Configuration +- Additional Configurations +- Known Issues +- Support + + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family +of Adapters, version 5.x.x. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel PRO/1000 adapter. All hardware requirements listed +apply to use with Linux. + +Native VLANs are now available with supported kernels. + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm + +For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following +website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the +networking link on the left to search for your adapter: + + http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are +used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe or insmod command +using this syntax: + + modprobe e1000 [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + + insmod e1000 [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + +For example, with two PRO/1000 PCI adapters, entering: + + insmod e1000 TxDescriptors=80,128 + +loads the e1000 driver with 80 TX descriptors for the first adapter and 128 TX +descriptors for the second adapter. + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. Also, if the driver is statically built into the +kernel, the driver is loaded with the default values for all the parameters. +Ethtool can be used to change some of the parameters at runtime. + + NOTES: For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed + parameters, see the "Speed and Duplex Configuration" section in + this document. + + For more information about the InterruptThrottleRate, RxIntDelay, + TxIntDelay, RxAbsIntDelay, and TxAbsIntDelay parameters, see the + application note at: + http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm + + A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to the + data buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware. + +AutoNeg (adapters using copper connections only) +Valid Range: 0x01-0x0F, 0x20-0x2F +Default Value: 0x2F + This parameter is a bit mask that specifies which speed and duplex + settings the board advertises. When this parameter is used, the Speed and + Duplex parameters must not be specified. + NOTE: Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more + information on the AutoNeg parameter. + +Duplex (adapters using copper connections only) +Valid Range: 0-2 (0=auto-negotiate, 1=half, 2=full) +Default Value: 0 + Defines the direction in which data is allowed to flow. Can be either one + or two-directional. If both Duplex and the link partner are set to auto- + negotiate, the board auto-detects the correct duplex. If the link partner + is forced (either full or half), Duplex defaults to half-duplex. + +FlowControl +Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) +Default: Read flow control settings from the EEPROM + This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to + Ethernet PAUSE frames. + +InterruptThrottleRate +Valid Range: 100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic) +Default Value: 8000 + This value represents the maximum number of interrupts per second the + controller generates. InterruptThrottleRate is another setting used in + interrupt moderation. Dynamic mode uses a heuristic algorithm to adjust + InterruptThrottleRate based on the current traffic load. +Un-supported Adapters: InterruptThrottleRate is NOT supported by 82542, 82543 + or 82544-based adapters. + + NOTE: InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and + RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive + and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to + generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate + allows. + CAUTION: If you are using the Intel PRO/1000 CT Network Connection + (controller 82547), setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value + greater than 75,000, may hang (stop transmitting) adapters under + certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG + message is logged in the system event log. In addition, the + controller is automatically reset, restoring the network + connection. To eliminate the potential for the hang, ensure + that InterruptThrottleRate is set no greater than 75,000 and is + not set to 0. + NOTE: When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters are + in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non-linearly. + In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting the overall + throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as follows: + + insmod e1000.o InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000 + + This sets the InterruptThrottleRate to 3000 interrupts/sec for the + first, second, and third instances of the driver. The range of 2000 to + 3000 interrupts per second works on a majority of systems and is a + good starting point, but the optimal value will be platform-specific. + If CPU utilization is not a concern, use RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default + driver settings. + +RxDescriptors +Valid Range: 80-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters + 80-4096 for all other supported adapters +Default Value: 256 + This value is the number of receive descriptors allocated by the driver. + Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets. + Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is allocated for each + descriptor and can either be 2048 or 4096 bytes long, depending on the MTU + + setting. An incoming packet can span one or more receive descriptors. + The maximum MTU size is 16110. + + NOTE: MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo + Frames. + NOTE: Depending on the available system resources, the request for a + higher number of receive descriptors may be denied. In this case, + use a lower number. + +RxIntDelay +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 0 + This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024 + microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if + properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds + extra latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput + of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value + may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive + descriptors. + + CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may + hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If + this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system + event log. In addition, the controller is automatically reset, + restoring the network connection. To eliminate the potential for + the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0. + +RxAbsIntDelay (82540, 82545 and later adapters only) +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 128 + This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a + receive interrupt is generated. Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero, + this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial + packet is received within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, + along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network + conditions. + +Speed (adapters using copper connections only) +Valid Settings: 0, 10, 100, 1000 +Default Value: 0 (auto-negotiate at all supported speeds) + Speed forces the line speed to the specified value in megabits per second + (Mbps). If this parameter is not specified or is set to 0 and the link + partner is set to auto-negotiate, the board will auto-detect the correct + speed. Duplex should also be set when Speed is set to either 10 or 100. + +TxDescriptors +Valid Range: 80-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters + 80-4096 for all other supported adapters +Default Value: 256 + This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver. + Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each + descriptor is 16 bytes. + + NOTE: Depending on the available system resources, the request for a + higher number of transmit descriptors may be denied. In this case, + use a lower number. + +TxIntDelay +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 64 + This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of + 1.024 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU + efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the + system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high + causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors. + +TxAbsIntDelay (82540, 82545 and later adapters only) +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 64 + This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a + transmit interrupt is generated. Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero, + this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial + packet is sent on the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, + along with TxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific + network conditions. + +XsumRX (not available on the 82542-based adapter) +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 1 + A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum + offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware. + +Speed and Duplex Configuration +============================== + +Three keywords are used to control the speed and duplex configuration. These +keywords are Speed, Duplex, and AutoNeg. + +If the board uses a fiber interface, these keywords are ignored, and the +fiber interface board only links at 1000 Mbps full-duplex. + +For copper-based boards, the keywords interact as follows: + + The default operation is auto-negotiate. The board advertises all supported + speed and duplex combinations, and it links at the highest common speed and + duplex mode IF the link partner is set to auto-negotiate. + + If Speed = 1000, limited auto-negotiation is enabled and only 1000 Mbps is + advertised (The 1000BaseT spec requires auto-negotiation.) + + If Speed = 10 or 100, then both Speed and Duplex should be set. Auto- + negotiation is disabled, and the AutoNeg parameter is ignored. Partner SHOULD + also be forced. + +The AutoNeg parameter is used when more control is required over the auto- +negotiation process. When this parameter is used, Speed and Duplex parameters +must not be specified. The following table describes supported values for the +AutoNeg parameter: + +Speed (Mbps) 1000 100 100 10 10 +Duplex Full Full Half Full Half +Value (in base 16) 0x20 0x08 0x04 0x02 0x01 + +Example: insmod e1000 AutoNeg=0x03, loads e1000 and specifies (10 full duplex, +10 half duplex) for negotiation with the peer. + +Note that setting AutoNeg does not guarantee that the board will link at the +highest specified speed or duplex mode, but the board will link at the +highest possible speed/duplex of the link partner IF the link partner is also +set to auto-negotiate. If the link partner is forced speed/duplex, the +adapter MUST be forced to the same speed/duplex. + + +Additional Configurations +========================= + + Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions + ------------------------------------------------- + + Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is + distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding + an alias line to /etc/modules.conf as well as editing other system startup + scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux distributions ship + with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the proper way to + configure a network device for your system, refer to your distribution + documentation. If during this process you are asked for the driver or module + name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel PRO/1000 Family of + Adapters is e1000. + + As an example, if you install the e1000 driver for two PRO/1000 adapters + (eth0 and eth1) and set the speed and duplex to 10full and 100half, add the + following to modules.conf: + + alias eth0 e1000 + alias eth1 e1000 + options e1000 Speed=10,100 Duplex=2,1 + + Viewing Link Messages + --------------------- + + Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is + restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on + your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following: + + dmesg -n 8 + + NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + + Jumbo Frames + ------------ + + The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters except 82542-based + adapters. Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value + larger than the default of 1500. Use the ifconfig command to increase the + MTU size. For example: + + ifconfig ethx mtu 9000 up + + The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16110. This value coincides + with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128. + + NOTE: Jumbo Frames are supported at 1000 Mbps only. Using Jumbo Frames at + 10 or 100 Mbps may result in poor performance or loss of link. + + + NOTE: MTU designates the frame size. To enable Jumbo Frames, increase the + MTU size on the interface beyond 1500. + + Ethtool + ------- + + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. + + The latest release of ethtool can be found from + http://sf.net/projects/gkernel. + + NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support + for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading + ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1. + + Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) + --------------------------- + + WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with + all versions of Red Hat after Red Hat 7.2. For other Linux distributions, + download and install Ethtool from the following website: + http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + + For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the website listed + above. + + WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. + For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be + loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. + + NAPI + ---- + + NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e1000 driver. NAPI is enabled + or disabled based on the configuration of the kernel. + + See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. + + +Known Issues +============ + + Jumbo Frames System Requirement + ------------------------------- + + Memory allocation failures have been observed on Linux systems with 64 MB + of RAM or less that are running Jumbo Frames. If you are using Jumbo Frames, + your system may require more than the advertised minimum requirement of 64 MB + of system memory. + + +Support +======= + +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + + http://support.intel.com + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to +the issue to linux.nics@intel.com. + + +License +======= + +This software program is released under the terms of a license agreement +between you ('Licensee') and Intel. Do not use or load this software or any +associated materials (collectively, the 'Software') until you have carefully +read the full terms and conditions of the LICENSE located in this software +package. By loading or using the Software, you agree to the terms of this +Agreement. If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, do not +install or use the Software. + +* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/eql.txt b/Documentation/networking/eql.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0f1550150f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/eql.txt @@ -0,0 +1,528 @@ + EQL Driver: Serial IP Load Balancing HOWTO + Simon "Guru Aleph-Null" Janes, simon@ncm.com + v1.1, February 27, 1995 + + This is the manual for the EQL device driver. EQL is a software device + that lets you load-balance IP serial links (SLIP or uncompressed PPP) + to increase your bandwidth. It will not reduce your latency (i.e. ping + times) except in the case where you already have lots of traffic on + your link, in which it will help them out. This driver has been tested + with the 1.1.75 kernel, and is known to have patched cleanly with + 1.1.86. Some testing with 1.1.92 has been done with the v1.1 patch + which was only created to patch cleanly in the very latest kernel + source trees. (Yes, it worked fine.) + + 1. Introduction + + Which is worse? A huge fee for a 56K leased line or two phone lines? + It's probably the former. If you find yourself craving more bandwidth, + and have a ISP that is flexible, it is now possible to bind modems + together to work as one point-to-point link to increase your + bandwidth. All without having to have a special black box on either + side. + + + The eql driver has only been tested with the Livingston PortMaster-2e + terminal server. I do not know if other terminal servers support load- + balancing, but I do know that the PortMaster does it, and does it + almost as well as the eql driver seems to do it (-- Unfortunately, in + my testing so far, the Livingston PortMaster 2e's load-balancing is a + good 1 to 2 KB/s slower than the test machine working with a 28.8 Kbps + and 14.4 Kbps connection. However, I am not sure that it really is + the PortMaster, or if it's Linux's TCP drivers. I'm told that Linux's + TCP implementation is pretty fast though.--) + + + I suggest to ISPs out there that it would probably be fair to charge + a load-balancing client 75% of the cost of the second line and 50% of + the cost of the third line etc... + + + Hey, we can all dream you know... + + + 2. Kernel Configuration + + Here I describe the general steps of getting a kernel up and working + with the eql driver. From patching, building, to installing. + + + 2.1. Patching The Kernel + + If you do not have or cannot get a copy of the kernel with the eql + driver folded into it, get your copy of the driver from + ftp://slaughter.ncm.com/pub/Linux/LOAD_BALANCING/eql-1.1.tar.gz. + Unpack this archive someplace obvious like /usr/local/src/. It will + create the following files: + + + + ______________________________________________________________________ + -rw-r--r-- guru/ncm 198 Jan 19 18:53 1995 eql-1.1/NO-WARRANTY + -rw-r--r-- guru/ncm 30620 Feb 27 21:40 1995 eql-1.1/eql-1.1.patch + -rwxr-xr-x guru/ncm 16111 Jan 12 22:29 1995 eql-1.1/eql_enslave + -rw-r--r-- guru/ncm 2195 Jan 10 21:48 1995 eql-1.1/eql_enslave.c + ______________________________________________________________________ + + Unpack a recent kernel (something after 1.1.92) someplace convenient + like say /usr/src/linux-1.1.92.eql. Use symbolic links to point + /usr/src/linux to this development directory. + + + Apply the patch by running the commands: + + + ______________________________________________________________________ + cd /usr/src + patch </usr/local/src/eql-1.1/eql-1.1.patch + ______________________________________________________________________ + + + + + + 2.2. Building The Kernel + + After patching the kernel, run make config and configure the kernel + for your hardware. + + + After configuration, make and install according to your habit. + + + 3. Network Configuration + + So far, I have only used the eql device with the DSLIP SLIP connection + manager by Matt Dillon (-- "The man who sold his soul to code so much + so quickly."--) . How you configure it for other "connection" + managers is up to you. Most other connection managers that I've seen + don't do a very good job when it comes to handling more than one + connection. + + + 3.1. /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 + + In rc.inet1, ifconfig the eql device to the IP address you usually use + for your machine, and the MTU you prefer for your SLIP lines. One + could argue that MTU should be roughly half the usual size for two + modems, one-third for three, one-fourth for four, etc... But going + too far below 296 is probably overkill. Here is an example ifconfig + command that sets up the eql device: + + + + ______________________________________________________________________ + ifconfig eql 198.67.33.239 mtu 1006 + ______________________________________________________________________ + + + + + + Once the eql device is up and running, add a static default route to + it in the routing table using the cool new route syntax that makes + life so much easier: + + + + ______________________________________________________________________ + route add default eql + ______________________________________________________________________ + + + 3.2. Enslaving Devices By Hand + + Enslaving devices by hand requires two utility programs: eql_enslave + and eql_emancipate (-- eql_emancipate hasn't been written because when + an enslaved device "dies", it is automatically taken out of the queue. + I haven't found a good reason to write it yet... other than for + completeness, but that isn't a good motivator is it?--) + + + The syntax for enslaving a device is "eql_enslave <master-name> + <slave-name> <estimated-bps>". Here are some example enslavings: + + + + ______________________________________________________________________ + eql_enslave eql sl0 28800 + eql_enslave eql ppp0 14400 + eql_enslave eql sl1 57600 + ______________________________________________________________________ + + + + + + When you want to free a device from its life of slavery, you can + either down the device with ifconfig (eql will automatically bury the + dead slave and remove it from its queue) or use eql_emancipate to free + it. (-- Or just ifconfig it down, and the eql driver will take it out + for you.--) + + + + ______________________________________________________________________ + eql_emancipate eql sl0 + eql_emancipate eql ppp0 + eql_emancipate eql sl1 + ______________________________________________________________________ + + + + + + 3.3. DSLIP Configuration for the eql Device + + The general idea is to bring up and keep up as many SLIP connections + as you need, automatically. + + + 3.3.1. /etc/slip/runslip.conf + + Here is an example runslip.conf: + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ______________________________________________________________________ + name sl-line-1 + enabled + baud 38400 + mtu 576 + ducmd -e /etc/slip/dialout/cua2-288.xp -t 9 + command eql_enslave eql $interface 28800 + address 198.67.33.239 + line /dev/cua2 + + name sl-line-2 + enabled + baud 38400 + mtu 576 + ducmd -e /etc/slip/dialout/cua3-288.xp -t 9 + command eql_enslave eql $interface 28800 + address 198.67.33.239 + line /dev/cua3 + ______________________________________________________________________ + + + + + + 3.4. Using PPP and the eql Device + + I have not yet done any load-balancing testing for PPP devices, mainly + because I don't have a PPP-connection manager like SLIP has with + DSLIP. I did find a good tip from LinuxNET:Billy for PPP performance: + make sure you have asyncmap set to something so that control + characters are not escaped. + + + I tried to fix up a PPP script/system for redialing lost PPP + connections for use with the eql driver the weekend of Feb 25-26 '95 + (Hereafter known as the 8-hour PPP Hate Festival). Perhaps later this + year. + + + 4. About the Slave Scheduler Algorithm + + The slave scheduler probably could be replaced with a dozen other + things and push traffic much faster. The formula in the current set + up of the driver was tuned to handle slaves with wildly different + bits-per-second "priorities". + + + All testing I have done was with two 28.8 V.FC modems, one connecting + at 28800 bps or slower, and the other connecting at 14400 bps all the + time. + + + One version of the scheduler was able to push 5.3 K/s through the + 28800 and 14400 connections, but when the priorities on the links were + very wide apart (57600 vs. 14400) the "faster" modem received all + traffic and the "slower" modem starved. + + + 5. Testers' Reports + + Some people have experimented with the eql device with newer + kernels (than 1.1.75). I have since updated the driver to patch + cleanly in newer kernels because of the removal of the old "slave- + balancing" driver config option. + + + o icee from LinuxNET patched 1.1.86 without any rejects and was able + to boot the kernel and enslave a couple of ISDN PPP links. + + 5.1. Randolph Bentson's Test Report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + From bentson@grieg.seaslug.org Wed Feb 8 19:08:09 1995 + Date: Tue, 7 Feb 95 22:57 PST + From: Randolph Bentson <bentson@grieg.seaslug.org> + To: guru@ncm.com + Subject: EQL driver tests + + + I have been checking out your eql driver. (Nice work, that!) + Although you may already done this performance testing, here + are some data I've discovered. + + Randolph Bentson + bentson@grieg.seaslug.org + + --------------------------------------------------------- + + + A pseudo-device driver, EQL, written by Simon Janes, can be used + to bundle multiple SLIP connections into what appears to be a + single connection. This allows one to improve dial-up network + connectivity gradually, without having to buy expensive DSU/CSU + hardware and services. + + I have done some testing of this software, with two goals in + mind: first, to ensure it actually works as described and + second, as a method of exercising my device driver. + + The following performance measurements were derived from a set + of SLIP connections run between two Linux systems (1.1.84) using + a 486DX2/66 with a Cyclom-8Ys and a 486SLC/40 with a Cyclom-16Y. + (Ports 0,1,2,3 were used. A later configuration will distribute + port selection across the different Cirrus chips on the boards.) + Once a link was established, I timed a binary ftp transfer of + 289284 bytes of data. If there were no overhead (packet headers, + inter-character and inter-packet delays, etc.) the transfers + would take the following times: + + bits/sec seconds + 345600 8.3 + 234600 12.3 + 172800 16.7 + 153600 18.8 + 76800 37.6 + 57600 50.2 + 38400 75.3 + 28800 100.4 + 19200 150.6 + 9600 301.3 + + A single line running at the lower speeds and with large packets + comes to within 2% of this. Performance is limited for the higher + speeds (as predicted by the Cirrus databook) to an aggregate of + about 160 kbits/sec. The next round of testing will distribute + the load across two or more Cirrus chips. + + The good news is that one gets nearly the full advantage of the + second, third, and fourth line's bandwidth. (The bad news is + that the connection establishment seemed fragile for the higher + speeds. Once established, the connection seemed robust enough.) + + #lines speed mtu seconds theory actual %of + kbit/sec duration speed speed max + 3 115200 900 _ 345600 + 3 115200 400 18.1 345600 159825 46 + 2 115200 900 _ 230400 + 2 115200 600 18.1 230400 159825 69 + 2 115200 400 19.3 230400 149888 65 + 4 57600 900 _ 234600 + 4 57600 600 _ 234600 + 4 57600 400 _ 234600 + 3 57600 600 20.9 172800 138413 80 + 3 57600 900 21.2 172800 136455 78 + 3 115200 600 21.7 345600 133311 38 + 3 57600 400 22.5 172800 128571 74 + 4 38400 900 25.2 153600 114795 74 + 4 38400 600 26.4 153600 109577 71 + 4 38400 400 27.3 153600 105965 68 + 2 57600 900 29.1 115200 99410.3 86 + 1 115200 900 30.7 115200 94229.3 81 + 2 57600 600 30.2 115200 95789.4 83 + 3 38400 900 30.3 115200 95473.3 82 + 3 38400 600 31.2 115200 92719.2 80 + 1 115200 600 31.3 115200 92423 80 + 2 57600 400 32.3 115200 89561.6 77 + 1 115200 400 32.8 115200 88196.3 76 + 3 38400 400 33.5 115200 86353.4 74 + 2 38400 900 43.7 76800 66197.7 86 + 2 38400 600 44 76800 65746.4 85 + 2 38400 400 47.2 76800 61289 79 + 4 19200 900 50.8 76800 56945.7 74 + 4 19200 400 53.2 76800 54376.7 70 + 4 19200 600 53.7 76800 53870.4 70 + 1 57600 900 54.6 57600 52982.4 91 + 1 57600 600 56.2 57600 51474 89 + 3 19200 900 60.5 57600 47815.5 83 + 1 57600 400 60.2 57600 48053.8 83 + 3 19200 600 62 57600 46658.7 81 + 3 19200 400 64.7 57600 44711.6 77 + 1 38400 900 79.4 38400 36433.8 94 + 1 38400 600 82.4 38400 35107.3 91 + 2 19200 900 84.4 38400 34275.4 89 + 1 38400 400 86.8 38400 33327.6 86 + 2 19200 600 87.6 38400 33023.3 85 + 2 19200 400 91.2 38400 31719.7 82 + 4 9600 900 94.7 38400 30547.4 79 + 4 9600 400 106 38400 27290.9 71 + 4 9600 600 110 38400 26298.5 68 + 3 9600 900 118 28800 24515.6 85 + 3 9600 600 120 28800 24107 83 + 3 9600 400 131 28800 22082.7 76 + 1 19200 900 155 19200 18663.5 97 + 1 19200 600 161 19200 17968 93 + 1 19200 400 170 19200 17016.7 88 + 2 9600 600 176 19200 16436.6 85 + 2 9600 900 180 19200 16071.3 83 + 2 9600 400 181 19200 15982.5 83 + 1 9600 900 305 9600 9484.72 98 + 1 9600 600 314 9600 9212.87 95 + 1 9600 400 332 9600 8713.37 90 + + + + + + 5.2. Anthony Healy's Report + + + + + + + + Date: Mon, 13 Feb 1995 16:17:29 +1100 (EST) + From: Antony Healey <ahealey@st.nepean.uws.edu.au> + To: Simon Janes <guru@ncm.com> + Subject: Re: Load Balancing + + Hi Simon, + I've installed your patch and it works great. I have trialed + it over twin SL/IP lines, just over null modems, but I was + able to data at over 48Kb/s [ISDN link -Simon]. I managed a + transfer of up to 7.5 Kbyte/s on one go, but averaged around + 6.4 Kbyte/s, which I think is pretty cool. :) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt b/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..90e9e5f16e6b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ewrk3.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +The EtherWORKS 3 driver in this distribution is designed to work with all +kernels > 1.1.33 (approx) and includes tools in the 'ewrk3tools' +subdirectory to allow set up of the card, similar to the MSDOS +'NICSETUP.EXE' tools provided on the DOS drivers disk (type 'make' in that +subdirectory to make the tools). + +The supported cards are DE203, DE204 and DE205. All other cards are NOT +supported - refer to 'depca.c' for running the LANCE based network cards and +'de4x5.c' for the DIGITAL Semiconductor PCI chip based adapters from +Digital. + +The ability to load this driver as a loadable module has been included and +used extensively during the driver development (to save those long reboot +sequences). To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things: + + 0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system. + 1) copy ewrk3.c from the /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite + temporary directory. + 2) edit the source code near line 1898 to reflect the I/O address and + IRQ you're using. + 3) compile ewrk3.c, but include -DMODULE in the command line to ensure + that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code). + 4) if you are wanting to add a new card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a + kernel with the ewrk3 configuration turned off and reboot. + 5) insmod ewrk3.o + [Alan Cox: Changed this so you can insmod ewrk3.o irq=x io=y] + [Adam Kropelin: Multiple cards now supported by irq=x1,x2 io=y1,y2] + 6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface manually + (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). + 7) enjoy! + + Note that autoprobing is not allowed in loadable modules - the system is + already up and running and you're messing with interrupts. + + To unload a module, turn off the associated interface + 'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod ewrk3'. + +The performance we've achieved so far has been measured through the 'ttcp' +tool at 975kB/s. This measures the total TCP stack performance which +includes the card, so don't expect to get much nearer the 1.25MB/s +theoretical Ethernet rate. + + +Enjoy! + +Dave diff --git a/Documentation/networking/filter.txt b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bbf2005270b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/filter.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +filter.txt: Linux Socket Filtering +Written by: Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org> + +Introduction +============ + + Linux Socket Filtering is derived from the Berkeley +Packet Filter. There are some distinct differences between +the BSD and Linux Kernel Filtering. + +Linux Socket Filtering (LSF) allows a user-space program to +attach a filter onto any socket and allow or disallow certain +types of data to come through the socket. LSF follows exactly +the same filter code structure as the BSD Berkeley Packet Filter +(BPF), so referring to the BSD bpf.4 manpage is very helpful in +creating filters. + +LSF is much simpler than BPF. One does not have to worry about +devices or anything like that. You simply create your filter +code, send it to the kernel via the SO_ATTACH_FILTER ioctl and +if your filter code passes the kernel check on it, you then +immediately begin filtering data on that socket. + +You can also detach filters from your socket via the +SO_DETACH_FILTER ioctl. This will probably not be used much +since when you close a socket that has a filter on it the +filter is automagically removed. The other less common case +may be adding a different filter on the same socket where you had another +filter that is still running: the kernel takes care of removing +the old one and placing your new one in its place, assuming your +filter has passed the checks, otherwise if it fails the old filter +will remain on that socket. + +Examples +======== + +Ioctls- +setsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_ATTACH_FILTER, &Filter, sizeof(Filter)); +setsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_DETACH_FILTER, &value, sizeof(value)); + +See the BSD bpf.4 manpage and the BSD Packet Filter paper written by +Steven McCanne and Van Jacobson of Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt b/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b1f337f0f4ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/fore200e.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + +FORE Systems PCA-200E/SBA-200E ATM NIC driver +--------------------------------------------- + +This driver adds support for the FORE Systems 200E-series ATM adapters +to the Linux operating system. It is based on the earlier PCA-200E driver +written by Uwe Dannowski. + +The driver simultaneously supports PCA-200E and SBA-200E adapters on +i386, alpha (untested), powerpc, sparc and sparc64 archs. + +The intent is to enable the use of different models of FORE adapters at the +same time, by hosts that have several bus interfaces (such as PCI+SBUS, +PCI+MCA or PCI+EISA). + +Only PCI and SBUS devices are currently supported by the driver, but support +for other bus interfaces such as EISA should not be too hard to add (this may +be more tricky for the MCA bus, though, as FORE made some MCA-specific +modifications to the adapter's AALI interface). + + +Firmware Copyright Notice +------------------------- + +Please read the fore200e_firmware_copyright file present +in the linux/drivers/atm directory for details and restrictions. + + +Firmware Updates +---------------- + +The FORE Systems 200E-series driver is shipped with firmware data being +uploaded to the ATM adapters at system boot time or at module loading time. +The supplied firmware images should work with all adapters. + +However, if you encounter problems (the firmware doesn't start or the driver +is unable to read the PROM data), you may consider trying another firmware +version. Alternative binary firmware images can be found somewhere on the +ForeThought CD-ROM supplied with your adapter by FORE Systems. + +You can also get the latest firmware images from FORE Systems at +http://www.fore.com. Register TACTics Online and go to +the 'software updates' pages. The firmware binaries are part of +the various ForeThought software distributions. + +Notice that different versions of the PCA-200E firmware exist, depending +on the endianess of the host architecture. The driver is shipped with +both little and big endian PCA firmware images. + +Name and location of the new firmware images can be set at kernel +configuration time: + +1. Copy the new firmware binary files (with .bin, .bin1 or .bin2 suffix) + to some directory, such as linux/drivers/atm. + +2. Reconfigure your kernel to set the new firmware name and location. + Expected pathnames are absolute or relative to the drivers/atm directory. + +3. Rebuild and re-install your kernel or your module. + + +Feedback +-------- + +Feedback is welcome. Please send success stories/bug reports/ +patches/improvement/comments/flames to <lizzi@cnam.fr>. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt b/Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1a0b720440dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +Frame Relay (FR) support for linux is built into a two tiered system of device +drivers. The upper layer implements RFC1490 FR specification, and uses the +Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) as its hardware address. Usually these +are assigned by your network supplier, they give you the number/numbers of +the Virtual Connections (VC) assigned to you. + +Each DLCI is a point-to-point link between your machine and a remote one. +As such, a separate device is needed to accommodate the routing. Within the +net-tools archives is 'dlcicfg'. This program will communicate with the +base "DLCI" device, and create new net devices named 'dlci00', 'dlci01'... +The configuration script will ask you how many DLCIs you need, as well as +how many DLCIs you want to assign to each Frame Relay Access Device (FRAD). + +The DLCI uses a number of function calls to communicate with the FRAD, all +of which are stored in the FRAD's private data area. assoc/deassoc, +activate/deactivate and dlci_config. The DLCI supplies a receive function +to the FRAD to accept incoming packets. + +With this initial offering, only 1 FRAD driver is available. With many thanks +to Sangoma Technologies, David Mandelstam & Gene Kozin, the S502A, S502E & +S508 are supported. This driver is currently set up for only FR, but as +Sangoma makes more firmware modules available, it can be updated to provide +them as well. + +Configuration of the FRAD makes use of another net-tools program, 'fradcfg'. +This program makes use of a configuration file (which dlcicfg can also read) +to specify the types of boards to be configured as FRADs, as well as perform +any board specific configuration. The Sangoma module of fradcfg loads the +FR firmware into the card, sets the irq/port/memory information, and provides +an initial configuration. + +Additional FRAD device drivers can be added as hardware is available. + +At this time, the dlcicfg and fradcfg programs have not been incorporated into +the net-tools distribution. They can be found at ftp.invlogic.com, in +/pub/linux. Note that with OS/2 FTPD, you end up in /pub by default, so just +use 'cd linux'. v0.10 is for use on pre-2.0.3 and earlier, v0.15 is for +pre-2.0.4 and later. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt b/Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c3297f79c137 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/gen_stats.txt @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +Generic networking statistics for netlink users +====================================================================== + +Statistic counters are grouped into structs: + +Struct TLV type Description +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +gnet_stats_basic TCA_STATS_BASIC Basic statistics +gnet_stats_rate_est TCA_STATS_RATE_EST Rate estimator +gnet_stats_queue TCA_STATS_QUEUE Queue statistics +none TCA_STATS_APP Application specific + + +Collecting: +----------- + +Declare the statistic structs you need: +struct mystruct { + struct gnet_stats_basic bstats; + struct gnet_stats_queue qstats; + ... +}; + +Update statistics: +mystruct->tstats.packet++; +mystruct->qstats.backlog += skb->pkt_len; + + +Export to userspace (Dump): +--------------------------- + +my_dumping_routine(struct sk_buff *skb, ...) +{ + struct gnet_dump dump; + + if (gnet_stats_start_copy(skb, TCA_STATS2, &mystruct->lock, &dump) < 0) + goto rtattr_failure; + + if (gnet_stats_copy_basic(&dump, &mystruct->bstats) < 0 || + gnet_stats_copy_queue(&dump, &mystruct->qstats) < 0 || + gnet_stats_copy_app(&dump, &xstats, sizeof(xstats)) < 0) + goto rtattr_failure; + + if (gnet_stats_finish_copy(&dump) < 0) + goto rtattr_failure; + ... +} + +TCA_STATS/TCA_XSTATS backward compatibility: +-------------------------------------------- + +Prior users of struct tc_stats and xstats can maintain backward +compatibility by calling the compat wrappers to keep providing the +existing TLV types. + +my_dumping_routine(struct sk_buff *skb, ...) +{ + if (gnet_stats_start_copy_compat(skb, TCA_STATS2, TCA_STATS, + TCA_XSTATS, &mystruct->lock, &dump) < 0) + goto rtattr_failure; + ... +} + +A struct tc_stats will be filled out during gnet_stats_copy_* calls +and appended to the skb. TCA_XSTATS is provided if gnet_stats_copy_app +was called. + + +Locking: +-------- + +Locks are taken before writing and released once all statistics have +been written. Locks are always released in case of an error. You +are responsible for making sure that the lock is initialized. + + +Rate Estimator: +-------------- + +0) Prepare an estimator attribute. Most likely this would be in user + space. The value of this TLV should contain a tc_estimator structure. + As usual, such a TLV nees to be 32 bit aligned and therefore the + length needs to be appropriately set etc. The estimator interval + and ewma log need to be converted to the appropriate values. + tc_estimator.c::tc_setup_estimator() is advisable to be used as the + conversion routine. It does a few clever things. It takes a time + interval in microsecs, a time constant also in microsecs and a struct + tc_estimator to be populated. The returned tc_estimator can be + transported to the kernel. Transfer such a structure in a TLV of type + TCA_RATE to your code in the kernel. + +In the kernel when setting up: +1) make sure you have basic stats and rate stats setup first. +2) make sure you have initialized stats lock that is used to setup such + stats. +3) Now initialize a new estimator: + + int ret = gen_new_estimator(my_basicstats,my_rate_est_stats, + mystats_lock, attr_with_tcestimator_struct); + + if ret == 0 + success + else + failed + +From now on, everytime you dump my_rate_est_stats it will contain +uptodate info. + +Once you are done, call gen_kill_estimator(my_basicstats, +my_rate_est_stats) Make sure that my_basicstats and my_rate_est_stats +are still valid (i.e still exist) at the time of making this call. + + +Authors: +-------- +Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> +Jamal Hadi Salim <hadi@cyberus.ca> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d1dc6b884f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +Generic HDLC layer +Krzysztof Halasa <khc@pm.waw.pl> +January, 2003 + + +Generic HDLC layer currently supports: +- Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT and no LMI), with ARP support (no InARP). + Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation) + interfaces can share a single PVC. +- raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation. +- Cisco HDLC, +- PPP (uses syncppp.c), +- X.25 (uses X.25 routines). + +There are hardware drivers for the following cards: +- C101 by Moxa Technologies Co., Ltd. +- RISCom/N2 by SDL Communications Inc. +- and others, some not in the official kernel. + +Ethernet device emulation (using HDLC or Frame-Relay PVC) is compatible +with IEEE 802.1Q (VLANs) and 802.1D (Ethernet bridging). + + +Make sure the hdlc.o and the hardware driver are loaded. It should +create a number of "hdlc" (hdlc0 etc) network devices, one for each +WAN port. You'll need the "sethdlc" utility, get it from: + http://hq.pm.waw.pl/hdlc/ + +Compile sethdlc.c utility: + gcc -O2 -Wall -o sethdlc sethdlc.c +Make sure you're using a correct version of sethdlc for your kernel. + +Use sethdlc to set physical interface, clock rate, HDLC mode used, +and add any required PVCs if using Frame Relay. +Usually you want something like: + + sethdlc hdlc0 clock int rate 128000 + sethdlc hdlc0 cisco interval 10 timeout 25 +or + sethdlc hdlc0 rs232 clock ext + sethdlc hdlc0 fr lmi ansi + sethdlc hdlc0 create 99 + ifconfig hdlc0 up + ifconfig pvc0 localIP pointopoint remoteIP + +In Frame Relay mode, ifconfig master hdlc device up (without assigning +any IP address to it) before using pvc devices. + + +Setting interface: + +* v35 | rs232 | x21 | t1 | e1 - sets physical interface for a given port + if the card has software-selectable interfaces + loopback - activate hardware loopback (for testing only) +* clock ext - external clock (uses DTE RX and TX clock) +* clock int - internal clock (provides clock signal on DCE clock output) +* clock txint - TX internal, RX external (provides TX clock on DCE output) +* clock txfromrx - TX clock derived from RX clock (TX clock on DCE output) +* rate - sets clock rate in bps (not required for external clock or + for txfromrx) + +Setting protocol: + +* hdlc - sets raw HDLC (IP-only) mode + nrz / nrzi / fm-mark / fm-space / manchester - sets transmission code + no-parity / crc16 / crc16-pr0 (CRC16 with preset zeros) / crc32-itu + crc16-itu (CRC16 with ITU-T polynomial) / crc16-itu-pr0 - sets parity + +* hdlc-eth - Ethernet device emulation using HDLC. Parity and encoding + as above. + +* cisco - sets Cisco HDLC mode (IP, IPv6 and IPX supported) + interval - time in seconds between keepalive packets + timeout - time in seconds after last received keepalive packet before + we assume the link is down + +* ppp - sets synchronous PPP mode + +* x25 - sets X.25 mode + +* fr - Frame Relay mode + lmi ansi / ccitt / none - LMI (link management) type + dce - Frame Relay DCE (network) side LMI instead of default DTE (user). + It has nothing to do with clocks! + t391 - link integrity verification polling timer (in seconds) - user + t392 - polling verification timer (in seconds) - network + n391 - full status polling counter - user + n392 - error threshold - both user and network + n393 - monitored events count - both user and network + +Frame-Relay only: +* create n | delete n - adds / deletes PVC interface with DLCI #n. + Newly created interface will be named pvc0, pvc1 etc. + +* create ether n | delete ether n - adds a device for Ethernet-bridged + frames. The device will be named pvceth0, pvceth1 etc. + + + + +Board-specific issues +--------------------- + +n2.o and c101.o need parameters to work: + + insmod n2 hw=io,irq,ram,ports[:io,irq,...] +example: + insmod n2 hw=0x300,10,0xD0000,01 + +or + insmod c101 hw=irq,ram[:irq,...] +example: + insmod c101 hw=9,0xdc000 + +If built into the kernel, these drivers need kernel (command line) parameters: + n2.hw=io,irq,ram,ports:... +or + c101.hw=irq,ram:... + + + +If you have a problem with N2 or C101 card, you can issue the "private" +command to see port's packet descriptor rings (in kernel logs): + + sethdlc hdlc0 private + +The hardware driver has to be build with CONFIG_HDLC_DEBUG_RINGS. +Attaching this info to bug reports would be helpful. Anyway, let me know +if you have problems using this. + +For patches and other info look at http://hq.pm.waw.pl/hdlc/ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f315d20d3867 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c @@ -0,0 +1,1110 @@ +/* Mode: C; + * ifenslave.c: Configure network interfaces for parallel routing. + * + * This program controls the Linux implementation of running multiple + * network interfaces in parallel. + * + * Author: Donald Becker <becker@cesdis.gsfc.nasa.gov> + * Copyright 1994-1996 Donald Becker + * + * This program is free software; you can redistribute it + * and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + * License as published by the Free Software Foundation. + * + * The author may be reached as becker@CESDIS.gsfc.nasa.gov, or C/O + * Center of Excellence in Space Data and Information Sciences + * Code 930.5, Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt MD 20771 + * + * Changes : + * - 2000/10/02 Willy Tarreau <willy at meta-x.org> : + * - few fixes. Master's MAC address is now correctly taken from + * the first device when not previously set ; + * - detach support : call BOND_RELEASE to detach an enslaved interface. + * - give a mini-howto from command-line help : # ifenslave -h + * + * - 2001/02/16 Chad N. Tindel <ctindel at ieee dot org> : + * - Master is now brought down before setting the MAC address. In + * the 2.4 kernel you can't change the MAC address while the device is + * up because you get EBUSY. + * + * - 2001/09/13 Takao Indoh <indou dot takao at jp dot fujitsu dot com> + * - Added the ability to change the active interface on a mode 1 bond + * at runtime. + * + * - 2001/10/23 Chad N. Tindel <ctindel at ieee dot org> : + * - No longer set the MAC address of the master. The bond device will + * take care of this itself + * - Try the SIOC*** versions of the bonding ioctls before using the + * old versions + * - 2002/02/18 Erik Habbinga <erik_habbinga @ hp dot com> : + * - ifr2.ifr_flags was not initialized in the hwaddr_notset case, + * SIOCGIFFLAGS now called before hwaddr_notset test + * + * - 2002/10/31 Tony Cureington <tony.cureington * hp_com> : + * - If the master does not have a hardware address when the first slave + * is enslaved, the master is assigned the hardware address of that + * slave - there is a comment in bonding.c stating "ifenslave takes + * care of this now." This corrects the problem of slaves having + * different hardware addresses in active-backup mode when + * multiple interfaces are specified on a single ifenslave command + * (ifenslave bond0 eth0 eth1). + * + * - 2003/03/18 - Tsippy Mendelson <tsippy.mendelson at intel dot com> and + * Shmulik Hen <shmulik.hen at intel dot com> + * - Moved setting the slave's mac address and openning it, from + * the application to the driver. This enables support of modes + * that need to use the unique mac address of each slave. + * The driver also takes care of closing the slave and restoring its + * original mac address upon release. + * In addition, block possibility of enslaving before the master is up. + * This prevents putting the system in an undefined state. + * + * - 2003/05/01 - Amir Noam <amir.noam at intel dot com> + * - Added ABI version control to restore compatibility between + * new/old ifenslave and new/old bonding. + * - Prevent adding an adapter that is already a slave. + * Fixes the problem of stalling the transmission and leaving + * the slave in a down state. + * + * - 2003/05/01 - Shmulik Hen <shmulik.hen at intel dot com> + * - Prevent enslaving if the bond device is down. + * Fixes the problem of leaving the system in unstable state and + * halting when trying to remove the module. + * - Close socket on all abnormal exists. + * - Add versioning scheme that follows that of the bonding driver. + * current version is 1.0.0 as a base line. + * + * - 2003/05/22 - Jay Vosburgh <fubar at us dot ibm dot com> + * - ifenslave -c was broken; it's now fixed + * - Fixed problem with routes vanishing from master during enslave + * processing. + * + * - 2003/05/27 - Amir Noam <amir.noam at intel dot com> + * - Fix backward compatibility issues: + * For drivers not using ABI versions, slave was set down while + * it should be left up before enslaving. + * Also, master was not set down and the default set_mac_address() + * would fail and generate an error message in the system log. + * - For opt_c: slave should not be set to the master's setting + * while it is running. It was already set during enslave. To + * simplify things, it is now handeled separately. + * + * - 2003/12/01 - Shmulik Hen <shmulik.hen at intel dot com> + * - Code cleanup and style changes + * set version to 1.1.0 + */ + +#define APP_VERSION "1.1.0" +#define APP_RELDATE "December 1, 2003" +#define APP_NAME "ifenslave" + +static char *version = +APP_NAME ".c:v" APP_VERSION " (" APP_RELDATE ")\n" +"o Donald Becker (becker@cesdis.gsfc.nasa.gov).\n" +"o Detach support added on 2000/10/02 by Willy Tarreau (willy at meta-x.org).\n" +"o 2.4 kernel support added on 2001/02/16 by Chad N. Tindel\n" +" (ctindel at ieee dot org).\n"; + +static const char *usage_msg = +"Usage: ifenslave [-f] <master-if> <slave-if> [<slave-if>...]\n" +" ifenslave -d <master-if> <slave-if> [<slave-if>...]\n" +" ifenslave -c <master-if> <slave-if>\n" +" ifenslave --help\n"; + +static const char *help_msg = +"\n" +" To create a bond device, simply follow these three steps :\n" +" - ensure that the required drivers are properly loaded :\n" +" # modprobe bonding ; modprobe <3c59x|eepro100|pcnet32|tulip|...>\n" +" - assign an IP address to the bond device :\n" +" # ifconfig bond0 <addr> netmask <mask> broadcast <bcast>\n" +" - attach all the interfaces you need to the bond device :\n" +" # ifenslave [{-f|--force}] bond0 eth0 [eth1 [eth2]...]\n" +" If bond0 didn't have a MAC address, it will take eth0's. Then, all\n" +" interfaces attached AFTER this assignment will get the same MAC addr.\n" +" (except for ALB/TLB modes)\n" +"\n" +" To set the bond device down and automatically release all the slaves :\n" +" # ifconfig bond0 down\n" +"\n" +" To detach a dead interface without setting the bond device down :\n" +" # ifenslave {-d|--detach} bond0 eth0 [eth1 [eth2]...]\n" +"\n" +" To change active slave :\n" +" # ifenslave {-c|--change-active} bond0 eth0\n" +"\n" +" To show master interface info\n" +" # ifenslave bond0\n" +"\n" +" To show all interfaces info\n" +" # ifenslave {-a|--all-interfaces}\n" +"\n" +" To be more verbose\n" +" # ifenslave {-v|--verbose} ...\n" +"\n" +" # ifenslave {-u|--usage} Show usage\n" +" # ifenslave {-V|--version} Show version\n" +" # ifenslave {-h|--help} This message\n" +"\n"; + +#include <unistd.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <stdio.h> +#include <ctype.h> +#include <string.h> +#include <errno.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <getopt.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <sys/socket.h> +#include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <linux/if.h> +#include <net/if_arp.h> +#include <linux/if_ether.h> +#include <linux/if_bonding.h> +#include <linux/sockios.h> + +typedef unsigned long long u64; /* hack, so we may include kernel's ethtool.h */ +typedef __uint32_t u32; /* ditto */ +typedef __uint16_t u16; /* ditto */ +typedef __uint8_t u8; /* ditto */ +#include <linux/ethtool.h> + +struct option longopts[] = { + /* { name has_arg *flag val } */ + {"all-interfaces", 0, 0, 'a'}, /* Show all interfaces. */ + {"change-active", 0, 0, 'c'}, /* Change the active slave. */ + {"detach", 0, 0, 'd'}, /* Detach a slave interface. */ + {"force", 0, 0, 'f'}, /* Force the operation. */ + {"help", 0, 0, 'h'}, /* Give help */ + {"usage", 0, 0, 'u'}, /* Give usage */ + {"verbose", 0, 0, 'v'}, /* Report each action taken. */ + {"version", 0, 0, 'V'}, /* Emit version information. */ + { 0, 0, 0, 0} +}; + +/* Command-line flags. */ +unsigned int +opt_a = 0, /* Show-all-interfaces flag. */ +opt_c = 0, /* Change-active-slave flag. */ +opt_d = 0, /* Detach a slave interface. */ +opt_f = 0, /* Force the operation. */ +opt_h = 0, /* Help */ +opt_u = 0, /* Usage */ +opt_v = 0, /* Verbose flag. */ +opt_V = 0; /* Version */ + +int skfd = -1; /* AF_INET socket for ioctl() calls.*/ +int abi_ver = 0; /* userland - kernel ABI version */ +int hwaddr_set = 0; /* Master's hwaddr is set */ +int saved_errno; + +struct ifreq master_mtu, master_flags, master_hwaddr; +struct ifreq slave_mtu, slave_flags, slave_hwaddr; + +struct dev_ifr { + struct ifreq *req_ifr; + char *req_name; + int req_type; +}; + +struct dev_ifr master_ifra[] = { + {&master_mtu, "SIOCGIFMTU", SIOCGIFMTU}, + {&master_flags, "SIOCGIFFLAGS", SIOCGIFFLAGS}, + {&master_hwaddr, "SIOCGIFHWADDR", SIOCGIFHWADDR}, + {NULL, "", 0} +}; + +struct dev_ifr slave_ifra[] = { + {&slave_mtu, "SIOCGIFMTU", SIOCGIFMTU}, + {&slave_flags, "SIOCGIFFLAGS", SIOCGIFFLAGS}, + {&slave_hwaddr, "SIOCGIFHWADDR", SIOCGIFHWADDR}, + {NULL, "", 0} +}; + +static void if_print(char *ifname); +static int get_drv_info(char *master_ifname); +static int get_if_settings(char *ifname, struct dev_ifr ifra[]); +static int get_slave_flags(char *slave_ifname); +static int set_master_hwaddr(char *master_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr); +static int set_slave_hwaddr(char *slave_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr); +static int set_slave_mtu(char *slave_ifname, int mtu); +static int set_if_flags(char *ifname, short flags); +static int set_if_up(char *ifname, short flags); +static int set_if_down(char *ifname, short flags); +static int clear_if_addr(char *ifname); +static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname); +static int change_active(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname); +static int enslave(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname); +static int release(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname); +#define v_print(fmt, args...) \ + if (opt_v) \ + fprintf(stderr, fmt, ## args ) + +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ + char **spp, *master_ifname, *slave_ifname; + int c, i, rv; + int res = 0; + int exclusive = 0; + + while ((c = getopt_long(argc, argv, "acdfhuvV", longopts, 0)) != EOF) { + switch (c) { + case 'a': opt_a++; exclusive++; break; + case 'c': opt_c++; exclusive++; break; + case 'd': opt_d++; exclusive++; break; + case 'f': opt_f++; exclusive++; break; + case 'h': opt_h++; exclusive++; break; + case 'u': opt_u++; exclusive++; break; + case 'v': opt_v++; break; + case 'V': opt_V++; exclusive++; break; + + case '?': + fprintf(stderr, usage_msg); + res = 2; + goto out; + } + } + + /* options check */ + if (exclusive > 1) { + fprintf(stderr, usage_msg); + res = 2; + goto out; + } + + if (opt_v || opt_V) { + printf(version); + if (opt_V) { + res = 0; + goto out; + } + } + + if (opt_u) { + printf(usage_msg); + res = 0; + goto out; + } + + if (opt_h) { + printf(usage_msg); + printf(help_msg); + res = 0; + goto out; + } + + /* Open a basic socket */ + if ((skfd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0)) < 0) { + perror("socket"); + res = 1; + goto out; + } + + if (opt_a) { + if (optind == argc) { + /* No remaining args */ + /* show all interfaces */ + if_print((char *)NULL); + goto out; + } else { + /* Just show usage */ + fprintf(stderr, usage_msg); + res = 2; + goto out; + } + } + + /* Copy the interface name */ + spp = argv + optind; + master_ifname = *spp++; + + if (master_ifname == NULL) { + fprintf(stderr, usage_msg); + res = 2; + goto out; + } + + /* exchange abi version with bonding module */ + res = get_drv_info(master_ifname); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s': Error: handshake with driver failed. " + "Aborting\n", + master_ifname); + goto out; + } + + slave_ifname = *spp++; + + if (slave_ifname == NULL) { + if (opt_d || opt_c) { + fprintf(stderr, usage_msg); + res = 2; + goto out; + } + + /* A single arg means show the + * configuration for this interface + */ + if_print(master_ifname); + goto out; + } + + res = get_if_settings(master_ifname, master_ifra); + if (res) { + /* Probably a good reason not to go on */ + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s': Error: get settings failed: %s. " + "Aborting\n", + master_ifname, strerror(res)); + goto out; + } + + /* check if master is indeed a master; + * if not then fail any operation + */ + if (!(master_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_MASTER)) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Illegal operation; the specified interface '%s' " + "is not a master. Aborting\n", + master_ifname); + res = 1; + goto out; + } + + /* check if master is up; if not then fail any operation */ + if (!(master_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_UP)) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Illegal operation; the specified master interface " + "'%s' is not up.\n", + master_ifname); + res = 1; + goto out; + } + + /* Only for enslaving */ + if (!opt_c && !opt_d) { + sa_family_t master_family = master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_family; + unsigned char *hwaddr = + (unsigned char *)master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data; + + /* The family '1' is ARPHRD_ETHER for ethernet. */ + if (master_family != 1 && !opt_f) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Illegal operation: The specified master " + "interface '%s' is not ethernet-like.\n " + "This program is designed to work with " + "ethernet-like network interfaces.\n " + "Use the '-f' option to force the " + "operation.\n", + master_ifname); + res = 1; + goto out; + } + + /* Check master's hw addr */ + for (i = 0; i < 6; i++) { + if (hwaddr[i] != 0) { + hwaddr_set = 1; + break; + } + } + + if (hwaddr_set) { + v_print("current hardware address of master '%s' " + "is %2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x, " + "type %d\n", + master_ifname, + hwaddr[0], hwaddr[1], + hwaddr[2], hwaddr[3], + hwaddr[4], hwaddr[5], + master_family); + } + } + + /* Accepts only one slave */ + if (opt_c) { + /* change active slave */ + res = get_slave_flags(slave_ifname); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: get flags failed. " + "Aborting\n", + slave_ifname); + goto out; + } + res = change_active(master_ifname, slave_ifname); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s', Slave '%s': Error: " + "Change active failed\n", + master_ifname, slave_ifname); + } + } else { + /* Accept multiple slaves */ + do { + if (opt_d) { + /* detach a slave interface from the master */ + rv = get_slave_flags(slave_ifname); + if (rv) { + /* Can't work with this slave. */ + /* remember the error and skip it*/ + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: get flags " + "failed. Skipping\n", + slave_ifname); + res = rv; + continue; + } + rv = release(master_ifname, slave_ifname); + if (rv) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s', Slave '%s': Error: " + "Release failed\n", + master_ifname, slave_ifname); + res = rv; + } + } else { + /* attach a slave interface to the master */ + rv = get_if_settings(slave_ifname, slave_ifra); + if (rv) { + /* Can't work with this slave. */ + /* remember the error and skip it*/ + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: get " + "settings failed: %s. " + "Skipping\n", + slave_ifname, strerror(rv)); + res = rv; + continue; + } + rv = enslave(master_ifname, slave_ifname); + if (rv) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s', Slave '%s': Error: " + "Enslave failed\n", + master_ifname, slave_ifname); + res = rv; + } + } + } while ((slave_ifname = *spp++) != NULL); + } + +out: + if (skfd >= 0) { + close(skfd); + } + + return res; +} + +static short mif_flags; + +/* Get the inteface configuration from the kernel. */ +static int if_getconfig(char *ifname) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int metric, mtu; /* Parameters of the master interface. */ + struct sockaddr dstaddr, broadaddr, netmask; + unsigned char *hwaddr; + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFFLAGS, &ifr) < 0) + return -1; + mif_flags = ifr.ifr_flags; + printf("The result of SIOCGIFFLAGS on %s is %x.\n", + ifname, ifr.ifr_flags); + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFADDR, &ifr) < 0) + return -1; + printf("The result of SIOCGIFADDR is %2.2x.%2.2x.%2.2x.%2.2x.\n", + ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[0], ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[1], + ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[2], ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data[3]); + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFHWADDR, &ifr) < 0) + return -1; + + /* Gotta convert from 'char' to unsigned for printf(). */ + hwaddr = (unsigned char *)ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data; + printf("The result of SIOCGIFHWADDR is type %d " + "%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x.\n", + ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_family, hwaddr[0], hwaddr[1], + hwaddr[2], hwaddr[3], hwaddr[4], hwaddr[5]); + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFMETRIC, &ifr) < 0) { + metric = 0; + } else + metric = ifr.ifr_metric; + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFMTU, &ifr) < 0) + mtu = 0; + else + mtu = ifr.ifr_mtu; + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFDSTADDR, &ifr) < 0) { + memset(&dstaddr, 0, sizeof(struct sockaddr)); + } else + dstaddr = ifr.ifr_dstaddr; + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFBRDADDR, &ifr) < 0) { + memset(&broadaddr, 0, sizeof(struct sockaddr)); + } else + broadaddr = ifr.ifr_broadaddr; + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname); + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFNETMASK, &ifr) < 0) { + memset(&netmask, 0, sizeof(struct sockaddr)); + } else + netmask = ifr.ifr_netmask; + + return 0; +} + +static void if_print(char *ifname) +{ + char buff[1024]; + struct ifconf ifc; + struct ifreq *ifr; + int i; + + if (ifname == (char *)NULL) { + ifc.ifc_len = sizeof(buff); + ifc.ifc_buf = buff; + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFCONF, &ifc) < 0) { + perror("SIOCGIFCONF failed"); + return; + } + + ifr = ifc.ifc_req; + for (i = ifc.ifc_len / sizeof(struct ifreq); --i >= 0; ifr++) { + if (if_getconfig(ifr->ifr_name) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, + "%s: unknown interface.\n", + ifr->ifr_name); + continue; + } + + if (((mif_flags & IFF_UP) == 0) && !opt_a) continue; + /*ife_print(&ife);*/ + } + } else { + if (if_getconfig(ifname) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, + "%s: unknown interface.\n", ifname); + } + } +} + +static int get_drv_info(char *master_ifname) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + struct ethtool_drvinfo info; + char *endptr; + + memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + ifr.ifr_data = (caddr_t)&info; + + info.cmd = ETHTOOL_GDRVINFO; + strncpy(info.driver, "ifenslave", 32); + snprintf(info.fw_version, 32, "%d", BOND_ABI_VERSION); + + if (ioctl(skfd, SIOCETHTOOL, &ifr) < 0) { + if (errno == EOPNOTSUPP) { + goto out; + } + + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Master '%s': Error: get bonding info failed %s\n", + master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + return 1; + } + + abi_ver = strtoul(info.fw_version, &endptr, 0); + if (*endptr) { + v_print("Master '%s': Error: got invalid string as an ABI " + "version from the bonding module\n", + master_ifname); + return 1; + } + +out: + v_print("ABI ver is %d\n", abi_ver); + + return 0; +} + +static int change_active(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + if (!(slave_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_SLAVE)) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Illegal operation: The specified slave interface " + "'%s' is not a slave\n", + slave_ifname); + return 1; + } + + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + strncpy(ifr.ifr_slave, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + if ((ioctl(skfd, SIOCBONDCHANGEACTIVE, &ifr) < 0) && + (ioctl(skfd, BOND_CHANGE_ACTIVE_OLD, &ifr) < 0)) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCBONDCHANGEACTIVE failed: " + "%s\n", + master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + res = 1; + } + + return res; +} + +static int enslave(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + if (slave_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_SLAVE) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Illegal operation: The specified slave interface " + "'%s' is already a slave\n", + slave_ifname); + return 1; + } + + res = set_if_down(slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: bring interface down failed\n", + slave_ifname); + return res; + } + + if (abi_ver < 2) { + /* Older bonding versions would panic if the slave has no IP + * address, so get the IP setting from the master. + */ + res = set_if_addr(master_ifname, slave_ifname); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: set address failed\n", + slave_ifname); + return res; + } + } else { + res = clear_if_addr(slave_ifname); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: clear address failed\n", + slave_ifname); + return res; + } + } + + if (master_mtu.ifr_mtu != slave_mtu.ifr_mtu) { + res = set_slave_mtu(slave_ifname, master_mtu.ifr_mtu); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: set MTU failed\n", + slave_ifname); + return res; + } + } + + if (hwaddr_set) { + /* Master already has an hwaddr + * so set it's hwaddr to the slave + */ + if (abi_ver < 1) { + /* The driver is using an old ABI, so + * the application sets the slave's + * hwaddr + */ + res = set_slave_hwaddr(slave_ifname, + &(master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr)); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: set hw address " + "failed\n", + slave_ifname); + goto undo_mtu; + } + + /* For old ABI the application needs to bring the + * slave back up + */ + res = set_if_up(slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: bring interface " + "down failed\n", + slave_ifname); + goto undo_slave_mac; + } + } + /* The driver is using a new ABI, + * so the driver takes care of setting + * the slave's hwaddr and bringing + * it up again + */ + } else { + /* No hwaddr for master yet, so + * set the slave's hwaddr to it + */ + if (abi_ver < 1) { + /* For old ABI, the master needs to be + * down before setting it's hwaddr + */ + res = set_if_down(master_ifname, master_flags.ifr_flags); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s': Error: bring interface " + "down failed\n", + master_ifname); + goto undo_mtu; + } + } + + res = set_master_hwaddr(master_ifname, + &(slave_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr)); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s': Error: set hw address " + "failed\n", + master_ifname); + goto undo_mtu; + } + + if (abi_ver < 1) { + /* For old ABI, bring the master + * back up + */ + res = set_if_up(master_ifname, master_flags.ifr_flags); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Master '%s': Error: bring interface " + "up failed\n", + master_ifname); + goto undo_master_mac; + } + } + + hwaddr_set = 1; + } + + /* Do the real thing */ + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + strncpy(ifr.ifr_slave, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + if ((ioctl(skfd, SIOCBONDENSLAVE, &ifr) < 0) && + (ioctl(skfd, BOND_ENSLAVE_OLD, &ifr) < 0)) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCBONDENSLAVE failed: %s\n", + master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + res = 1; + } + + if (res) { + goto undo_master_mac; + } + + return 0; + +/* rollback (best effort) */ +undo_master_mac: + set_master_hwaddr(master_ifname, &(master_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr)); + hwaddr_set = 0; + goto undo_mtu; +undo_slave_mac: + set_slave_hwaddr(slave_ifname, &(slave_hwaddr.ifr_hwaddr)); +undo_mtu: + set_slave_mtu(slave_ifname, slave_mtu.ifr_mtu); + return res; +} + +static int release(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + if (!(slave_flags.ifr_flags & IFF_SLAVE)) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Illegal operation: The specified slave interface " + "'%s' is not a slave\n", + slave_ifname); + return 1; + } + + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + strncpy(ifr.ifr_slave, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + if ((ioctl(skfd, SIOCBONDRELEASE, &ifr) < 0) && + (ioctl(skfd, BOND_RELEASE_OLD, &ifr) < 0)) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCBONDRELEASE failed: %s\n", + master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + return 1; + } else if (abi_ver < 1) { + /* The driver is using an old ABI, so we'll set the interface + * down to avoid any conflicts due to same MAC/IP + */ + res = set_if_down(slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags); + if (res) { + fprintf(stderr, + "Slave '%s': Error: bring interface " + "down failed\n", + slave_ifname); + } + } + + /* set to default mtu */ + set_slave_mtu(slave_ifname, 1500); + + return res; +} + +static int get_if_settings(char *ifname, struct dev_ifr ifra[]) +{ + int i; + int res = 0; + + for (i = 0; ifra[i].req_ifr; i++) { + strncpy(ifra[i].req_ifr->ifr_name, ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + res = ioctl(skfd, ifra[i].req_type, ifra[i].req_ifr); + if (res < 0) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Interface '%s': Error: %s failed: %s\n", + ifname, ifra[i].req_name, + strerror(saved_errno)); + + return saved_errno; + } + } + + return 0; +} + +static int get_slave_flags(char *slave_ifname) +{ + int res = 0; + + strncpy(slave_flags.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCGIFFLAGS, &slave_flags); + if (res < 0) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Slave '%s': Error: SIOCGIFFLAGS failed: %s\n", + slave_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + } else { + v_print("Slave %s: flags %04X.\n", + slave_ifname, slave_flags.ifr_flags); + } + + return res; +} + +static int set_master_hwaddr(char *master_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr) +{ + unsigned char *addr = (unsigned char *)hwaddr->sa_data; + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + memcpy(&(ifr.ifr_hwaddr), hwaddr, sizeof(struct sockaddr)); + res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFHWADDR, &ifr); + if (res < 0) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Master '%s': Error: SIOCSIFHWADDR failed: %s\n", + master_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + return res; + } else { + v_print("Master '%s': hardware address set to " + "%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x.\n", + master_ifname, addr[0], addr[1], addr[2], + addr[3], addr[4], addr[5]); + } + + return res; +} + +static int set_slave_hwaddr(char *slave_ifname, struct sockaddr *hwaddr) +{ + unsigned char *addr = (unsigned char *)hwaddr->sa_data; + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + memcpy(&(ifr.ifr_hwaddr), hwaddr, sizeof(struct sockaddr)); + res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFHWADDR, &ifr); + if (res < 0) { + saved_errno = errno; + + v_print("Slave '%s': Error: SIOCSIFHWADDR failed: %s\n", + slave_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + + if (saved_errno == EBUSY) { + v_print(" The device is busy: it must be idle " + "before running this command.\n"); + } else if (saved_errno == EOPNOTSUPP) { + v_print(" The device does not support setting " + "the MAC address.\n" + " Your kernel likely does not support slave " + "devices.\n"); + } else if (saved_errno == EINVAL) { + v_print(" The device's address type does not match " + "the master's address type.\n"); + } + return res; + } else { + v_print("Slave '%s': hardware address set to " + "%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x:%2.2x.\n", + slave_ifname, addr[0], addr[1], addr[2], + addr[3], addr[4], addr[5]); + } + + return res; +} + +static int set_slave_mtu(char *slave_ifname, int mtu) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + ifr.ifr_mtu = mtu; + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + + res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFMTU, &ifr); + if (res < 0) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Slave '%s': Error: SIOCSIFMTU failed: %s\n", + slave_ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + } else { + v_print("Slave '%s': MTU set to %d.\n", slave_ifname, mtu); + } + + return res; +} + +static int set_if_flags(char *ifname, short flags) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + ifr.ifr_flags = flags; + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + + res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFFLAGS, &ifr); + if (res < 0) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCSIFFLAGS failed: %s\n", + ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + } else { + v_print("Interface '%s': flags set to %04X.\n", ifname, flags); + } + + return res; +} + +static int set_if_up(char *ifname, short flags) +{ + return set_if_flags(ifname, flags | IFF_UP); +} + +static int set_if_down(char *ifname, short flags) +{ + return set_if_flags(ifname, flags & ~IFF_UP); +} + +static int clear_if_addr(char *ifname) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int res = 0; + + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + ifr.ifr_addr.sa_family = AF_INET; + memset(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data, 0, sizeof(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data)); + + res = ioctl(skfd, SIOCSIFADDR, &ifr); + if (res < 0) { + saved_errno = errno; + v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCSIFADDR failed: %s\n", + ifname, strerror(saved_errno)); + } else { + v_print("Interface '%s': address cleared\n", ifname); + } + + return res; +} + +static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int res; + unsigned char *ipaddr; + int i; + struct { + char *req_name; + char *desc; + int g_ioctl; + int s_ioctl; + } ifra[] = { + {"IFADDR", "addr", SIOCGIFADDR, SIOCSIFADDR}, + {"DSTADDR", "destination addr", SIOCGIFDSTADDR, SIOCSIFDSTADDR}, + {"BRDADDR", "broadcast addr", SIOCGIFBRDADDR, SIOCSIFBRDADDR}, + {"NETMASK", "netmask", SIOCGIFNETMASK, SIOCSIFNETMASK}, + {NULL, NULL, 0, 0}, + }; + + for (i = 0; ifra[i].req_name; i++) { + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, master_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + res = ioctl(skfd, ifra[i].g_ioctl, &ifr); + if (res < 0) { + int saved_errno = errno; + + v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCG%s failed: %s\n", + master_ifname, ifra[i].req_name, + strerror(saved_errno)); + + ifr.ifr_addr.sa_family = AF_INET; + memset(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data, 0, + sizeof(ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data)); + } + + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, slave_ifname, IFNAMSIZ); + res = ioctl(skfd, ifra[i].s_ioctl, &ifr); + if (res < 0) { + int saved_errno = errno; + + v_print("Interface '%s': Error: SIOCS%s failed: %s\n", + slave_ifname, ifra[i].req_name, + strerror(saved_errno)); + + return res; + } + + ipaddr = ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data; + v_print("Interface '%s': set IP %s to %d.%d.%d.%d\n", + slave_ifname, ifra[i].desc, + ipaddr[0], ipaddr[1], ipaddr[2], ipaddr[3]); + } + + return 0; +} + +/* + * Local variables: + * version-control: t + * kept-new-versions: 5 + * c-indent-level: 4 + * c-basic-offset: 4 + * tab-width: 4 + * compile-command: "gcc -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O -I/usr/src/linux/include ifenslave.c -o ifenslave" + * End: + */ + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a2c893a7475d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,878 @@ +/proc/sys/net/ipv4/* Variables: + +ip_forward - BOOLEAN + 0 - disabled (default) + not 0 - enabled + + Forward Packets between interfaces. + + This variable is special, its change resets all configuration + parameters to their default state (RFC1122 for hosts, RFC1812 + for routers) + +ip_default_ttl - INTEGER + default 64 + +ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN + Disable Path MTU Discovery. + default FALSE + +min_pmtu - INTEGER + default 562 - minimum discovered Path MTU + +mtu_expires - INTEGER + Time, in seconds, that cached PMTU information is kept. + +min_adv_mss - INTEGER + The advertised MSS depends on the first hop route MTU, but will + never be lower than this setting. + +IP Fragmentation: + +ipfrag_high_thresh - INTEGER + Maximum memory used to reassemble IP fragments. When + ipfrag_high_thresh bytes of memory is allocated for this purpose, + the fragment handler will toss packets until ipfrag_low_thresh + is reached. + +ipfrag_low_thresh - INTEGER + See ipfrag_high_thresh + +ipfrag_time - INTEGER + Time in seconds to keep an IP fragment in memory. + +ipfrag_secret_interval - INTEGER + Regeneration interval (in seconds) of the hash secret (or lifetime + for the hash secret) for IP fragments. + Default: 600 + +INET peer storage: + +inet_peer_threshold - INTEGER + The approximate size of the storage. Starting from this threshold + entries will be thrown aggressively. This threshold also determines + entries' time-to-live and time intervals between garbage collection + passes. More entries, less time-to-live, less GC interval. + +inet_peer_minttl - INTEGER + Minimum time-to-live of entries. Should be enough to cover fragment + time-to-live on the reassembling side. This minimum time-to-live is + guaranteed if the pool size is less than inet_peer_threshold. + Measured in jiffies(1). + +inet_peer_maxttl - INTEGER + Maximum time-to-live of entries. Unused entries will expire after + this period of time if there is no memory pressure on the pool (i.e. + when the number of entries in the pool is very small). + Measured in jiffies(1). + +inet_peer_gc_mintime - INTEGER + Minimum interval between garbage collection passes. This interval is + in effect under high memory pressure on the pool. + Measured in jiffies(1). + +inet_peer_gc_maxtime - INTEGER + Minimum interval between garbage collection passes. This interval is + in effect under low (or absent) memory pressure on the pool. + Measured in jiffies(1). + +TCP variables: + +tcp_syn_retries - INTEGER + Number of times initial SYNs for an active TCP connection attempt + will be retransmitted. Should not be higher than 255. Default value + is 5, which corresponds to ~180seconds. + +tcp_synack_retries - INTEGER + Number of times SYNACKs for a passive TCP connection attempt will + be retransmitted. Should not be higher than 255. Default value + is 5, which corresponds to ~180seconds. + +tcp_keepalive_time - INTEGER + How often TCP sends out keepalive messages when keepalive is enabled. + Default: 2hours. + +tcp_keepalive_probes - INTEGER + How many keepalive probes TCP sends out, until it decides that the + connection is broken. Default value: 9. + +tcp_keepalive_intvl - INTEGER + How frequently the probes are send out. Multiplied by + tcp_keepalive_probes it is time to kill not responding connection, + after probes started. Default value: 75sec i.e. connection + will be aborted after ~11 minutes of retries. + +tcp_retries1 - INTEGER + How many times to retry before deciding that something is wrong + and it is necessary to report this suspicion to network layer. + Minimal RFC value is 3, it is default, which corresponds + to ~3sec-8min depending on RTO. + +tcp_retries2 - INTEGER + How may times to retry before killing alive TCP connection. + RFC1122 says that the limit should be longer than 100 sec. + It is too small number. Default value 15 corresponds to ~13-30min + depending on RTO. + +tcp_orphan_retries - INTEGER + How may times to retry before killing TCP connection, closed + by our side. Default value 7 corresponds to ~50sec-16min + depending on RTO. If you machine is loaded WEB server, + you should think about lowering this value, such sockets + may consume significant resources. Cf. tcp_max_orphans. + +tcp_fin_timeout - INTEGER + Time to hold socket in state FIN-WAIT-2, if it was closed + by our side. Peer can be broken and never close its side, + or even died unexpectedly. Default value is 60sec. + Usual value used in 2.2 was 180 seconds, you may restore + it, but remember that if your machine is even underloaded WEB server, + you risk to overflow memory with kilotons of dead sockets, + FIN-WAIT-2 sockets are less dangerous than FIN-WAIT-1, + because they eat maximum 1.5K of memory, but they tend + to live longer. Cf. tcp_max_orphans. + +tcp_max_tw_buckets - INTEGER + Maximal number of timewait sockets held by system simultaneously. + If this number is exceeded time-wait socket is immediately destroyed + and warning is printed. This limit exists only to prevent + simple DoS attacks, you _must_ not lower the limit artificially, + but rather increase it (probably, after increasing installed memory), + if network conditions require more than default value. + +tcp_tw_recycle - BOOLEAN + Enable fast recycling TIME-WAIT sockets. Default value is 0. + It should not be changed without advice/request of technical + experts. + +tcp_tw_reuse - BOOLEAN + Allow to reuse TIME-WAIT sockets for new connections when it is + safe from protocol viewpoint. Default value is 0. + It should not be changed without advice/request of technical + experts. + +tcp_max_orphans - INTEGER + Maximal number of TCP sockets not attached to any user file handle, + held by system. If this number is exceeded orphaned connections are + reset immediately and warning is printed. This limit exists + only to prevent simple DoS attacks, you _must_ not rely on this + or lower the limit artificially, but rather increase it + (probably, after increasing installed memory), + if network conditions require more than default value, + and tune network services to linger and kill such states + more aggressively. Let me to remind again: each orphan eats + up to ~64K of unswappable memory. + +tcp_abort_on_overflow - BOOLEAN + If listening service is too slow to accept new connections, + reset them. Default state is FALSE. It means that if overflow + occurred due to a burst, connection will recover. Enable this + option _only_ if you are really sure that listening daemon + cannot be tuned to accept connections faster. Enabling this + option can harm clients of your server. + +tcp_syncookies - BOOLEAN + Only valid when the kernel was compiled with CONFIG_SYNCOOKIES + Send out syncookies when the syn backlog queue of a socket + overflows. This is to prevent against the common 'syn flood attack' + Default: FALSE + + Note, that syncookies is fallback facility. + It MUST NOT be used to help highly loaded servers to stand + against legal connection rate. If you see synflood warnings + in your logs, but investigation shows that they occur + because of overload with legal connections, you should tune + another parameters until this warning disappear. + See: tcp_max_syn_backlog, tcp_synack_retries, tcp_abort_on_overflow. + + syncookies seriously violate TCP protocol, do not allow + to use TCP extensions, can result in serious degradation + of some services (f.e. SMTP relaying), visible not by you, + but your clients and relays, contacting you. While you see + synflood warnings in logs not being really flooded, your server + is seriously misconfigured. + +tcp_stdurg - BOOLEAN + Use the Host requirements interpretation of the TCP urg pointer field. + Most hosts use the older BSD interpretation, so if you turn this on + Linux might not communicate correctly with them. + Default: FALSE + +tcp_max_syn_backlog - INTEGER + Maximal number of remembered connection requests, which are + still did not receive an acknowledgment from connecting client. + Default value is 1024 for systems with more than 128Mb of memory, + and 128 for low memory machines. If server suffers of overload, + try to increase this number. + +tcp_window_scaling - BOOLEAN + Enable window scaling as defined in RFC1323. + +tcp_timestamps - BOOLEAN + Enable timestamps as defined in RFC1323. + +tcp_sack - BOOLEAN + Enable select acknowledgments (SACKS). + +tcp_fack - BOOLEAN + Enable FACK congestion avoidance and fast retransmission. + The value is not used, if tcp_sack is not enabled. + +tcp_dsack - BOOLEAN + Allows TCP to send "duplicate" SACKs. + +tcp_ecn - BOOLEAN + Enable Explicit Congestion Notification in TCP. + +tcp_reordering - INTEGER + Maximal reordering of packets in a TCP stream. + Default: 3 + +tcp_retrans_collapse - BOOLEAN + Bug-to-bug compatibility with some broken printers. + On retransmit try to send bigger packets to work around bugs in + certain TCP stacks. + +tcp_wmem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, default, max + min: Amount of memory reserved for send buffers for TCP socket. + Each TCP socket has rights to use it due to fact of its birth. + Default: 4K + + default: Amount of memory allowed for send buffers for TCP socket + by default. This value overrides net.core.wmem_default used + by other protocols, it is usually lower than net.core.wmem_default. + Default: 16K + + max: Maximal amount of memory allowed for automatically selected + send buffers for TCP socket. This value does not override + net.core.wmem_max, "static" selection via SO_SNDBUF does not use this. + Default: 128K + +tcp_rmem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, default, max + min: Minimal size of receive buffer used by TCP sockets. + It is guaranteed to each TCP socket, even under moderate memory + pressure. + Default: 8K + + default: default size of receive buffer used by TCP sockets. + This value overrides net.core.rmem_default used by other protocols. + Default: 87380 bytes. This value results in window of 65535 with + default setting of tcp_adv_win_scale and tcp_app_win:0 and a bit + less for default tcp_app_win. See below about these variables. + + max: maximal size of receive buffer allowed for automatically + selected receiver buffers for TCP socket. This value does not override + net.core.rmem_max, "static" selection via SO_RCVBUF does not use this. + Default: 87380*2 bytes. + +tcp_mem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, pressure, max + low: below this number of pages TCP is not bothered about its + memory appetite. + + pressure: when amount of memory allocated by TCP exceeds this number + of pages, TCP moderates its memory consumption and enters memory + pressure mode, which is exited when memory consumption falls + under "low". + + high: number of pages allowed for queueing by all TCP sockets. + + Defaults are calculated at boot time from amount of available + memory. + +tcp_app_win - INTEGER + Reserve max(window/2^tcp_app_win, mss) of window for application + buffer. Value 0 is special, it means that nothing is reserved. + Default: 31 + +tcp_adv_win_scale - INTEGER + Count buffering overhead as bytes/2^tcp_adv_win_scale + (if tcp_adv_win_scale > 0) or bytes-bytes/2^(-tcp_adv_win_scale), + if it is <= 0. + Default: 2 + +tcp_rfc1337 - BOOLEAN + If set, the TCP stack behaves conforming to RFC1337. If unset, + we are not conforming to RFC, but prevent TCP TIME_WAIT + assassination. + Default: 0 + +tcp_low_latency - BOOLEAN + If set, the TCP stack makes decisions that prefer lower + latency as opposed to higher throughput. By default, this + option is not set meaning that higher throughput is preferred. + An example of an application where this default should be + changed would be a Beowulf compute cluster. + Default: 0 + +tcp_westwood - BOOLEAN + Enable TCP Westwood+ congestion control algorithm. + TCP Westwood+ is a sender-side only modification of the TCP Reno + protocol stack that optimizes the performance of TCP congestion + control. It is based on end-to-end bandwidth estimation to set + congestion window and slow start threshold after a congestion + episode. Using this estimation, TCP Westwood+ adaptively sets a + slow start threshold and a congestion window which takes into + account the bandwidth used at the time congestion is experienced. + TCP Westwood+ significantly increases fairness wrt TCP Reno in + wired networks and throughput over wireless links. + Default: 0 + +tcp_vegas_cong_avoid - BOOLEAN + Enable TCP Vegas congestion avoidance algorithm. + TCP Vegas is a sender-side only change to TCP that anticipates + the onset of congestion by estimating the bandwidth. TCP Vegas + adjusts the sending rate by modifying the congestion + window. TCP Vegas should provide less packet loss, but it is + not as aggressive as TCP Reno. + Default:0 + +tcp_bic - BOOLEAN + Enable BIC TCP congestion control algorithm. + BIC-TCP is a sender-side only change that ensures a linear RTT + fairness under large windows while offering both scalability and + bounded TCP-friendliness. The protocol combines two schemes + called additive increase and binary search increase. When the + congestion window is large, additive increase with a large + increment ensures linear RTT fairness as well as good + scalability. Under small congestion windows, binary search + increase provides TCP friendliness. + Default: 0 + +tcp_bic_low_window - INTEGER + Sets the threshold window (in packets) where BIC TCP starts to + adjust the congestion window. Below this threshold BIC TCP behaves + the same as the default TCP Reno. + Default: 14 + +tcp_bic_fast_convergence - BOOLEAN + Forces BIC TCP to more quickly respond to changes in congestion + window. Allows two flows sharing the same connection to converge + more rapidly. + Default: 1 + +tcp_default_win_scale - INTEGER + Sets the minimum window scale TCP will negotiate for on all + conections. + Default: 7 + +tcp_tso_win_divisor - INTEGER + This allows control over what percentage of the congestion window + can be consumed by a single TSO frame. + The setting of this parameter is a choice between burstiness and + building larger TSO frames. + Default: 8 + +tcp_frto - BOOLEAN + Enables F-RTO, an enhanced recovery algorithm for TCP retransmission + timeouts. It is particularly beneficial in wireless environments + where packet loss is typically due to random radio interference + rather than intermediate router congestion. + +somaxconn - INTEGER + Limit of socket listen() backlog, known in userspace as SOMAXCONN. + Defaults to 128. See also tcp_max_syn_backlog for additional tuning + for TCP sockets. + +IP Variables: + +ip_local_port_range - 2 INTEGERS + Defines the local port range that is used by TCP and UDP to + choose the local port. The first number is the first, the + second the last local port number. Default value depends on + amount of memory available on the system: + > 128Mb 32768-61000 + < 128Mb 1024-4999 or even less. + This number defines number of active connections, which this + system can issue simultaneously to systems not supporting + TCP extensions (timestamps). With tcp_tw_recycle enabled + (i.e. by default) range 1024-4999 is enough to issue up to + 2000 connections per second to systems supporting timestamps. + +ip_nonlocal_bind - BOOLEAN + If set, allows processes to bind() to non-local IP addresses, + which can be quite useful - but may break some applications. + Default: 0 + +ip_dynaddr - BOOLEAN + If set non-zero, enables support for dynamic addresses. + If set to a non-zero value larger than 1, a kernel log + message will be printed when dynamic address rewriting + occurs. + Default: 0 + +icmp_echo_ignore_all - BOOLEAN +icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts - BOOLEAN + If either is set to true, then the kernel will ignore either all + ICMP ECHO requests sent to it or just those to broadcast/multicast + addresses, respectively. + +icmp_ratelimit - INTEGER + Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMP packets whose type matches + icmp_ratemask (see below) to specific targets. + 0 to disable any limiting, otherwise the maximal rate in jiffies(1) + Default: 100 + +icmp_ratemask - INTEGER + Mask made of ICMP types for which rates are being limited. + Significant bits: IHGFEDCBA9876543210 + Default mask: 0000001100000011000 (6168) + + Bit definitions (see include/linux/icmp.h): + 0 Echo Reply + 3 Destination Unreachable * + 4 Source Quench * + 5 Redirect + 8 Echo Request + B Time Exceeded * + C Parameter Problem * + D Timestamp Request + E Timestamp Reply + F Info Request + G Info Reply + H Address Mask Request + I Address Mask Reply + + * These are rate limited by default (see default mask above) + +icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses - BOOLEAN + Some routers violate RFC1122 by sending bogus responses to broadcast + frames. Such violations are normally logged via a kernel warning. + If this is set to TRUE, the kernel will not give such warnings, which + will avoid log file clutter. + Default: FALSE + +igmp_max_memberships - INTEGER + Change the maximum number of multicast groups we can subscribe to. + Default: 20 + +conf/interface/* changes special settings per interface (where "interface" is + the name of your network interface) +conf/all/* is special, changes the settings for all interfaces + + +log_martians - BOOLEAN + Log packets with impossible addresses to kernel log. + log_martians for the interface will be enabled if at least one of + conf/{all,interface}/log_martians is set to TRUE, + it will be disabled otherwise + +accept_redirects - BOOLEAN + Accept ICMP redirect messages. + accept_redirects for the interface will be enabled if: + - both conf/{all,interface}/accept_redirects are TRUE in the case forwarding + for the interface is enabled + or + - at least one of conf/{all,interface}/accept_redirects is TRUE in the case + forwarding for the interface is disabled + accept_redirects for the interface will be disabled otherwise + default TRUE (host) + FALSE (router) + +forwarding - BOOLEAN + Enable IP forwarding on this interface. + +mc_forwarding - BOOLEAN + Do multicast routing. The kernel needs to be compiled with CONFIG_MROUTE + and a multicast routing daemon is required. + conf/all/mc_forwarding must also be set to TRUE to enable multicast routing + for the interface + +medium_id - INTEGER + Integer value used to differentiate the devices by the medium they + are attached to. Two devices can have different id values when + the broadcast packets are received only on one of them. + The default value 0 means that the device is the only interface + to its medium, value of -1 means that medium is not known. + + Currently, it is used to change the proxy_arp behavior: + the proxy_arp feature is enabled for packets forwarded between + two devices attached to different media. + +proxy_arp - BOOLEAN + Do proxy arp. + proxy_arp for the interface will be enabled if at least one of + conf/{all,interface}/proxy_arp is set to TRUE, + it will be disabled otherwise + +shared_media - BOOLEAN + Send(router) or accept(host) RFC1620 shared media redirects. + Overrides ip_secure_redirects. + shared_media for the interface will be enabled if at least one of + conf/{all,interface}/shared_media is set to TRUE, + it will be disabled otherwise + default TRUE + +secure_redirects - BOOLEAN + Accept ICMP redirect messages only for gateways, + listed in default gateway list. + secure_redirects for the interface will be enabled if at least one of + conf/{all,interface}/secure_redirects is set to TRUE, + it will be disabled otherwise + default TRUE + +send_redirects - BOOLEAN + Send redirects, if router. + send_redirects for the interface will be enabled if at least one of + conf/{all,interface}/send_redirects is set to TRUE, + it will be disabled otherwise + Default: TRUE + +bootp_relay - BOOLEAN + Accept packets with source address 0.b.c.d destined + not to this host as local ones. It is supposed, that + BOOTP relay daemon will catch and forward such packets. + conf/all/bootp_relay must also be set to TRUE to enable BOOTP relay + for the interface + default FALSE + Not Implemented Yet. + +accept_source_route - BOOLEAN + Accept packets with SRR option. + conf/all/accept_source_route must also be set to TRUE to accept packets + with SRR option on the interface + default TRUE (router) + FALSE (host) + +rp_filter - BOOLEAN + 1 - do source validation by reversed path, as specified in RFC1812 + Recommended option for single homed hosts and stub network + routers. Could cause troubles for complicated (not loop free) + networks running a slow unreliable protocol (sort of RIP), + or using static routes. + + 0 - No source validation. + + conf/all/rp_filter must also be set to TRUE to do source validation + on the interface + + Default value is 0. Note that some distributions enable it + in startup scripts. + +arp_filter - BOOLEAN + 1 - Allows you to have multiple network interfaces on the same + subnet, and have the ARPs for each interface be answered + based on whether or not the kernel would route a packet from + the ARP'd IP out that interface (therefore you must use source + based routing for this to work). In other words it allows control + of which cards (usually 1) will respond to an arp request. + + 0 - (default) The kernel can respond to arp requests with addresses + from other interfaces. This may seem wrong but it usually makes + sense, because it increases the chance of successful communication. + IP addresses are owned by the complete host on Linux, not by + particular interfaces. Only for more complex setups like load- + balancing, does this behaviour cause problems. + + arp_filter for the interface will be enabled if at least one of + conf/{all,interface}/arp_filter is set to TRUE, + it will be disabled otherwise + +arp_announce - INTEGER + Define different restriction levels for announcing the local + source IP address from IP packets in ARP requests sent on + interface: + 0 - (default) Use any local address, configured on any interface + 1 - Try to avoid local addresses that are not in the target's + subnet for this interface. This mode is useful when target + hosts reachable via this interface require the source IP + address in ARP requests to be part of their logical network + configured on the receiving interface. When we generate the + request we will check all our subnets that include the + target IP and will preserve the source address if it is from + such subnet. If there is no such subnet we select source + address according to the rules for level 2. + 2 - Always use the best local address for this target. + In this mode we ignore the source address in the IP packet + and try to select local address that we prefer for talks with + the target host. Such local address is selected by looking + for primary IP addresses on all our subnets on the outgoing + interface that include the target IP address. If no suitable + local address is found we select the first local address + we have on the outgoing interface or on all other interfaces, + with the hope we will receive reply for our request and + even sometimes no matter the source IP address we announce. + + The max value from conf/{all,interface}/arp_announce is used. + + Increasing the restriction level gives more chance for + receiving answer from the resolved target while decreasing + the level announces more valid sender's information. + +arp_ignore - INTEGER + Define different modes for sending replies in response to + received ARP requests that resolve local target IP addresses: + 0 - (default): reply for any local target IP address, configured + on any interface + 1 - reply only if the target IP address is local address + configured on the incoming interface + 2 - reply only if the target IP address is local address + configured on the incoming interface and both with the + sender's IP address are part from same subnet on this interface + 3 - do not reply for local addresses configured with scope host, + only resolutions for global and link addresses are replied + 4-7 - reserved + 8 - do not reply for all local addresses + + The max value from conf/{all,interface}/arp_ignore is used + when ARP request is received on the {interface} + +app_solicit - INTEGER + The maximum number of probes to send to the user space ARP daemon + via netlink before dropping back to multicast probes (see + mcast_solicit). Defaults to 0. + +disable_policy - BOOLEAN + Disable IPSEC policy (SPD) for this interface + +disable_xfrm - BOOLEAN + Disable IPSEC encryption on this interface, whatever the policy + + + +tag - INTEGER + Allows you to write a number, which can be used as required. + Default value is 0. + +(1) Jiffie: internal timeunit for the kernel. On the i386 1/100s, on the +Alpha 1/1024s. See the HZ define in /usr/include/asm/param.h for the exact +value on your system. + +Alexey Kuznetsov. +kuznet@ms2.inr.ac.ru + +Updated by: +Andi Kleen +ak@muc.de +Nicolas Delon +delon.nicolas@wanadoo.fr + + + + +/proc/sys/net/ipv6/* Variables: + +IPv6 has no global variables such as tcp_*. tcp_* settings under ipv4/ also +apply to IPv6 [XXX?]. + +bindv6only - BOOLEAN + Default value for IPV6_V6ONLY socket option, + which restricts use of the IPv6 socket to IPv6 communication + only. + TRUE: disable IPv4-mapped address feature + FALSE: enable IPv4-mapped address feature + + Default: FALSE (as specified in RFC2553bis) + +IPv6 Fragmentation: + +ip6frag_high_thresh - INTEGER + Maximum memory used to reassemble IPv6 fragments. When + ip6frag_high_thresh bytes of memory is allocated for this purpose, + the fragment handler will toss packets until ip6frag_low_thresh + is reached. + +ip6frag_low_thresh - INTEGER + See ip6frag_high_thresh + +ip6frag_time - INTEGER + Time in seconds to keep an IPv6 fragment in memory. + +ip6frag_secret_interval - INTEGER + Regeneration interval (in seconds) of the hash secret (or lifetime + for the hash secret) for IPv6 fragments. + Default: 600 + +conf/default/*: + Change the interface-specific default settings. + + +conf/all/*: + Change all the interface-specific settings. + + [XXX: Other special features than forwarding?] + +conf/all/forwarding - BOOLEAN + Enable global IPv6 forwarding between all interfaces. + + IPv4 and IPv6 work differently here; e.g. netfilter must be used + to control which interfaces may forward packets and which not. + + This also sets all interfaces' Host/Router setting + 'forwarding' to the specified value. See below for details. + + This referred to as global forwarding. + +conf/interface/*: + Change special settings per interface. + + The functional behaviour for certain settings is different + depending on whether local forwarding is enabled or not. + +accept_ra - BOOLEAN + Accept Router Advertisements; autoconfigure using them. + + Functional default: enabled if local forwarding is disabled. + disabled if local forwarding is enabled. + +accept_redirects - BOOLEAN + Accept Redirects. + + Functional default: enabled if local forwarding is disabled. + disabled if local forwarding is enabled. + +autoconf - BOOLEAN + Autoconfigure addresses using Prefix Information in Router + Advertisements. + + Functional default: enabled if accept_ra is enabled. + disabled if accept_ra is disabled. + +dad_transmits - INTEGER + The amount of Duplicate Address Detection probes to send. + Default: 1 + +forwarding - BOOLEAN + Configure interface-specific Host/Router behaviour. + + Note: It is recommended to have the same setting on all + interfaces; mixed router/host scenarios are rather uncommon. + + FALSE: + + By default, Host behaviour is assumed. This means: + + 1. IsRouter flag is not set in Neighbour Advertisements. + 2. Router Solicitations are being sent when necessary. + 3. If accept_ra is TRUE (default), accept Router + Advertisements (and do autoconfiguration). + 4. If accept_redirects is TRUE (default), accept Redirects. + + TRUE: + + If local forwarding is enabled, Router behaviour is assumed. + This means exactly the reverse from the above: + + 1. IsRouter flag is set in Neighbour Advertisements. + 2. Router Solicitations are not sent. + 3. Router Advertisements are ignored. + 4. Redirects are ignored. + + Default: FALSE if global forwarding is disabled (default), + otherwise TRUE. + +hop_limit - INTEGER + Default Hop Limit to set. + Default: 64 + +mtu - INTEGER + Default Maximum Transfer Unit + Default: 1280 (IPv6 required minimum) + +router_solicitation_delay - INTEGER + Number of seconds to wait after interface is brought up + before sending Router Solicitations. + Default: 1 + +router_solicitation_interval - INTEGER + Number of seconds to wait between Router Solicitations. + Default: 4 + +router_solicitations - INTEGER + Number of Router Solicitations to send until assuming no + routers are present. + Default: 3 + +use_tempaddr - INTEGER + Preference for Privacy Extensions (RFC3041). + <= 0 : disable Privacy Extensions + == 1 : enable Privacy Extensions, but prefer public + addresses over temporary addresses. + > 1 : enable Privacy Extensions and prefer temporary + addresses over public addresses. + Default: 0 (for most devices) + -1 (for point-to-point devices and loopback devices) + +temp_valid_lft - INTEGER + valid lifetime (in seconds) for temporary addresses. + Default: 604800 (7 days) + +temp_prefered_lft - INTEGER + Preferred lifetime (in seconds) for temporary addresses. + Default: 86400 (1 day) + +max_desync_factor - INTEGER + Maximum value for DESYNC_FACTOR, which is a random value + that ensures that clients don't synchronize with each + other and generate new addresses at exactly the same time. + value is in seconds. + Default: 600 + +regen_max_retry - INTEGER + Number of attempts before give up attempting to generate + valid temporary addresses. + Default: 5 + +max_addresses - INTEGER + Number of maximum addresses per interface. 0 disables limitation. + It is recommended not set too large value (or 0) because it would + be too easy way to crash kernel to allow to create too much of + autoconfigured addresses. + Default: 16 + +icmp/*: +ratelimit - INTEGER + Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMPv6 packets. + 0 to disable any limiting, otherwise the maximal rate in jiffies(1) + Default: 100 + + +IPv6 Update by: +Pekka Savola <pekkas@netcore.fi> +YOSHIFUJI Hideaki / USAGI Project <yoshfuji@linux-ipv6.org> + + +/proc/sys/net/bridge/* Variables: + +bridge-nf-call-arptables - BOOLEAN + 1 : pass bridged ARP traffic to arptables' FORWARD chain. + 0 : disable this. + Default: 1 + +bridge-nf-call-iptables - BOOLEAN + 1 : pass bridged IPv4 traffic to iptables' chains. + 0 : disable this. + Default: 1 + +bridge-nf-call-ip6tables - BOOLEAN + 1 : pass bridged IPv6 traffic to ip6tables' chains. + 0 : disable this. + Default: 1 + +bridge-nf-filter-vlan-tagged - BOOLEAN + 1 : pass bridged vlan-tagged ARP/IP traffic to arptables/iptables. + 0 : disable this. + Default: 1 + + +UNDOCUMENTED: + +dev_weight FIXME +discovery_slots FIXME +discovery_timeout FIXME +fast_poll_increase FIXME +ip6_queue_maxlen FIXME +lap_keepalive_time FIXME +lo_cong FIXME +max_baud_rate FIXME +max_dgram_qlen FIXME +max_noreply_time FIXME +max_tx_data_size FIXME +max_tx_window FIXME +min_tx_turn_time FIXME +mod_cong FIXME +no_cong FIXME +no_cong_thresh FIXME +slot_timeout FIXME +warn_noreply_time FIXME + +$Id: ip-sysctl.txt,v 1.20 2001/12/13 09:00:18 davem Exp $ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip_dynaddr.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip_dynaddr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..45f3c1268e86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip_dynaddr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +IP dynamic address hack-port v0.03 +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +This stuff allows diald ONESHOT connections to get established by +dynamically changing packet source address (and socket's if local procs). +It is implemented for TCP diald-box connections(1) and IP_MASQuerading(2). + +If enabled[*] and forwarding interface has changed: + 1) Socket (and packet) source address is rewritten ON RETRANSMISSIONS + while in SYN_SENT state (diald-box processes). + 2) Out-bounded MASQueraded source address changes ON OUTPUT (when + internal host does retransmission) until a packet from outside is + received by the tunnel. + +This is specially helpful for auto dialup links (diald), where the +``actual'' outgoing address is unknown at the moment the link is +going up. So, the *same* (local AND masqueraded) connections requests that +bring the link up will be able to get established. + +[*] At boot, by default no address rewriting is attempted. + To enable: + # echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr + To enable verbose mode: + # echo 2 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr + To disable (default) + # echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr + +Enjoy! + +-- Juanjo <jjciarla@raiz.uncu.edu.ar> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipddp.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipddp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..661a5558dd8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ipddp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +Text file for ipddp.c: + AppleTalk-IP Decapsulation and AppleTalk-IP Encapsulation + +This text file is written by Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org> + +Introduction +------------ + +AppleTalk-IP (IPDDP) is the method computers connected to AppleTalk +networks can use to communicate via IP. AppleTalk-IP is simply IP datagrams +inside AppleTalk packets. + +Through this driver you can either allow your Linux box to communicate +IP over an AppleTalk network or you can provide IP gatewaying functions +for your AppleTalk users. + +You can currently encapsulate or decapsulate AppleTalk-IP on LocalTalk, +EtherTalk and PPPTalk. The only limit on the protocol is that of what +kernel AppleTalk layer and drivers are available. + +Each mode requires its own user space software. + +Compiling AppleTalk-IP Decapsulation/Encapsulation +================================================= + +AppleTalk-IP decapsulation needs to be compiled into your kernel. You +will need to turn on AppleTalk-IP driver support. Then you will need to +select ONE of the two options; IP to AppleTalk-IP encapsulation support or +AppleTalk-IP to IP decapsulation support. If you compile the driver +statically you will only be able to use the driver for the function you have +enabled in the kernel. If you compile the driver as a module you can +select what mode you want it to run in via a module loading param. +ipddp_mode=1 for AppleTalk-IP encapsulation and ipddp_mode=2 for +AppleTalk-IP to IP decapsulation. + +Basic instructions for user space tools +======================================= + +To enable AppleTalk-IP decapsulation/encapsulation you will need the +proper tools. You can get the tools for decapsulation from +http://spacs1.spacs.k12.wi.us/~jschlst/index.html and for encapsulation +from http://www.maths.unm.edu/~bradford/ltpc.html + +I will briefly describe the operation of the tools, but you will +need to consult the supporting documentation for each set of tools. + +Decapsulation - You will need to download a software package called +MacGate. In this distribution there will be a tool called MacRoute +which enables you to add routes to the kernel for your Macs by hand. +Also the tool MacRegGateWay is included to register the +proper IP Gateway and IP addresses for your machine. Included in this +distribution is a patch to netatalk-1.4b2+asun2.0a17.2 (available from +ftp.u.washington.edu/pub/user-supported/asun/) this patch is optional +but it allows automatic adding and deleting of routes for Macs. (Handy +for locations with large Mac installations) + +Encapsulation - You will need to download a software daemon called ipddpd. +This software expects there to be an AppleTalk-IP gateway on the network. +You will also need to add the proper routes to route your Linux box's IP +traffic out the ipddp interface. + +Common Uses of ipddp.c +---------------------- +Of course AppleTalk-IP decapsulation and encapsulation, but specifically +decapsulation is being used most for connecting LocalTalk networks to +IP networks. Although it has been used on EtherTalk networks to allow +Macs that are only able to tunnel IP over EtherTalk. + +Encapsulation has been used to allow a Linux box stuck on a LocalTalk +network to use IP. It should work equally well if you are stuck on an +EtherTalk only network. + +Further Assistance +------------------- +You can contact me (Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org>) with any +questions regarding decapsulation or encapsulation. Bradford W. Johnson +<johns393@maroon.tc.umn.edu> originally wrote the ipddp.c driver for IP +encapsulation in AppleTalk. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/iphase.txt b/Documentation/networking/iphase.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..39ccb8595bf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/iphase.txt @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + READ ME FISRT + ATM (i)Chip IA Linux Driver Source +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + Read This Before You Begin! +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Description +----------- + +This is the README file for the Interphase PCI ATM (i)Chip IA Linux driver +source release. + +The features and limitations of this driver are as follows: + - A single VPI (VPI value of 0) is supported. + - Supports 4K VCs for the server board (with 512K control memory) and 1K + VCs for the client board (with 128K control memory). + - UBR, ABR and CBR service categories are supported. + - Only AAL5 is supported. + - Supports setting of PCR on the VCs. + - Multiple adapters in a system are supported. + - All variants of Interphase ATM PCI (i)Chip adapter cards are supported, + including x575 (OC3, control memory 128K , 512K and packet memory 128K, + 512K and 1M), x525 (UTP25) and x531 (DS3 and E3). See + http://www.iphase.com/products/ClassSheet.cfm?ClassID=ATM + for details. + - Only x86 platforms are supported. + - SMP is supported. + + +Before You Start +---------------- + + +Installation +------------ + +1. Installing the adapters in the system + To install the ATM adapters in the system, follow the steps below. + a. Login as root. + b. Shut down the system and power off the system. + c. Install one or more ATM adapters in the system. + d. Connect each adapter to a port on an ATM switch. The green 'Link' + LED on the front panel of the adapter will be on if the adapter is + connected to the switch properly when the system is powered up. + e. Power on and boot the system. + +2. [ Removed ] + +3. Rebuild kernel with ABR support + [ a. and b. removed ] + c. Reconfigure the kernel, choose the Interphase ia driver through "make + menuconfig" or "make xconfig". + d. Rebuild the kernel, loadable modules and the atm tools. + e. Install the new built kernel and modules and reboot. + +4. Load the adapter hardware driver (ia driver) if it is built as a module + a. Login as root. + b. Change directory to /lib/modules/<kernel-version>/atm. + c. Run "insmod suni.o;insmod iphase.o" + The yellow 'status' LED on the front panel of the adapter will blink + while the driver is loaded in the system. + d. To verify that the 'ia' driver is loaded successfully, run the + following command: + + cat /proc/atm/devices + + If the driver is loaded successfully, the output of the command will + be similar to the following lines: + + Itf Type ESI/"MAC"addr AAL(TX,err,RX,err,drop) ... + 0 ia xxxxxxxxx 0 ( 0 0 0 0 0 ) 5 ( 0 0 0 0 0 ) + + You can also check the system log file /var/log/messages for messages + related to the ATM driver. + +5. Ia Driver Configuration + +5.1 Configuration of adapter buffers + The (i)Chip boards have 3 different packet RAM size variants: 128K, 512K and + 1M. The RAM size decides the number of buffers and buffer size. The default + size and number of buffers are set as following: + + Totol Rx RAM Tx RAM Rx Buf Tx Buf Rx buf Tx buf + RAM size size size size size cnt cnt + -------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ + 128K 64K 64K 10K 10K 6 6 + 512K 256K 256K 10K 10K 25 25 + 1M 512K 512K 10K 10K 51 51 + + These setting should work well in most environments, but can be + changed by typing the following command: + + insmod <IA_DIR>/ia.o IA_RX_BUF=<RX_CNT> IA_RX_BUF_SZ=<RX_SIZE> \ + IA_TX_BUF=<TX_CNT> IA_TX_BUF_SZ=<TX_SIZE> + Where: + RX_CNT = number of receive buffers in the range (1-128) + RX_SIZE = size of receive buffers in the range (48-64K) + TX_CNT = number of transmit buffers in the range (1-128) + TX_SIZE = size of transmit buffers in the range (48-64K) + + 1. Transmit and receive buffer size must be a multiple of 4. + 2. Care should be taken so that the memory required for the + transmit and receive buffers is less than or equal to the + total adapter packet memory. + +5.2 Turn on ia debug trace + + When the ia driver is built with the CONFIG_ATM_IA_DEBUG flag, the driver + can provide more debug trace if needed. There is a bit mask variable, + IADebugFlag, which controls the output of the traces. You can find the bit + map of the IADebugFlag in iphase.h. + The debug trace can be turn on through the insmod command line option, for + example, "insmod iphase.o IADebugFlag=0xffffffff" can turn on all the debug + traces together with loading the driver. + +6. Ia Driver Test Using ttcp_atm and PVC + + For the PVC setup, the test machines can either be connected back-to-back or + through a switch. If connected through the switch, the switch must be + configured for the PVC(s). + + a. For UBR test: + At the test machine intended to receive data, type: + ttcp_atm -r -a -s 0.100 + At the other test machine, type: + ttcp_atm -t -a -s 0.100 -n 10000 + Run "ttcp_atm -h" to display more options of the ttcp_atm tool. + b. For ABR test: + It is the same as the UBR testing, but with an extra command option: + -Pabr:max_pcr=<xxx> + where: + xxx = the maximum peak cell rate, from 170 - 353207. + This option must be set on both the machines. + c. For CBR test: + It is the same as the UBR testing, but with an extra command option: + -Pcbr:max_pcr=<xxx> + where: + xxx = the maximum peak cell rate, from 170 - 353207. + This option may only be set on the transmit machine. + + +OUTSTANDING ISSUES +------------------ + + + +Contact Information +------------------- + + Customer Support: + United States: Telephone: (214) 654-5555 + Fax: (214) 654-5500 + E-Mail: intouch@iphase.com + Europe: Telephone: 33 (0)1 41 15 44 00 + Fax: 33 (0)1 41 15 12 13 + World Wide Web: http://www.iphase.com + Anonymous FTP: ftp.iphase.com diff --git a/Documentation/networking/irda.txt b/Documentation/networking/irda.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9e5b8e66d6a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/irda.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +To use the IrDA protocols within Linux you will need to get a suitable copy +of the IrDA Utilities. More detailed information about these and associated +programs can be found on http://irda.sourceforge.net/ + +For more information about how to use the IrDA protocol stack, see the +Linux Infared HOWTO (http://www.tuxmobil.org/Infrared-HOWTO/Infrared-HOWTO.html) +by Werner Heuser <wehe@tuxmobil.org> + +There is an active mailing list for discussing Linux-IrDA matters called + irda-users@lists.sourceforge.net + + + + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7c98277777eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE Family of Adapters +================================================================ + +November 17, 2004 + + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Improving Performance +- Support + + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE Family +of Adapters, version 1.0.x. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel PRO/10GbE adapter. All hardware requirements listed +apply to use with Linux. + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +To verify your Intel adapter is supported, find the board ID number on the +adapter. Look for a label that has a barcode and a number in the format +A12345-001. + +Use the above information and the Adapter & Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm + +For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, go to: + + http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are +used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe or insmod command +using this syntax: + + modprobe ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + + insmod ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + +For example, with two PRO/10GbE PCI adapters, entering: + + insmod ixgb TxDescriptors=80,128 + +loads the ixgb driver with 80 TX resources for the first adapter and 128 TX +resources for the second adapter. + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. Also, if the driver is statically built into the +kernel, the driver is loaded with the default values for all the parameters. +Ethtool can be used to change some of the parameters at runtime. + +FlowControl +Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) +Default: Read from the EEPROM + If EEPROM is not detected, default is 3 + This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to + Ethernet PAUSE frames. + +RxDescriptors +Valid Range: 64-512 +Default Value: 512 + This value is the number of receive descriptors allocated by the driver. + Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets. + Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for + each descriptor and can be either 2048, 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes, + depending on the MTU setting. When the MTU size is 1500 or less, the + receive buffer size is 2048 bytes. When the MTU is greater than 1500 the + receive buffer size will be either 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes. The + maximum MTU size is 16114. + +RxIntDelay +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 6 + This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of + 0.8192 microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU + efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing + this value adds extra latency to frame reception and can end up + decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting + dropped receives, this value may be set too high, causing the driver to + run out of available receive descriptors. + +TxDescriptors +Valid Range: 64-4096 +Default Value: 256 + This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver. + Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each + descriptor is 16 bytes. + +XsumRX +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 1 + A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum + offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware. + +XsumTX +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 1 + A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum + offload for transmitted packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter + hardware. + +Improving Performance +===================== + +With the Intel PRO/10 GbE adapter, the default Linux configuration will very +likely limit the total available throughput artificially. There is a set of +things that when applied together increase the ability of Linux to transmit +and receive data. The following enhancements were originally acquired from +settings published at http://www.spec.org/web99 for various submitted results +using Linux. + +NOTE: These changes are only suggestions, and serve as a starting point for +tuning your network performance. + +The changes are made in three major ways, listed in order of greatest effect: +- Use ifconfig to modify the mtu (maximum transmission unit) and the txqueuelen + parameter. +- Use sysctl to modify /proc parameters (essentially kernel tuning) +- Use setpci to modify the MMRBC field in PCI-X configuration space to increase + transmit burst lengths on the bus. + +NOTE: setpci modifies the adapter's configuration registers to allow it to read +up to 4k bytes at a time (for transmits). However, for some systems the +behavior after modifying this register may be undefined (possibly errors of some +kind). A power-cycle, hard reset or explicitly setting the e6 register back to +22 (setpci -d 8086:1048 e6.b=22) may be required to get back to a stable +configuration. + +- COPY these lines and paste them into ixgb_perf.sh: +#!/bin/bash +echo "configuring network performance , edit this file to change the interface" +# set mmrbc to 4k reads, modify only Intel 10GbE device IDs +setpci -d 8086:1048 e6.b=2e +# set the MTU (max transmission unit) - it requires your switch and clients to change too! +# set the txqueuelen +# your ixgb adapter should be loaded as eth1 for this to work, change if needed +ifconfig eth1 mtu 9000 txqueuelen 1000 up +# call the sysctl utility to modify /proc/sys entries +sysctl -p ./sysctl_ixgb.conf +- END ixgb_perf.sh + +- COPY these lines and paste them into sysctl_ixgb.conf: +# some of the defaults may be different for your kernel +# call this file with sysctl -p <this file> +# these are just suggested values that worked well to increase throughput in +# several network benchmark tests, your mileage may vary + +### IPV4 specific settings +net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps = 0 # turns TCP timestamp support off, default 1, reduces CPU use +net.ipv4.tcp_sack = 0 # turn SACK support off, default on +# on systems with a VERY fast bus -> memory interface this is the big gainer +net.ipv4.tcp_rmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/default/max TCP read buffer, default 4096 87380 174760 +net.ipv4.tcp_wmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/pressure/max TCP write buffer, default 4096 16384 131072 +net.ipv4.tcp_mem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/pressure/max TCP buffer space, default 31744 32256 32768 + +### CORE settings (mostly for socket and UDP effect) +net.core.rmem_max = 524287 # maximum receive socket buffer size, default 131071 +net.core.wmem_max = 524287 # maximum send socket buffer size, default 131071 +net.core.rmem_default = 524287 # default receive socket buffer size, default 65535 +net.core.wmem_default = 524287 # default send socket buffer size, default 65535 +net.core.optmem_max = 524287 # maximum amount of option memory buffers, default 10240 +net.core.netdev_max_backlog = 300000 # number of unprocessed input packets before kernel starts dropping them, default 300 +- END sysctl_ixgb.conf + +Edit the ixgb_perf.sh script if necessary to change eth1 to whatever interface +your ixgb driver is using. + +NOTE: Unless these scripts are added to the boot process, these changes will +only last only until the next system reboot. + + +Resolving Slow UDP Traffic +-------------------------- + +If your server does not seem to be able to receive UDP traffic as fast as it +can receive TCP traffic, it could be because Linux, by default, does not set +the network stack buffers as large as they need to be to support high UDP +transfer rates. One way to alleviate this problem is to allow more memory to +be used by the IP stack to store incoming data. + +For instance, use the commands: + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=262143 +and + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=262143 +to increase the read buffer memory max and default to 262143 (256k - 1) from +defaults of max=131071 (128k - 1) and default=65535 (64k - 1). These variables +will increase the amount of memory used by the network stack for receives, and +can be increased significantly more if necessary for your application. + +Support +======= + +For general information and support, go to the Intel support website at: + + http://support.intel.com + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to +the issue to linux.nics@intel.com. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/lapb-module.txt b/Documentation/networking/lapb-module.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d4fc8f221559 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/lapb-module.txt @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ + The Linux LAPB Module Interface 1.3 + + Jonathan Naylor 29.12.96 + +Changed (Henner Eisen, 2000-10-29): int return value for data_indication() + +The LAPB module will be a separately compiled module for use by any parts of +the Linux operating system that require a LAPB service. This document +defines the interfaces to, and the services provided by this module. The +term module in this context does not imply that the LAPB module is a +separately loadable module, although it may be. The term module is used in +its more standard meaning. + +The interface to the LAPB module consists of functions to the module, +callbacks from the module to indicate important state changes, and +structures for getting and setting information about the module. + +Structures +---------- + +Probably the most important structure is the skbuff structure for holding +received and transmitted data, however it is beyond the scope of this +document. + +The two LAPB specific structures are the LAPB initialisation structure and +the LAPB parameter structure. These will be defined in a standard header +file, <linux/lapb.h>. The header file <net/lapb.h> is internal to the LAPB +module and is not for use. + +LAPB Initialisation Structure +----------------------------- + +This structure is used only once, in the call to lapb_register (see below). +It contains information about the device driver that requires the services +of the LAPB module. + +struct lapb_register_struct { + void (*connect_confirmation)(int token, int reason); + void (*connect_indication)(int token, int reason); + void (*disconnect_confirmation)(int token, int reason); + void (*disconnect_indication)(int token, int reason); + int (*data_indication)(int token, struct sk_buff *skb); + void (*data_transmit)(int token, struct sk_buff *skb); +}; + +Each member of this structure corresponds to a function in the device driver +that is called when a particular event in the LAPB module occurs. These will +be described in detail below. If a callback is not required (!!) then a NULL +may be substituted. + + +LAPB Parameter Structure +------------------------ + +This structure is used with the lapb_getparms and lapb_setparms functions +(see below). They are used to allow the device driver to get and set the +operational parameters of the LAPB implementation for a given connection. + +struct lapb_parms_struct { + unsigned int t1; + unsigned int t1timer; + unsigned int t2; + unsigned int t2timer; + unsigned int n2; + unsigned int n2count; + unsigned int window; + unsigned int state; + unsigned int mode; +}; + +T1 and T2 are protocol timing parameters and are given in units of 100ms. N2 +is the maximum number of tries on the link before it is declared a failure. +The window size is the maximum number of outstanding data packets allowed to +be unacknowledged by the remote end, the value of the window is between 1 +and 7 for a standard LAPB link, and between 1 and 127 for an extended LAPB +link. + +The mode variable is a bit field used for setting (at present) three values. +The bit fields have the following meanings: + +Bit Meaning +0 LAPB operation (0=LAPB_STANDARD 1=LAPB_EXTENDED). +1 [SM]LP operation (0=LAPB_SLP 1=LAPB=MLP). +2 DTE/DCE operation (0=LAPB_DTE 1=LAPB_DCE) +3-31 Reserved, must be 0. + +Extended LAPB operation indicates the use of extended sequence numbers and +consequently larger window sizes, the default is standard LAPB operation. +MLP operation is the same as SLP operation except that the addresses used by +LAPB are different to indicate the mode of operation, the default is Single +Link Procedure. The difference between DCE and DTE operation is (i) the +addresses used for commands and responses, and (ii) when the DCE is not +connected, it sends DM without polls set, every T1. The upper case constant +names will be defined in the public LAPB header file. + + +Functions +--------- + +The LAPB module provides a number of function entry points. + + +int lapb_register(void *token, struct lapb_register_struct); + +This must be called before the LAPB module may be used. If the call is +successful then LAPB_OK is returned. The token must be a unique identifier +generated by the device driver to allow for the unique identification of the +instance of the LAPB link. It is returned by the LAPB module in all of the +callbacks, and is used by the device driver in all calls to the LAPB module. +For multiple LAPB links in a single device driver, multiple calls to +lapb_register must be made. The format of the lapb_register_struct is given +above. The return values are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB registered successfully. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Token is already registered. +LAPB_NOMEM Out of memory + + +int lapb_unregister(void *token); + +This releases all the resources associated with a LAPB link. Any current +LAPB link will be abandoned without further messages being passed. After +this call, the value of token is no longer valid for any calls to the LAPB +function. The valid return values are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB unregistered successfully. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Invalid/unknown LAPB token. + + +int lapb_getparms(void *token, struct lapb_parms_struct *parms); + +This allows the device driver to get the values of the current LAPB +variables, the lapb_parms_struct is described above. The valid return values +are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB getparms was successful. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Invalid/unknown LAPB token. + + +int lapb_setparms(void *token, struct lapb_parms_struct *parms); + +This allows the device driver to set the values of the current LAPB +variables, the lapb_parms_struct is described above. The values of t1timer, +t2timer and n2count are ignored, likewise changing the mode bits when +connected will be ignored. An error implies that none of the values have +been changed. The valid return values are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB getparms was successful. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Invalid/unknown LAPB token. +LAPB_INVALUE One of the values was out of its allowable range. + + +int lapb_connect_request(void *token); + +Initiate a connect using the current parameter settings. The valid return +values are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB is starting to connect. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Invalid/unknown LAPB token. +LAPB_CONNECTED LAPB module is already connected. + + +int lapb_disconnect_request(void *token); + +Initiate a disconnect. The valid return values are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB is starting to disconnect. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Invalid/unknown LAPB token. +LAPB_NOTCONNECTED LAPB module is not connected. + + +int lapb_data_request(void *token, struct sk_buff *skb); + +Queue data with the LAPB module for transmitting over the link. If the call +is successful then the skbuff is owned by the LAPB module and may not be +used by the device driver again. The valid return values are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB has accepted the data. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Invalid/unknown LAPB token. +LAPB_NOTCONNECTED LAPB module is not connected. + + +int lapb_data_received(void *token, struct sk_buff *skb); + +Queue data with the LAPB module which has been received from the device. It +is expected that the data passed to the LAPB module has skb->data pointing +to the beginning of the LAPB data. If the call is successful then the skbuff +is owned by the LAPB module and may not be used by the device driver again. +The valid return values are: + +LAPB_OK LAPB has accepted the data. +LAPB_BADTOKEN Invalid/unknown LAPB token. + + +Callbacks +--------- + +These callbacks are functions provided by the device driver for the LAPB +module to call when an event occurs. They are registered with the LAPB +module with lapb_register (see above) in the structure lapb_register_struct +(see above). + + +void (*connect_confirmation)(void *token, int reason); + +This is called by the LAPB module when a connection is established after +being requested by a call to lapb_connect_request (see above). The reason is +always LAPB_OK. + + +void (*connect_indication)(void *token, int reason); + +This is called by the LAPB module when the link is established by the remote +system. The value of reason is always LAPB_OK. + + +void (*disconnect_confirmation)(void *token, int reason); + +This is called by the LAPB module when an event occurs after the device +driver has called lapb_disconnect_request (see above). The reason indicates +what has happened. In all cases the LAPB link can be regarded as being +terminated. The values for reason are: + +LAPB_OK The LAPB link was terminated normally. +LAPB_NOTCONNECTED The remote system was not connected. +LAPB_TIMEDOUT No response was received in N2 tries from the remote + system. + + +void (*disconnect_indication)(void *token, int reason); + +This is called by the LAPB module when the link is terminated by the remote +system or another event has occurred to terminate the link. This may be +returned in response to a lapb_connect_request (see above) if the remote +system refused the request. The values for reason are: + +LAPB_OK The LAPB link was terminated normally by the remote + system. +LAPB_REFUSED The remote system refused the connect request. +LAPB_NOTCONNECTED The remote system was not connected. +LAPB_TIMEDOUT No response was received in N2 tries from the remote + system. + + +int (*data_indication)(void *token, struct sk_buff *skb); + +This is called by the LAPB module when data has been received from the +remote system that should be passed onto the next layer in the protocol +stack. The skbuff becomes the property of the device driver and the LAPB +module will not perform any more actions on it. The skb->data pointer will +be pointing to the first byte of data after the LAPB header. + +This method should return NET_RX_DROP (as defined in the header +file include/linux/netdevice.h) if and only if the frame was dropped +before it could be delivered to the upper layer. + + +void (*data_transmit)(void *token, struct sk_buff *skb); + +This is called by the LAPB module when data is to be transmitted to the +remote system by the device driver. The skbuff becomes the property of the +device driver and the LAPB module will not perform any more actions on it. +The skb->data pointer will be pointing to the first byte of the LAPB header. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt b/Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fe2a9129d959 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ltpc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +This is the ALPHA version of the ltpc driver. + +In order to use it, you will need at least version 1.3.3 of the +netatalk package, and the Apple or Farallon LocalTalk PC card. +There are a number of different LocalTalk cards for the PC; this +driver applies only to the one with the 65c02 processor chip on it. + +To include it in the kernel, select the CONFIG_LTPC switch in the +configuration dialog. You can also compile it as a module. + +While the driver will attempt to autoprobe the I/O port address, IRQ +line, and DMA channel of the card, this does not always work. For +this reason, you should be prepared to supply these parameters +yourself. (see "Card Configuration" below for how to determine or +change the settings on your card) + +When the driver is compiled into the kernel, you can add a line such +as the following to your /etc/lilo.conf: + + append="ltpc=0x240,9,1" + +where the parameters (in order) are the port address, IRQ, and DMA +channel. The second and third values can be omitted, in which case +the driver will try to determine them itself. + +If you load the driver as a module, you can pass the parameters "io=", +"irq=", and "dma=" on the command line with insmod or modprobe, or add +them as options in /etc/modprobe.conf: + + alias lt0 ltpc # autoload the module when the interface is configured + options ltpc io=0x240 irq=9 dma=1 + +Before starting up the netatalk demons (perhaps in rc.local), you +need to add a line such as: + + /sbin/ifconfig lt0 127.0.0.42 + +The address is unimportant - however, the card needs to be configured +with ifconfig so that Netatalk can find it. + +The appropriate netatalk configuration depends on whether you are +attached to a network that includes AppleTalk routers or not. If, +like me, you are simply connecting to your home Macintoshes and +printers, you need to set up netatalk to "seed". The way I do this +is to have the lines + + dummy -seed -phase 2 -net 2000 -addr 2000.26 -zone "1033" + lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1033 -addr 1033.27 -zone "1033" + +in my atalkd.conf. What is going on here is that I need to fool +netatalk into thinking that there are two AppleTalk interfaces +present; otherwise, it refuses to seed. This is a hack, and a more +permanent solution would be to alter the netatalk code. Also, make +sure you have the correct name for the dummy interface - If it's +compiled as a module, you will need to refer to it as "dummy0" or some +such. + +If you are attached to an extended AppleTalk network, with routers on +it, then you don't need to fool around with this -- the appropriate +line in atalkd.conf is + + lt0 -phase 1 + +-------------------------------------- + +Card Configuration: + +The interrupts and so forth are configured via the dipswitch on the +board. Set the switches so as not to conflict with other hardware. + + Interrupts -- set at most one. If none are set, the driver uses + polled mode. Because the card was developed in the XT era, the + original documentation refers to IRQ2. Since you'll be running + this on an AT (or later) class machine, that really means IRQ9. + + SW1 IRQ 4 + SW2 IRQ 3 + SW3 IRQ 9 (2 in original card documentation only applies to XT) + + + DMA -- choose DMA 1 or 3, and set both corresponding switches. + + SW4 DMA 3 + SW5 DMA 1 + SW6 DMA 3 + SW7 DMA 1 + + + I/O address -- choose one. + + SW8 220 / 240 + +-------------------------------------- + +IP: + +Yes, it is possible to do IP over LocalTalk. However, you can't just +treat the LocalTalk device like an ordinary Ethernet device, even if +that's what it looks like to Netatalk. + +Instead, you follow the same procedure as for doing IP in EtherTalk. +See Documentation/networking/ipddp.txt for more information about the +kernel driver and userspace tools needed. + +-------------------------------------- + +BUGS: + +IRQ autoprobing often doesn't work on a cold boot. To get around +this, either compile the driver as a module, or pass the parameters +for the card to the kernel as described above. + +Also, as usual, autoprobing is not recommended when you use the driver +as a module. (though it usually works at boot time, at least) + +Polled mode is *really* slow sometimes, but this seems to depend on +the configuration of the network. + +It may theoretically be possible to use two LTPC cards in the same +machine, but this is unsupported, so if you really want to do this, +you'll probably have to hack the initialization code a bit. + +______________________________________ + +THANKS: + Thanks to Alan Cox for helpful discussions early on in this +work, and to Denis Hainsworth for doing the bleeding-edge testing. + +-- Bradford Johnson <bradford@math.umn.edu> + +-- Updated 11/09/1998 by David Huggins-Daines <dhd@debian.org> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt b/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5049a64313d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +Behaviour of Cards Under Multicast +================================== + +This is how they currently behave, not what the hardware can do--for example, +the Lance driver doesn't use its filter, even though the code for loading +it is in the DEC Lance-based driver. + +The following are requirements for multicasting +----------------------------------------------- +AppleTalk Multicast hardware filtering not important but + avoid cards only doing promisc +IP-Multicast Multicast hardware filters really help +IP-MRoute AllMulti hardware filters are of no help + + +Board Multicast AllMulti Promisc Filter +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +3c501 YES YES YES Software +3c503 YES YES YES Hardware +3c505 YES NO YES Hardware +3c507 NO NO NO N/A +3c509 YES YES YES Software +3c59x YES YES YES Software +ac3200 YES YES YES Hardware +apricot YES PROMISC YES Hardware +arcnet NO NO NO N/A +at1700 PROMISC PROMISC YES Software +atp PROMISC PROMISC YES Software +cs89x0 YES YES YES Software +de4x5 YES YES YES Hardware +de600 NO NO NO N/A +de620 PROMISC PROMISC YES Software +depca YES PROMISC YES Hardware +dmfe YES YES YES Software(*) +e2100 YES YES YES Hardware +eepro YES PROMISC YES Hardware +eexpress NO NO NO N/A +ewrk3 YES PROMISC YES Hardware +hp-plus YES YES YES Hardware +hp YES YES YES Hardware +hp100 YES YES YES Hardware +ibmtr NO NO NO N/A +ioc3-eth YES YES YES Hardware +lance YES YES YES Software(#) +ne YES YES YES Hardware +ni52 <------------------ Buggy ------------------> +ni65 YES YES YES Software(#) +seeq NO NO NO N/A +sgiseek <------------------ Buggy ------------------> +sk_g16 NO NO YES N/A +smc-ultra YES YES YES Hardware +sunlance YES YES YES Hardware +tulip YES YES YES Hardware +wavelan YES PROMISC YES Hardware +wd YES YES YES Hardware +xirc2ps_cs YES YES YES Hardware +znet YES YES YES Software + + +PROMISC = This multicast mode is in fact promiscuous mode. Avoid using +cards who go PROMISC on any multicast in a multicast kernel. + +(#) = Hardware multicast support is not used yet. +(*) = Hardware support for Davicom 9132 chipset only. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ncsa-telnet b/Documentation/networking/ncsa-telnet new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d77d28b09093 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ncsa-telnet @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +NCSA telnet doesn't work with path MTU discovery enabled. This is due to a +bug in NCSA that also stops it working with other modern networking code +such as Solaris. + +The following information is courtesy of +Marek <marekm@i17linuxb.ists.pwr.wroc.pl> + +There is a fixed version somewhere on ftp.upe.ac.za (sorry, I don't +remember the exact pathname, and this site is very slow from here). +It may or may not be faster for you to get it from +ftp://ftp.ists.pwr.wroc.pl/pub/msdos/telnet/ncsa_upe/tel23074.zip +(source is in v230704s.zip). I have tested it with 1.3.79 (with +path mtu discovery enabled - ncsa 2.3.08 didn't work) and it seems +to work. I don't know if anyone is working on this code - this +version is over a year old. Too bad - it's faster and often more +stable than these windoze telnets, and runs on almost anything... diff --git a/Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt b/Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3830a83513d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt @@ -0,0 +1,324 @@ +Wed 2-Aug-95 <matti.aarnio@utu.fi> + + Linux network driver modules + + Do not mistake this for "README.modules" at the top-level + directory! That document tells about modules in general, while + this one tells only about network device driver modules. + + This is a potpourri of INSMOD-time(*) configuration options + (if such exists) and their default values of various modules + in the Linux network drivers collection. + + Some modules have also hidden (= non-documented) tunable values. + The choice of not documenting them is based on general belief, that + the less the user needs to know, the better. (There are things that + driver developers can use, others should not confuse themselves.) + + In many cases it is highly preferred that insmod:ing is done + ONLY with defining an explicit address for the card, AND BY + NOT USING AUTO-PROBING! + + Now most cards have some explicitly defined base address that they + are compiled with (to avoid auto-probing, among other things). + If that compiled value does not match your actual configuration, + do use the "io=0xXXX" -parameter for the insmod, and give there + a value matching your environment. + + If you are adventurous, you can ask the driver to autoprobe + by using the "io=0" parameter, however it is a potentially dangerous + thing to do in a live system. (If you don't know where the + card is located, you can try autoprobing, and after possible + crash recovery, insmod with proper IO-address..) + + -------------------------- + (*) "INSMOD-time" means when you load module with + /sbin/insmod you can feed it optional parameters. + See "man insmod". + -------------------------- + + + 8390 based Network Modules (Paul Gortmaker, Nov 12, 1995) + -------------------------- + +(Includes: smc-ultra, ne, wd, 3c503, hp, hp-plus, e2100 and ac3200) + +The 8390 series of network drivers now support multiple card systems without +reloading the same module multiple times (memory efficient!) This is done by +specifying multiple comma separated values, such as: + + insmod 3c503.o io=0x280,0x300,0x330,0x350 xcvr=0,1,0,1 + +The above would have the one module controlling four 3c503 cards, with card 2 +and 4 using external transceivers. The "insmod" manual describes the usage +of comma separated value lists. + +It is *STRONGLY RECOMMENDED* that you supply "io=" instead of autoprobing. +If an "io=" argument is not supplied, then the ISA drivers will complain +about autoprobing being not recommended, and begrudgingly autoprobe for +a *SINGLE CARD ONLY* -- if you want to use multiple cards you *have* to +supply an "io=0xNNN,0xQQQ,..." argument. + +The ne module is an exception to the above. A NE2000 is essentially an +8390 chip, some bus glue and some RAM. Because of this, the ne probe is +more invasive than the rest, and so at boot we make sure the ne probe is +done last of all the 8390 cards (so that it won't trip over other 8390 based +cards) With modules we can't ensure that all other non-ne 8390 cards have +already been found. Because of this, the ne module REQUIRES an "io=0xNNN" +argument passed in via insmod. It will refuse to autoprobe. + +It is also worth noting that auto-IRQ probably isn't as reliable during +the flurry of interrupt activity on a running machine. Cards such as the +ne2000 that can't get the IRQ setting from an EEPROM or configuration +register are probably best supplied with an "irq=M" argument as well. + + +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +Card/Module List - Configurable Parameters and Default Values +---------------------------------------------------------------------- + +3c501.c: + io = 0x280 IO base address + irq = 5 IRQ + (Probes ports: 0x280, 0x300) + +3c503.c: + io = 0 (It will complain if you don't supply an "io=0xNNN") + irq = 0 (IRQ software selected by driver using autoIRQ) + xcvr = 0 (Use xcvr=1 to select external transceiver.) + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x310, 0x330, 0x350, 0x250, 0x280, 0x2A0, 0x2E0) + +3c505.c: + io = 0 + irq = 0 + dma = 6 (not autoprobed) + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x280, 0x310) + +3c507.c: + io = 0x300 + irq = 0 + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x280) + +3c509.c: + io = 0 + irq = 0 + ( Module load-time probing Works reliably only on EISA, ISA ID-PROBE + IS NOT RELIABLE! Compile this driver statically into kernel for + now, if you need it auto-probing on an ISA-bus machine. ) + +8390.c: + (No public options, several other modules need this one) + +a2065.c: + Since this is a Zorro board, it supports full autoprobing, even for + multiple boards. (m68k/Amiga) + +ac3200.c: + io = 0 (Checks 0x1000 to 0x8fff in 0x1000 intervals) + irq = 0 (Read from config register) + (EISA probing..) + +apricot.c: + io = 0x300 (Can't be altered!) + irq = 10 + +arcnet.c: + io = 0 + irqnum = 0 + shmem = 0 + num = 0 + DO SET THESE MANUALLY AT INSMOD! + (When probing, looks at the following possible addresses: + Suggested ones: + 0x300, 0x2E0, 0x2F0, 0x2D0 + Other ones: + 0x200, 0x210, 0x220, 0x230, 0x240, 0x250, 0x260, 0x270, + 0x280, 0x290, 0x2A0, 0x2B0, 0x2C0, + 0x310, 0x320, 0x330, 0x340, 0x350, 0x360, 0x370, + 0x380, 0x390, 0x3A0, 0x3E0, 0x3F0 ) + +ariadne.c: + Since this is a Zorro board, it supports full autoprobing, even for + multiple boards. (m68k/Amiga) + +at1700.c: + io = 0x260 + irq = 0 + (Probes ports: 0x260, 0x280, 0x2A0, 0x240, 0x340, 0x320, 0x380, 0x300) + +atari_bionet.c: + Supports full autoprobing. (m68k/Atari) + +atari_pamsnet.c: + Supports full autoprobing. (m68k/Atari) + +atarilance.c: + Supports full autoprobing. (m68k/Atari) + +atp.c: *Not modularized* + (Probes ports: 0x378, 0x278, 0x3BC; + fixed IRQs: 5 and 7 ) + +cops.c: + io = 0x240 + irq = 5 + nodeid = 0 (AutoSelect = 0, NodeID 1-254 is hand selected.) + (Probes ports: 0x240, 0x340, 0x200, 0x210, 0x220, 0x230, 0x260, + 0x2A0, 0x300, 0x310, 0x320, 0x330, 0x350, 0x360) + +de4x5.c: + io = 0x000b + irq = 10 + is_not_dec = 0 -- For non-DEC card using DEC 21040/21041/21140 chip, set this to 1 + (EISA, and PCI probing) + +de600.c: + de600_debug = 0 + (On port 0x378, irq 7 -- lpt1; compile time configurable) + +de620.c: + bnc = 0, utp = 0 <-- Force media by setting either. + io = 0x378 (also compile-time configurable) + irq = 7 + +depca.c: + io = 0x200 + irq = 7 + (Probes ports: ISA: 0x300, 0x200; + EISA: 0x0c00 ) + +dummy.c: + No options + +e2100.c: + io = 0 (It will complain if you don't supply an "io=0xNNN") + irq = 0 (IRQ software selected by driver) + mem = 0 (Override default shared memory start of 0xd0000) + xcvr = 0 (Use xcvr=1 to select external transceiver.) + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x280, 0x380, 0x220) + +eepro.c: + io = 0x200 + irq = 0 + (Probes ports: 0x200, 0x240, 0x280, 0x2C0, 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360) + +eexpress.c: + io = 0x300 + irq = 0 (IRQ value read from EEPROM) + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x270, 0x320, 0x340) + +eql.c: + (No parameters) + +ewrk3.c: + io = 0x300 + irq = 5 + (With module no autoprobing! + On EISA-bus does EISA probing. + Static linkage probes ports on ISA bus: + 0x100, 0x120, 0x140, 0x160, 0x180, 0x1A0, 0x1C0, + 0x200, 0x220, 0x240, 0x260, 0x280, 0x2A0, 0x2C0, 0x2E0, + 0x300, 0x340, 0x360, 0x380, 0x3A0, 0x3C0) + +hp-plus.c: + io = 0 (It will complain if you don't supply an "io=0xNNN") + irq = 0 (IRQ read from configuration register) + (Probes ports: 0x200, 0x240, 0x280, 0x2C0, 0x300, 0x320, 0x340) + +hp.c: + io = 0 (It will complain if you don't supply an "io=0xNNN") + irq = 0 (IRQ software selected by driver using autoIRQ) + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x280, 0x2C0, 0x200, 0x240) + +hp100.c: + hp100_port = 0 (IO-base address) + (Does EISA-probing, if on EISA-slot; + On ISA-bus probes all ports from 0x100 thru to 0x3E0 + in increments of 0x020) + +hydra.c: + Since this is a Zorro board, it supports full autoprobing, even for + multiple boards. (m68k/Amiga) + +ibmtr.c: + io = 0xa20, 0xa24 (autoprobed by default) + irq = 0 (driver cannot select irq - read from hardware) + mem = 0 (shared memory base set at 0xd0000 and not yet + able to override thru mem= parameter.) + +lance.c: *Not modularized* + (PCI, and ISA probing; "CONFIG_PCI" needed for PCI support) + (Probes ISA ports: 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360) + +loopback.c: *Static kernel component* + +ne.c: + io = 0 (Explicitly *requires* an "io=0xNNN" value) + irq = 0 (Tries to determine configured IRQ via autoIRQ) + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x280, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360) + +net_init.c: *Static kernel component* + +ni52.c: *Not modularized* + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x280, 0x360, 0x320, 0x340 + mems: 0xD0000, 0xD2000, 0xC8000, 0xCA000, + 0xD4000, 0xD6000, 0xD8000 ) + +ni65.c: *Not modularized* **16MB MEMORY BARRIER BUG** + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360) + +pi2.c: *Not modularized* (well, NON-STANDARD modularization!) + Only one card supported at this time. + (Probes ports: 0x380, 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360, 0x3A0) + +plip.c: + io = 0 + irq = 0 (by default, uses IRQ 5 for port at 0x3bc, IRQ 7 + for port at 0x378, and IRQ 2 for port at 0x278) + (Probes ports: 0x278, 0x378, 0x3bc) + +ppp.c: + No options (ppp-2.2+ has some, this is based on non-dynamic + version from ppp-2.1.2d) + +seeq8005.c: *Not modularized* + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360) + +sk_g16.c: *Not modularized* + (Probes ports: 0x100, 0x180, 0x208, 0x220m 0x288, 0x320, 0x328, 0x390) + +skeleton.c: *Skeleton* + +slhc.c: + No configuration parameters + +slip.c: + slip_maxdev = 256 (default value from SL_NRUNIT on slip.h) + + +smc-ultra.c: + io = 0 (It will complain if you don't supply an "io=0xNNN") + irq = 0 (IRQ val. read from EEPROM) + (Probes ports: 0x200, 0x220, 0x240, 0x280, 0x300, 0x340, 0x380) + +tulip.c: *Partial modularization* + (init-time memory allocation makes problems..) + +tunnel.c: + No insmod parameters + +wavelan.c: + io = 0x390 (Settable, but change not recommended) + irq = 0 (Not honoured, if changed..) + +wd.c: + io = 0 (It will complain if you don't supply an "io=0xNNN") + irq = 0 (IRQ val. read from EEPROM, ancient cards use autoIRQ) + mem = 0 (Force shared-memory on address 0xC8000, or whatever..) + mem_end = 0 (Force non-std. mem. size via supplying mem_end val.) + (eg. for 32k WD8003EBT, use mem=0xd0000 mem_end=0xd8000) + (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x280, 0x380, 0x240) + +znet.c: *Not modularized* + (Only one device on Zenith Z-Note (notebook?) systems, + configuration information from (EE)PROM) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..53618fb1a717 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + +started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>, 2001.09.17 +2.6 port and netpoll api by Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>, Sep 9 2003 + +Please send bug reports to Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com> + +This module logs kernel printk messages over UDP allowing debugging of +problem where disk logging fails and serial consoles are impractical. + +It can be used either built-in or as a module. As a built-in, +netconsole initializes immediately after NIC cards and will bring up +the specified interface as soon as possible. While this doesn't allow +capture of early kernel panics, it does capture most of the boot +process. + +It takes a string configuration parameter "netconsole" in the +following format: + + netconsole=[src-port]@[src-ip]/[<dev>],[tgt-port]@<tgt-ip>/[tgt-macaddr] + + where + src-port source for UDP packets (defaults to 6665) + src-ip source IP to use (interface address) + dev network interface (eth0) + tgt-port port for logging agent (6666) + tgt-ip IP address for logging agent + tgt-macaddr ethernet MAC address for logging agent (broadcast) + +Examples: + + linux netconsole=4444@10.0.0.1/eth1,9353@10.0.0.2/12:34:56:78:9a:bc + + or + + insmod netconsole netconsole=@/,@10.0.0.2/ + +Built-in netconsole starts immediately after the TCP stack is +initialized and attempts to bring up the supplied dev at the supplied +address. + +The remote host can run either 'netcat -u -l -p <port>' or syslogd. + +WARNING: the default target ethernet setting uses the broadcast +ethernet address to send packets, which can cause increased load on +other systems on the same ethernet segment. + +NOTE: the network device (eth1 in the above case) can run any kind +of other network traffic, netconsole is not intrusive. Netconsole +might cause slight delays in other traffic if the volume of kernel +messages is high, but should have no other impact. + +Netconsole was designed to be as instantaneous as possible, to +enable the logging of even the most critical kernel bugs. It works +from IRQ contexts as well, and does not enable interrupts while +sending packets. Due to these unique needs, configuration can not +be more automatic, and some fundamental limitations will remain: +only IP networks, UDP packets and ethernet devices are supported. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1509f3aff968 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + +Network Devices, the Kernel, and You! + + +Introduction +============ +The following is a random collection of documentation regarding +network devices. + +struct net_device allocation rules +================================== +Network device structures need to persist even after module is unloaded and +must be allocated with kmalloc. If device has registered successfully, +it will be freed on last use by free_netdev. This is required to handle the +pathologic case cleanly (example: rmmod mydriver </sys/class/net/myeth/mtu ) + +There are routines in net_init.c to handle the common cases of +alloc_etherdev, alloc_netdev. These reserve extra space for driver +private data which gets freed when the network device is freed. If +separately allocated data is attached to the network device +(dev->priv) then it is up to the module exit handler to free that. + + +struct net_device synchronization rules +======================================= +dev->open: + Synchronization: rtnl_lock() semaphore. + Context: process + +dev->stop: + Synchronization: rtnl_lock() semaphore. + Context: process + Note1: netif_running() is guaranteed false + Note2: dev->poll() is guaranteed to be stopped + +dev->do_ioctl: + Synchronization: rtnl_lock() semaphore. + Context: process + +dev->get_stats: + Synchronization: dev_base_lock rwlock. + Context: nominally process, but don't sleep inside an rwlock + +dev->hard_start_xmit: + Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock. + When the driver sets NETIF_F_LLTX in dev->features this will be + called without holding xmit_lock. In this case the driver + has to lock by itself when needed. It is recommended to use a try lock + for this and return -1 when the spin lock fails. + The locking there should also properly protect against + set_multicast_list + Context: BHs disabled + Notes: netif_queue_stopped() is guaranteed false + Return codes: + o NETDEV_TX_OK everything ok. + o NETDEV_TX_BUSY Cannot transmit packet, try later + Usually a bug, means queue start/stop flow control is broken in + the driver. Note: the driver must NOT put the skb in its DMA ring. + o NETDEV_TX_LOCKED Locking failed, please retry quickly. + Only valid when NETIF_F_LLTX is set. + +dev->tx_timeout: + Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock. + Context: BHs disabled + Notes: netif_queue_stopped() is guaranteed true + +dev->set_multicast_list: + Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock. + Context: BHs disabled + +dev->poll: + Synchronization: __LINK_STATE_RX_SCHED bit in dev->state. See + dev_close code and comments in net/core/dev.c for more info. + Context: softirq + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netif-msg.txt b/Documentation/networking/netif-msg.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..18ad4cea6259 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/netif-msg.txt @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + +________________ +NETIF Msg Level + +The design of the network interface message level setting. + +History + + The design of the debugging message interface was guided and + constrained by backwards compatibility previous practice. It is useful + to understand the history and evolution in order to understand current + practice and relate it to older driver source code. + + From the beginning of Linux, each network device driver has had a local + integer variable that controls the debug message level. The message + level ranged from 0 to 7, and monotonically increased in verbosity. + + The message level was not precisely defined past level 3, but were + always implemented within +-1 of the specified level. Drivers tended + to shed the more verbose level messages as they matured. + 0 Minimal messages, only essential information on fatal errors. + 1 Standard messages, initialization status. No run-time messages + 2 Special media selection messages, generally timer-driver. + 3 Interface starts and stops, including normal status messages + 4 Tx and Rx frame error messages, and abnormal driver operation + 5 Tx packet queue information, interrupt events. + 6 Status on each completed Tx packet and received Rx packets + 7 Initial contents of Tx and Rx packets + + Initially this message level variable was uniquely named in each driver + e.g. "lance_debug", so that a kernel symbolic debugger could locate and + modify the setting. When kernel modules became common, the variables + were consistently renamed to "debug" and allowed to be set as a module + parameter. + + This approach worked well. However there is always a demand for + additional features. Over the years the following emerged as + reasonable and easily implemented enhancements + Using an ioctl() call to modify the level. + Per-interface rather than per-driver message level setting. + More selective control over the type of messages emitted. + + The netif_msg recommandation adds these features with only a minor + complexity and code size increase. + + The recommendation is the following points + Retaining the per-driver integer variable "debug" as a module + parameter with a default level of '1'. + + Adding a per-interface private variable named "msg_enable". The + variable is a bit map rather than a level, and is initialized as + 1 << debug + Or more precisely + debug < 0 ? 0 : 1 << min(sizeof(int)-1, debug) + + Messages should changes from + if (debug > 1) + printk(MSG_DEBUG "%s: ... + to + if (np->msg_enable & NETIF_MSG_LINK) + printk(MSG_DEBUG "%s: ... + + +The set of message levels is named + Old level Name Bit position + 0 NETIF_MSG_DRV 0x0001 + 1 NETIF_MSG_PROBE 0x0002 + 2 NETIF_MSG_LINK 0x0004 + 2 NETIF_MSG_TIMER 0x0004 + 3 NETIF_MSG_IFDOWN 0x0008 + 3 NETIF_MSG_IFUP 0x0008 + 4 NETIF_MSG_RX_ERR 0x0010 + 4 NETIF_MSG_TX_ERR 0x0010 + 5 NETIF_MSG_TX_QUEUED 0x0020 + 5 NETIF_MSG_INTR 0x0020 + 6 NETIF_MSG_TX_DONE 0x0040 + 6 NETIF_MSG_RX_STATUS 0x0040 + 7 NETIF_MSG_PKTDATA 0x0080 + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt b/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c65a94010ea8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + +IBM PCI Pit/Pit-Phy/Olympic CHIPSET BASED TOKEN RING CARDS README + +Release 0.2.0 - Release + June 8th 1999 Peter De Schrijver & Mike Phillips +Release 0.9.C - Release + April 18th 2001 Mike Phillips + +Thanks: +Erik De Cock, Adrian Bridgett and Frank Fiene for their +patience and testing. +Donald Champion for the cardbus support +Kyle Lucke for the dma api changes. +Jonathon Bitner for hardware support. +Everybody on linux-tr for their continued support. + +Options: + +The driver accepts four options: ringspeed, pkt_buf_sz, +message_level and network_monitor. + +These options can be specified differently for each card found. + +ringspeed: Has one of three settings 0 (default), 4 or 16. 0 will +make the card autosense the ringspeed and join at the appropriate speed, +this will be the default option for most people. 4 or 16 allow you to +explicitly force the card to operate at a certain speed. The card will fail +if you try to insert it at the wrong speed. (Although some hubs will allow +this so be *very* careful). The main purpose for explicitly setting the ring +speed is for when the card is first on the ring. In autosense mode, if the card +cannot detect any active monitors on the ring it will not open, so you must +re-init the card at the appropriate speed. Unfortunately at present the only +way of doing this is rmmod and insmod which is a bit tough if it is compiled +in the kernel. + +pkt_buf_sz: This is this initial receive buffer allocation size. This will +default to 4096 if no value is entered. You may increase performance of the +driver by setting this to a value larger than the network packet size, although +the driver now re-sizes buffers based on MTU settings as well. + +message_level: Controls level of messages created by the driver. Defaults to 0: +which only displays start-up and critical messages. Presently any non-zero +value will display all soft messages as well. NB This does not turn +debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code. + +network_monitor: Any non-zero value will provide a quasi network monitoring +mode. All unexpected MAC frames (beaconing etc.) will be received +by the driver and the source and destination addresses printed. +Also an entry will be added in /proc/net called olympic_tr%d, where tr%d +is the registered device name, i.e tr0, tr1, etc. This displays low +level information about the configuration of the ring and the adapter. +This feature has been designed for network administrators to assist in +the diagnosis of network / ring problems. (This used to OLYMPIC_NETWORK_MONITOR, +but has now changed to allow each adapter to be configured differently and +to alleviate the necessity to re-compile olympic to turn the option on). + +Multi-card: + +The driver will detect multiple cards and will work with shared interrupts, +each card is assigned the next token ring device, i.e. tr0 , tr1, tr2. The +driver should also happily reside in the system with other drivers. It has +been tested with ibmtr.c running, and I personally have had one Olicom PCI +card and two IBM olympic cards (all on the same interrupt), all running +together. + +Variable MTU size: + +The driver can handle a MTU size upto either 4500 or 18000 depending upon +ring speed. The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part +of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able +to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring +position = 296,000 bytes of memory space, plus of course anything +necessary for the tx sk_buff's. Remember this is per card, so if you are +building routers, gateway's etc, you could start to use a lot of memory +real fast. + + +6/8/99 Peter De Schrijver and Mike Phillips + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8d4cf78258e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,399 @@ +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ ABSTRACT +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +This file documents the CONFIG_PACKET_MMAP option available with the PACKET +socket interface on 2.4 and 2.6 kernels. This type of sockets is used for +capture network traffic with utilities like tcpdump or any other that uses +the libpcap library. + +You can find the latest version of this document at + + http://pusa.uv.es/~ulisses/packet_mmap/ + +Please send me your comments to + + Ulisses Alonso Camaró <uaca@i.hate.spam.alumni.uv.es> + +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ Why use PACKET_MMAP +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +In Linux 2.4/2.6 if PACKET_MMAP is not enabled, the capture process is very +inefficient. It uses very limited buffers and requires one system call +to capture each packet, it requires two if you want to get packet's +timestamp (like libpcap always does). + +In the other hand PACKET_MMAP is very efficient. PACKET_MMAP provides a size +configurable circular buffer mapped in user space. This way reading packets just +needs to wait for them, most of the time there is no need to issue a single +system call. By using a shared buffer between the kernel and the user +also has the benefit of minimizing packet copies. + +It's fine to use PACKET_MMAP to improve the performance of the capture process, +but it isn't everything. At least, if you are capturing at high speeds (this +is relative to the cpu speed), you should check if the device driver of your +network interface card supports some sort of interrupt load mitigation or +(even better) if it supports NAPI, also make sure it is enabled. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ How to use CONFIG_PACKET_MMAP +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +From the user standpoint, you should use the higher level libpcap library, wich +is a de facto standard, portable across nearly all operating systems +including Win32. + +Said that, at time of this writing, official libpcap 0.8.1 is out and doesn't include +support for PACKET_MMAP, and also probably the libpcap included in your distribution. + +I'm aware of two implementations of PACKET_MMAP in libpcap: + + http://pusa.uv.es/~ulisses/packet_mmap/ (by Simon Patarin, based on libpcap 0.6.2) + http://public.lanl.gov/cpw/ (by Phil Wood, based on lastest libpcap) + +The rest of this document is intended for people who want to understand +the low level details or want to improve libpcap by including PACKET_MMAP +support. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ How to use CONFIG_PACKET_MMAP directly +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +From the system calls stand point, the use of PACKET_MMAP involves +the following process: + + +[setup] socket() -------> creation of the capture socket + setsockopt() ---> allocation of the circular buffer (ring) + mmap() ---------> maping of the allocated buffer to the + user process + +[capture] poll() ---------> to wait for incoming packets + +[shutdown] close() --------> destruction of the capture socket and + deallocation of all associated + resources. + + +socket creation and destruction is straight forward, and is done +the same way with or without PACKET_MMAP: + +int fd; + +fd= socket(PF_PACKET, mode, htons(ETH_P_ALL)) + +where mode is SOCK_RAW for the raw interface were link level +information can be captured or SOCK_DGRAM for the cooked +interface where link level information capture is not +supported and a link level pseudo-header is provided +by the kernel. + +The destruction of the socket and all associated resources +is done by a simple call to close(fd). + +Next I will describe PACKET_MMAP settings and it's constraints, +also the maping of the circular buffer in the user process and +the use of this buffer. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ PACKET_MMAP settings +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +To setup PACKET_MMAP from user level code is done with a call like + + setsockopt(fd, SOL_PACKET, PACKET_RX_RING, (void *) &req, sizeof(req)) + +The most significant argument in the previous call is the req parameter, +this parameter must to have the following structure: + + struct tpacket_req + { + unsigned int tp_block_size; /* Minimal size of contiguous block */ + unsigned int tp_block_nr; /* Number of blocks */ + unsigned int tp_frame_size; /* Size of frame */ + unsigned int tp_frame_nr; /* Total number of frames */ + }; + +This structure is defined in /usr/include/linux/if_packet.h and establishes a +circular buffer (ring) of unswappable memory mapped in the capture process. +Being mapped in the capture process allows reading the captured frames and +related meta-information like timestamps without requiring a system call. + +Captured frames are grouped in blocks. Each block is a physically contiguous +region of memory and holds tp_block_size/tp_frame_size frames. The total number +of blocks is tp_block_nr. Note that tp_frame_nr is a redundant parameter because + + frames_per_block = tp_block_size/tp_frame_size + +indeed, packet_set_ring checks that the following condition is true + + frames_per_block * tp_block_nr == tp_frame_nr + + +Lets see an example, with the following values: + + tp_block_size= 4096 + tp_frame_size= 2048 + tp_block_nr = 4 + tp_frame_nr = 8 + +we will get the following buffer structure: + + block #1 block #2 ++---------+---------+ +---------+---------+ +| frame 1 | frame 2 | | frame 3 | frame 4 | ++---------+---------+ +---------+---------+ + + block #3 block #4 ++---------+---------+ +---------+---------+ +| frame 5 | frame 6 | | frame 7 | frame 8 | ++---------+---------+ +---------+---------+ + +A frame can be of any size with the only condition it can fit in a block. A block +can only hold an integer number of frames, or in other words, a frame cannot +be spawn accross two blocks so there are some datails you have to take into +account when choosing the frame_size. See "Maping and use of the circular +buffer (ring)". + + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ PACKET_MMAP setting constraints +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +In kernel versions prior to 2.4.26 (for the 2.4 branch) and 2.6.5 (2.6 branch), +the PACKET_MMAP buffer could hold only 32768 frames in a 32 bit architecture or +16384 in a 64 bit architecture. For information on these kernel versions +see http://pusa.uv.es/~ulisses/packet_mmap/packet_mmap.pre-2.4.26_2.6.5.txt + + Block size limit +------------------ + +As stated earlier, each block is a contiguous physical region of memory. These +memory regions are allocated with calls to the __get_free_pages() function. As +the name indicates, this function allocates pages of memory, and the second +argument is "order" or a power of two number of pages, that is +(for PAGE_SIZE == 4096) order=0 ==> 4096 bytes, order=1 ==> 8192 bytes, +order=2 ==> 16384 bytes, etc. The maximum size of a +region allocated by __get_free_pages is determined by the MAX_ORDER macro. More +precisely the limit can be calculated as: + + PAGE_SIZE << MAX_ORDER + + In a i386 architecture PAGE_SIZE is 4096 bytes + In a 2.4/i386 kernel MAX_ORDER is 10 + In a 2.6/i386 kernel MAX_ORDER is 11 + +So get_free_pages can allocate as much as 4MB or 8MB in a 2.4/2.6 kernel +respectively, with an i386 architecture. + +User space programs can include /usr/include/sys/user.h and +/usr/include/linux/mmzone.h to get PAGE_SIZE MAX_ORDER declarations. + +The pagesize can also be determined dynamically with the getpagesize (2) +system call. + + + Block number limit +-------------------- + +To understand the constraints of PACKET_MMAP, we have to see the structure +used to hold the pointers to each block. + +Currently, this structure is a dynamically allocated vector with kmalloc +called pg_vec, its size limits the number of blocks that can be allocated. + + +---+---+---+---+ + | x | x | x | x | + +---+---+---+---+ + | | | | + | | | v + | | v block #4 + | v block #3 + v block #2 + block #1 + + +kmalloc allocates any number of bytes of phisically contiguous memory from +a pool of pre-determined sizes. This pool of memory is mantained by the slab +allocator wich is at the end the responsible for doing the allocation and +hence wich imposes the maximum memory that kmalloc can allocate. + +In a 2.4/2.6 kernel and the i386 architecture, the limit is 131072 bytes. The +predetermined sizes that kmalloc uses can be checked in the "size-<bytes>" +entries of /proc/slabinfo + +In a 32 bit architecture, pointers are 4 bytes long, so the total number of +pointers to blocks is + + 131072/4 = 32768 blocks + + + PACKET_MMAP buffer size calculator +------------------------------------ + +Definitions: + +<size-max> : is the maximum size of allocable with kmalloc (see /proc/slabinfo) +<pointer size>: depends on the architecture -- sizeof(void *) +<page size> : depends on the architecture -- PAGE_SIZE or getpagesize (2) +<max-order> : is the value defined with MAX_ORDER +<frame size> : it's an upper bound of frame's capture size (more on this later) + +from these definitions we will derive + + <block number> = <size-max>/<pointer size> + <block size> = <pagesize> << <max-order> + +so, the max buffer size is + + <block number> * <block size> + +and, the number of frames be + + <block number> * <block size> / <frame size> + +Suposse the following parameters, wich apply for 2.6 kernel and an +i386 architecture: + + <size-max> = 131072 bytes + <pointer size> = 4 bytes + <pagesize> = 4096 bytes + <max-order> = 11 + +and a value for <frame size> of 2048 byteas. These parameters will yield + + <block number> = 131072/4 = 32768 blocks + <block size> = 4096 << 11 = 8 MiB. + +and hence the buffer will have a 262144 MiB size. So it can hold +262144 MiB / 2048 bytes = 134217728 frames + + +Actually, this buffer size is not possible with an i386 architecture. +Remember that the memory is allocated in kernel space, in the case of +an i386 kernel's memory size is limited to 1GiB. + +All memory allocations are not freed until the socket is closed. The memory +allocations are done with GFP_KERNEL priority, this basically means that +the allocation can wait and swap other process' memory in order to allocate +the nececessary memory, so normally limits can be reached. + + Other constraints +------------------- + +If you check the source code you will see that what I draw here as a frame +is not only the link level frame. At the begining of each frame there is a +header called struct tpacket_hdr used in PACKET_MMAP to hold link level's frame +meta information like timestamp. So what we draw here a frame it's really +the following (from include/linux/if_packet.h): + +/* + Frame structure: + + - Start. Frame must be aligned to TPACKET_ALIGNMENT=16 + - struct tpacket_hdr + - pad to TPACKET_ALIGNMENT=16 + - struct sockaddr_ll + - Gap, chosen so that packet data (Start+tp_net) alignes to + TPACKET_ALIGNMENT=16 + - Start+tp_mac: [ Optional MAC header ] + - Start+tp_net: Packet data, aligned to TPACKET_ALIGNMENT=16. + - Pad to align to TPACKET_ALIGNMENT=16 + */ + + + The following are conditions that are checked in packet_set_ring + + tp_block_size must be a multiple of PAGE_SIZE (1) + tp_frame_size must be greater than TPACKET_HDRLEN (obvious) + tp_frame_size must be a multiple of TPACKET_ALIGNMENT + tp_frame_nr must be exactly frames_per_block*tp_block_nr + +Note that tp_block_size should be choosed to be a power of two or there will +be a waste of memory. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ Maping and use of the circular buffer (ring) +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +The maping of the buffer in the user process is done with the conventional +mmap function. Even the circular buffer is compound of several physically +discontiguous blocks of memory, they are contiguous to the user space, hence +just one call to mmap is needed: + + mmap(0, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0); + +If tp_frame_size is a divisor of tp_block_size frames will be +contiguosly spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each +tp_block_size/tp_frame_size frames there will be a gap between +the frames. This is because a frame cannot be spawn across two +blocks. + +At the beginning of each frame there is an status field (see +struct tpacket_hdr). If this field is 0 means that the frame is ready +to be used for the kernel, If not, there is a frame the user can read +and the following flags apply: + + from include/linux/if_packet.h + + #define TP_STATUS_COPY 2 + #define TP_STATUS_LOSING 4 + #define TP_STATUS_CSUMNOTREADY 8 + + +TP_STATUS_COPY : This flag indicates that the frame (and associated + meta information) has been truncated because it's + larger than tp_frame_size. This packet can be + read entirely with recvfrom(). + + In order to make this work it must to be + enabled previously with setsockopt() and + the PACKET_COPY_THRESH option. + + The number of frames than can be buffered to + be read with recvfrom is limited like a normal socket. + See the SO_RCVBUF option in the socket (7) man page. + +TP_STATUS_LOSING : indicates there were packet drops from last time + statistics where checked with getsockopt() and + the PACKET_STATISTICS option. + +TP_STATUS_CSUMNOTREADY: currently it's used for outgoing IP packets wich + it's checksum will be done in hardware. So while + reading the packet we should not try to check the + checksum. + +for convenience there are also the following defines: + + #define TP_STATUS_KERNEL 0 + #define TP_STATUS_USER 1 + +The kernel initializes all frames to TP_STATUS_KERNEL, when the kernel +receives a packet it puts in the buffer and updates the status with +at least the TP_STATUS_USER flag. Then the user can read the packet, +once the packet is read the user must zero the status field, so the kernel +can use again that frame buffer. + +The user can use poll (any other variant should apply too) to check if new +packets are in the ring: + + struct pollfd pfd; + + pfd.fd = fd; + pfd.revents = 0; + pfd.events = POLLIN|POLLRDNORM|POLLERR; + + if (status == TP_STATUS_KERNEL) + retval = poll(&pfd, 1, timeout); + +It doesn't incur in a race condition to first check the status value and +then poll for frames. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ THANKS +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Jesse Brandeburg, for fixing my grammathical/spelling errors + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/pktgen.txt b/Documentation/networking/pktgen.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cc4b4d04129c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/pktgen.txt @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + + + HOWTO for the linux packet generator + ------------------------------------ + +Date: 041221 + +Enable CONFIG_NET_PKTGEN to compile and build pktgen.o either in kernel +or as module. Module is preferred. insmod pktgen if needed. Once running +pktgen creates a thread on each CPU where each thread has affinty it's CPU. +Monitoring and controlling is done via /proc. Easiest to select a suitable +a sample script and configure. + +On a dual CPU: + +ps aux | grep pkt +root 129 0.3 0.0 0 0 ? SW 2003 523:20 [pktgen/0] +root 130 0.3 0.0 0 0 ? SW 2003 509:50 [pktgen/1] + + +For montoring and control pktgen creates: + /proc/net/pktgen/pgctrl + /proc/net/pktgen/kpktgend_X + /proc/net/pktgen/ethX + + +Viewing threads +=============== +/proc/net/pktgen/kpktgend_0 +Name: kpktgend_0 max_before_softirq: 10000 +Running: +Stopped: eth1 +Result: OK: max_before_softirq=10000 + +Most important the devices assigend to thread. Note! A device can only belong +to one thread. + + +Viewing devices +=============== + +Parm section holds configured info. Current hold running stats. +Result is printed after run or after interruption. Example: + +/proc/net/pktgen/eth1 + +Params: count 10000000 min_pkt_size: 60 max_pkt_size: 60 + frags: 0 delay: 0 clone_skb: 1000000 ifname: eth1 + flows: 0 flowlen: 0 + dst_min: 10.10.11.2 dst_max: + src_min: src_max: + src_mac: 00:00:00:00:00:00 dst_mac: 00:04:23:AC:FD:82 + udp_src_min: 9 udp_src_max: 9 udp_dst_min: 9 udp_dst_max: 9 + src_mac_count: 0 dst_mac_count: 0 + Flags: +Current: + pkts-sofar: 10000000 errors: 39664 + started: 1103053986245187us stopped: 1103053999346329us idle: 880401us + seq_num: 10000011 cur_dst_mac_offset: 0 cur_src_mac_offset: 0 + cur_saddr: 0x10a0a0a cur_daddr: 0x20b0a0a + cur_udp_dst: 9 cur_udp_src: 9 + flows: 0 +Result: OK: 13101142(c12220741+d880401) usec, 10000000 (60byte,0frags) + 763292pps 390Mb/sec (390805504bps) errors: 39664 + +Confguring threads and devices +============================== +This is done via the /proc interface easiest done via pgset in the scripts + +Examples: + + pgset "clone_skb 1" sets the number of copies of the same packet + pgset "clone_skb 0" use single SKB for all transmits + pgset "pkt_size 9014" sets packet size to 9014 + pgset "frags 5" packet will consist of 5 fragments + pgset "count 200000" sets number of packets to send, set to zero + for continious sends untill explicitl stopped. + + pgset "delay 5000" adds delay to hard_start_xmit(). nanoseconds + + pgset "dst 10.0.0.1" sets IP destination address + (BEWARE! This generator is very aggressive!) + + pgset "dst_min 10.0.0.1" Same as dst + pgset "dst_max 10.0.0.254" Set the maximum destination IP. + pgset "src_min 10.0.0.1" Set the minimum (or only) source IP. + pgset "src_max 10.0.0.254" Set the maximum source IP. + pgset "dst6 fec0::1" IPV6 destination address + pgset "src6 fec0::2" IPV6 source address + pgset "dstmac 00:00:00:00:00:00" sets MAC destination address + pgset "srcmac 00:00:00:00:00:00" sets MAC source address + + pgset "src_mac_count 1" Sets the number of MACs we'll range through. + The 'minimum' MAC is what you set with srcmac. + + pgset "dst_mac_count 1" Sets the number of MACs we'll range through. + The 'minimum' MAC is what you set with dstmac. + + pgset "flag [name]" Set a flag to determine behaviour. Current flags + are: IPSRC_RND #IP Source is random (between min/max), + IPDST_RND, UDPSRC_RND, + UDPDST_RND, MACSRC_RND, MACDST_RND + + pgset "udp_src_min 9" set UDP source port min, If < udp_src_max, then + cycle through the port range. + + pgset "udp_src_max 9" set UDP source port max. + pgset "udp_dst_min 9" set UDP destination port min, If < udp_dst_max, then + cycle through the port range. + pgset "udp_dst_max 9" set UDP destination port max. + + pgset stop aborts injection. Also, ^C aborts generator. + + +Example scripts +=============== + +A collection of small tutorial scripts for pktgen is in expamples dir. + +pktgen.conf-1-1 # 1 CPU 1 dev +pktgen.conf-1-2 # 1 CPU 2 dev +pktgen.conf-2-1 # 2 CPU's 1 dev +pktgen.conf-2-2 # 2 CPU's 2 dev +pktgen.conf-1-1-rdos # 1 CPU 1 dev w. route DoS +pktgen.conf-1-1-ip6 # 1 CPU 1 dev ipv6 +pktgen.conf-1-1-ip6-rdos # 1 CPU 1 dev ipv6 w. route DoS +pktgen.conf-1-1-flows # 1 CPU 1 dev multiple flows. + +Run in shell: ./pktgen.conf-X-Y It does all the setup including sending. + + +Interrupt affinity +=================== +Note when adding devices to a specific CPU there good idea to also assign +/proc/irq/XX/smp_affinity so the TX-interrupts gets bound to the same CPU. +as this reduces cache bouncing when freeing skb's. + + +Current commands and configuration options +========================================== + +** Pgcontrol commands: + +start +stop + +** Thread commands: + +add_device +rem_device_all +max_before_softirq + + +** Device commands: + +count +clone_skb +debug + +frags +delay + +src_mac_count +dst_mac_count + +pkt_size +min_pkt_size +max_pkt_size + +udp_src_min +udp_src_max + +udp_dst_min +udp_dst_max + +flag + IPSRC_RND + TXSIZE_RND + IPDST_RND + UDPSRC_RND + UDPDST_RND + MACSRC_RND + MACDST_RND + +dst_min +dst_max + +src_min +src_max + +dst_mac +src_mac + +clear_counters + +dst6 +src6 + +flows +flowlen + +References: +ftp://robur.slu.se/pub/Linux/net-development/pktgen-testing/ +ftp://robur.slu.se/pub/Linux/net-development/pktgen-testing/examples/ + +Paper from Linux-Kongress in Erlangen 2004. +ftp://robur.slu.se/pub/Linux/net-development/pktgen-testing/pktgen_paper.pdf + +Thanks to: +Grant Grundler for testing on IA-64 and parisc, Harald Welte, Lennert Buytenhek +Stephen Hemminger, Andi Kleen, Dave Miller and many others. + + +Good luck with the linux net-development.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/networking/policy-routing.txt b/Documentation/networking/policy-routing.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..36f6936d7f21 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/policy-routing.txt @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +Classes +------- + + "Class" is a complete routing table in common sense. + I.e. it is tree of nodes (destination prefix, tos, metric) + with attached information: gateway, device etc. + This tree is looked up as specified in RFC1812 5.2.4.3 + 1. Basic match + 2. Longest match + 3. Weak TOS. + 4. Metric. (should not be in kernel space, but they are) + 5. Additional pruning rules. (not in kernel space). + + We have two special type of nodes: + REJECT - abort route lookup and return an error value. + THROW - abort route lookup in this class. + + + Currently the number of classes is limited to 255 + (0 is reserved for "not specified class") + + Three classes are builtin: + + RT_CLASS_LOCAL=255 - local interface addresses, + broadcasts, nat addresses. + + RT_CLASS_MAIN=254 - all normal routes are put there + by default. + + RT_CLASS_DEFAULT=253 - if ip_fib_model==1, then + normal default routes are put there, if ip_fib_model==2 + all gateway routes are put there. + + +Rules +----- + Rule is a record of (src prefix, src interface, tos, dst prefix) + with attached information. + + Rule types: + RTP_ROUTE - lookup in attached class + RTP_NAT - lookup in attached class and if a match is found, + translate packet source address. + RTP_MASQUERADE - lookup in attached class and if a match is found, + masquerade packet as sourced by us. + RTP_DROP - silently drop the packet. + RTP_REJECT - drop the packet and send ICMP NET UNREACHABLE. + RTP_PROHIBIT - drop the packet and send ICMP COMM. ADM. PROHIBITED. + + Rule flags: + RTRF_LOG - log route creations. + RTRF_VALVE - One way route (used with masquerading) + +Default setup: + +root@amber:/pub/ip-routing # iproute -r +Kernel routing policy rules +Pref Source Destination TOS Iface Cl + 0 default default 00 * 255 + 254 default default 00 * 254 + 255 default default 00 * 253 + + +Lookup algorithm +---------------- + + We scan rules list, and if a rule is matched, apply it. + If a route is found, return it. + If it is not found or a THROW node was matched, continue + to scan rules. + +Applications +------------ + +1. Just ignore classes. All the routes are put into MAIN class + (and/or into DEFAULT class). + + HOWTO: iproute add PREFIX [ tos TOS ] [ gw GW ] [ dev DEV ] + [ metric METRIC ] [ reject ] ... (look at iproute utility) + + or use route utility from current net-tools. + +2. Opposite case. Just forget all that you know about routing + tables. Every rule is supplied with its own gateway, device + info. record. This approach is not appropriate for automated + route maintenance, but it is ideal for manual configuration. + + HOWTO: iproute addrule [ from PREFIX ] [ to PREFIX ] [ tos TOS ] + [ dev INPUTDEV] [ pref PREFERENCE ] route [ gw GATEWAY ] + [ dev OUTDEV ] ..... + + Warning: As of now the size of the routing table in this + approach is limited to 256. If someone likes this model, I'll + relax this limitation. + +3. OSPF classes (see RFC1583, RFC1812 E.3.3) + Very clean, stable and robust algorithm for OSPF routing + domains. Unfortunately, it is not widely used in the Internet. + + Proposed setup: + 255 local addresses + 254 interface routes + 253 ASE routes with external metric + 252 ASE routes with internal metric + 251 inter-area routes + 250 intra-area routes for 1st area + 249 intra-area routes for 2nd area + etc. + + Rules: + iproute addrule class 253 + iproute addrule class 252 + iproute addrule class 251 + iproute addrule to a-prefix-for-1st-area class 250 + iproute addrule to another-prefix-for-1st-area class 250 + ... + iproute addrule to a-prefix-for-2nd-area class 249 + ... + + Area classes must be terminated with reject record. + iproute add default reject class 250 + iproute add default reject class 249 + ... + +4. The Variant Router Requirements Algorithm (RFC1812 E.3.2) + Create 16 classes for different TOS values. + It is a funny, but pretty useless algorithm. + I listed it just to show the power of new routing code. + +5. All the variety of combinations...... + + +GATED +----- + + Gated does not understand classes, but it will work + happily in MAIN+DEFAULT. All policy routes can be set + and maintained manually. + +IMPORTANT NOTE +-------------- + route.c has a compilation time switch CONFIG_IP_LOCAL_RT_POLICY. + If it is set, locally originated packets are routed + using all the policy list. This is not very convenient and + pretty ambiguous when used with NAT and masquerading. + I set it to FALSE by default. + + +Alexey Kuznetov +kuznet@ms2.inr.ac.ru diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ppp_generic.txt b/Documentation/networking/ppp_generic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..15b5172fbb98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ppp_generic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,432 @@ + PPP Generic Driver and Channel Interface + ---------------------------------------- + + Paul Mackerras + paulus@samba.org + 7 Feb 2002 + +The generic PPP driver in linux-2.4 provides an implementation of the +functionality which is of use in any PPP implementation, including: + +* the network interface unit (ppp0 etc.) +* the interface to the networking code +* PPP multilink: splitting datagrams between multiple links, and + ordering and combining received fragments +* the interface to pppd, via a /dev/ppp character device +* packet compression and decompression +* TCP/IP header compression and decompression +* detecting network traffic for demand dialling and for idle timeouts +* simple packet filtering + +For sending and receiving PPP frames, the generic PPP driver calls on +the services of PPP `channels'. A PPP channel encapsulates a +mechanism for transporting PPP frames from one machine to another. A +PPP channel implementation can be arbitrarily complex internally but +has a very simple interface with the generic PPP code: it merely has +to be able to send PPP frames, receive PPP frames, and optionally +handle ioctl requests. Currently there are PPP channel +implementations for asynchronous serial ports, synchronous serial +ports, and for PPP over ethernet. + +This architecture makes it possible to implement PPP multilink in a +natural and straightforward way, by allowing more than one channel to +be linked to each ppp network interface unit. The generic layer is +responsible for splitting datagrams on transmit and recombining them +on receive. + + +PPP channel API +--------------- + +See include/linux/ppp_channel.h for the declaration of the types and +functions used to communicate between the generic PPP layer and PPP +channels. + +Each channel has to provide two functions to the generic PPP layer, +via the ppp_channel.ops pointer: + +* start_xmit() is called by the generic layer when it has a frame to + send. The channel has the option of rejecting the frame for + flow-control reasons. In this case, start_xmit() should return 0 + and the channel should call the ppp_output_wakeup() function at a + later time when it can accept frames again, and the generic layer + will then attempt to retransmit the rejected frame(s). If the frame + is accepted, the start_xmit() function should return 1. + +* ioctl() provides an interface which can be used by a user-space + program to control aspects of the channel's behaviour. This + procedure will be called when a user-space program does an ioctl + system call on an instance of /dev/ppp which is bound to the + channel. (Usually it would only be pppd which would do this.) + +The generic PPP layer provides seven functions to channels: + +* ppp_register_channel() is called when a channel has been created, to + notify the PPP generic layer of its presence. For example, setting + a serial port to the PPPDISC line discipline causes the ppp_async + channel code to call this function. + +* ppp_unregister_channel() is called when a channel is to be + destroyed. For example, the ppp_async channel code calls this when + a hangup is detected on the serial port. + +* ppp_output_wakeup() is called by a channel when it has previously + rejected a call to its start_xmit function, and can now accept more + packets. + +* ppp_input() is called by a channel when it has received a complete + PPP frame. + +* ppp_input_error() is called by a channel when it has detected that a + frame has been lost or dropped (for example, because of a FCS (frame + check sequence) error). + +* ppp_channel_index() returns the channel index assigned by the PPP + generic layer to this channel. The channel should provide some way + (e.g. an ioctl) to transmit this back to user-space, as user-space + will need it to attach an instance of /dev/ppp to this channel. + +* ppp_unit_number() returns the unit number of the ppp network + interface to which this channel is connected, or -1 if the channel + is not connected. + +Connecting a channel to the ppp generic layer is initiated from the +channel code, rather than from the generic layer. The channel is +expected to have some way for a user-level process to control it +independently of the ppp generic layer. For example, with the +ppp_async channel, this is provided by the file descriptor to the +serial port. + +Generally a user-level process will initialize the underlying +communications medium and prepare it to do PPP. For example, with an +async tty, this can involve setting the tty speed and modes, issuing +modem commands, and then going through some sort of dialog with the +remote system to invoke PPP service there. We refer to this process +as `discovery'. Then the user-level process tells the medium to +become a PPP channel and register itself with the generic PPP layer. +The channel then has to report the channel number assigned to it back +to the user-level process. From that point, the PPP negotiation code +in the PPP daemon (pppd) can take over and perform the PPP +negotiation, accessing the channel through the /dev/ppp interface. + +At the interface to the PPP generic layer, PPP frames are stored in +skbuff structures and start with the two-byte PPP protocol number. +The frame does *not* include the 0xff `address' byte or the 0x03 +`control' byte that are optionally used in async PPP. Nor is there +any escaping of control characters, nor are there any FCS or framing +characters included. That is all the responsibility of the channel +code, if it is needed for the particular medium. That is, the skbuffs +presented to the start_xmit() function contain only the 2-byte +protocol number and the data, and the skbuffs presented to ppp_input() +must be in the same format. + +The channel must provide an instance of a ppp_channel struct to +represent the channel. The channel is free to use the `private' field +however it wishes. The channel should initialize the `mtu' and +`hdrlen' fields before calling ppp_register_channel() and not change +them until after ppp_unregister_channel() returns. The `mtu' field +represents the maximum size of the data part of the PPP frames, that +is, it does not include the 2-byte protocol number. + +If the channel needs some headroom in the skbuffs presented to it for +transmission (i.e., some space free in the skbuff data area before the +start of the PPP frame), it should set the `hdrlen' field of the +ppp_channel struct to the amount of headroom required. The generic +PPP layer will attempt to provide that much headroom but the channel +should still check if there is sufficient headroom and copy the skbuff +if there isn't. + +On the input side, channels should ideally provide at least 2 bytes of +headroom in the skbuffs presented to ppp_input(). The generic PPP +code does not require this but will be more efficient if this is done. + + +Buffering and flow control +-------------------------- + +The generic PPP layer has been designed to minimize the amount of data +that it buffers in the transmit direction. It maintains a queue of +transmit packets for the PPP unit (network interface device) plus a +queue of transmit packets for each attached channel. Normally the +transmit queue for the unit will contain at most one packet; the +exceptions are when pppd sends packets by writing to /dev/ppp, and +when the core networking code calls the generic layer's start_xmit() +function with the queue stopped, i.e. when the generic layer has +called netif_stop_queue(), which only happens on a transmit timeout. +The start_xmit function always accepts and queues the packet which it +is asked to transmit. + +Transmit packets are dequeued from the PPP unit transmit queue and +then subjected to TCP/IP header compression and packet compression +(Deflate or BSD-Compress compression), as appropriate. After this +point the packets can no longer be reordered, as the decompression +algorithms rely on receiving compressed packets in the same order that +they were generated. + +If multilink is not in use, this packet is then passed to the attached +channel's start_xmit() function. If the channel refuses to take +the packet, the generic layer saves it for later transmission. The +generic layer will call the channel's start_xmit() function again +when the channel calls ppp_output_wakeup() or when the core +networking code calls the generic layer's start_xmit() function +again. The generic layer contains no timeout and retransmission +logic; it relies on the core networking code for that. + +If multilink is in use, the generic layer divides the packet into one +or more fragments and puts a multilink header on each fragment. It +decides how many fragments to use based on the length of the packet +and the number of channels which are potentially able to accept a +fragment at the moment. A channel is potentially able to accept a +fragment if it doesn't have any fragments currently queued up for it +to transmit. The channel may still refuse a fragment; in this case +the fragment is queued up for the channel to transmit later. This +scheme has the effect that more fragments are given to higher- +bandwidth channels. It also means that under light load, the generic +layer will tend to fragment large packets across all the channels, +thus reducing latency, while under heavy load, packets will tend to be +transmitted as single fragments, thus reducing the overhead of +fragmentation. + + +SMP safety +---------- + +The PPP generic layer has been designed to be SMP-safe. Locks are +used around accesses to the internal data structures where necessary +to ensure their integrity. As part of this, the generic layer +requires that the channels adhere to certain requirements and in turn +provides certain guarantees to the channels. Essentially the channels +are required to provide the appropriate locking on the ppp_channel +structures that form the basis of the communication between the +channel and the generic layer. This is because the channel provides +the storage for the ppp_channel structure, and so the channel is +required to provide the guarantee that this storage exists and is +valid at the appropriate times. + +The generic layer requires these guarantees from the channel: + +* The ppp_channel object must exist from the time that + ppp_register_channel() is called until after the call to + ppp_unregister_channel() returns. + +* No thread may be in a call to any of ppp_input(), ppp_input_error(), + ppp_output_wakeup(), ppp_channel_index() or ppp_unit_number() for a + channel at the time that ppp_unregister_channel() is called for that + channel. + +* ppp_register_channel() and ppp_unregister_channel() must be called + from process context, not interrupt or softirq/BH context. + +* The remaining generic layer functions may be called at softirq/BH + level but must not be called from a hardware interrupt handler. + +* The generic layer may call the channel start_xmit() function at + softirq/BH level but will not call it at interrupt level. Thus the + start_xmit() function may not block. + +* The generic layer will only call the channel ioctl() function in + process context. + +The generic layer provides these guarantees to the channels: + +* The generic layer will not call the start_xmit() function for a + channel while any thread is already executing in that function for + that channel. + +* The generic layer will not call the ioctl() function for a channel + while any thread is already executing in that function for that + channel. + +* By the time a call to ppp_unregister_channel() returns, no thread + will be executing in a call from the generic layer to that channel's + start_xmit() or ioctl() function, and the generic layer will not + call either of those functions subsequently. + + +Interface to pppd +----------------- + +The PPP generic layer exports a character device interface called +/dev/ppp. This is used by pppd to control PPP interface units and +channels. Although there is only one /dev/ppp, each open instance of +/dev/ppp acts independently and can be attached either to a PPP unit +or a PPP channel. This is achieved using the file->private_data field +to point to a separate object for each open instance of /dev/ppp. In +this way an effect similar to Solaris' clone open is obtained, +allowing us to control an arbitrary number of PPP interfaces and +channels without having to fill up /dev with hundreds of device names. + +When /dev/ppp is opened, a new instance is created which is initially +unattached. Using an ioctl call, it can then be attached to an +existing unit, attached to a newly-created unit, or attached to an +existing channel. An instance attached to a unit can be used to send +and receive PPP control frames, using the read() and write() system +calls, along with poll() if necessary. Similarly, an instance +attached to a channel can be used to send and receive PPP frames on +that channel. + +In multilink terms, the unit represents the bundle, while the channels +represent the individual physical links. Thus, a PPP frame sent by a +write to the unit (i.e., to an instance of /dev/ppp attached to the +unit) will be subject to bundle-level compression and to fragmentation +across the individual links (if multilink is in use). In contrast, a +PPP frame sent by a write to the channel will be sent as-is on that +channel, without any multilink header. + +A channel is not initially attached to any unit. In this state it can +be used for PPP negotiation but not for the transfer of data packets. +It can then be connected to a PPP unit with an ioctl call, which +makes it available to send and receive data packets for that unit. + +The ioctl calls which are available on an instance of /dev/ppp depend +on whether it is unattached, attached to a PPP interface, or attached +to a PPP channel. The ioctl calls which are available on an +unattached instance are: + +* PPPIOCNEWUNIT creates a new PPP interface and makes this /dev/ppp + instance the "owner" of the interface. The argument should point to + an int which is the desired unit number if >= 0, or -1 to assign the + lowest unused unit number. Being the owner of the interface means + that the interface will be shut down if this instance of /dev/ppp is + closed. + +* PPPIOCATTACH attaches this instance to an existing PPP interface. + The argument should point to an int containing the unit number. + This does not make this instance the owner of the PPP interface. + +* PPPIOCATTCHAN attaches this instance to an existing PPP channel. + The argument should point to an int containing the channel number. + +The ioctl calls available on an instance of /dev/ppp attached to a +channel are: + +* PPPIOCDETACH detaches the instance from the channel. This ioctl is + deprecated since the same effect can be achieved by closing the + instance. In order to prevent possible races this ioctl will fail + with an EINVAL error if more than one file descriptor refers to this + instance (i.e. as a result of dup(), dup2() or fork()). + +* PPPIOCCONNECT connects this channel to a PPP interface. The + argument should point to an int containing the interface unit + number. It will return an EINVAL error if the channel is already + connected to an interface, or ENXIO if the requested interface does + not exist. + +* PPPIOCDISCONN disconnects this channel from the PPP interface that + it is connected to. It will return an EINVAL error if the channel + is not connected to an interface. + +* All other ioctl commands are passed to the channel ioctl() function. + +The ioctl calls that are available on an instance that is attached to +an interface unit are: + +* PPPIOCSMRU sets the MRU (maximum receive unit) for the interface. + The argument should point to an int containing the new MRU value. + +* PPPIOCSFLAGS sets flags which control the operation of the + interface. The argument should be a pointer to an int containing + the new flags value. The bits in the flags value that can be set + are: + SC_COMP_TCP enable transmit TCP header compression + SC_NO_TCP_CCID disable connection-id compression for + TCP header compression + SC_REJ_COMP_TCP disable receive TCP header decompression + SC_CCP_OPEN Compression Control Protocol (CCP) is + open, so inspect CCP packets + SC_CCP_UP CCP is up, may (de)compress packets + SC_LOOP_TRAFFIC send IP traffic to pppd + SC_MULTILINK enable PPP multilink fragmentation on + transmitted packets + SC_MP_SHORTSEQ expect short multilink sequence + numbers on received multilink fragments + SC_MP_XSHORTSEQ transmit short multilink sequence nos. + + The values of these flags are defined in <linux/if_ppp.h>. Note + that the values of the SC_MULTILINK, SC_MP_SHORTSEQ and + SC_MP_XSHORTSEQ bits are ignored if the CONFIG_PPP_MULTILINK option + is not selected. + +* PPPIOCGFLAGS returns the value of the status/control flags for the + interface unit. The argument should point to an int where the ioctl + will store the flags value. As well as the values listed above for + PPPIOCSFLAGS, the following bits may be set in the returned value: + SC_COMP_RUN CCP compressor is running + SC_DECOMP_RUN CCP decompressor is running + SC_DC_ERROR CCP decompressor detected non-fatal error + SC_DC_FERROR CCP decompressor detected fatal error + +* PPPIOCSCOMPRESS sets the parameters for packet compression or + decompression. The argument should point to a ppp_option_data + structure (defined in <linux/if_ppp.h>), which contains a + pointer/length pair which should describe a block of memory + containing a CCP option specifying a compression method and its + parameters. The ppp_option_data struct also contains a `transmit' + field. If this is 0, the ioctl will affect the receive path, + otherwise the transmit path. + +* PPPIOCGUNIT returns, in the int pointed to by the argument, the unit + number of this interface unit. + +* PPPIOCSDEBUG sets the debug flags for the interface to the value in + the int pointed to by the argument. Only the least significant bit + is used; if this is 1 the generic layer will print some debug + messages during its operation. This is only intended for debugging + the generic PPP layer code; it is generally not helpful for working + out why a PPP connection is failing. + +* PPPIOCGDEBUG returns the debug flags for the interface in the int + pointed to by the argument. + +* PPPIOCGIDLE returns the time, in seconds, since the last data + packets were sent and received. The argument should point to a + ppp_idle structure (defined in <linux/ppp_defs.h>). If the + CONFIG_PPP_FILTER option is enabled, the set of packets which reset + the transmit and receive idle timers is restricted to those which + pass the `active' packet filter. + +* PPPIOCSMAXCID sets the maximum connection-ID parameter (and thus the + number of connection slots) for the TCP header compressor and + decompressor. The lower 16 bits of the int pointed to by the + argument specify the maximum connection-ID for the compressor. If + the upper 16 bits of that int are non-zero, they specify the maximum + connection-ID for the decompressor, otherwise the decompressor's + maximum connection-ID is set to 15. + +* PPPIOCSNPMODE sets the network-protocol mode for a given network + protocol. The argument should point to an npioctl struct (defined + in <linux/if_ppp.h>). The `protocol' field gives the PPP protocol + number for the protocol to be affected, and the `mode' field + specifies what to do with packets for that protocol: + + NPMODE_PASS normal operation, transmit and receive packets + NPMODE_DROP silently drop packets for this protocol + NPMODE_ERROR drop packets and return an error on transmit + NPMODE_QUEUE queue up packets for transmit, drop received + packets + + At present NPMODE_ERROR and NPMODE_QUEUE have the same effect as + NPMODE_DROP. + +* PPPIOCGNPMODE returns the network-protocol mode for a given + protocol. The argument should point to an npioctl struct with the + `protocol' field set to the PPP protocol number for the protocol of + interest. On return the `mode' field will be set to the network- + protocol mode for that protocol. + +* PPPIOCSPASS and PPPIOCSACTIVE set the `pass' and `active' packet + filters. These ioctls are only available if the CONFIG_PPP_FILTER + option is selected. The argument should point to a sock_fprog + structure (defined in <linux/filter.h>) containing the compiled BPF + instructions for the filter. Packets are dropped if they fail the + `pass' filter; otherwise, if they fail the `active' filter they are + passed but they do not reset the transmit or receive idle timer. + +* PPPIOCSMRRU enables or disables multilink processing for received + packets and sets the multilink MRRU (maximum reconstructed receive + unit). The argument should point to an int containing the new MRRU + value. If the MRRU value is 0, processing of received multilink + fragments is disabled. This ioctl is only available if the + CONFIG_PPP_MULTILINK option is selected. + +Last modified: 7-feb-2002 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/proc_net_tcp.txt b/Documentation/networking/proc_net_tcp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..59cb915c3713 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/proc_net_tcp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +This document describes the interfaces /proc/net/tcp and /proc/net/tcp6. + +These /proc interfaces provide information about currently active TCP +connections, and are implemented by tcp_get_info() in net/ipv4/tcp_ipv4.c and +tcp6_get_info() in net/ipv6/tcp_ipv6.c, respectively. + +It will first list all listening TCP sockets, and next list all established +TCP connections. A typical entry of /proc/net/tcp would look like this (split +up into 3 parts because of the length of the line): + + 46: 010310AC:9C4C 030310AC:1770 01 + | | | | | |--> connection state + | | | | |------> remote TCP port number + | | | |-------------> remote IPv4 address + | | |--------------------> local TCP port number + | |---------------------------> local IPv4 address + |----------------------------------> number of entry + + 00000150:00000000 01:00000019 00000000 + | | | | |--> number of unrecovered RTO timeouts + | | | |----------> number of jiffies until timer expires + | | |----------------> timer_active (see below) + | |----------------------> receive-queue + |-------------------------------> transmit-queue + + 1000 0 54165785 4 cd1e6040 25 4 27 3 -1 + | | | | | | | | | |--> slow start size threshold, + | | | | | | | | | or -1 if the treshold + | | | | | | | | | is >= 0xFFFF + | | | | | | | | |----> sending congestion window + | | | | | | | |-------> (ack.quick<<1)|ack.pingpong + | | | | | | |---------> Predicted tick of soft clock + | | | | | | (delayed ACK control data) + | | | | | |------------> retransmit timeout + | | | | |------------------> location of socket in memory + | | | |-----------------------> socket reference count + | | |-----------------------------> inode + | |----------------------------------> unanswered 0-window probes + |---------------------------------------------> uid + +timer_active: + 0 no timer is pending + 1 retransmit-timer is pending + 2 another timer (e.g. delayed ack or keepalive) is pending + 3 this is a socket in TIME_WAIT state. Not all fields will contain + data (or even exist) + 4 zero window probe timer is pending diff --git a/Documentation/networking/pt.txt b/Documentation/networking/pt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..72e888c1d988 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/pt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +This is the README for the Gracilis Packetwin device driver, version 0.5 +ALPHA for Linux 1.3.43. + +These files will allow you to talk to the PackeTwin (now know as PT) and +connect through it just like a pair of TNCs. To do this you will also +require the AX.25 code in the kernel enabled. + +There are four files in this archive; this readme, a patch file, a .c file +and finally a .h file. The two program files need to be put into the +drivers/net directory in the Linux source tree, for me this is the +directory /usr/src/linux/drivers/net. The patch file needs to be patched in +at the top of the Linux source tree (/usr/src/linux in my case). + +You will most probably have to edit the pt.c file to suit your own setup, +this should just involve changing some of the defines at the top of the file. +Please note that if you run an external modem you must specify a speed of 0. + +The program is currently setup to run a 4800 baud external modem on port A +and a Kantronics DE-9600 daughter board on port B so if you have this (or +something similar) then you're right. + +To compile in the driver, put the files in the correct place and patch in +the diff. You will have to re-configure the kernel again before you +recompile it. + +The driver is not real good at the moment for finding the card. You can +'help' it by changing the order of the potential addresses in the structure +found in the pt_init() function so the address of where the card is is put +first. + +After compiling, you have to get them going, they are pretty well like any +other net device and just need ifconfig to get them going. +As an example, here is my /etc/rc.net +-------------------------- + +# +# Configure the PackeTwin, port A. +/sbin/ifconfig pt0a 44.136.8.87 hw ax25 vk2xlz mtu 512 +/sbin/ifconfig pt0a 44.136.8.87 broadcast 44.136.8.255 netmask 255.255.255.0 +/sbin/route add -net 44.136.8.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 dev pt0a +/sbin/route add -net 44.0.0.0 netmask 255.0.0.0 gw 44.136.8.68 dev pt0a +/sbin/route add -net 138.25.16.0 netmask 255.255.240.0 dev pt0a +/sbin/route add -host 44.136.8.255 dev pt0a +# +# Configure the PackeTwin, port B. +/sbin/ifconfig pt0b 44.136.8.87 hw ax25 vk2xlz-1 mtu 512 +/sbin/ifconfig pt0b 44.136.8.87 broadcast 44.255.255.255 netmask 255.0.0.0 +/sbin/route add -host 44.136.8.216 dev pt0b +/sbin/route add -host 44.136.8.95 dev pt0b +/sbin/route add -host 44.255.255.255 dev pt0b + +This version of the driver comes under the GNU GPL. If you have one of my +previous (non-GPL) versions of the driver, please update to this one. + +I hope that this all works well for you. I would be pleased to hear how +many people use the driver and if it does its job. + + - Craig vk2xlz <csmall@small.dropbear.id.au> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ray_cs.txt b/Documentation/networking/ray_cs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b1def00bc4a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ray_cs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +September 21, 1999 + +Copyright (c) 1998 Corey Thomas (corey@world.std.com) + +This file is the documentation for the Raylink Wireless LAN card driver for +Linux. The Raylink wireless LAN card is a PCMCIA card which provides IEEE +802.11 compatible wireless network connectivity at 1 and 2 megabits/second. +See http://www.raytheon.com/micro/raylink/ for more information on the Raylink +card. This driver is in early development and does have bugs. See the known +bugs and limitations at the end of this document for more information. +This driver also works with WebGear's Aviator 2.4 and Aviator Pro +wireless LAN cards. + +As of kernel 2.3.18, the ray_cs driver is part of the Linux kernel +source. My web page for the development of ray_cs is at +http://world.std.com/~corey/raylink.html and I can be emailed at +corey@world.std.com + +The kernel driver is based on ray_cs-1.62.tgz + +The driver at my web page is intended to be used as an add on to +David Hinds pcmcia package. All the command line parameters are +available when compiled as a module. When built into the kernel, only +the essid= string parameter is available via the kernel command line. +This will change after the method of sorting out parameters for all +the PCMCIA drivers is agreed upon. If you must have a built in driver +with nondefault parameters, they can be edited in +/usr/src/linux/drivers/net/pcmcia/ray_cs.c. Searching for MODULE_PARM +will find them all. + +Information on card services is available at: + ftp://hyper.stanford.edu/pub/pcmcia/doc + http://hyper.stanford.edu/HyperNews/get/pcmcia/home.html + + +Card services user programs are still required for PCMCIA devices. +pcmcia-cs-3.1.1 or greater is required for the kernel version of +the driver. + +Currently, ray_cs is not part of David Hinds card services package, +so the following magic is required. + +At the end of the /etc/pcmcia/config.opts file, add the line: +source ./ray_cs.opts +This will make card services read the ray_cs.opts file +when starting. Create the file /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts containing the +following: + +#### start of /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts ################### +# Configuration options for Raylink Wireless LAN PCMCIA card +device "ray_cs" + class "network" module "misc/ray_cs" + +card "RayLink PC Card WLAN Adapter" + manfid 0x01a6, 0x0000 + bind "ray_cs" + +module "misc/ray_cs" opts "" +#### end of /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts ##################### + + +To join an existing network with +different parameters, contact the network administrator for the +configuration information, and edit /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts. +Add the parameters below between the empty quotes. + +Parameters for ray_cs driver which may be specified in ray_cs.opts: + +bc integer 0 = normal mode (802.11 timing) + 1 = slow down inter frame timing to allow + operation with older breezecom access + points. + +beacon_period integer beacon period in Kilo-microseconds + legal values = must be integer multiple + of hop dwell + default = 256 + +country integer 1 = USA (default) + 2 = Europe + 3 = Japan + 4 = Korea + 5 = Spain + 6 = France + 7 = Israel + 8 = Australia + +essid string ESS ID - network name to join + string with maximum length of 32 chars + default value = "ADHOC_ESSID" + +hop_dwell integer hop dwell time in Kilo-microseconds + legal values = 16,32,64,128(default),256 + +irq_mask integer linux standard 16 bit value 1bit/IRQ + lsb is IRQ 0, bit 1 is IRQ 1 etc. + Used to restrict choice of IRQ's to use. + Recommended method for controlling + interrupts is in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts + +net_type integer 0 (default) = adhoc network, + 1 = infrastructure + +phy_addr string string containing new MAC address in + hex, must start with x eg + x00008f123456 + +psm integer 0 = continuously active + 1 = power save mode (not useful yet) + +pc_debug integer (0-5) larger values for more verbose + logging. Replaces ray_debug. + +ray_debug integer Replaced with pc_debug + +ray_mem_speed integer defaults to 500 + +sniffer integer 0 = not sniffer (default) + 1 = sniffer which can be used to record all + network traffic using tcpdump or similar, + but no normal network use is allowed. + +translate integer 0 = no translation (encapsulate frames) + 1 = translation (RFC1042/802.1) + + +More on sniffer mode: + +tcpdump does not understand 802.11 headers, so it can't +interpret the contents, but it can record to a file. This is only +useful for debugging 802.11 lowlevel protocols that are not visible to +linux. If you want to watch ftp xfers, or do similar things, you +don't need to use sniffer mode. Also, some packet types are never +sent up by the card, so you will never see them (ack, rts, cts, probe +etc.) There is a simple program (showcap) included in the ray_cs +package which parses the 802.11 headers. + +Known Problems and missing features + + Does not work with non x86 + + Does not work with SMP + + Support for defragmenting frames is not yet debugged, and in + fact is known to not work. I have never encountered a net set + up to fragment, but still, it should be fixed. + + The ioctl support is incomplete. The hardware address cannot be set + using ifconfig yet. If a different hardware address is needed, it may + be set using the phy_addr parameter in ray_cs.opts. This requires + a card insertion to take effect. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/routing.txt b/Documentation/networking/routing.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a26838b930f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/routing.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +The directory ftp.inr.ac.ru:/ip-routing contains: + +- iproute.c - "professional" routing table maintenance utility. + +- rdisc.tar.gz - rdisc daemon, ported from Sun. + STRONGLY RECOMMENDED FOR ALL HOSTS. + +- routing.tgz - original Mike McLagan's route by source patch. + Currently it is obsolete. + +- gated.dif-ss<NEWEST>.gz - gated-R3_6Alpha_2 fixes. + Look at README.gated + +- mrouted-3.8.dif.gz - mrouted-3.8 fixes. + +- rtmon.c - trivial debugging utility: reads and stores netlink. + + +NEWS for user. + +- Policy based routing. Routing decisions are made on the basis + not only of destination address, but also source address, + TOS and incoming interface. +- Complete set of IP level control messages. + Now Linux is the only OS in the world complying to RFC requirements. + Great win 8) +- New interface addressing paradigm. + Assignment of address ranges to interface, + multiple prefixes etc. etc. + Do not bother, it is compatible with the old one. Moreover: +- You don't need to do "route add aaa.bbb.ccc... eth0" anymore, + it is done automatically. +- "Abstract" UNIX sockets and security enhancements. + This is necessary to use TIRPC and TLI emulation library. + +NEWS for hacker. + +- New destination cache. Flexible, robust and just beautiful. +- Network stack is reordered, simplified, optimized, a lot of bugs fixed. + (well, and new bugs were introduced, but I haven't seen them yet 8)) + It is difficult to describe all the changes, look into source. + +If you see this file, then this patch works 8) + +Alexey Kuznetsov. +kuznet@ms2.inr.ac.ru diff --git a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6726b524ec45 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +S2IO Technologies XFrame 10 Gig adapter. +------------------------------------------- + +I. Module loadable parameters. +When loaded as a module, the driver provides a host of Module loadable +parameters, so the device can be tuned as per the users needs. +A list of the Module params is given below. +(i) ring_num: This can be used to program the number of + receive rings used in the driver. +(ii) ring_len: This defines the number of descriptors each ring + can have. There can be a maximum of 8 rings. +(iii) frame_len: This is an array of size 8. Using this we can + set the maximum size of the received frame that can + be steered into the corrsponding receive ring. +(iv) fifo_num: This defines the number of Tx FIFOs thats used in + the driver. +(v) fifo_len: Each element defines the number of + Tx descriptors that can be associated with each + corresponding FIFO. There are a maximum of 8 FIFOs. +(vi) tx_prio: This is a bool, if module is loaded with a non-zero + value for tx_prio multi FIFO scheme is activated. +(vii) rx_prio: This is a bool, if module is loaded with a non-zero + value for tx_prio multi RING scheme is activated. +(viii) latency_timer: The value given against this param will be + loaded into the latency timer register in PCI Config + space, else the register is left with its reset value. + +II. Performance tuning. + By changing a few sysctl parameters. + Copy the following lines into a file and run the following command, + "sysctl -p <file_name>" +### IPV4 specific settings +net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps = 0 # turns TCP timestamp support off, default 1, reduces CPU use +net.ipv4.tcp_sack = 0 # turn SACK support off, default on +# on systems with a VERY fast bus -> memory interface this is the big gainer +net.ipv4.tcp_rmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/default/max TCP read buffer, default 4096 87380 174760 +net.ipv4.tcp_wmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/pressure/max TCP write buffer, default 4096 16384 131072 +net.ipv4.tcp_mem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/pressure/max TCP buffer space, default 31744 32256 32768 + +### CORE settings (mostly for socket and UDP effect) +net.core.rmem_max = 524287 # maximum receive socket buffer size, default 131071 +net.core.wmem_max = 524287 # maximum send socket buffer size, default 131071 +net.core.rmem_default = 524287 # default receive socket buffer size, default 65535 +net.core.wmem_default = 524287 # default send socket buffer size, default 65535 +net.core.optmem_max = 524287 # maximum amount of option memory buffers, default 10240 +net.core.netdev_max_backlog = 300000 # number of unprocessed input packets before kernel starts dropping them, default 300 +---End of performance tuning file--- + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sctp.txt b/Documentation/networking/sctp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0c790a76910e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/sctp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +Linux Kernel SCTP + +This is the current BETA release of the Linux Kernel SCTP reference +implementation. + +SCTP (Stream Control Transmission Protocol) is a IP based, message oriented, +reliable transport protocol, with congestion control, support for +transparent multi-homing, and multiple ordered streams of messages. +RFC2960 defines the core protocol. The IETF SIGTRAN working group originally +developed the SCTP protocol and later handed the protocol over to the +Transport Area (TSVWG) working group for the continued evolvement of SCTP as a +general purpose transport. + +See the IETF website (http://www.ietf.org) for further documents on SCTP. +See http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2960.txt + +The initial project goal is to create an Linux kernel reference implementation +of SCTP that is RFC 2960 compliant and provides an programming interface +referred to as the UDP-style API of the Sockets Extensions for SCTP, as +proposed in IETF Internet-Drafts. + + +Caveats: + +-lksctp can be built as statically or as a module. However, be aware that +module removal of lksctp is not yet a safe activity. + +-There is tentative support for IPv6, but most work has gone towards +implementation and testing lksctp on IPv4. + + +For more information, please visit the lksctp project website: + http://www.sf.net/projects/lksctp + +Or contact the lksctp developers through the mailing list: + <lksctp-developers@lists.sourceforge.net> + + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/shaper.txt b/Documentation/networking/shaper.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6c4ebb66a906 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/shaper.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +Traffic Shaper For Linux + +This is the current BETA release of the traffic shaper for Linux. It works +within the following limits: + +o Minimum shaping speed is currently about 9600 baud (it can only +shape down to 1 byte per clock tick) + +o Maximum is about 256K, it will go above this but get a bit blocky. + +o If you ifconfig the master device that a shaper is attached to down +then your machine will follow. + +o The shaper must be a module. + + +Setup: + + A shaper device is configured using the shapeconfig program. +Typically you will do something like this + +shapecfg attach shaper0 eth1 +shapecfg speed shaper0 64000 +ifconfig shaper0 myhost netmask 255.255.255.240 broadcast 1.2.3.4.255 up +route add -net some.network netmask a.b.c.d dev shaper0 + +The shaper should have the same IP address as the device it is attached to +for normal use. + +Gotchas: + + The shaper shapes transmitted traffic. It's rather impossible to +shape received traffic except at the end (or a router) transmitting it. + + Gated/routed/rwhod/mrouted all see the shaper as an additional device +and will treat it as such unless patched. Note that for mrouted you can run +mrouted tunnels via a traffic shaper to control bandwidth usage. + + The shaper is device/route based. This makes it very easy to use +with any setup BUT less flexible. You may need to use iproute2 to set up +multiple route tables to get the flexibility. + + There is no "borrowing" or "sharing" scheme. This is a simple +traffic limiter. We implement Van Jacobson and Sally Floyd's CBQ +architecture into Linux 2.2. This is the preferred solution. Shaper is +for simple or back compatible setups. + +Alan diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sis900.txt b/Documentation/networking/sis900.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bddffd7385ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/sis900.txt @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ + +SiS 900/7016 Fast Ethernet Device Driver + +Ollie Lho + +Lei Chun Chang + + Copyright © 1999 by Silicon Integrated System Corp. + + This document gives some information on installation and usage of SiS + 900/7016 device driver under Linux. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at + your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but + WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 + USA + _________________________________________________________________ + + Table of Contents + 1. Introduction + 2. Changes + 3. Tested Environment + 4. Files in This Package + 5. Installation + + Building the driver as loadable module + Building the driver into kernel + + 6. Known Problems and Bugs + 7. Revision History + 8. Acknowledgements + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 1. Introduction + + This document describes the revision 1.06 and 1.07 of SiS 900/7016 + Fast Ethernet device driver under Linux. The driver is developed by + Silicon Integrated System Corp. and distributed freely under the GNU + General Public License (GPL). The driver can be compiled as a loadable + module and used under Linux kernel version 2.2.x. (rev. 1.06) With + minimal changes, the driver can also be used under 2.3.x and 2.4.x + kernel (rev. 1.07), please see Chapter 5. If you are intended to use + the driver for earlier kernels, you are on your own. + + The driver is tested with usual TCP/IP applications including FTP, + Telnet, Netscape etc. and is used constantly by the developers. + + Please send all comments/fixes/questions to Lei-Chun Chang. + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 2. Changes + + Changes made in Revision 1.07 + + 1. Separation of sis900.c and sis900.h in order to move most constant + definition to sis900.h (many of those constants were corrected) + 2. Clean up PCI detection, the pci-scan from Donald Becker were not + used, just simple pci_find_*. + 3. MII detection is modified to support multiple mii transceiver. + 4. Bugs in read_eeprom, mdio_* were removed. + 5. Lot of sis900 irrelevant comments were removed/changed and more + comments were added to reflect the real situation. + 6. Clean up of physical/virtual address space mess in buffer + descriptors. + 7. Better transmit/receive error handling. + 8. The driver now uses zero-copy single buffer management scheme to + improve performance. + 9. Names of variables were changed to be more consistent. + 10. Clean up of auo-negotiation and timer code. + 11. Automatic detection and change of PHY on the fly. + 12. Bug in mac probing fixed. + 13. Fix 630E equalier problem by modifying the equalizer workaround + rule. + 14. Support for ICS1893 10/100 Interated PHYceiver. + 15. Support for media select by ifconfig. + 16. Added kernel-doc extratable documentation. + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 3. Tested Environment + + This driver is developed on the following hardware + + * Intel Celeron 500 with SiS 630 (rev 02) chipset + * SiS 900 (rev 01) and SiS 7016/7014 Fast Ethernet Card + + and tested with these software environments + + * Red Hat Linux version 6.2 + * Linux kernel version 2.4.0 + * Netscape version 4.6 + * NcFTP 3.0.0 beta 18 + * Samba version 2.0.3 + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 4. Files in This Package + + In the package you can find these files: + + sis900.c + Driver source file in C + + sis900.h + Header file for sis900.c + + sis900.sgml + DocBook SGML source of the document + + sis900.txt + Driver document in plain text + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 5. Installation + + Silicon Integrated System Corp. is cooperating closely with core Linux + Kernel developers. The revisions of SiS 900 driver are distributed by + the usuall channels for kernel tar files and patches. Those kernel tar + files for official kernel and patches for kernel pre-release can be + download at official kernel ftp site and its mirrors. The 1.06 + revision can be found in kernel version later than 2.3.15 and + pre-2.2.14, and 1.07 revision can be found in kernel version 2.4.0. If + you have no prior experience in networking under Linux, please read + Ethernet HOWTO and Networking HOWTO available from Linux Documentation + Project (LDP). + + The driver is bundled in release later than 2.2.11 and 2.3.15 so this + is the most easy case. Be sure you have the appropriate packages for + compiling kernel source. Those packages are listed in Document/Changes + in kernel source distribution. If you have to install the driver other + than those bundled in kernel release, you should have your driver file + sis900.c and sis900.h copied into /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/ first. + There are two alternative ways to install the driver + _________________________________________________________________ + +Building the driver as loadable module + + To build the driver as a loadable kernel module you have to + reconfigure the kernel to activate network support by + +make menuconfig + + Choose "Loadable module support --->", then select "Enable loadable + module support". + + Choose "Network Device Support --->", select "Ethernet (10 or + 100Mbit)". Then select "EISA, VLB, PCI and on board controllers", and + choose "SiS 900/7016 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter support" to "M". + + After reconfiguring the kernel, you can make the driver module by + +make modules + + The driver should be compiled with no errors. After compiling the + driver, the driver can be installed to proper place by + +make modules_install + + Load the driver into kernel by + +insmod sis900 + + When loading the driver into memory, some information message can be + view by + +dmesg + + or +cat /var/log/message + + If the driver is loaded properly you will have messages similar to + this: + +sis900.c: v1.07.06 11/07/2000 +eth0: SiS 900 PCI Fast Ethernet at 0xd000, IRQ 10, 00:00:e8:83:7f:a4. +eth0: SiS 900 Internal MII PHY transceiver found at address 1. +eth0: Using SiS 900 Internal MII PHY as default + + showing the version of the driver and the results of probing routine. + + Once the driver is loaded, network can be brought up by + +/sbin/ifconfig eth0 IPADDR broadcast BROADCAST netmask NETMASK media TYPE + + where IPADDR, BROADCAST, NETMASK are your IP address, broadcast + address and netmask respectively. TYPE is used to set medium type used + by the device. Typical values are "10baseT"(twisted-pair 10Mbps + Ethernet) or "100baseT" (twisted-pair 100Mbps Ethernet). For more + information on how to configure network interface, please refer to + Networking HOWTO. + + The link status is also shown by kernel messages. For example, after + the network interface is activated, you may have the message: + +eth0: Media Link On 100mbps full-duplex + + If you try to unplug the twist pair (TP) cable you will get + +eth0: Media Link Off + + indicating that the link is failed. + _________________________________________________________________ + +Building the driver into kernel + + If you want to make the driver into kernel, choose "Y" rather than "M" + on "SiS 900/7016 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter support" when configuring + the kernel. Build the kernel image in the usual way + +make clean + +make bzlilo + + Next time the system reboot, you have the driver in memory. + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 6. Known Problems and Bugs + + There are some known problems and bugs. If you find any other bugs + please mail to lcchang@sis.com.tw + + 1. AM79C901 HomePNA PHY is not thoroughly tested, there may be some + bugs in the "on the fly" change of transceiver. + 2. A bug is hidden somewhere in the receive buffer management code, + the bug causes NULL pointer reference in the kernel. This fault is + caught before bad things happen and reported with the message: + eth0: NULL pointer encountered in Rx ring, skipping which can be + viewed with dmesg or cat /var/log/message. + 3. The media type change from 10Mbps to 100Mbps twisted-pair ethernet + by ifconfig causes the media link down. + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 7. Revision History + + * November 13, 2000, Revision 1.07, seventh release, 630E problem + fixed and further clean up. + * November 4, 1999, Revision 1.06, Second release, lots of clean up + and optimization. + * August 8, 1999, Revision 1.05, Initial Public Release + _________________________________________________________________ + +Chapter 8. Acknowledgements + + This driver was originally derived form Donald Becker's pci-skeleton + and rtl8139 drivers. Donald also provided various suggestion regarded + with improvements made in revision 1.06. + + The 1.05 revision was created by Jim Huang, AMD 79c901 support was + added by Chin-Shan Li. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt b/Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..851fc97bb22f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt @@ -0,0 +1,568 @@ +(C)Copyright 1999-2004 Marvell(R). +All rights reserved +=========================================================================== + +sk98lin.txt created 13-Feb-2004 + +Readme File for sk98lin v6.23 +Marvell Yukon/SysKonnect SK-98xx Gigabit Ethernet Adapter family driver for LINUX + +This file contains + 1 Overview + 2 Required Files + 3 Installation + 3.1 Driver Installation + 3.2 Inclusion of adapter at system start + 4 Driver Parameters + 4.1 Per-Port Parameters + 4.2 Adapter Parameters + 5 Large Frame Support + 6 VLAN and Link Aggregation Support (IEEE 802.1, 802.1q, 802.3ad) + 7 Troubleshooting + +=========================================================================== + + +1 Overview +=========== + +The sk98lin driver supports the Marvell Yukon and SysKonnect +SK-98xx/SK-95xx compliant Gigabit Ethernet Adapter on Linux. It has +been tested with Linux on Intel/x86 machines. +*** + + +2 Required Files +================= + +The linux kernel source. +No additional files required. +*** + + +3 Installation +=============== + +It is recommended to download the latest version of the driver from the +SysKonnect web site www.syskonnect.com. If you have downloaded the latest +driver, the Linux kernel has to be patched before the driver can be +installed. For details on how to patch a Linux kernel, refer to the +patch.txt file. + +3.1 Driver Installation +------------------------ + +The following steps describe the actions that are required to install +the driver and to start it manually. These steps should be carried +out for the initial driver setup. Once confirmed to be ok, they can +be included in the system start. + +NOTE 1: To perform the following tasks you need 'root' access. + +NOTE 2: In case of problems, please read the section "Troubleshooting" + below. + +The driver can either be integrated into the kernel or it can be compiled +as a module. Select the appropriate option during the kernel +configuration. + +Compile/use the driver as a module +---------------------------------- +To compile the driver, go to the directory /usr/src/linux and +execute the command "make menuconfig" or "make xconfig" and proceed as +follows: + +To integrate the driver permanently into the kernel, proceed as follows: + +1. Select the menu "Network device support" and then "Ethernet(1000Mbit)" +2. Mark "Marvell Yukon Chipset / SysKonnect SK-98xx family support" + with (*) +3. Build a new kernel when the configuration of the above options is + finished. +4. Install the new kernel. +5. Reboot your system. + +To use the driver as a module, proceed as follows: + +1. Enable 'loadable module support' in the kernel. +2. For automatic driver start, enable the 'Kernel module loader'. +3. Select the menu "Network device support" and then "Ethernet(1000Mbit)" +4. Mark "Marvell Yukon Chipset / SysKonnect SK-98xx family support" + with (M) +5. Execute the command "make modules". +6. Execute the command "make modules_install". + The appropiate modules will be installed. +7. Reboot your system. + + +Load the module manually +------------------------ +To load the module manually, proceed as follows: + +1. Enter "modprobe sk98lin". +2. If a Marvell Yukon or SysKonnect SK-98xx adapter is installed in + your computer and you have a /proc file system, execute the command: + "ls /proc/net/sk98lin/" + This should produce an output containing a line with the following + format: + eth0 eth1 ... + which indicates that your adapter has been found and initialized. + + NOTE 1: If you have more than one Marvell Yukon or SysKonnect SK-98xx + adapter installed, the adapters will be listed as 'eth0', + 'eth1', 'eth2', etc. + For each adapter, repeat steps 3 and 4 below. + + NOTE 2: If you have other Ethernet adapters installed, your Marvell + Yukon or SysKonnect SK-98xx adapter will be mapped to the + next available number, e.g. 'eth1'. The mapping is executed + automatically. + The module installation message (displayed either in a system + log file or on the console) prints a line for each adapter + found containing the corresponding 'ethX'. + +3. Select an IP address and assign it to the respective adapter by + entering: + ifconfig eth0 <ip-address> + With this command, the adapter is connected to the Ethernet. + + SK-98xx Gigabit Ethernet Server Adapters: The yellow LED on the adapter + is now active, the link status LED of the primary port is active and + the link status LED of the secondary port (on dual port adapters) is + blinking (if the ports are connected to a switch or hub). + SK-98xx V2.0 Gigabit Ethernet Adapters: The link status LED is active. + In addition, you will receive a status message on the console stating + "ethX: network connection up using port Y" and showing the selected + connection parameters (x stands for the ethernet device number + (0,1,2, etc), y stands for the port name (A or B)). + + NOTE: If you are in doubt about IP addresses, ask your network + administrator for assistance. + +4. Your adapter should now be fully operational. + Use 'ping <otherstation>' to verify the connection to other computers + on your network. +5. To check the adapter configuration view /proc/net/sk98lin/[devicename]. + For example by executing: + "cat /proc/net/sk98lin/eth0" + +Unload the module +----------------- +To stop and unload the driver modules, proceed as follows: + +1. Execute the command "ifconfig eth0 down". +2. Execute the command "rmmod sk98lin". + +3.2 Inclusion of adapter at system start +----------------------------------------- + +Since a large number of different Linux distributions are +available, we are unable to describe a general installation procedure +for the driver module. +Because the driver is now integrated in the kernel, installation should +be easy, using the standard mechanism of your distribution. +Refer to the distribution's manual for installation of ethernet adapters. + +*** + +4 Driver Parameters +==================== + +Parameters can be set at the command line after the module has been +loaded with the command 'modprobe'. +In some distributions, the configuration tools are able to pass parameters +to the driver module. + +If you use the kernel module loader, you can set driver parameters +in the file /etc/modprobe.conf (or /etc/modules.conf in 2.4 or earlier). +To set the driver parameters in this file, proceed as follows: + +1. Insert a line of the form : + options sk98lin ... + For "...", the same syntax is required as described for the command + line paramaters of modprobe below. +2. To activate the new parameters, either reboot your computer + or + unload and reload the driver. + The syntax of the driver parameters is: + + modprobe sk98lin parameter=value1[,value2[,value3...]] + + where value1 refers to the first adapter, value2 to the second etc. + +NOTE: All parameters are case sensitive. Write them exactly as shown + below. + +Example: +Suppose you have two adapters. You want to set auto-negotiation +on the first adapter to ON and on the second adapter to OFF. +You also want to set DuplexCapabilities on the first adapter +to FULL, and on the second adapter to HALF. +Then, you must enter: + + modprobe sk98lin AutoNeg_A=On,Off DupCap_A=Full,Half + +NOTE: The number of adapters that can be configured this way is + limited in the driver (file skge.c, constant SK_MAX_CARD_PARAM). + The current limit is 16. If you happen to install + more adapters, adjust this and recompile. + + +4.1 Per-Port Parameters +------------------------ + +These settings are available for each port on the adapter. +In the following description, '?' stands for the port for +which you set the parameter (A or B). + +Speed +----- +Parameter: Speed_? +Values: 10, 100, 1000, Auto +Default: Auto + +This parameter is used to set the speed capabilities. It is only valid +for the SK-98xx V2.0 copper adapters. +Usually, the speed is negotiated between the two ports during link +establishment. If this fails, a port can be forced to a specific setting +with this parameter. + +Auto-Negotiation +---------------- +Parameter: AutoNeg_? +Values: On, Off, Sense +Default: On + +The "Sense"-mode automatically detects whether the link partner supports +auto-negotiation or not. + +Duplex Capabilities +------------------- +Parameter: DupCap_? +Values: Half, Full, Both +Default: Both + +This parameters is only relevant if auto-negotiation for this port is +not set to "Sense". If auto-negotiation is set to "On", all three values +are possible. If it is set to "Off", only "Full" and "Half" are allowed. +This parameter is usefull if your link partner does not support all +possible combinations. + +Flow Control +------------ +Parameter: FlowCtrl_? +Values: Sym, SymOrRem, LocSend, None +Default: SymOrRem + +This parameter can be used to set the flow control capabilities the +port reports during auto-negotiation. It can be set for each port +individually. +Possible modes: + -- Sym = Symmetric: both link partners are allowed to send + PAUSE frames + -- SymOrRem = SymmetricOrRemote: both or only remote partner + are allowed to send PAUSE frames + -- LocSend = LocalSend: only local link partner is allowed + to send PAUSE frames + -- None = no link partner is allowed to send PAUSE frames + +NOTE: This parameter is ignored if auto-negotiation is set to "Off". + +Role in Master-Slave-Negotiation (1000Base-T only) +-------------------------------------------------- +Parameter: Role_? +Values: Auto, Master, Slave +Default: Auto + +This parameter is only valid for the SK-9821 and SK-9822 adapters. +For two 1000Base-T ports to communicate, one must take the role of the +master (providing timing information), while the other must be the +slave. Usually, this is negotiated between the two ports during link +establishment. If this fails, a port can be forced to a specific setting +with this parameter. + + +4.2 Adapter Parameters +----------------------- + +Connection Type (SK-98xx V2.0 copper adapters only) +--------------- +Parameter: ConType +Values: Auto, 100FD, 100HD, 10FD, 10HD +Default: Auto + +The parameter 'ConType' is a combination of all five per-port parameters +within one single parameter. This simplifies the configuration of both ports +of an adapter card! The different values of this variable reflect the most +meaningful combinations of port parameters. + +The following table shows the values of 'ConType' and the corresponding +combinations of the per-port parameters: + + ConType | DupCap AutoNeg FlowCtrl Role Speed + ----------+------------------------------------------------------ + Auto | Both On SymOrRem Auto Auto + 100FD | Full Off None Auto (ignored) 100 + 100HD | Half Off None Auto (ignored) 100 + 10FD | Full Off None Auto (ignored) 10 + 10HD | Half Off None Auto (ignored) 10 + +Stating any other port parameter together with this 'ConType' variable +will result in a merged configuration of those settings. This due to +the fact, that the per-port parameters (e.g. Speed_? ) have a higher +priority than the combined variable 'ConType'. + +NOTE: This parameter is always used on both ports of the adapter card. + +Interrupt Moderation +-------------------- +Parameter: Moderation +Values: None, Static, Dynamic +Default: None + +Interrupt moderation is employed to limit the maxmimum number of interrupts +the driver has to serve. That is, one or more interrupts (which indicate any +transmit or receive packet to be processed) are queued until the driver +processes them. When queued interrupts are to be served, is determined by the +'IntsPerSec' parameter, which is explained later below. + +Possible modes: + + -- None - No interrupt moderation is applied on the adapter card. + Therefore, each transmit or receive interrupt is served immediately + as soon as it appears on the interrupt line of the adapter card. + + -- Static - Interrupt moderation is applied on the adapter card. + All transmit and receive interrupts are queued until a complete + moderation interval ends. If such a moderation interval ends, all + queued interrupts are processed in one big bunch without any delay. + The term 'static' reflects the fact, that interrupt moderation is + always enabled, regardless how much network load is currently + passing via a particular interface. In addition, the duration of + the moderation interval has a fixed length that never changes while + the driver is operational. + + -- Dynamic - Interrupt moderation might be applied on the adapter card, + depending on the load of the system. If the driver detects that the + system load is too high, the driver tries to shield the system against + too much network load by enabling interrupt moderation. If - at a later + time - the CPU utilizaton decreases again (or if the network load is + negligible) the interrupt moderation will automatically be disabled. + +Interrupt moderation should be used when the driver has to handle one or more +interfaces with a high network load, which - as a consequence - leads also to a +high CPU utilization. When moderation is applied in such high network load +situations, CPU load might be reduced by 20-30%. + +NOTE: The drawback of using interrupt moderation is an increase of the round- +trip-time (RTT), due to the queueing and serving of interrupts at dedicated +moderation times. + +Interrupts per second +--------------------- +Parameter: IntsPerSec +Values: 30...40000 (interrupts per second) +Default: 2000 + +This parameter is only used, if either static or dynamic interrupt moderation +is used on a network adapter card. Using this paramter if no moderation is +applied, will lead to no action performed. + +This parameter determines the length of any interrupt moderation interval. +Assuming that static interrupt moderation is to be used, an 'IntsPerSec' +parameter value of 2000 will lead to an interrupt moderation interval of +500 microseconds. + +NOTE: The duration of the moderation interval is to be chosen with care. +At first glance, selecting a very long duration (e.g. only 100 interrupts per +second) seems to be meaningful, but the increase of packet-processing delay +is tremendous. On the other hand, selecting a very short moderation time might +compensate the use of any moderation being applied. + + +Preferred Port +-------------- +Parameter: PrefPort +Values: A, B +Default: A + +This is used to force the preferred port to A or B (on dual-port network +adapters). The preferred port is the one that is used if both are detected +as fully functional. + +RLMT Mode (Redundant Link Management Technology) +------------------------------------------------ +Parameter: RlmtMode +Values: CheckLinkState,CheckLocalPort, CheckSeg, DualNet +Default: CheckLinkState + +RLMT monitors the status of the port. If the link of the active port +fails, RLMT switches immediately to the standby link. The virtual link is +maintained as long as at least one 'physical' link is up. + +Possible modes: + + -- CheckLinkState - Check link state only: RLMT uses the link state + reported by the adapter hardware for each individual port to + determine whether a port can be used for all network traffic or + not. + + -- CheckLocalPort - In this mode, RLMT monitors the network path + between the two ports of an adapter by regularly exchanging packets + between them. This mode requires a network configuration in which + the two ports are able to "see" each other (i.e. there must not be + any router between the ports). + + -- CheckSeg - Check local port and segmentation: This mode supports the + same functions as the CheckLocalPort mode and additionally checks + network segmentation between the ports. Therefore, this mode is only + to be used if Gigabit Ethernet switches are installed on the network + that have been configured to use the Spanning Tree protocol. + + -- DualNet - In this mode, ports A and B are used as separate devices. + If you have a dual port adapter, port A will be configured as eth0 + and port B as eth1. Both ports can be used independently with + distinct IP addresses. The preferred port setting is not used. + RLMT is turned off. + +NOTE: RLMT modes CLP and CLPSS are designed to operate in configurations + where a network path between the ports on one adapter exists. + Moreover, they are not designed to work where adapters are connected + back-to-back. +*** + + +5 Large Frame Support +====================== + +The driver supports large frames (also called jumbo frames). Using large +frames can result in an improved throughput if transferring large amounts +of data. +To enable large frames, set the MTU (maximum transfer unit) of the +interface to the desired value (up to 9000), execute the following +command: + ifconfig eth0 mtu 9000 +This will only work if you have two adapters connected back-to-back +or if you use a switch that supports large frames. When using a switch, +it should be configured to allow large frames and auto-negotiation should +be set to OFF. The setting must be configured on all adapters that can be +reached by the large frames. If one adapter is not set to receive large +frames, it will simply drop them. + +You can switch back to the standard ethernet frame size by executing the +following command: + ifconfig eth0 mtu 1500 + +To permanently configure this setting, add a script with the 'ifconfig' +line to the system startup sequence (named something like "S99sk98lin" +in /etc/rc.d/rc2.d). +*** + + +6 VLAN and Link Aggregation Support (IEEE 802.1, 802.1q, 802.3ad) +================================================================== + +The Marvell Yukon/SysKonnect Linux drivers are able to support VLAN and +Link Aggregation according to IEEE standards 802.1, 802.1q, and 802.3ad. +These features are only available after installation of open source +modules available on the Internet: +For VLAN go to: http://www.candelatech.com/~greear/vlan.html +For Link Aggregation go to: http://www.st.rim.or.jp/~yumo + +NOTE: SysKonnect GmbH does not offer any support for these open source + modules and does not take the responsibility for any kind of + failures or problems arising in connection with these modules. + +NOTE: Configuring Link Aggregation on a SysKonnect dual link adapter may + cause problems when unloading the driver. + + +7 Troubleshooting +================== + +If any problems occur during the installation process, check the +following list: + + +Problem: The SK-98xx adapter can not be found by the driver. +Solution: In /proc/pci search for the following entry: + 'Ethernet controller: SysKonnect SK-98xx ...' + If this entry exists, the SK-98xx or SK-98xx V2.0 adapter has + been found by the system and should be operational. + If this entry does not exist or if the file '/proc/pci' is not + found, there may be a hardware problem or the PCI support may + not be enabled in your kernel. + The adapter can be checked using the diagnostics program which + is available on the SysKonnect web site: + www.syskonnect.com + + Some COMPAQ machines have problems dealing with PCI under Linux. + Linux. This problem is described in the 'PCI howto' document + (included in some distributions or available from the + web, e.g. at 'www.linux.org'). + + +Problem: Programs such as 'ifconfig' or 'route' can not be found or the + error message 'Operation not permitted' is displayed. +Reason: You are not logged in as user 'root'. +Solution: Logout and login as 'root' or change to 'root' via 'su'. + + +Problem: Upon use of the command 'ping <address>' the message + "ping: sendto: Network is unreachable" is displayed. +Reason: Your route is not set correctly. +Solution: If you are using RedHat, you probably forgot to set up the + route in the 'network configuration'. + Check the existing routes with the 'route' command and check + if an entry for 'eth0' exists, and if so, if it is set correctly. + + +Problem: The driver can be started, the adapter is connected to the + network, but you cannot receive or transmit any packets; + e.g. 'ping' does not work. +Reason: There is an incorrect route in your routing table. +Solution: Check the routing table with the command 'route' and read the + manual help pages dealing with routes (enter 'man route'). + +NOTE: Although the 2.2.x kernel versions generate the routing entry + automatically, problems of this kind may occur here as well. We've + come across a situation in which the driver started correctly at + system start, but after the driver has been removed and reloaded, + the route of the adapter's network pointed to the 'dummy0'device + and had to be corrected manually. + + +Problem: Your computer should act as a router between multiple + IP subnetworks (using multiple adapters), but computers in + other subnetworks cannot be reached. +Reason: Either the router's kernel is not configured for IP forwarding + or the routing table and gateway configuration of at least one + computer is not working. + +Problem: Upon driver start, the following error message is displayed: + "eth0: -- ERROR -- + Class: internal Software error + Nr: 0xcc + Msg: SkGeInitPort() cannot init running ports" +Reason: You are using a driver compiled for single processor machines + on a multiprocessor machine with SMP (Symmetric MultiProcessor) + kernel. +Solution: Configure your kernel appropriately and recompile the kernel or + the modules. + + + +If your problem is not listed here, please contact SysKonnect's technical +support for help (linux@syskonnect.de). +When contacting our technical support, please ensure that the following +information is available: +- System Manufacturer and HW Informations (CPU, Memory... ) +- PCI-Boards in your system +- Distribution +- Kernel version +- Driver version +*** + + + +***End of Readme File*** diff --git a/Documentation/networking/skfp.txt b/Documentation/networking/skfp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3a419ed42f81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/skfp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ +(C)Copyright 1998-2000 SysKonnect, +=========================================================================== + +skfp.txt created 11-May-2000 + +Readme File for skfp.o v2.06 + + +This file contains +(1) OVERVIEW +(2) SUPPORTED ADAPTERS +(3) GENERAL INFORMATION +(4) INSTALLATION +(5) INCLUSION OF THE ADAPTER IN SYSTEM START +(6) TROUBLESHOOTING +(7) FUNCTION OF THE ADAPTER LEDS +(8) HISTORY + +=========================================================================== + + + +(1) OVERVIEW +============ + +This README explains how to use the driver 'skfp' for Linux with your +network adapter. + +Chapter 2: Contains a list of all network adapters that are supported by + this driver. + +Chapter 3: Gives some general information. + +Chapter 4: Describes common problems and solutions. + +Chapter 5: Shows the changed functionality of the adapter LEDs. + +Chapter 6: History of development. + +*** + + +(2) SUPPORTED ADAPTERS +====================== + +The network driver 'skfp' supports the following network adapters: +SysKonnect adapters: + - SK-5521 (SK-NET FDDI-UP) + - SK-5522 (SK-NET FDDI-UP DAS) + - SK-5541 (SK-NET FDDI-FP) + - SK-5543 (SK-NET FDDI-LP) + - SK-5544 (SK-NET FDDI-LP DAS) + - SK-5821 (SK-NET FDDI-UP64) + - SK-5822 (SK-NET FDDI-UP64 DAS) + - SK-5841 (SK-NET FDDI-FP64) + - SK-5843 (SK-NET FDDI-LP64) + - SK-5844 (SK-NET FDDI-LP64 DAS) +Compaq adapters (not tested): + - Netelligent 100 FDDI DAS Fibre SC + - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS Fibre SC + - Netelligent 100 FDDI DAS UTP + - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS UTP + - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS Fibre MIC +*** + + +(3) GENERAL INFORMATION +======================= + +From v2.01 on, the driver is integrated in the linux kernel sources. +Therefor, the installation is the same as for any other adapter +supported by the kernel. +Refer to the manual of your distribution about the installation +of network adapters. +Makes my life much easier :-) +*** + + +(4) TROUBLESHOOTING +=================== + +If you run into problems during installation, check those items: + +Problem: The FDDI adapter can not be found by the driver. +Reason: Look in /proc/pci for the following entry: + 'FDDI network controller: SysKonnect SK-FDDI-PCI ...' + If this entry exists, then the FDDI adapter has been + found by the system and should be able to be used. + If this entry does not exist or if the file '/proc/pci' + is not there, then you may have a hardware problem or PCI + support may not be enabled in your kernel. + The adapter can be checked using the diagnostic program + which is available from the SysKonnect web site: + www.syskonnect.de + Some COMPAQ machines have a problem with PCI under + Linux. This is described in the 'PCI howto' document + (included in some distributions or available from the + www, e.g. at 'www.linux.org') and no workaround is available. + +Problem: You want to use your computer as a router between + multiple IP subnetworks (using multiple adapters), but + you can not reach computers in other subnetworks. +Reason: Either the router's kernel is not configured for IP + forwarding or there is a problem with the routing table + and gateway configuration in at least one of the + computers. + +If your problem is not listed here, please contact our +technical support for help. +You can send email to: + linux@syskonnect.de +When contacting our technical support, +please ensure that the following information is available: +- System Manufacturer and Model +- Boards in your system +- Distribution +- Kernel version + +*** + + +(5) FUNCTION OF THE ADAPTER LEDS +================================ + + The functionality of the LED's on the FDDI network adapters was + changed in SMT version v2.82. With this new SMT version, the yellow + LED works as a ring operational indicator. An active yellow LED + indicates that the ring is down. The green LED on the adapter now + works as a link indicator where an active GREEN LED indicates that + the respective port has a physical connection. + + With versions of SMT prior to v2.82 a ring up was indicated if the + yellow LED was off while the green LED(s) showed the connection + status of the adapter. During a ring down the green LED was off and + the yellow LED was on. + + All implementations indicate that a driver is not loaded if + all LEDs are off. + +*** + + +(6) HISTORY +=========== + +v2.06 (20000511) (In-Kernel version) + New features: + - 64 bit support + - new pci dma interface + - in kernel 2.3.99 + +v2.05 (20000217) (In-Kernel version) + New features: + - Changes for 2.3.45 kernel + +v2.04 (20000207) (Standalone version) + New features: + - Added rx/tx byte counter + +v2.03 (20000111) (Standalone version) + Problems fixed: + - Fixed printk statements from v2.02 + +v2.02 (991215) (Standalone version) + Problems fixed: + - Removed unnecessary output + - Fixed path for "printver.sh" in makefile + +v2.01 (991122) (In-Kernel version) + New features: + - Integration in Linux kernel sources + - Support for memory mapped I/O. + +v2.00 (991112) + New features: + - Full source released under GPL + +v1.05 (991023) + Problems fixed: + - Compilation with kernel version 2.2.13 failed + +v1.04 (990427) + Changes: + - New SMT module included, changing LED functionality + Problems fixed: + - Synchronization on SMP machines was buggy + +v1.03 (990325) + Problems fixed: + - Interrupt routing on SMP machines could be incorrect + +v1.02 (990310) + New features: + - Support for kernel versions 2.2.x added + - Kernel patch instead of private duplicate of kernel functions + +v1.01 (980812) + Problems fixed: + Connection hangup with telnet + Slow telnet connection + +v1.00 beta 01 (980507) + New features: + None. + Problems fixed: + None. + Known limitations: + - tar archive instead of standard package format (rpm). + - FDDI statistic is empty. + - not tested with 2.1.xx kernels + - integration in kernel not tested + - not tested simultaneously with FDDI adapters from other vendors. + - only X86 processors supported. + - SBA (Synchronous Bandwidth Allocator) parameters can + not be configured. + - does not work on some COMPAQ machines. See the PCI howto + document for details about this problem. + - data corruption with kernel versions below 2.0.33. + +*** End of information file *** diff --git a/Documentation/networking/slicecom.hun b/Documentation/networking/slicecom.hun new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5acf1918694a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/slicecom.hun @@ -0,0 +1,371 @@ + +SliceCOM adapter felhasznaloi dokumentacioja - 0.51 verziohoz + +Bartók István <bartoki@itc.hu> +Utolso modositas: Wed Aug 29 17:26:58 CEST 2001 + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Hasznalata: + +Forditas: + +Code maturity level options + [*] Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers + +Network device support + Wan interfaces + <M> MultiGate (COMX) synchronous + <M> Support for MUNICH based boards: SliceCOM, PCICOM (NEW) + <M> Support for HDLC and syncPPP... + + +A modulok betoltese: + +modprobe comx + +modprobe comx-proto-ppp # a Cisco-HDLC es a SyncPPP protokollt is + # ez a modul adja + +modprobe comx-hw-munich # a modul betoltodeskor azonnal jelent a + # syslogba a detektalt kartyakrol + + +Konfiguralas: + +# Ezen az interfeszen Cisco-HDLC vonali protokoll fog futni +# Az interfeszhez rendelt idoszeletek: 1,2 (128 kbit/sec-es vonal) +# (a G.703 keretben az elso adatot vivo idoszelet az 1-es) +# +mkdir /proc/comx/comx0.1/ +echo slicecom >/proc/comx/comx0.1/boardtype +echo hdlc >/proc/comx/comx0.1/protocol +echo 1 2 >/proc/comx/comx0.1/timeslots + + +# Ezen az interfeszen SyncPPP vonali protokoll fog futni +# Az interfeszhez rendelt idoszelet: 3 (64 kbit/sec-es vonal) +# +mkdir /proc/comx/comx0.2/ +echo slicecom >/proc/comx/comx0.2/boardtype +echo ppp >/proc/comx/comx0.2/protocol +echo 3 >/proc/comx/comx0.2/timeslots + +... + +ifconfig comx0.1 up +ifconfig comx0.2 up + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +A COMX driverek default 20 csomagnyi transmit queue-t rendelnek a halozati +interfeszekhez. WAN halozatokban ennel hosszabbat is szokas hasznalni +(20 es 100 kozott), hogy a vonal kihasznaltsaga nagy terheles eseten jobb +legyen (bar ezzel megno a varhato kesleltetes a csomagok sorban allasa miatt): + +# ifconfig comx0 txqueuelen 50 + +Ezt a beallitasi lehetoseget csak az ujabb disztribuciok ifconfig parancsa +tamogatja (amik mar a 2.2 kernelekhez keszultek, mint a RedHat 6.1 vagy a +Debian 2.2). + +A 2.1-es Debian disztribuciohoz a http://www.debian.org/~rcw/2.2/netbase/ +cimrol toltheto le ujabb netbase csomag, ami mar ilyet tamogato ifconfig +parancsot tartalmaz. Bovebben a 2.2 kernel hasznalatarol Debian 2.1 alatt: +http://www.debian.org/releases/stable/running-kernel-2.2 + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +A kartya LED-jeinek jelentese: + +piros - eg, ha Remote Alarm-ot kuld a tuloldal +zold - eg, ha a vett jelben megtalalja a keretszinkront + +Reszletesebben: + +piros: zold: jelentes: + +- - nincs keretszinkron (nincs jel, vagy rossz a jel) +- eg "minden rendben" +eg eg a vetel OK, de a tuloldal Remote Alarm-ot kuld +eg - ez nincs ertelmezve, egyelore funkcio nelkul + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Reszletesebb leiras a hardver beallitasi lehetosegeirol: + +Az altalanos,- es a protokoll-retegek beallitasi lehetosegeirol a 'comx.txt' +fajlban leirtak SliceCOM kartyanal is ervenyesek, itt csak a hardver-specifikus +beallitasi lehetosegek vannak osszefoglalva: + +Konfiguralasi interfesz a /proc/comx/ alatt: + +Minden timeslot-csoportnak kulon comx* interfeszt kell letrehozni mkdir-rel: +comx0, comx1, .. stb. Itt beallithato, hogy az adott interfesz hanyadik kartya +melyik timeslotja(i)bol alljon ossze. A Cisco-fele serial3:1 elnevezesek +(serial3:1 = a 3. kartyaban az 1-es idoszelet-csoport) Linuxon aliasing-ot +jelentenenek, ezert mi nem tudunk ilyen elnevezest hasznalni. + +Tobb kartya eseten a comx0.1, comx0.2, ... vagy slice0.1, slice0.2 nevek +hasznalhatoak. + +Tobb SliceCOM kartya is lehet egy gepben, de sajat interrupt kell mindegyiknek, +nem tud meg megosztott interruptot kezelni. + +Az egesz kartyat erinto beallitasok: + +Az ioport es irq beallitas nincs: amit a PCI BIOS kioszt a rendszernek, +azt hasznalja a driver. + + +comx0/boardnum - hanyadik SliceCOM kartya a gepben (a 'termeszetes' PCI + sorrendben ertve: ahogyan a /proc/pci-ban vagy az 'lspci' + kimeneteben megjelenik, altalaban az alaplapi PCI meghajto + aramkorokhoz kozelebb eso kartyak a kisebb sorszamuak) + + Default: 0 (0-tol kezdodik a szamolas) + + +Bar a kovetkezoket csak egy-egy interfeszen allitjuk at, megis az egesz kartya +mukodeset egyszerre allitjak. A megkotes hogy csak UP-ban levo interfeszen +hasznalhatoak, azert van, mert kulonben nem vart eredmenyekre vezetne egy ilyen +paranccsorozat: + + echo 0 >boardnum + echo internal >clock_source + echo 1 >boardnum + +- Ez a 0-s board clock_source-at allitana at. + +Ezek a beallitasok megmaradnak az osszes interfesz torlesekor, de torlodnek +a driver modul ki/betoltesekor. + + +comx0/clock_source - A Tx orajelforrasa, a Cisco-val hasonlatosra keszult. + Hasznalata: + + papaya:# echo line >/proc/comx/comx0/clock_source + papaya:# echo internal >/proc/comx/comx0/clock_source + + line - A Tx orajelet a vett adatfolyambol dekodolja, igyekszik + igazodni hozza. Ha nem lat orajelet az inputon, akkor + atall a sajat orajelgeneratorara. + internal - A Tx orajelet a sajat orajelgeneratora szolgaltatja. + + Default: line + + Normal osszeallitas eseten a tavkozlesi szolgaltato eszkoze + (pl. HDSL modem) adja az orajelet, ezert ez a default. + + +comx0/framing - A CRC4 ki/be kapcsolasa + + A CRC4: 16 PCM keretet (A PCM keret az, amibe a 32 darab 64 + kilobites csatorna van bemultiplexalva. Nem osszetevesztendo a HDLC + kerettel.) 2x8 -as csoportokra osztanak, es azokhoz 4-4 bites CRC-t + szamolnak. Elsosorban a vonal minosegenek a monitorozasara szolgal. + + papaya:~# echo crc4 >/proc/comx/comx0/framing + papaya:~# echo no-crc4 >/proc/comx/comx0/framing + + Default a 'crc4', a MATAV vonalak altalaban igy futnak. De ha nem + egyforma is a beallitas a vonal ket vegen, attol a forgalom altalaban + at tud menni. + + +comx0/linecode - A vonali kodolas beallitasa + + papaya:~# echo hdb3 >/proc/comx/comx0/linecode + papaya:~# echo ami >/proc/comx/comx0/linecode + + Default a 'hdb3', a MATAV vonalak igy futnak. + + (az AMI kodolas igen ritka E1-es vonalaknal). Ha ez a beallitas nem + egyezik a vonal ket vegen, akkor elofordulhat hogy a keretszinkron + osszejon, de CRC4-hibak es a vonalakon atvitt adatokban is hibak + keletkeznek (amit a HDLC/SyncPPP szinten CRC-hibaval jelez) + + +comx0/reg - a kartya aramkoreinek, a MUNICH (reg) es a FALC (lbireg) +comx0/lbireg regisztereinek kozvetlen elerese. Hasznalata: + + echo >reg 0x04 0x0 - a 4-es regiszterbe 0-t ir + echo >reg 0x104 - printk()-val kiirja a 4-es regiszter + tartalmat a syslogba. + + WARNING: ezek csak a fejleszteshez keszultek, sok galibat + lehet veluk okozni! + + +comx0/loopback - A kartya G.703 jelenek a visszahurkolasara is van lehetoseg: + + papaya:# echo none >/proc/comx/comx0/loopback + papaya:# echo local >/proc/comx/comx0/loopback + papaya:# echo remote >/proc/comx/comx0/loopback + + none - nincs visszahurkolas, normal mukodes + local - a kartya a sajat maga altal adott jelet kapja vissza + remote - a kartya a kivulrol vett jelet adja kifele + + Default: none + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Az interfeszhez (Cisco terminologiaban 'channel-group') kapcsolodo beallitasok: + +comx0/timeslots - mely timeslotok (idoszeletek) tartoznak az adott interfeszhez. + + papaya:~# cat /proc/comx/comx0/timeslots + 1 3 4 5 6 + papaya:~# + + Egy timeslot megkeresese (hanyas interfeszbe tartozik nalunk): + + papaya:~# grep ' 4' /proc/comx/comx*/timeslots + /proc/comx/comx0/timeslots:1 3 4 5 6 + papaya:~# + + Beallitasa: + papaya:~# echo '1 5 2 6 7 8' >/proc/comx/comx0/timeslots + + A timeslotok sorrendje nem szamit, '1 3 2' ugyanaz mint az '1 2 3'. + + Beallitashoz az adott interfesznek DOWN-ban kell lennie + (ifconfig comx0 down), de ugyanannak a kartyanak a tobbi interfesze + uzemelhet kozben. + + Beallitaskor leellenorzi, hogy az uj timeslotok nem utkoznek-e egy + masik interfesz timeslotjaival. Ha utkoznek, akkor nem allitja at. + + Mindig 10-es szamrendszerben tortenik a timeslotok ertelmezese, nehogy + a 08, 09 alaku felirast rosszul ertelmezze. + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Az interfeszek es a kartya allapotanak lekerdezese: + +- A ' '-szel kezdodo sorok az eredeti kimenetet, a //-rel kezdodo sorok a +magyarazatot jelzik. + + papaya:~$ cat /proc/comx/comx1/status + Interface administrative status is UP, modem status is UP, protocol is UP + Modem status changes: 0, Transmitter status is IDLE, tbusy: 0 + Interface load (input): 978376 / 947808 / 951024 bits/s (5s/5m/15m) + (output): 978376 / 947848 / 951024 bits/s (5s/5m/15m) + Debug flags: none + RX errors: len: 22, overrun: 1, crc: 0, aborts: 0 + buffer overrun: 0, pbuffer overrun: 0 + TX errors: underrun: 0 + Line keepalive (value: 10) status UP [0] + +// Itt kezdodik a hardver-specifikus resz: + Controller status: + No alarms + +// Alarm: hibajelzes: +// +// No alarms - minden rendben +// +// LOS - Loss Of Signal - nem erzekel jelet a bemeneten. +// AIS - Alarm Indication Signal - csak egymas utani 1-esek jonnek +// a bemeneten, a tuloldal igy is jelezheti hogy meghibasodott vagy +// nincs inicializalva. +// AUXP - Auxiliary Pattern Indication - 01010101.. sorozat jon a bemeneten. +// LFA - Loss of Frame Alignment - nincs keretszinkron +// RRA - Receive Remote Alarm - a tuloldal el, de hibat jelez. +// LMFA - Loss of CRC4 Multiframe Alignment - nincs CRC4-multikeret-szinkron +// NMF - No Multiframe alignment Found after 400 msec - ilyen alarm a no-crc4 +// es crc4 keretezesek eseten nincs, lasd lentebb +// +// Egyeb lehetseges hibajelzesek: +// +// Transmit Line Short - a kartya ugy erzi hogy az adasi kimenete rovidre +// van zarva, ezert kikapcsolta az adast. (nem feltetlenul veszi eszre +// a kulso rovidzarat) + +// A veteli oldal csomagjainak lancolt listai, debug celokra: + + Rx ring: + rafutott: 0 + lastcheck: 50845731, jiffies: 51314281 + base: 017b1858 + rx_desc_ptr: 0 + rx_desc_ptr: 017b1858 + hw_curr_ptr: 017b1858 + 06040000 017b1868 017b1898 c016ff00 + 06040000 017b1878 017b1e9c c016ff00 + 46040000 017b1888 017b24a0 c016ff00 + 06040000 017b1858 017b2aa4 c016ff00 + +// A kartyat hasznalo tobbi interfesz: a 0-s channel-group a comx1 interfesz, +// es az 1,2,...,16 timeslotok tartoznak hozza: + + Interfaces using this board: (channel-group, interface, timeslots) + 0 comx1: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + 1 comx2: 17 + 2 comx3: 18 + 3 comx4: 19 + 4 comx5: 20 + 5 comx6: 21 + 6 comx7: 22 + 7 comx8: 23 + 8 comx9: 24 + 9 comx10: 25 + 10 comx11: 26 + 11 comx12: 27 + 12 comx13: 28 + 13 comx14: 29 + 14 comx15: 30 + 15 comx16: 31 + +// Hany esemenyt kezelt le a driver egy-egy hardver-interrupt kiszolgalasanal: + + Interrupt work histogram: + hist[ 0]: 0 hist[ 1]: 2 hist[ 2]: 18574 hist[ 3]: 79 + hist[ 4]: 14 hist[ 5]: 1 hist[ 6]: 0 hist[ 7]: 1 + hist[ 8]: 0 hist[ 9]: 7 + +// Hany kikuldendo csomag volt mar a Tx-ringben amikor ujabb lett irva bele: + + Tx ring histogram: + hist[ 0]: 2329 hist[ 1]: 0 hist[ 2]: 0 hist[ 3]: 0 + +// Az E1-interfesz hiba-szamlaloi, az rfc2495-nek megfeleloen: +// (kb. a Cisco routerek "show controllers e1" formatumaban: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/software/ios11/rbook/rinterfc.htm#xtocid25669126) + +Data in current interval (91 seconds elapsed): + 9516 Line Code Violations, 65 Path Code Violations, 2 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 2 Fr Loss Secs, 2 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 11 Unavail Secs +Data in Interval 1 (15 minutes): + 0 Line Code Violations, 0 Path Code Violations, 0 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 0 Fr Loss Secs, 0 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 0 Unavail Secs +Data in last 4 intervals (1 hour): + 0 Line Code Violations, 0 Path Code Violations, 0 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 0 Fr Loss Secs, 0 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 0 Unavail Secs +Data in last 96 intervals (24 hours): + 0 Line Code Violations, 0 Path Code Violations, 0 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 0 Fr Loss Secs, 0 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 0 Unavail Secs + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Nehany kulonlegesebb beallitasi lehetoseg (idovel beepulhetnek majd a driverbe): +Ezekkel sok galibat lehet okozni, nagyon ovatosan kell oket hasznalni! + + modified CRC-4, for improved interworking of CRC-4 and non-CRC-4 + devices: (lasd page 107 es g706 Annex B) + lbireg[ 0x1b ] |= 0x08 + lbireg[ 0x1c ] |= 0xc0 + - ilyenkor ertelmezett az NMF - 'No Multiframe alignment Found after + 400 msec' alarm. + + FALC - a vonali meghajto IC + local loop - a sajat adasomat halljam vissza + remote loop - a kivulrol jovo adast adom vissza + + Egy hibakeresesre hasznalhato dolog: + - 1-es timeslot local loop a FALC-ban: echo >lbireg 0x1d 0x21 + - local loop kikapcsolasa: echo >lbireg 0x1d 0x00 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/slicecom.txt b/Documentation/networking/slicecom.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..59cfd95121fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/slicecom.txt @@ -0,0 +1,369 @@ + +SliceCOM adapter user's documentation - for the 0.51 driver version + +Written by Bartók István <bartoki@itc.hu> + +English translation: Lakatos György <gyuri@itc.hu> +Mon Dec 11 15:28:42 CET 2000 + +Last modified: Wed Aug 29 17:25:37 CEST 2001 + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Usage: + +Compiling the kernel: + +Code maturity level options + [*] Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers + +Network device support + Wan interfaces + <M> MultiGate (COMX) synchronous + <M> Support for MUNICH based boards: SliceCOM, PCICOM (NEW) + <M> Support for HDLC and syncPPP... + + +Loading the modules: + +modprobe comx + +modprobe comx-proto-ppp # module for Cisco-HDLC and SyncPPP protocols + +modprobe comx-hw-munich # the module logs information by the kernel + # about the detected boards + + +Configuring the board: + +# This interface will use the Cisco-HDLC line protocol, +# the timeslices assigned are 1,2 (128 KiBit line speed) +# (the first data timeslice in the G.703 frame is no. 1) +# +mkdir /proc/comx/comx0.1/ +echo slicecom >/proc/comx/comx0.1/boardtype +echo hdlc >/proc/comx/comx0.1/protocol +echo 1 2 >/proc/comx/comx0.1/timeslots + + +# This interface uses SyncPPP line protocol, the assigned +# is no. 3 (64 KiBit line speed) +# +mkdir /proc/comx/comx0.2/ +echo slicecom >/proc/comx/comx0.2/boardtype +echo ppp >/proc/comx/comx0.2/protocol +echo 3 >/proc/comx/comx0.2/timeslots + +... + +ifconfig comx0.1 up +ifconfig comx0.2 up + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +The COMX interfaces use a 10 packet transmit queue by default, however WAN +networks sometimes use bigger values (20 to 100), to utilize the line better +by large traffic (though the line delay increases because of more packets +join the queue). + +# ifconfig comx0 txqueuelen 50 + +This option is only supported by the ifconfig command of the later +distributions, which came with 2.2 kernels, such as RedHat 6.1 or Debian 2.2. + +You can download a newer netbase packet from +http://www.debian.org/~rcw/2.2/netbase/ for Debian 2.1, which has a new +ifconfig. You can get further information about using 2.2 kernel with +Debian 2.1 from http://www.debian.org/releases/stable/running-kernel-2.2 + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +The SliceCom LEDs: + +red - on, if the interface is unconfigured, or it gets Remote Alarm-s +green - on, if the board finds frame-sync in the received signal + +A bit more detailed: + +red: green: meaning: + +- - no frame-sync, no signal received, or signal SNAFU. +- on "Everything is OK" +on on Recepion is ok, but the remote end sends Remote Alarm +on - The interface is unconfigured + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +A more detailed description of the hardware setting options: + +The general and the protocol layer options described in the 'comx.txt' file +apply to the SliceCom as well, I only summarize the SliceCom hardware specific +settings below. + +The '/proc/comx' configuring interface: + +An interface directory should be created for every timeslot group with +'mkdir', e,g: 'comx0', 'comx1' etc. The timeslots can be assigned here to the +specific interface. The Cisco-like naming convention (serial3:1 - first +timeslot group of the 3rd. board) can't be used here, because these mean IP +aliasing in Linux. + +You can give any meaningful name to keep the configuration clear; +e.g: 'comx0.1', 'comx0.2', 'comx1.1', comx1.2', if you have two boards +with two interfaces each. + +Settings, which apply to the board: + +Neither 'io' nor 'irq' settings required, the driver uses the resources +given by the PCI BIOS. + +comx0/boardnum - board number of the SliceCom in the PC (using the 'natural' + PCI order) as listed in '/proc/pci' or the output of the + 'lspci' command, generally the slots nearer to the motherboard + PCI driver chips have the lower numbers. + + Default: 0 (the counting starts with 0) + +Though the options below are to be set on a single interface, they apply to the +whole board. The restriction, to use them on 'UP' interfaces, is because the +command sequence below could lead to unpredicable results. + + # echo 0 >boardnum + # echo internal >clock_source + # echo 1 >boardnum + +The sequence would set the clock source of board 0. + +These settings will persist after all the interfaces are cleared, but are +cleared when the driver module is unloaded and loaded again. + +comx0/clock_source - source of the transmit clock + Usage: + + # echo line >/proc/comx/comx0/clock_source + # echo internal >/proc/comx/comx0/clock_source + + line - The Tx clock is being decoded if the input data stream, + if no clock seen on the input, then the board will use it's + own clock generator. + + internal - The Tx clock is supplied by the builtin clock generator. + + Default: line + + Normally, the telecommunication company's end device (the HDSL + modem) provides the Tx clock, that's why 'line' is the default. + +comx0/framing - Switching CRC4 off/on + + CRC4: 16 PCM frames (The 32 64Kibit channels are multiplexed into a + PCM frame, nothing to do with HDLC frames) are divided into 2x8 + groups, each group has a 4 bit CRC. + + # echo crc4 >/proc/comx/comx0/framing + # echo no-crc4 >/proc/comx/comx0/framing + + Default is 'crc4', the Hungarian MATAV lines behave like this. + The traffic generally passes if this setting on both ends don't match. + +comx0/linecode - Setting the line coding + + # echo hdb3 >/proc/comx/comx0/linecode + # echo ami >/proc/comx/comx0/linecode + + Default a 'hdb3', MATAV lines use this. + + (AMI coding is rarely used with E1 lines). Frame sync may occur, if + this setting doesn't match the other end's, but CRC4 and data errors + will come, which will result in CRC errors on HDLC/SyncPPP level. + +comx0/reg - direct access to the board's MUNICH (reg) and FALC (lbireg) +comx0/lbireg circuit's registers + + # echo >reg 0x04 0x0 - write 0 to register 4 + # echo >reg 0x104 - write the contents of register 4 with + printk() to syslog + +WARNING! These are only for development purposes, messing with this will + result much trouble! + +comx0/loopback - Places a loop to the board's G.703 signals + + # echo none >/proc/comx/comx0/loopback + # echo local >/proc/comx/comx0/loopback + # echo remote >/proc/comx/comx0/loopback + + none - normal operation, no loop + local - the board receives it's own output + remote - the board sends the received data to the remote side + + Default: none + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Interface (channel group in Cisco terms) settings: + +comx0/timeslots - which timeslots belong to the given interface + + Setting: + + # echo '1 5 2 6 7 8' >/proc/comx/comx0/timeslots + + # cat /proc/comx/comx0/timeslots + 1 2 5 6 7 8 + # + + Finding a timeslot: + + # grep ' 4' /proc/comx/comx*/timeslots + /proc/comx/comx0/timeslots:1 3 4 5 6 + # + + The timeslots can be in any order, '1 2 3' is the same as '1 3 2'. + + The interface has to be DOWN during the setting ('ifconfig comx0 + down'), but the other interfaces could operate normally. + + The driver checks if the assigned timeslots are vacant, if not, then + the setting won't be applied. + + The timeslot values are treated as decimal numbers, not to misunderstand + values of 08, 09 form. + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Checking the interface and board status: + +- Lines beginning with ' ' (space) belong to the original output, the lines +which begin with '//' are the comments. + + papaya:~$ cat /proc/comx/comx1/status + Interface administrative status is UP, modem status is UP, protocol is UP + Modem status changes: 0, Transmitter status is IDLE, tbusy: 0 + Interface load (input): 978376 / 947808 / 951024 bits/s (5s/5m/15m) + (output): 978376 / 947848 / 951024 bits/s (5s/5m/15m) + Debug flags: none + RX errors: len: 22, overrun: 1, crc: 0, aborts: 0 + buffer overrun: 0, pbuffer overrun: 0 + TX errors: underrun: 0 + Line keepalive (value: 10) status UP [0] + +// The hardware specific part starts here: + Controller status: + No alarms + +// Alarm: +// +// No alarms - Everything OK +// +// LOS - Loss Of Signal - No signal sensed on the input +// AIS - Alarm Indication Signal - The remot side sends '11111111'-s, +// it tells, that there's an error condition, or it's not +// initialised. +// AUXP - Auxiliary Pattern Indication - 01010101.. received. +// LFA - Loss of Frame Alignment - no frame sync received. +// RRA - Receive Remote Alarm - the remote end's OK, but singnals error cond. +// LMFA - Loss of CRC4 Multiframe Alignment - no CRC4 multiframe sync. +// NMF - No Multiframe alignment Found after 400 msec - no such alarm using +// no-crc4 or crc4 framing, see below. +// +// Other possible error messages: +// +// Transmit Line Short - the board felt, that it's output is short-circuited, +// so it switched the transmission off. (The board can't definitely tell, +// that it's output is short-circuited.) + +// Chained list of the received packets, for debug purposes: + + Rx ring: + rafutott: 0 + lastcheck: 50845731, jiffies: 51314281 + base: 017b1858 + rx_desc_ptr: 0 + rx_desc_ptr: 017b1858 + hw_curr_ptr: 017b1858 + 06040000 017b1868 017b1898 c016ff00 + 06040000 017b1878 017b1e9c c016ff00 + 46040000 017b1888 017b24a0 c016ff00 + 06040000 017b1858 017b2aa4 c016ff00 + +// All the interfaces using the board: comx1, using the 1,2,...16 timeslots, +// comx2, using timeslot 17, etc. + + Interfaces using this board: (channel-group, interface, timeslots) + 0 comx1: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + 1 comx2: 17 + 2 comx3: 18 + 3 comx4: 19 + 4 comx5: 20 + 5 comx6: 21 + 6 comx7: 22 + 7 comx8: 23 + 8 comx9: 24 + 9 comx10: 25 + 10 comx11: 26 + 11 comx12: 27 + 12 comx13: 28 + 13 comx14: 29 + 14 comx15: 30 + 15 comx16: 31 + +// The number of events handled by the driver during an interrupt cycle: + + Interrupt work histogram: + hist[ 0]: 0 hist[ 1]: 2 hist[ 2]: 18574 hist[ 3]: 79 + hist[ 4]: 14 hist[ 5]: 1 hist[ 6]: 0 hist[ 7]: 1 + hist[ 8]: 0 hist[ 9]: 7 + +// The number of packets to send in the Tx ring, when a new one arrived: + + Tx ring histogram: + hist[ 0]: 2329 hist[ 1]: 0 hist[ 2]: 0 hist[ 3]: 0 + +// The error counters of the E1 interface, according to the RFC2495, +// (similar to the Cisco "show controllers e1" command's output: +// http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/software/ios11/rbook/rinterfc.htm#xtocid25669126) + +Data in current interval (91 seconds elapsed): + 9516 Line Code Violations, 65 Path Code Violations, 2 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 2 Fr Loss Secs, 2 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 11 Unavail Secs +Data in Interval 1 (15 minutes): + 0 Line Code Violations, 0 Path Code Violations, 0 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 0 Fr Loss Secs, 0 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 0 Unavail Secs +Data in last 4 intervals (1 hour): + 0 Line Code Violations, 0 Path Code Violations, 0 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 0 Fr Loss Secs, 0 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 0 Unavail Secs +Data in last 96 intervals (24 hours): + 0 Line Code Violations, 0 Path Code Violations, 0 E-Bit Errors + 0 Slip Secs, 0 Fr Loss Secs, 0 Line Err Secs, 0 Degraded Mins + 0 Errored Secs, 0 Bursty Err Secs, 0 Severely Err Secs, 0 Unavail Secs + +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Some unique options, (may get into the driver later): +Treat them very carefully, these can cause much trouble! + + modified CRC-4, for improved interworking of CRC-4 and non-CRC-4 + devices: (see page 107 and g706 Annex B) + lbireg[ 0x1b ] |= 0x08 + lbireg[ 0x1c ] |= 0xc0 + + - The NMF - 'No Multiframe alignment Found after 400 msec' alarm + comes into account. + + FALC - the line driver chip. + local loop - I hear my transmission back. + remote loop - I echo the remote transmission back. + + Something useful for finding errors: + + - local loop for timeslot 1 in the FALC chip: + + # echo >lbireg 0x1d 0x21 + + - Swithing the loop off: + + # echo >lbireg 0x1d 0x00 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/smc9.txt b/Documentation/networking/smc9.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d1e15074e43d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/smc9.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + +SMC 9xxxx Driver +Revision 0.12 +3/5/96 +Copyright 1996 Erik Stahlman +Released under terms of the GNU General Public License. + +This file contains the instructions and caveats for my SMC9xxx driver. You +should not be using the driver without reading this file. + +Things to note about installation: + + 1. The driver should work on all kernels from 1.2.13 until 1.3.71. + (A kernel patch is supplied for 1.3.71 ) + + 2. If you include this into the kernel, you might need to change some + options, such as for forcing IRQ. + + + 3. To compile as a module, run 'make' . + Make will give you the appropriate options for various kernel support. + + 4. Loading the driver as a module : + + use: insmod smc9194.o + optional parameters: + io=xxxx : your base address + irq=xx : your irq + ifport=x : 0 for whatever is default + 1 for twisted pair + 2 for AUI ( or BNC on some cards ) + +How to obtain the latest version? + +FTP: + ftp://fenris.campus.vt.edu/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz + ftp://sfbox.vt.edu/filebox/F/fenris/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz + + +Contacting me: + erik@mail.vt.edu + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/smctr.txt b/Documentation/networking/smctr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4c866f5a0ee4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/smctr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +Text File for the SMC TokenCard TokenRing Linux driver (smctr.c). + By Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org> + +The Linux SMC Token Ring driver works with the SMC TokenCard Elite (8115T) +ISA and SMC TokenCard Elite/A (8115T/A) MCA adapters. + +Latest information on this driver can be obtained on the Linux-SNA WWW site. +Please point your browser to: http://www.linux-sna.org + +This driver is rather simple to use. Select Y to Token Ring adapter support +in the kernel configuration. A choice for SMC Token Ring adapters will +appear. This drives supports all SMC ISA/MCA adapters. Choose this +option. I personally recommend compiling the driver as a module (M), but if you +you would like to compile it staticly answer Y instead. + +This driver supports multiple adapters without the need to load multiple copies +of the driver. You should be able to load up to 7 adapters without any kernel +modifications, if you are in need of more please contact the maintainer of this +driver. + +Load the driver either by lilo/loadlin or as a module. When a module using the +following command will suffice for most: + +# modprobe smctr +smctr.c: v1.00 12/6/99 by jschlst@samba.org +tr0: SMC TokenCard 8115T at Io 0x300, Irq 10, Rom 0xd8000, Ram 0xcc000. + +Now just setup the device via ifconfig and set and routes you may have. After +this you are ready to start sending some tokens. + +Errata: +1). For anyone wondering where to pick up the SMC adapters please browse + to http://www.smc.com + +2). If you are the first/only Token Ring Client on a Token Ring LAN, please + specify the ringspeed with the ringspeed=[4/16] module option. If no + ringspeed is specified the driver will attempt to autodetect the ring + speed and/or if the adapter is the first/only station on the ring take + the appropriate actions. + + NOTE: Default ring speed is 16MB UTP. + +3). PnP support for this adapter sucks. I recommend hard setting the + IO/MEM/IRQ by the jumpers on the adapter. If this is not possible + load the module with the following io=[ioaddr] mem=[mem_addr] + irq=[irq_num]. + + The following IRQ, IO, and MEM settings are supported. + + IO ports: + 0x200, 0x220, 0x240, 0x260, 0x280, 0x2A0, 0x2C0, 0x2E0, 0x300, + 0x320, 0x340, 0x360, 0x380. + + IRQs: + 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 + + Memory addresses: + 0xA0000, 0xA4000, 0xA8000, 0xAC000, 0xB0000, 0xB4000, + 0xB8000, 0xBC000, 0xC0000, 0xC4000, 0xC8000, 0xCC000, + 0xD0000, 0xD4000, 0xD8000, 0xDC000, 0xE0000, 0xE4000, + 0xE8000, 0xEC000, 0xF0000, 0xF4000, 0xF8000, 0xFC000 + +This driver is under the GNU General Public License. Its Firmware image is +included as an initialized C-array and is licensed by SMC to the Linux +users of this driver. However no warranty about its fitness is expressed or +implied by SMC. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tcp.txt b/Documentation/networking/tcp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..71749007091e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/tcp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +How the new TCP output machine [nyi] works. + + +Data is kept on a single queue. The skb->users flag tells us if the frame is +one that has been queued already. To add a frame we throw it on the end. Ack +walks down the list from the start. + +We keep a set of control flags + + + sk->tcp_pend_event + + TCP_PEND_ACK Ack needed + TCP_ACK_NOW Needed now + TCP_WINDOW Window update check + TCP_WINZERO Zero probing + + + sk->transmit_queue The transmission frame begin + sk->transmit_new First new frame pointer + sk->transmit_end Where to add frames + + sk->tcp_last_tx_ack Last ack seen + sk->tcp_dup_ack Dup ack count for fast retransmit + + +Frames are queued for output by tcp_write. We do our best to send the frames +off immediately if possible, but otherwise queue and compute the body +checksum in the copy. + +When a write is done we try to clear any pending events and piggy back them. +If the window is full we queue full sized frames. On the first timeout in +zero window we split this. + +On a timer we walk the retransmit list to send any retransmits, update the +backoff timers etc. A change of route table stamp causes a change of header +and recompute. We add any new tcp level headers and refinish the checksum +before sending. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tlan.txt b/Documentation/networking/tlan.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7e6aa5b20c37 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/tlan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +(C) 1997-1998 Caldera, Inc. +(C) 1998 James Banks +(C) 1999-2001 Torben Mathiasen <tmm@image.dk, torben.mathiasen@compaq.com> + +For driver information/updates visit http://opensource.compaq.com + + +TLAN driver for Linux, version 1.14a +README + + +I. Supported Devices. + + Only PCI devices will work with this driver. + + Supported: + Vendor ID Device ID Name + 0e11 ae32 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX PCI UTP + 0e11 ae34 Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP + 0e11 ae35 Compaq Integrated NetFlex 3/P + 0e11 ae40 Compaq Netelligent Dual 10/100 TX PCI UTP + 0e11 ae43 Compaq Netelligent Integrated 10/100 TX UTP + 0e11 b011 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX Embedded UTP + 0e11 b012 Compaq Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax + 0e11 b030 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX UTP + 0e11 f130 Compaq NetFlex 3/P + 0e11 f150 Compaq NetFlex 3/P + 108d 0012 Olicom OC-2325 + 108d 0013 Olicom OC-2183 + 108d 0014 Olicom OC-2326 + + + Caveats: + + I am not sure if 100BaseTX daughterboards (for those cards which + support such things) will work. I haven't had any solid evidence + either way. + + However, if a card supports 100BaseTx without requiring an add + on daughterboard, it should work with 100BaseTx. + + The "Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax" (b012) device is untested, + but I do not expect any problems. + + +II. Driver Options + 1. You can append debug=x to the end of the insmod line to get + debug messages, where x is a bit field where the bits mean + the following: + + 0x01 Turn on general debugging messages. + 0x02 Turn on receive debugging messages. + 0x04 Turn on transmit debugging messages. + 0x08 Turn on list debugging messages. + + 2. You can append aui=1 to the end of the insmod line to cause + the adapter to use the AUI interface instead of the 10 Base T + interface. This is also what to do if you want to use the BNC + connector on a TLAN based device. (Setting this option on a + device that does not have an AUI/BNC connector will probably + cause it to not function correctly.) + + 3. You can set duplex=1 to force half duplex, and duplex=2 to + force full duplex. + + 4. You can set speed=10 to force 10Mbs operation, and speed=100 + to force 100Mbs operation. (I'm not sure what will happen + if a card which only supports 10Mbs is forced into 100Mbs + mode.) + + 5. You have to use speed=X duplex=Y together now. If you just + do "insmod tlan.o speed=100" the driver will do Auto-Neg. + To force a 10Mbps Half-Duplex link do "insmod tlan.o speed=10 + duplex=1". + + 6. If the driver is built into the kernel, you can use the 3rd + and 4th parameters to set aui and debug respectively. For + example: + + ether=0,0,0x1,0x7,eth0 + + This sets aui to 0x1 and debug to 0x7, assuming eth0 is a + supported TLAN device. + + The bits in the third byte are assigned as follows: + + 0x01 = aui + 0x02 = use half duplex + 0x04 = use full duplex + 0x08 = use 10BaseT + 0x10 = use 100BaseTx + + You also need to set both speed and duplex settings when forcing + speeds with kernel-parameters. + ether=0,0,0x12,0,eth0 will force link to 100Mbps Half-Duplex. + + 7. If you have more than one tlan adapter in your system, you can + use the above options on a per adapter basis. To force a 100Mbit/HD + link with your eth1 adapter use: + + insmod tlan speed=0,100 duplex=0,1 + + Now eth0 will use auto-neg and eth1 will be forced to 100Mbit/HD. + Note that the tlan driver supports a maximum of 8 adapters. + + +III. Things to try if you have problems. + 1. Make sure your card's PCI id is among those listed in + section I, above. + 2. Make sure routing is correct. + 3. Try forcing different speed/duplex settings + + +There is also a tlan mailing list which you can join by sending "subscribe tlan" +in the body of an email to majordomo@vuser.vu.union.edu. +There is also a tlan website at http://opensource.compaq.com + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt b/Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..179e527b9da1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/tms380tr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +Text file for the Linux SysKonnect Token Ring ISA/PCI Adapter Driver. + Text file by: Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org> + +The Linux SysKonnect Token Ring driver works with the SysKonnect TR4/16(+) ISA, +SysKonnect TR4/16(+) PCI, SysKonnect TR4/16 PCI, and older revisions of the +SK NET TR4/16 ISA card. + +Latest information on this driver can be obtained on the Linux-SNA WWW site. +Please point your browser to: +http://www.linux-sna.org + +Many thanks to Christoph Goos for his excellent work on this driver and +SysKonnect for donating the adapters to Linux-SNA for the testing and +maintenance of this device driver. + +Important information to be noted: +1. Adapters can be slow to open (~20 secs) and close (~5 secs), please be + patient. +2. This driver works very well when autoprobing for adapters. Why even + think about those nasty io/int/dma settings of modprobe when the driver + will do it all for you! + +This driver is rather simple to use. Select Y to Token Ring adapter support +in the kernel configuration. A choice for SysKonnect Token Ring adapters will +appear. This drives supports all SysKonnect ISA and PCI adapters. Choose this +option. I personally recommend compiling the driver as a module (M), but if you +you would like to compile it staticly answer Y instead. + +This driver supports multiple adapters without the need to load multiple copies +of the driver. You should be able to load up to 7 adapters without any kernel +modifications, if you are in need of more please contact the maintainer of this +driver. + +Load the driver either by lilo/loadlin or as a module. When a module using the +following command will suffice for most: + +# modprobe sktr + +This will produce output similar to the following: (Output is user specific) + +sktr.c: v1.01 08/29/97 by Christoph Goos +tr0: SK NET TR 4/16 PCI found at 0x6100, using IRQ 17. +tr1: SK NET TR 4/16 PCI found at 0x6200, using IRQ 16. +tr2: SK NET TR 4/16 ISA found at 0xa20, using IRQ 10 and DMA 5. + +Now just setup the device via ifconfig and set and routes you may have. After +this you are ready to start sending some tokens. + +Errata: +For anyone wondering where to pick up the SysKonnect adapters please browse +to http://www.syskonnect.com + +This driver is under the GNU General Public License. Its Firmware image is +included as an initialized C-array and is licensed by SysKonnect to the Linux +users of this driver. However no warranty about its fitness is expressed or +implied by SysKonnect. + +Below find attached the setting for the SK NET TR 4/16 ISA adapters +------------------------------------------------------------------- + + *************************** + *** C O N T E N T S *** + *************************** + + 1) Location of DIP-Switch W1 + 2) Default settings + 3) DIP-Switch W1 description + + + ============================================================== + CHAPTER 1 LOCATION OF DIP-SWITCH + ============================================================== + +UÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ +þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ UÄÄÄÄÄ¿ UÄÄÄ¿ þ +þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU W1 AÄÄÄÄÄU UÄÄÄÄ¿ þ þ þ +þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ þ þ þ þ UÄÄÅ¿ +þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU UÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ AÄÄÄÄU þ þ þ þþ +þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ þ þ UÄÄÄ¿ AÄÄÄU AÄÄÅU +þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU þ TMS380C26 þ þ þ þ +þUÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ þ þ AÄÄÄU AÄ¿ +þAÄÄÄÄÄÄU þ þ þ þ +þ AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU þ þ +þ þ þ +þ AÄU +þ þ +þ þ +þ þ +þ þ +AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄAÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄAÄÄAÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄAÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU + AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU AÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄU + + ============================================================== + CHAPTER 2 DEFAULT SETTINGS + ============================================================== + + W1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + +------------------------------+ + | ON X | + | OFF X X X X X X X | + +------------------------------+ + + W1.1 = ON Adapter drives address lines SA17..19 + W1.2 - 1.5 = OFF BootROM disabled + W1.6 - 1.8 = OFF I/O address 0A20h + + ============================================================== + CHAPTER 3 DIP SWITCH W1 DESCRIPTION + ============================================================== + + UÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄ¿ ON + þ 1 þ 2 þ 3 þ 4 þ 5 þ 6 þ 7 þ 8 þ + AÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄAÄÄÄU OFF + |AD | BootROM Addr. | I/O | + +-+-+-------+-------+-----+-----+ + | | | + | | +------ 6 7 8 + | | ON ON ON 1900h + | | ON ON OFF 0900h + | | ON OFF ON 1980h + | | ON OFF OFF 0980h + | | OFF ON ON 1b20h + | | OFF ON OFF 0b20h + | | OFF OFF ON 1a20h + | | OFF OFF OFF 0a20h (+) + | | + | | + | +-------- 2 3 4 5 + | OFF x x x disabled (+) + | ON ON ON ON C0000 + | ON ON ON OFF C4000 + | ON ON OFF ON C8000 + | ON ON OFF OFF CC000 + | ON OFF ON ON D0000 + | ON OFF ON OFF D4000 + | ON OFF OFF ON D8000 + | ON OFF OFF OFF DC000 + | + | + +----- 1 + OFF adapter does NOT drive SA<17..19> + ON adapter drives SA<17..19> (+) + + + (+) means default setting + + ******************************** diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ec3d109d787a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +Universal TUN/TAP device driver. +Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Maxim Krasnyansky <max_mk@yahoo.com> + + Linux, Solaris drivers + Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Maxim Krasnyansky <max_mk@yahoo.com> + + FreeBSD TAP driver + Copyright (c) 1999-2000 Maksim Yevmenkin <m_evmenkin@yahoo.com> + + Revision of this document 2002 by Florian Thiel <florian.thiel@gmx.net> + +1. Description + TUN/TAP provides packet reception and transmission for user space programs. + It can be seen as a simple Point-to-Point or Ethernet device, which, + instead of receiving packets from physical media, receives them from + user space program and instead of sending packets via physical media + writes them to the user space program. + + In order to use the driver a program has to open /dev/net/tun and issue a + corresponding ioctl() to register a network device with the kernel. A network + device will appear as tunXX or tapXX, depending on the options chosen. When + the program closes the file descriptor, the network device and all + corresponding routes will disappear. + + Depending on the type of device chosen the userspace program has to read/write + IP packets (with tun) or ethernet frames (with tap). Which one is being used + depends on the flags given with the ioctl(). + + The package from http://vtun.sourceforge.net/tun contains two simple examples + for how to use tun and tap devices. Both programs work like a bridge between + two network interfaces. + br_select.c - bridge based on select system call. + br_sigio.c - bridge based on async io and SIGIO signal. + However, the best example is VTun http://vtun.sourceforge.net :)) + +2. Configuration + Create device node: + mkdir /dev/net (if it doesn't exist already) + mknod /dev/net/tun c 10 200 + + Set permissions: + e.g. chmod 0700 /dev/net/tun + if you want the device only accessible by root. Giving regular users the + right to assign network devices is NOT a good idea. Users could assign + bogus network interfaces to trick firewalls or administrators. + + Driver module autoloading + + Make sure that "Kernel module loader" - module auto-loading + support is enabled in your kernel. The kernel should load it on + first access. + + Manual loading + insert the module by hand: + modprobe tun + + If you do it the latter way, you have to load the module every time you + need it, if you do it the other way it will be automatically loaded when + /dev/net/tun is being opened. + +3. Program interface + 3.1 Network device allocation: + + char *dev should be the name of the device with a format string (e.g. + "tun%d"), but (as far as I can see) this can be any valid network device name. + Note that the character pointer becomes overwritten with the real device name + (e.g. "tun0") + + #include <linux/if.h> + #include <linux/if_tun.h> + + int tun_alloc(char *dev) + { + struct ifreq ifr; + int fd, err; + + if( (fd = open("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR)) < 0 ) + return tun_alloc_old(dev); + + memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); + + /* Flags: IFF_TUN - TUN device (no Ethernet headers) + * IFF_TAP - TAP device + * + * IFF_NO_PI - Do not provide packet information + */ + ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TUN; + if( *dev ) + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, dev, IFNAMSIZ); + + if( (err = ioctl(fd, TUNSETIFF, (void *) &ifr)) < 0 ){ + close(fd); + return err; + } + strcpy(dev, ifr.ifr_name); + return fd; + } + + 3.2 Frame format: + If flag IFF_NO_PI is not set each frame format is: + Flags [2 bytes] + Proto [2 bytes] + Raw protocol(IP, IPv6, etc) frame. + +Universal TUN/TAP device driver Frequently Asked Question. + +1. What platforms are supported by TUN/TAP driver ? +Currently driver has been written for 3 Unices: + Linux kernels 2.2.x, 2.4.x + FreeBSD 3.x, 4.x, 5.x + Solaris 2.6, 7.0, 8.0 + +2. What is TUN/TAP driver used for? +As mentioned above, main purpose of TUN/TAP driver is tunneling. +It is used by VTun (http://vtun.sourceforge.net). + +Another interesting application using TUN/TAP is pipsecd +(http://perso.enst.fr/~beyssac/pipsec/), an userspace IPSec +implementation that can use complete kernel routing (unlike FreeS/WAN). + +3. How does Virtual network device actually work ? +Virtual network device can be viewed as a simple Point-to-Point or +Ethernet device, which instead of receiving packets from a physical +media, receives them from user space program and instead of sending +packets via physical media sends them to the user space program. + +Let's say that you configured IPX on the tap0, then whenever +the kernel sends an IPX packet to tap0, it is passed to the application +(VTun for example). The application encrypts, compresses and sends it to +the other side over TCP or UDP. The application on the other side decompresses +and decrypts the data received and writes the packet to the TAP device, +the kernel handles the packet like it came from real physical device. + +4. What is the difference between TUN driver and TAP driver? +TUN works with IP frames. TAP works with Ethernet frames. + +This means that you have to read/write IP packets when you are using tun and +ethernet frames when using tap. + +5. What is the difference between BPF and TUN/TAP driver? +BFP is an advanced packet filter. It can be attached to existing +network interface. It does not provide a virtual network interface. +A TUN/TAP driver does provide a virtual network interface and it is possible +to attach BPF to this interface. + +6. Does TAP driver support kernel Ethernet bridging? +Yes. Linux and FreeBSD drivers support Ethernet bridging. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fa12a9e4abdd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,450 @@ +Documentation/networking/vortex.txt +Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au> +30 April 2000 + + +This document describes the usage and errata of the 3Com "Vortex" device +driver for Linux, 3c59x.c. + +The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com> + +Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver. +Please report problems to one or more of: + + Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au> + Netdev mailing list <netdev@oss.sgi.com> + Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> + +Please note the 'Reporting and Diagnosing Problems' section at the end +of this file. + + +Since kernel 2.3.99-pre6, this driver incorporates the support for the +3c575-series Cardbus cards which used to be handled by 3c575_cb.c. + +This driver supports the following hardware: + + 3c590 Vortex 10Mbps + 3c592 EISA 10mbps Demon/Vortex + 3c597 EISA Fast Demon/Vortex + 3c595 Vortex 100baseTx + 3c595 Vortex 100baseT4 + 3c595 Vortex 100base-MII + 3Com Vortex + 3c900 Boomerang 10baseT + 3c900 Boomerang 10Mbps Combo + 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPO + 3c900B Cyclone 10Mbps T + 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps Combo + 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPC + 3c900B-FL Cyclone 10base-FL + 3c905 Boomerang 100baseTx + 3c905 Boomerang 100baseT4 + 3c905B Cyclone 100baseTx + 3c905B Cyclone 10/100/BNC + 3c905B-FX Cyclone 100baseFx + 3c905C Tornado + 3c980 Cyclone + 3cSOHO100-TX Hurricane + 3c555 Laptop Hurricane + 3c575 Boomerang CardBus + 3CCFE575 Cyclone CardBus + 3CCFE575CT Cyclone CardBus + 3CCFE656 Cyclone CardBus + 3CCFEM656 Cyclone CardBus + 3c450 Cyclone/unknown + + +Module parameters +================= + +There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when +its module is loaded. These are usually placed in /etc/modprobe.conf +(/etc/modules.conf in 2.4). Example: + +options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300 + +If you are using the PCMCIA tools (cardmgr) then the options may be +placed in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts: + +module "3c59x" opts "debug=3 rx_copybreak=300" + + +The supported parameters are: + +debug=N + + Where N is a number from 0 to 7. Anything above 3 produces a lot + of output in your system logs. debug=1 is default. + +options=N1,N2,N3,... + + Each number in the list provides an option to the corresponding + network card. So if you have two 3c905's and you wish to provide + them with option 0x204 you would use: + + options=0x204,0x204 + + The individual options are composed of a number of bitfields which + have the following meanings: + + Possible media type settings + 0 10baseT + 1 10Mbs AUI + 2 undefined + 3 10base2 (BNC) + 4 100base-TX + 5 100base-FX + 6 MII (Media Independent Interface) + 7 Use default setting from EEPROM + 8 Autonegotiate + 9 External MII + 10 Use default setting from EEPROM + + When generating a value for the 'options' setting, the above media + selection values may be OR'ed (or added to) the following: + + 0x8000 Set driver debugging level to 7 + 0x4000 Set driver debugging level to 2 + 0x0400 Enable Wake-on-LAN + 0x0200 Force full duplex mode. + 0x0010 Bus-master enable bit (Old Vortex cards only) + + For example: + + insmod 3c59x options=0x204 + + will force full-duplex 100base-TX, rather than allowing the usual + autonegotiation. + +global_options=N + + Sets the `options' parameter for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. + Entries in the `options' array above will override any setting of + this. + +full_duplex=N1,N2,N3... + + Similar to bit 9 of 'options'. Forces the corresponding card into + full-duplex mode. Please use this in preference to the `options' + parameter. + + In fact, please don't use this at all! You're better off getting + autonegotiation working properly. + +global_full_duplex=N1 + + Sets full duplex mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries + in the `full_duplex' array above will override any setting of this. + +flow_ctrl=N1,N2,N3... + + Use 802.3x MAC-layer flow control. The 3com cards only support the + PAUSE command, which means that they will stop sending packets for a + short period if they receive a PAUSE frame from the link partner. + + The driver only allows flow control on a link which is operating in + full duplex mode. + + This feature does not appear to work on the 3c905 - only 3c905B and + 3c905C have been tested. + + The 3com cards appear to only respond to PAUSE frames which are + sent to the reserved destination address of 01:80:c2:00:00:01. They + do not honour PAUSE frames which are sent to the station MAC address. + +rx_copybreak=M + + The driver preallocates 32 full-sized (1536 byte) network buffers + for receiving. When a packet arrives, the driver has to decide + whether to leave the packet in its full-sized buffer, or to allocate + a smaller buffer and copy the packet across into it. + + This is a speed/space tradeoff. + + The value of rx_copybreak is used to decide when to make the copy. + If the packet size is less than rx_copybreak, the packet is copied. + The default value for rx_copybreak is 200 bytes. + +max_interrupt_work=N + + The driver's interrupt service routine can handle many receive and + transmit packets in a single invocation. It does this in a loop. + The value of max_interrupt_work governs how mnay times the interrupt + service routine will loop. The default value is 32 loops. If this + is exceeded the interrupt service routine gives up and generates a + warning message "eth0: Too much work in interrupt". + +hw_checksums=N1,N2,N3,... + + Recent 3com NICs are able to generate IPv4, TCP and UDP checksums + in hardware. Linux has used the Rx checksumming for a long time. + The "zero copy" patch which is planned for the 2.4 kernel series + allows you to make use of the NIC's DMA scatter/gather and transmit + checksumming as well. + + The driver is set up so that, when the zerocopy patch is applied, + all Tornado and Cyclone devices will use S/G and Tx checksums. + + This module parameter has been provided so you can override this + decision. If you think that Tx checksums are causing a problem, you + may disable the feature with `hw_checksums=0'. + + If you think your NIC should be performing Tx checksumming and the + driver isn't enabling it, you can force the use of hardware Tx + checksumming with `hw_checksums=1'. + + The driver drops a message in the logfiles to indicate whether or + not it is using hardware scatter/gather and hardware Tx checksums. + + Scatter/gather and hardware checksums provide considerable + performance improvement for the sendfile() system call, but a small + decrease in throughput for send(). There is no effect upon receive + efficiency. + +compaq_ioaddr=N +compaq_irq=N +compaq_device_id=N + + "Variables to work-around the Compaq PCI BIOS32 problem".... + +watchdog=N + + Sets the time duration (in milliseconds) after which the kernel + decides that the transmitter has become stuck and needs to be reset. + This is mainly for debugging purposes, although it may be advantageous + to increase this value on LANs which have very high collision rates. + The default value is 5000 (5.0 seconds). + +enable_wol=N1,N2,N3,... + + Enable Wake-on-LAN support for the relevant interface. Donald + Becker's `ether-wake' application may be used to wake suspended + machines. + + Also enables the NIC's power management support. + +global_enable_wol=N + + Sets enable_wol mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries in + the `enable_wol' array above will override any setting of this. + +Media selection +--------------- + +A number of the older NICs such as the 3c590 and 3c900 series have +10base2 and AUI interfaces. + +Prior to January, 2001 this driver would autoeselect the 10base2 or AUI +port if it didn't detect activity on the 10baseT port. It would then +get stuck on the 10base2 port and a driver reload was necessary to +switch back to 10baseT. This behaviour could not be prevented with a +module option override. + +Later (current) versions of the driver _do_ support locking of the +media type. So if you load the driver module with + + modprobe 3c59x options=0 + +it will permanently select the 10baseT port. Automatic selection of +other media types does not occur. + + +Transmit error, Tx status register 82 +------------------------------------- + +This is a common error which is almost always caused by another host on +the same network being in full-duplex mode, while this host is in +half-duplex mode. You need to find that other host and make it run in +half-duplex mode or fix this host to run in full-duplex mode. + +As a last resort, you can force the 3c59x driver into full-duplex mode +with + + options 3c59x full_duplex=1 + +but this has to be viewed as a workaround for broken network gear and +should only really be used for equipment which cannot autonegotiate. + + +Additional resources +-------------------- + +Details of the device driver implementation are at the top of the source file. + +Additional documentation is available at Don Becker's Linux Drivers site: + + http://www.scyld.com/network/vortex.html + +Donald Becker's driver development site: + + http://www.scyld.com/network + +Donald's vortex-diag program is useful for inspecting the NIC's state: + + http://www.scyld.com/diag/#pci-diags + +Donald's mii-diag program may be used for inspecting and manipulating +the NIC's Media Independent Interface subsystem: + + http://www.scyld.com/diag/#mii-diag + +Donald's wake-on-LAN page: + + http://www.scyld.com/expert/wake-on-lan.html + +3Com's documentation for many NICs, including the ones supported by +this driver is available at + + http://support.3com.com/partners/developer/developer_form.html + +3Com's DOS-based application for setting up the NICs EEPROMs: + + ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe + +Driver updates and a detailed changelog for the modifications which +were made for the 2.3/2,4 series kernel is available at + + http://www.uow.edu.au/~andrewm/linux/#3c59x-2.3 + + +Autonegotiation notes +--------------------- + + The driver uses a one-minute heartbeat for adapting to changes in + the external LAN environment. This means that when, for example, a + machine is unplugged from a hubbed 10baseT LAN plugged into a + switched 100baseT LAN, the throughput will be quite dreadful for up + to sixty seconds. Be patient. + + Cisco interoperability note from Walter Wong <wcw+@CMU.EDU>: + + On a side note, adding HAS_NWAY seems to share a problem with the + Cisco 6509 switch. Specifically, you need to change the spanning + tree parameter for the port the machine is plugged into to 'portfast' + mode. Otherwise, the negotiation fails. This has been an issue + we've noticed for a while but haven't had the time to track down. + + Cisco switches (Jeff Busch <jbusch@deja.com>) + + My "standard config" for ports to which PC's/servers connect directly: + + interface FastEthernet0/N + description machinename + load-interval 30 + spanning-tree portfast + + If autonegotiation is a problem, you may need to specify "speed + 100" and "duplex full" as well (or "speed 10" and "duplex half"). + + WARNING: DO NOT hook up hubs/switches/bridges to these + specially-configured ports! The switch will become very confused. + + +Reporting and diagnosing problems +--------------------------------- + +Maintainers find that accurate and complete problem reports are +invaluable in resolving driver problems. We are frequently not able to +reproduce problems and must rely on your patience and efforts to get to +the bottom of the problem. + +If you believe you have a driver problem here are some of the +steps you should take: + +- Is it really a driver problem? + + Eliminate some variables: try different cards, different + computers, different cables, different ports on the switch/hub, + different versions of the kernel or ofthe driver, etc. + +- OK, it's a driver problem. + + You need to generate a report. Typically this is an email to the + maintainer and/or linux-net@vger.kernel.org. The maintainer's + email address will be inthe driver source or in the MAINTAINERS file. + +- The contents of your report will vary a lot depending upon the + problem. If it's a kernel crash then you should refer to the + REPORTING-BUGS file. + + But for most problems it is useful to provide the following: + + o Kernel version, driver version + + o A copy of the banner message which the driver generates when + it is initialised. For example: + + eth0: 3Com PCI 3c905C Tornado at 0xa400, 00:50:da:6a:88:f0, IRQ 19 + 8K byte-wide RAM 5:3 Rx:Tx split, autoselect/Autonegotiate interface. + MII transceiver found at address 24, status 782d. + Enabling bus-master transmits and whole-frame receives. + + NOTE: You must provide the `debug=2' modprobe option to generate + a full detection message. Please do this: + + modprobe 3c59x debug=2 + + o If it is a PCI device, the relevant output from 'lspci -vx', eg: + + 00:09.0 Ethernet controller: 3Com Corporation 3c905C-TX [Fast Etherlink] (rev 74) + Subsystem: 3Com Corporation: Unknown device 9200 + Flags: bus master, medium devsel, latency 32, IRQ 19 + I/O ports at a400 [size=128] + Memory at db000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128] + Expansion ROM at <unassigned> [disabled] [size=128K] + Capabilities: [dc] Power Management version 2 + 00: b7 10 00 92 07 00 10 02 74 00 00 02 08 20 00 00 + 10: 01 a4 00 00 00 00 00 db 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 + 20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 b7 10 00 10 + 30: 00 00 00 00 dc 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 01 0a 0a + + o A description of the environment: 10baseT? 100baseT? + full/half duplex? switched or hubbed? + + o Any additional module parameters which you may be providing to the driver. + + o Any kernel logs which are produced. The more the merrier. + If this is a large file and you are sending your report to a + mailing list, mention that you have the logfile, but don't send + it. If you're reporting direct to the maintainer then just send + it. + + To ensure that all kernel logs are available, add the + following line to /etc/syslog.conf: + + kern.* /var/log/messages + + Then restart syslogd with: + + /etc/rc.d/init.d/syslog restart + + (The above may vary, depending upon which Linux distribution you use). + + o If your problem is reproducible then that's great. Try the + following: + + 1) Increase the debug level. Usually this is done via: + + a) modprobe driver debug=7 + b) In /etc/modprobe.conf (or /etc/modules.conf for 2.4): + options driver debug=7 + + 2) Recreate the problem with the higher debug level, + send all logs to the maintainer. + + 3) Download you card's diagnostic tool from Donald + Backer's website http://www.scyld.com/diag. Download + mii-diag.c as well. Build these. + + a) Run 'vortex-diag -aaee' and 'mii-diag -v' when the card is + working correctly. Save the output. + + b) Run the above commands when the card is malfunctioning. Send + both sets of output. + +Finally, please be patient and be prepared to do some work. You may end up working on +this problem for a week or more as the maintainer asks more questions, asks for more +tests, asks for patches to be applied, etc. At the end of it all, the problem may even +remain unresolved. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/wan-router.txt b/Documentation/networking/wan-router.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aea20cd2a56e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/wan-router.txt @@ -0,0 +1,622 @@ +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Linux WAN Router Utilities Package +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Version 2.2.1 +Mar 28, 2001 +Author: Nenad Corbic <ncorbic@sangoma.com> +Copyright (c) 1995-2001 Sangoma Technologies Inc. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +INTRODUCTION + +Wide Area Networks (WANs) are used to interconnect Local Area Networks (LANs) +and/or stand-alone hosts over vast distances with data transfer rates +significantly higher than those achievable with commonly used dial-up +connections. + +Usually an external device called `WAN router' sitting on your local network +or connected to your machine's serial port provides physical connection to +WAN. Although router's job may be as simple as taking your local network +traffic, converting it to WAN format and piping it through the WAN link, these +devices are notoriously expensive, with prices as much as 2 - 5 times higher +then the price of a typical PC box. + +Alternatively, considering robustness and multitasking capabilities of Linux, +an internal router can be built (most routers use some sort of stripped down +Unix-like operating system anyway). With a number of relatively inexpensive WAN +interface cards available on the market, a perfectly usable router can be +built for less than half a price of an external router. Yet a Linux box +acting as a router can still be used for other purposes, such as fire-walling, +running FTP, WWW or DNS server, etc. + +This kernel module introduces the notion of a WAN Link Driver (WLD) to Linux +operating system and provides generic hardware-independent services for such +drivers. Why can existing Linux network device interface not be used for +this purpose? Well, it can. However, there are a few key differences between +a typical network interface (e.g. Ethernet) and a WAN link. + +Many WAN protocols, such as X.25 and frame relay, allow for multiple logical +connections (known as `virtual circuits' in X.25 terminology) over a single +physical link. Each such virtual circuit may (and almost always does) lead +to a different geographical location and, therefore, different network. As a +result, it is the virtual circuit, not the physical link, that represents a +route and, therefore, a network interface in Linux terms. + +To further complicate things, virtual circuits are usually volatile in nature +(excluding so called `permanent' virtual circuits or PVCs). With almost no +time required to set up and tear down a virtual circuit, it is highly desirable +to implement on-demand connections in order to minimize network charges. So +unlike a typical network driver, the WAN driver must be able to handle multiple +network interfaces and cope as multiple virtual circuits come into existence +and go away dynamically. + +Last, but not least, WAN configuration is much more complex than that of say +Ethernet and may well amount to several dozens of parameters. Some of them +are "link-wide" while others are virtual circuit-specific. The same holds +true for WAN statistics which is by far more extensive and extremely useful +when troubleshooting WAN connections. Extending the ifconfig utility to suit +these needs may be possible, but does not seem quite reasonable. Therefore, a +WAN configuration utility and corresponding application programmer's interface +is needed for this purpose. + +Most of these problems are taken care of by this module. Its goal is to +provide a user with more-or-less standard look and feel for all WAN devices and +assist a WAN device driver writer by providing common services, such as: + + o User-level interface via /proc file system + o Centralized configuration + o Device management (setup, shutdown, etc.) + o Network interface management (dynamic creation/destruction) + o Protocol encapsulation/decapsulation + +To ba able to use the Linux WAN Router you will also need a WAN Tools package +available from + + ftp.sangoma.com/pub/linux/current_wanpipe/wanpipe-X.Y.Z.tgz + +where vX.Y.Z represent the wanpipe version number. + +For technical questions and/or comments please e-mail to ncorbic@sangoma.com. +For general inquiries please contact Sangoma Technologies Inc. by + + Hotline: 1-800-388-2475 (USA and Canada, toll free) + Phone: (905) 474-1990 ext: 106 + Fax: (905) 474-9223 + E-mail: dm@sangoma.com (David Mandelstam) + WWW: http://www.sangoma.com + + +INSTALLATION + +Please read the WanpipeForLinux.pdf manual on how to +install the WANPIPE tools and drivers properly. + + +After installing wanpipe package: /usr/local/wanrouter/doc. +On the ftp.sangoma.com : /linux/current_wanpipe/doc + + +COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING INFORMATION + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass +Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + + +ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS + +This product is based on the WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Router developed +by Sangoma Technologies Inc. for Linux 2.0.x and 2.2.x. Success of the WANPIPE +together with the next major release of Linux kernel in summer 1996 commanded +adequate changes to the WANPIPE code to take full advantage of new Linux +features. + +Instead of continuing developing proprietary interface tied to Sangoma WAN +cards, we decided to separate all hardware-independent code into a separate +module and defined two levels of interfaces - one for user-level applications +and another for kernel-level WAN drivers. WANPIPE is now implemented as a +WAN driver compliant with the WAN Link Driver interface. Also a general +purpose WAN configuration utility and a set of shell scripts was developed to +support WAN router at the user level. + +Many useful ideas concerning hardware-independent interface implementation +were given by Mike McLagan <mike.mclagan@linux.org> and his implementation +of the Frame Relay router and drivers for Sangoma cards (dlci/sdla). + +With the new implementation of the APIs being incorporated into the WANPIPE, +a special thank goes to Alan Cox in providing insight into BSD sockets. + +Special thanks to all the WANPIPE users who performed field-testing, reported +bugs and made valuable comments and suggestions that help us to improve this +product. + + + +NEW IN THIS RELEASE + + o Updated the WANCFG utility + Calls the pppconfig to configure the PPPD + for async connections. + + o Added the PPPCONFIG utility + Used to configure the PPPD dameon for the + WANPIPE Async PPP and standard serial port. + The wancfg calls the pppconfig to configure + the pppd. + + o Fixed the PCI autodetect feature. + The SLOT 0 was used as an autodetect option + however, some high end PC's slot numbers start + from 0. + + o This release has been tested with the new backupd + daemon release. + + +PRODUCT COMPONENTS AND RELATED FILES + +/etc: (or user defined) + wanpipe1.conf default router configuration file + +/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/misc: + wanrouter.o router kernel loadable module + af_wanpipe.o wanpipe api socket module + +/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/net: + sdladrv.o Sangoma SDLA support module + wanpipe.o Sangoma WANPIPE(tm) driver module + +/proc/net/wanrouter + Config reads current router configuration + Status reads current router status + {name} reads WAN driver statistics + +/usr/sbin: + wanrouter wanrouter start-up script + wanconfig wanrouter configuration utility + sdladump WANPIPE adapter memory dump utility + fpipemon Monitor for Frame Relay + cpipemon Monitor for Cisco HDLC + ppipemon Monitor for PPP + xpipemon Monitor for X25 + wpkbdmon WANPIPE keyboard led monitor/debugger + +/usr/local/wanrouter: + README this file + COPYING GNU General Public License + Setup installation script + Filelist distribution definition file + wanrouter.rc meta-configuration file + (used by the Setup and wanrouter script) + +/usr/local/wanrouter/doc: + wanpipeForLinux.pdf WAN Router User's Manual + +/usr/local/wanrouter/patches: + wanrouter-v2213.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.11 up to 2.2.13. + wanrouter-v2214.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.2.14. + wanrouter-v2215.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.15 to 2.2.17. + wanrouter-v2218.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.18 and up. + wanrouter-v240.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.4.0. + wanrouter-v242.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.4.2 and up. + wanrouter-v2034.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.0.34 + wanrouter-v2036.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.0.36 and up. + +/usr/local/wanrouter/patches/kdrivers: + Sources of the latest WANPIPE device drivers. + These are used to UPGRADE the linux kernel to the newest + version if the kernel source has already been pathced with + WANPIPE drivers. + +/usr/local/wanrouter/samples: + interface sample interface configuration file + wanpipe1.cpri CHDLC primary port + wanpipe2.csec CHDLC secondary port + wanpipe1.fr Frame Relay protocol + wanpipe1.ppp PPP protocol ) + wanpipe1.asy CHDLC ASYNC protocol + wanpipe1.x25 X25 protocol + wanpipe1.stty Sync TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon) + wanpipe1.atty Async TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon) + wanrouter.rc sample meta-configuration file + +/usr/local/wanrouter/util: + * wan-tools utilities source code + +/usr/local/wanrouter/api/x25: + * x25 api sample programs. +/usr/local/wanrouter/api/chdlc: + * chdlc api sample programs. +/usr/local/wanrouter/api/fr: + * fr api sample programs. +/usr/local/wanrouter/config/wancfg: + wancfg WANPIPE GUI configuration program. + Creates wanpipe#.conf files. +/usr/local/wanrouter/config/cfgft1: + cfgft1 GUI CSU/DSU configuration program. + +/usr/include/linux: + wanrouter.h router API definitions + wanpipe.h WANPIPE API definitions + sdladrv.h SDLA support module API definitions + sdlasfm.h SDLA firmware module definitions + if_wanpipe.h WANPIPE Socket definitions + if_wanpipe_common.h WANPIPE Socket/Driver common definitions. + sdlapci.h WANPIPE PCI definitions + + +/usr/src/linux/net/wanrouter: + * wanrouter source code + +/var/log: + wanrouter wanrouter start-up log (created by the Setup script) + +/var/lock: (or /var/lock/subsys for RedHat) + wanrouter wanrouter lock file (created by the Setup script) + +/usr/local/wanrouter/firmware: + fr514.sfm Frame relay firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card + cdual514.sfm Dual Port Cisco HDLC firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card + ppp514.sfm PPP Firmware for Sangoma S508 and S514 cards + x25_508.sfm X25 Firmware for Sangoma S508 card. + + +REVISION HISTORY + +1.0.0 December 31, 1996 Initial version + +1.0.1 January 30, 1997 Status and statistics can be read via /proc + filesystem entries. + +1.0.2 April 30, 1997 Added UDP management via monitors. + +1.0.3 June 3, 1997 UDP management for multiple boards using Frame + Relay and PPP + Enabled continuous transmission of Configure + Request Packet for PPP (for 508 only) + Connection Timeout for PPP changed from 900 to 0 + Flow Control Problem fixed for Frame Relay + +1.0.4 July 10, 1997 S508/FT1 monitoring capability in fpipemon and + ppipemon utilities. + Configurable TTL for UDP packets. + Multicast and Broadcast IP source addresses are + silently discarded. + +1.0.5 July 28, 1997 Configurable T391,T392,N391,N392,N393 for Frame + Relay in router.conf. + Configurable Memory Address through router.conf + for Frame Relay, PPP and X.25. (commenting this + out enables auto-detection). + Fixed freeing up received buffers using kfree() + for Frame Relay and X.25. + Protect sdla_peek() by calling save_flags(), + cli() and restore_flags(). + Changed number of Trace elements from 32 to 20 + Added DLCI specific data monitoring in FPIPEMON. +2.0.0 Nov 07, 1997 Implemented protection of RACE conditions by + critical flags for FRAME RELAY and PPP. + DLCI List interrupt mode implemented. + IPX support in FRAME RELAY and PPP. + IPX Server Support (MARS) + More driver specific stats included in FPIPEMON + and PIPEMON. + +2.0.1 Nov 28, 1997 Bug Fixes for version 2.0.0. + Protection of "enable_irq()" while + "disable_irq()" has been enabled from any other + routine (for Frame Relay, PPP and X25). + Added additional Stats for Fpipemon and Ppipemon + Improved Load Sharing for multiple boards + +2.0.2 Dec 09, 1997 Support for PAP and CHAP for ppp has been + implemented. + +2.0.3 Aug 15, 1998 New release supporting Cisco HDLC, CIR for Frame + relay, Dynamic IP assignment for PPP and Inverse + Arp support for Frame-relay. Man Pages are + included for better support and a new utility + for configuring FT1 cards. + +2.0.4 Dec 09, 1998 Dual Port support for Cisco HDLC. + Support for HDLC (LAPB) API. + Supports BiSync Streaming code for S502E + and S503 cards. + Support for Streaming HDLC API. + Provides a BSD socket interface for + creating applications using BiSync + streaming. + +2.0.5 Aug 04, 1999 CHDLC initializatin bug fix. + PPP interrupt driven driver: + Fix to the PPP line hangup problem. + New PPP firmware + Added comments to the startup SYSTEM ERROR messages + Xpipemon debugging application for the X25 protocol + New USER_MANUAL.txt + Fixed the odd boundary 4byte writes to the board. + BiSync Streaming code has been taken out. + Available as a patch. + Streaming HDLC API has been taken out. + Available as a patch. + +2.0.6 Aug 17, 1999 Increased debugging in statup scripts + Fixed insallation bugs from 2.0.5 + Kernel patch works for both 2.2.10 and 2.2.11 kernels. + There is no functional difference between the two packages + +2.0.7 Aug 26, 1999 o Merged X25API code into WANPIPE. + o Fixed a memeory leak for X25API + o Updated the X25API code for 2.2.X kernels. + o Improved NEM handling. + +2.1.0 Oct 25, 1999 o New code for S514 PCI Card + o New CHDLC and Frame Relay drivers + o PPP and X25 are not supported in this release + +2.1.1 Nov 30, 1999 o PPP support for S514 PCI Cards + +2.1.3 Apr 06, 2000 o Socket based x25api + o Socket based chdlc api + o Socket based fr api + o Dual Port Receive only CHDLC support. + o Asynchronous CHDLC support (Secondary Port) + o cfgft1 GUI csu/dsu configurator + o wancfg GUI configuration file + configurator. + o Architectual directory changes. + +beta-2.1.4 Jul 2000 o Dynamic interface configuration: + Network interfaces reflect the state + of protocol layer. If the protocol becomes + disconnected, driver will bring down + the interface. Once the protocol reconnects + the interface will be brought up. + + Note: This option is turned off by default. + + o Dynamic wanrouter setup using 'wanconfig': + wanconfig utility can be used to + shutdown,restart,start or reconfigure + a virtual circuit dynamically. + + Frame Relay: Each DLCI can be: + created,stopped,restarted and reconfigured + dynamically using wanconfig. + + ex: wanconfig card wanpipe1 dev wp1_fr16 up + + o Wanrouter startup via command line arguments: + wanconfig also supports wanrouter startup via command line + arguments. Thus, there is no need to create a wanpipe#.conf + configuration file. + + o Socket based x25api update/bug fixes. + Added support for LCN numbers greater than 255. + Option to pass up modem messages. + Provided a PCI IRQ check, so a single S514 + card is guaranteed to have a non-sharing interrupt. + + o Fixes to the wancfg utility. + o New FT1 debugging support via *pipemon utilities. + o Frame Relay ARP support Enabled. + +beta3-2.1.4 Jul 2000 o X25 M_BIT Problem fix. + o Added the Multi-Port PPP + Updated utilites for the Multi-Port PPP. + +2.1.4 Aut 2000 + o In X25API: + Maximum packet an application can send + to the driver has been extended to 4096 bytes. + + Fixed the x25 startup bug. Enable + communications only after all interfaces + come up. HIGH SVC/PVC is used to calculate + the number of channels. + Enable protocol only after all interfaces + are enabled. + + o Added an extra state to the FT1 config, kernel module. + o Updated the pipemon debuggers. + + o Blocked the Multi-Port PPP from running on kernels + 2.2.16 or greater, due to syncppp kernel module + change. + +beta1-2.1.5 Nov 15 2000 + o Fixed the MulitPort PPP Support for kernels 2.2.16 and above. + 2.2.X kernels only + + o Secured the driver UDP debugging calls + - All illegal netowrk debugging calls are reported to + the log. + - Defined a set of allowed commands, all other denied. + + o Cpipemon + - Added set FT1 commands to the cpipemon. Thus CSU/DSU + configuraiton can be performed using cpipemon. + All systems that cannot run cfgft1 GUI utility should + use cpipemon to configure the on board CSU/DSU. + + + o Keyboard Led Monitor/Debugger + - A new utilty /usr/sbin/wpkbdmon uses keyboard leds + to convey operatinal statistic information of the + Sangoma WANPIPE cards. + NUM_LOCK = Line State (On=connected, Off=disconnected) + CAPS_LOCK = Tx data (On=transmitting, Off=no tx data) + SCROLL_LOCK = Rx data (On=receiving, Off=no rx data + + o Hardware probe on module load and dynamic device allocation + - During WANPIPE module load, all Sangoma cards are probed + and found information is printed in the /var/log/messages. + - If no cards are found, the module load fails. + - Appropriate number of devices are dynamically loaded + based on the number of Sangoma cards found. + + Note: The kernel configuraiton option + CONFIG_WANPIPE_CARDS has been taken out. + + o Fixed the Frame Relay and Chdlc network interfaces so they are + compatible with libpcap libraries. Meaning, tcpdump, snort, + ethereal, and all other packet sniffers and debuggers work on + all WANPIPE netowrk interfaces. + - Set the network interface encoding type to ARPHRD_PPP. + This tell the sniffers that data obtained from the + network interface is in pure IP format. + Fix for 2.2.X kernels only. + + o True interface encoding option for Frame Relay and CHDLC + - The above fix sets the network interface encoding + type to ARPHRD_PPP, however some customers use + the encoding interface type to determine the + protocol running. Therefore, the TURE ENCODING + option will set the interface type back to the + original value. + + NOTE: If this option is used with Frame Relay and CHDLC + libpcap library support will be broken. + i.e. tcpdump will not work. + Fix for 2.2.x Kernels only. + + o Ethernet Bridgind over Frame Relay + - The Frame Relay bridging has been developed by + Kristian Hoffmann and Mark Wells. + - The Linux kernel bridge is used to send ethernet + data over the frame relay links. + For 2.2.X Kernels only. + + o Added extensive 2.0.X support. Most new features of + 2.1.5 for protocols Frame Relay, PPP and CHDLC are + supported under 2.0.X kernels. + +beta1-2.2.0 Dec 30 2000 + o Updated drivers for 2.4.X kernels. + o Updated drivers for SMP support. + o X25API is now able to share PCI interrupts. + o Took out a general polling routine that was used + only by X25API. + o Added appropriate locks to the dynamic reconfiguration + code. + o Fixed a bug in the keyboard debug monitor. + +beta2-2.2.0 Jan 8 2001 + o Patches for 2.4.0 kernel + o Patches for 2.2.18 kernel + o Minor updates to PPP and CHLDC drivers. + Note: No functinal difference. + +beta3-2.2.9 Jan 10 2001 + o I missed the 2.2.18 kernel patches in beta2-2.2.0 + release. They are included in this release. + +Stable Release +2.2.0 Feb 01 2001 + o Bug fix in wancfg GUI configurator. + The edit function didn't work properly. + + +bata1-2.2.1 Feb 09 2001 + o WANPIPE TTY Driver emulation. + Two modes of operation Sync and Async. + Sync: Using the PPPD daemon, kernel SyncPPP layer + and the Wanpipe sync TTY driver: a PPP protocol + connection can be established via Sangoma adapter, over + a T1 leased line. + + The 2.4.0 kernel PPP layer supports MULTILINK + protocol, that can be used to bundle any number of Sangoma + adapters (T1 lines) into one, under a single IP address. + Thus, efficiently obtaining multiple T1 throughput. + + NOTE: The remote side must also implement MULTILINK PPP + protocol. + + Async:Using the PPPD daemon, kernel AsyncPPP layer + and the WANPIPE async TTY driver: a PPP protocol + connection can be established via Sangoma adapter and + a modem, over a telephone line. + + Thus, the WANPIPE async TTY driver simulates a serial + TTY driver that would normally be used to interface the + MODEM to the linux kernel. + + o WANPIPE PPP Backup Utility + This utility will monitor the state of the PPP T1 line. + In case of failure, a dial up connection will be established + via pppd daemon, ether via a serial tty driver (serial port), + or a WANPIPE async TTY driver (in case serial port is unavailable). + + Furthermore, while in dial up mode, the primary PPP T1 link + will be monitored for signs of life. + + If the PPP T1 link comes back to life, the dial up connection + will be shutdown and T1 line re-established. + + + o New Setup installation script. + Option to UPGRADE device drivers if the kernel source has + already been patched with WANPIPE. + + Option to COMPILE WANPIPE modules against the currently + running kernel, thus no need for manual kernel and module + re-compilatin. + + o Updates and Bug Fixes to wancfg utility. + +bata2-2.2.1 Feb 20 2001 + + o Bug fixes to the CHDLC device drivers. + The driver had compilation problems under kernels + 2.2.14 or lower. + + o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script. + The device drivers compilation options didn't work + properly. + + o Update to the wpbackupd daemon. + Optimized the cross-over times, between the primary + link and the backup dialup. + +beta3-2.2.1 Mar 02 2001 + o Patches for 2.4.2 kernel. + + o Bug fixes to util/ make files. + o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script. + + o Took out the backupd support and made it into + as separate package. + +beta4-2.2.1 Mar 12 2001 + + o Fix to the Frame Relay Device driver. + IPSAC sends a packet of zero length + header to the frame relay driver. The + driver tries to push its own 2 byte header + into the packet, which causes the driver to + crash. + + o Fix the WANPIPE re-configuration code. + Bug was found by trying to run the cfgft1 while the + interface was already running. + + o Updates to cfgft1. + Writes a wanpipe#.cfgft1 configuration file + once the CSU/DSU is configured. This file can + holds the current CSU/DSU configuration. + + + +>>>>>> END OF README <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< + + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt b/Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aea20cd2a56e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt @@ -0,0 +1,622 @@ +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Linux WAN Router Utilities Package +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Version 2.2.1 +Mar 28, 2001 +Author: Nenad Corbic <ncorbic@sangoma.com> +Copyright (c) 1995-2001 Sangoma Technologies Inc. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +INTRODUCTION + +Wide Area Networks (WANs) are used to interconnect Local Area Networks (LANs) +and/or stand-alone hosts over vast distances with data transfer rates +significantly higher than those achievable with commonly used dial-up +connections. + +Usually an external device called `WAN router' sitting on your local network +or connected to your machine's serial port provides physical connection to +WAN. Although router's job may be as simple as taking your local network +traffic, converting it to WAN format and piping it through the WAN link, these +devices are notoriously expensive, with prices as much as 2 - 5 times higher +then the price of a typical PC box. + +Alternatively, considering robustness and multitasking capabilities of Linux, +an internal router can be built (most routers use some sort of stripped down +Unix-like operating system anyway). With a number of relatively inexpensive WAN +interface cards available on the market, a perfectly usable router can be +built for less than half a price of an external router. Yet a Linux box +acting as a router can still be used for other purposes, such as fire-walling, +running FTP, WWW or DNS server, etc. + +This kernel module introduces the notion of a WAN Link Driver (WLD) to Linux +operating system and provides generic hardware-independent services for such +drivers. Why can existing Linux network device interface not be used for +this purpose? Well, it can. However, there are a few key differences between +a typical network interface (e.g. Ethernet) and a WAN link. + +Many WAN protocols, such as X.25 and frame relay, allow for multiple logical +connections (known as `virtual circuits' in X.25 terminology) over a single +physical link. Each such virtual circuit may (and almost always does) lead +to a different geographical location and, therefore, different network. As a +result, it is the virtual circuit, not the physical link, that represents a +route and, therefore, a network interface in Linux terms. + +To further complicate things, virtual circuits are usually volatile in nature +(excluding so called `permanent' virtual circuits or PVCs). With almost no +time required to set up and tear down a virtual circuit, it is highly desirable +to implement on-demand connections in order to minimize network charges. So +unlike a typical network driver, the WAN driver must be able to handle multiple +network interfaces and cope as multiple virtual circuits come into existence +and go away dynamically. + +Last, but not least, WAN configuration is much more complex than that of say +Ethernet and may well amount to several dozens of parameters. Some of them +are "link-wide" while others are virtual circuit-specific. The same holds +true for WAN statistics which is by far more extensive and extremely useful +when troubleshooting WAN connections. Extending the ifconfig utility to suit +these needs may be possible, but does not seem quite reasonable. Therefore, a +WAN configuration utility and corresponding application programmer's interface +is needed for this purpose. + +Most of these problems are taken care of by this module. Its goal is to +provide a user with more-or-less standard look and feel for all WAN devices and +assist a WAN device driver writer by providing common services, such as: + + o User-level interface via /proc file system + o Centralized configuration + o Device management (setup, shutdown, etc.) + o Network interface management (dynamic creation/destruction) + o Protocol encapsulation/decapsulation + +To ba able to use the Linux WAN Router you will also need a WAN Tools package +available from + + ftp.sangoma.com/pub/linux/current_wanpipe/wanpipe-X.Y.Z.tgz + +where vX.Y.Z represent the wanpipe version number. + +For technical questions and/or comments please e-mail to ncorbic@sangoma.com. +For general inquiries please contact Sangoma Technologies Inc. by + + Hotline: 1-800-388-2475 (USA and Canada, toll free) + Phone: (905) 474-1990 ext: 106 + Fax: (905) 474-9223 + E-mail: dm@sangoma.com (David Mandelstam) + WWW: http://www.sangoma.com + + +INSTALLATION + +Please read the WanpipeForLinux.pdf manual on how to +install the WANPIPE tools and drivers properly. + + +After installing wanpipe package: /usr/local/wanrouter/doc. +On the ftp.sangoma.com : /linux/current_wanpipe/doc + + +COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING INFORMATION + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass +Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + + +ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS + +This product is based on the WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Router developed +by Sangoma Technologies Inc. for Linux 2.0.x and 2.2.x. Success of the WANPIPE +together with the next major release of Linux kernel in summer 1996 commanded +adequate changes to the WANPIPE code to take full advantage of new Linux +features. + +Instead of continuing developing proprietary interface tied to Sangoma WAN +cards, we decided to separate all hardware-independent code into a separate +module and defined two levels of interfaces - one for user-level applications +and another for kernel-level WAN drivers. WANPIPE is now implemented as a +WAN driver compliant with the WAN Link Driver interface. Also a general +purpose WAN configuration utility and a set of shell scripts was developed to +support WAN router at the user level. + +Many useful ideas concerning hardware-independent interface implementation +were given by Mike McLagan <mike.mclagan@linux.org> and his implementation +of the Frame Relay router and drivers for Sangoma cards (dlci/sdla). + +With the new implementation of the APIs being incorporated into the WANPIPE, +a special thank goes to Alan Cox in providing insight into BSD sockets. + +Special thanks to all the WANPIPE users who performed field-testing, reported +bugs and made valuable comments and suggestions that help us to improve this +product. + + + +NEW IN THIS RELEASE + + o Updated the WANCFG utility + Calls the pppconfig to configure the PPPD + for async connections. + + o Added the PPPCONFIG utility + Used to configure the PPPD dameon for the + WANPIPE Async PPP and standard serial port. + The wancfg calls the pppconfig to configure + the pppd. + + o Fixed the PCI autodetect feature. + The SLOT 0 was used as an autodetect option + however, some high end PC's slot numbers start + from 0. + + o This release has been tested with the new backupd + daemon release. + + +PRODUCT COMPONENTS AND RELATED FILES + +/etc: (or user defined) + wanpipe1.conf default router configuration file + +/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/misc: + wanrouter.o router kernel loadable module + af_wanpipe.o wanpipe api socket module + +/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/net: + sdladrv.o Sangoma SDLA support module + wanpipe.o Sangoma WANPIPE(tm) driver module + +/proc/net/wanrouter + Config reads current router configuration + Status reads current router status + {name} reads WAN driver statistics + +/usr/sbin: + wanrouter wanrouter start-up script + wanconfig wanrouter configuration utility + sdladump WANPIPE adapter memory dump utility + fpipemon Monitor for Frame Relay + cpipemon Monitor for Cisco HDLC + ppipemon Monitor for PPP + xpipemon Monitor for X25 + wpkbdmon WANPIPE keyboard led monitor/debugger + +/usr/local/wanrouter: + README this file + COPYING GNU General Public License + Setup installation script + Filelist distribution definition file + wanrouter.rc meta-configuration file + (used by the Setup and wanrouter script) + +/usr/local/wanrouter/doc: + wanpipeForLinux.pdf WAN Router User's Manual + +/usr/local/wanrouter/patches: + wanrouter-v2213.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.11 up to 2.2.13. + wanrouter-v2214.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.2.14. + wanrouter-v2215.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.15 to 2.2.17. + wanrouter-v2218.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.18 and up. + wanrouter-v240.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.4.0. + wanrouter-v242.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.4.2 and up. + wanrouter-v2034.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.0.34 + wanrouter-v2036.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.0.36 and up. + +/usr/local/wanrouter/patches/kdrivers: + Sources of the latest WANPIPE device drivers. + These are used to UPGRADE the linux kernel to the newest + version if the kernel source has already been pathced with + WANPIPE drivers. + +/usr/local/wanrouter/samples: + interface sample interface configuration file + wanpipe1.cpri CHDLC primary port + wanpipe2.csec CHDLC secondary port + wanpipe1.fr Frame Relay protocol + wanpipe1.ppp PPP protocol ) + wanpipe1.asy CHDLC ASYNC protocol + wanpipe1.x25 X25 protocol + wanpipe1.stty Sync TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon) + wanpipe1.atty Async TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon) + wanrouter.rc sample meta-configuration file + +/usr/local/wanrouter/util: + * wan-tools utilities source code + +/usr/local/wanrouter/api/x25: + * x25 api sample programs. +/usr/local/wanrouter/api/chdlc: + * chdlc api sample programs. +/usr/local/wanrouter/api/fr: + * fr api sample programs. +/usr/local/wanrouter/config/wancfg: + wancfg WANPIPE GUI configuration program. + Creates wanpipe#.conf files. +/usr/local/wanrouter/config/cfgft1: + cfgft1 GUI CSU/DSU configuration program. + +/usr/include/linux: + wanrouter.h router API definitions + wanpipe.h WANPIPE API definitions + sdladrv.h SDLA support module API definitions + sdlasfm.h SDLA firmware module definitions + if_wanpipe.h WANPIPE Socket definitions + if_wanpipe_common.h WANPIPE Socket/Driver common definitions. + sdlapci.h WANPIPE PCI definitions + + +/usr/src/linux/net/wanrouter: + * wanrouter source code + +/var/log: + wanrouter wanrouter start-up log (created by the Setup script) + +/var/lock: (or /var/lock/subsys for RedHat) + wanrouter wanrouter lock file (created by the Setup script) + +/usr/local/wanrouter/firmware: + fr514.sfm Frame relay firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card + cdual514.sfm Dual Port Cisco HDLC firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card + ppp514.sfm PPP Firmware for Sangoma S508 and S514 cards + x25_508.sfm X25 Firmware for Sangoma S508 card. + + +REVISION HISTORY + +1.0.0 December 31, 1996 Initial version + +1.0.1 January 30, 1997 Status and statistics can be read via /proc + filesystem entries. + +1.0.2 April 30, 1997 Added UDP management via monitors. + +1.0.3 June 3, 1997 UDP management for multiple boards using Frame + Relay and PPP + Enabled continuous transmission of Configure + Request Packet for PPP (for 508 only) + Connection Timeout for PPP changed from 900 to 0 + Flow Control Problem fixed for Frame Relay + +1.0.4 July 10, 1997 S508/FT1 monitoring capability in fpipemon and + ppipemon utilities. + Configurable TTL for UDP packets. + Multicast and Broadcast IP source addresses are + silently discarded. + +1.0.5 July 28, 1997 Configurable T391,T392,N391,N392,N393 for Frame + Relay in router.conf. + Configurable Memory Address through router.conf + for Frame Relay, PPP and X.25. (commenting this + out enables auto-detection). + Fixed freeing up received buffers using kfree() + for Frame Relay and X.25. + Protect sdla_peek() by calling save_flags(), + cli() and restore_flags(). + Changed number of Trace elements from 32 to 20 + Added DLCI specific data monitoring in FPIPEMON. +2.0.0 Nov 07, 1997 Implemented protection of RACE conditions by + critical flags for FRAME RELAY and PPP. + DLCI List interrupt mode implemented. + IPX support in FRAME RELAY and PPP. + IPX Server Support (MARS) + More driver specific stats included in FPIPEMON + and PIPEMON. + +2.0.1 Nov 28, 1997 Bug Fixes for version 2.0.0. + Protection of "enable_irq()" while + "disable_irq()" has been enabled from any other + routine (for Frame Relay, PPP and X25). + Added additional Stats for Fpipemon and Ppipemon + Improved Load Sharing for multiple boards + +2.0.2 Dec 09, 1997 Support for PAP and CHAP for ppp has been + implemented. + +2.0.3 Aug 15, 1998 New release supporting Cisco HDLC, CIR for Frame + relay, Dynamic IP assignment for PPP and Inverse + Arp support for Frame-relay. Man Pages are + included for better support and a new utility + for configuring FT1 cards. + +2.0.4 Dec 09, 1998 Dual Port support for Cisco HDLC. + Support for HDLC (LAPB) API. + Supports BiSync Streaming code for S502E + and S503 cards. + Support for Streaming HDLC API. + Provides a BSD socket interface for + creating applications using BiSync + streaming. + +2.0.5 Aug 04, 1999 CHDLC initializatin bug fix. + PPP interrupt driven driver: + Fix to the PPP line hangup problem. + New PPP firmware + Added comments to the startup SYSTEM ERROR messages + Xpipemon debugging application for the X25 protocol + New USER_MANUAL.txt + Fixed the odd boundary 4byte writes to the board. + BiSync Streaming code has been taken out. + Available as a patch. + Streaming HDLC API has been taken out. + Available as a patch. + +2.0.6 Aug 17, 1999 Increased debugging in statup scripts + Fixed insallation bugs from 2.0.5 + Kernel patch works for both 2.2.10 and 2.2.11 kernels. + There is no functional difference between the two packages + +2.0.7 Aug 26, 1999 o Merged X25API code into WANPIPE. + o Fixed a memeory leak for X25API + o Updated the X25API code for 2.2.X kernels. + o Improved NEM handling. + +2.1.0 Oct 25, 1999 o New code for S514 PCI Card + o New CHDLC and Frame Relay drivers + o PPP and X25 are not supported in this release + +2.1.1 Nov 30, 1999 o PPP support for S514 PCI Cards + +2.1.3 Apr 06, 2000 o Socket based x25api + o Socket based chdlc api + o Socket based fr api + o Dual Port Receive only CHDLC support. + o Asynchronous CHDLC support (Secondary Port) + o cfgft1 GUI csu/dsu configurator + o wancfg GUI configuration file + configurator. + o Architectual directory changes. + +beta-2.1.4 Jul 2000 o Dynamic interface configuration: + Network interfaces reflect the state + of protocol layer. If the protocol becomes + disconnected, driver will bring down + the interface. Once the protocol reconnects + the interface will be brought up. + + Note: This option is turned off by default. + + o Dynamic wanrouter setup using 'wanconfig': + wanconfig utility can be used to + shutdown,restart,start or reconfigure + a virtual circuit dynamically. + + Frame Relay: Each DLCI can be: + created,stopped,restarted and reconfigured + dynamically using wanconfig. + + ex: wanconfig card wanpipe1 dev wp1_fr16 up + + o Wanrouter startup via command line arguments: + wanconfig also supports wanrouter startup via command line + arguments. Thus, there is no need to create a wanpipe#.conf + configuration file. + + o Socket based x25api update/bug fixes. + Added support for LCN numbers greater than 255. + Option to pass up modem messages. + Provided a PCI IRQ check, so a single S514 + card is guaranteed to have a non-sharing interrupt. + + o Fixes to the wancfg utility. + o New FT1 debugging support via *pipemon utilities. + o Frame Relay ARP support Enabled. + +beta3-2.1.4 Jul 2000 o X25 M_BIT Problem fix. + o Added the Multi-Port PPP + Updated utilites for the Multi-Port PPP. + +2.1.4 Aut 2000 + o In X25API: + Maximum packet an application can send + to the driver has been extended to 4096 bytes. + + Fixed the x25 startup bug. Enable + communications only after all interfaces + come up. HIGH SVC/PVC is used to calculate + the number of channels. + Enable protocol only after all interfaces + are enabled. + + o Added an extra state to the FT1 config, kernel module. + o Updated the pipemon debuggers. + + o Blocked the Multi-Port PPP from running on kernels + 2.2.16 or greater, due to syncppp kernel module + change. + +beta1-2.1.5 Nov 15 2000 + o Fixed the MulitPort PPP Support for kernels 2.2.16 and above. + 2.2.X kernels only + + o Secured the driver UDP debugging calls + - All illegal netowrk debugging calls are reported to + the log. + - Defined a set of allowed commands, all other denied. + + o Cpipemon + - Added set FT1 commands to the cpipemon. Thus CSU/DSU + configuraiton can be performed using cpipemon. + All systems that cannot run cfgft1 GUI utility should + use cpipemon to configure the on board CSU/DSU. + + + o Keyboard Led Monitor/Debugger + - A new utilty /usr/sbin/wpkbdmon uses keyboard leds + to convey operatinal statistic information of the + Sangoma WANPIPE cards. + NUM_LOCK = Line State (On=connected, Off=disconnected) + CAPS_LOCK = Tx data (On=transmitting, Off=no tx data) + SCROLL_LOCK = Rx data (On=receiving, Off=no rx data + + o Hardware probe on module load and dynamic device allocation + - During WANPIPE module load, all Sangoma cards are probed + and found information is printed in the /var/log/messages. + - If no cards are found, the module load fails. + - Appropriate number of devices are dynamically loaded + based on the number of Sangoma cards found. + + Note: The kernel configuraiton option + CONFIG_WANPIPE_CARDS has been taken out. + + o Fixed the Frame Relay and Chdlc network interfaces so they are + compatible with libpcap libraries. Meaning, tcpdump, snort, + ethereal, and all other packet sniffers and debuggers work on + all WANPIPE netowrk interfaces. + - Set the network interface encoding type to ARPHRD_PPP. + This tell the sniffers that data obtained from the + network interface is in pure IP format. + Fix for 2.2.X kernels only. + + o True interface encoding option for Frame Relay and CHDLC + - The above fix sets the network interface encoding + type to ARPHRD_PPP, however some customers use + the encoding interface type to determine the + protocol running. Therefore, the TURE ENCODING + option will set the interface type back to the + original value. + + NOTE: If this option is used with Frame Relay and CHDLC + libpcap library support will be broken. + i.e. tcpdump will not work. + Fix for 2.2.x Kernels only. + + o Ethernet Bridgind over Frame Relay + - The Frame Relay bridging has been developed by + Kristian Hoffmann and Mark Wells. + - The Linux kernel bridge is used to send ethernet + data over the frame relay links. + For 2.2.X Kernels only. + + o Added extensive 2.0.X support. Most new features of + 2.1.5 for protocols Frame Relay, PPP and CHDLC are + supported under 2.0.X kernels. + +beta1-2.2.0 Dec 30 2000 + o Updated drivers for 2.4.X kernels. + o Updated drivers for SMP support. + o X25API is now able to share PCI interrupts. + o Took out a general polling routine that was used + only by X25API. + o Added appropriate locks to the dynamic reconfiguration + code. + o Fixed a bug in the keyboard debug monitor. + +beta2-2.2.0 Jan 8 2001 + o Patches for 2.4.0 kernel + o Patches for 2.2.18 kernel + o Minor updates to PPP and CHLDC drivers. + Note: No functinal difference. + +beta3-2.2.9 Jan 10 2001 + o I missed the 2.2.18 kernel patches in beta2-2.2.0 + release. They are included in this release. + +Stable Release +2.2.0 Feb 01 2001 + o Bug fix in wancfg GUI configurator. + The edit function didn't work properly. + + +bata1-2.2.1 Feb 09 2001 + o WANPIPE TTY Driver emulation. + Two modes of operation Sync and Async. + Sync: Using the PPPD daemon, kernel SyncPPP layer + and the Wanpipe sync TTY driver: a PPP protocol + connection can be established via Sangoma adapter, over + a T1 leased line. + + The 2.4.0 kernel PPP layer supports MULTILINK + protocol, that can be used to bundle any number of Sangoma + adapters (T1 lines) into one, under a single IP address. + Thus, efficiently obtaining multiple T1 throughput. + + NOTE: The remote side must also implement MULTILINK PPP + protocol. + + Async:Using the PPPD daemon, kernel AsyncPPP layer + and the WANPIPE async TTY driver: a PPP protocol + connection can be established via Sangoma adapter and + a modem, over a telephone line. + + Thus, the WANPIPE async TTY driver simulates a serial + TTY driver that would normally be used to interface the + MODEM to the linux kernel. + + o WANPIPE PPP Backup Utility + This utility will monitor the state of the PPP T1 line. + In case of failure, a dial up connection will be established + via pppd daemon, ether via a serial tty driver (serial port), + or a WANPIPE async TTY driver (in case serial port is unavailable). + + Furthermore, while in dial up mode, the primary PPP T1 link + will be monitored for signs of life. + + If the PPP T1 link comes back to life, the dial up connection + will be shutdown and T1 line re-established. + + + o New Setup installation script. + Option to UPGRADE device drivers if the kernel source has + already been patched with WANPIPE. + + Option to COMPILE WANPIPE modules against the currently + running kernel, thus no need for manual kernel and module + re-compilatin. + + o Updates and Bug Fixes to wancfg utility. + +bata2-2.2.1 Feb 20 2001 + + o Bug fixes to the CHDLC device drivers. + The driver had compilation problems under kernels + 2.2.14 or lower. + + o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script. + The device drivers compilation options didn't work + properly. + + o Update to the wpbackupd daemon. + Optimized the cross-over times, between the primary + link and the backup dialup. + +beta3-2.2.1 Mar 02 2001 + o Patches for 2.4.2 kernel. + + o Bug fixes to util/ make files. + o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script. + + o Took out the backupd support and made it into + as separate package. + +beta4-2.2.1 Mar 12 2001 + + o Fix to the Frame Relay Device driver. + IPSAC sends a packet of zero length + header to the frame relay driver. The + driver tries to push its own 2 byte header + into the packet, which causes the driver to + crash. + + o Fix the WANPIPE re-configuration code. + Bug was found by trying to run the cfgft1 while the + interface was already running. + + o Updates to cfgft1. + Writes a wanpipe#.cfgft1 configuration file + once the CSU/DSU is configured. This file can + holds the current CSU/DSU configuration. + + + +>>>>>> END OF README <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< + + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/wavelan.txt b/Documentation/networking/wavelan.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c1acf5eb3712 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/wavelan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + The Wavelan drivers saga + ------------------------ + + By Jean Tourrilhes <jt@hpl.hp.com> + + The Wavelan is a Radio network adapter designed by +Lucent. Under this generic name is hidden quite a variety of hardware, +and many Linux driver to support it. + The get the full story on Wireless LANs, please consult : + http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/Linux/ + +"wavelan" driver (old ISA Wavelan) +---------------- + o Config : Network device -> Wireless LAN -> AT&T WaveLAN + o Location : .../drivers/net/wavelan* + o in-line doc : .../drivers/net/wavelan.p.h + o on-line doc : + http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/Linux/Wavelan.html + + This is the driver for the ISA version of the first generation +of the Wavelan, now discontinued. The device is 2 Mb/s, composed of a +Intel 82586 controller and a Lucent Modem, and is NOT 802.11 compliant. + The driver has been tested with the following hardware : + o Wavelan ISA 915 MHz (full length ISA card) + o Wavelan ISA 915 MHz 2.0 (half length ISA card) + o Wavelan ISA 2.4 GHz (full length ISA card, fixed frequency) + o Wavelan ISA 2.4 GHz 2.0 (half length ISA card, frequency selectable) + o Above cards with the optional DES encryption feature + +"wavelan_cs" driver (old Pcmcia Wavelan) +------------------- + o Config : Network device -> PCMCIA network -> + Pcmcia Wireless LAN -> AT&T/Lucent WaveLAN + o Location : .../drivers/net/pcmcia/wavelan* + o in-line doc : .../drivers/net/pcmcia/wavelan_cs.h + o on-line doc : + http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/Linux/Wavelan.html + + This is the driver for the PCMCIA version of the first +generation of the Wavelan, now discontinued. The device is 2 Mb/s, +composed of a Intel 82593 controller (totally different from the 82586) +and a Lucent Modem, and NOT 802.11 compatible. + The driver has been tested with the following hardware : + o Wavelan Pcmcia 915 MHz 2.0 (Pcmcia card + separate + modem/antenna block) + o Wavelan Pcmcia 2.4 GHz 2.0 (Pcmcia card + separate + modem/antenna block) + +"wvlan_cs" driver (Wavelan IEEE, GPL) +----------------- + o Config : Not yet in kernel + o Location : Pcmcia package 3.1.10+ + o on-line doc : http://www.fasta.fh-dortmund.de/users/andy/wvlan/ + + This is the driver for the current generation of Wavelan IEEE, +which is 802.11 compatible. Depending on version, it is 2 Mb/s or 11 +Mb/s, with or without encryption, all implemented in Lucent specific +DSP (the Hermes). + This is a GPL full source PCMCIA driver (ISA is just a Pcmcia +card with ISA-Pcmcia bridge). + +"wavelan2_cs" driver (Wavelan IEEE, binary) +-------------------- + o Config : Not yet in kernel + o Location : ftp://sourceforge.org/pcmcia/contrib/ + + This driver support exactly the same hardware as the previous +driver, the main difference is that it is based on a binary library +and supported by Lucent. + + I hope it clears the confusion ;-) + + Jean diff --git a/Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt b/Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..975cc87ebdd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + X.25 Device Driver Interface 1.1 + + Jonathan Naylor 26.12.96 + +This is a description of the messages to be passed between the X.25 Packet +Layer and the X.25 device driver. They are designed to allow for the easy +setting of the LAPB mode from within the Packet Layer. + +The X.25 device driver will be coded normally as per the Linux device driver +standards. Most X.25 device drivers will be moderately similar to the +already existing Ethernet device drivers. However unlike those drivers, the +X.25 device driver has a state associated with it, and this information +needs to be passed to and from the Packet Layer for proper operation. + +All messages are held in sk_buff's just like real data to be transmitted +over the LAPB link. The first byte of the skbuff indicates the meaning of +the rest of the skbuff, if any more information does exist. + + +Packet Layer to Device Driver +----------------------------- + +First Byte = 0x00 + +This indicates that the rest of the skbuff contains data to be transmitted +over the LAPB link. The LAPB link should already exist before any data is +passed down. + +First Byte = 0x01 + +Establish the LAPB link. If the link is already established then the connect +confirmation message should be returned as soon as possible. + +First Byte = 0x02 + +Terminate the LAPB link. If it is already disconnected then the disconnect +confirmation message should be returned as soon as possible. + +First Byte = 0x03 + +LAPB parameters. To be defined. + + +Device Driver to Packet Layer +----------------------------- + +First Byte = 0x00 + +This indicates that the rest of the skbuff contains data that has been +received over the LAPB link. + +First Byte = 0x01 + +LAPB link has been established. The same message is used for both a LAPB +link connect_confirmation and a connect_indication. + +First Byte = 0x02 + +LAPB link has been terminated. This same message is used for both a LAPB +link disconnect_confirmation and a disconnect_indication. + +First Byte = 0x03 + +LAPB parameters. To be defined. + + + +Possible Problems +================= + +(Henner Eisen, 2000-10-28) + +The X.25 packet layer protocol depends on a reliable datalink service. +The LAPB protocol provides such reliable service. But this reliability +is not preserved by the Linux network device driver interface: + +- With Linux 2.4.x (and above) SMP kernels, packet ordering is not + preserved. Even if a device driver calls netif_rx(skb1) and later + netif_rx(skb2), skb2 might be delivered to the network layer + earlier that skb1. +- Data passed upstream by means of netif_rx() might be dropped by the + kernel if the backlog queue is congested. + +The X.25 packet layer protocol will detect this and reset the virtual +call in question. But many upper layer protocols are not designed to +handle such N-Reset events gracefully. And frequent N-Reset events +will always degrade performance. + +Thus, driver authors should make netif_rx() as reliable as possible: + +SMP re-ordering will not occur if the driver's interrupt handler is +always executed on the same CPU. Thus, + +- Driver authors should use irq affinity for the interrupt handler. + +The probability of packet loss due to backlog congestion can be +reduced by the following measures or a combination thereof: + +(1) Drivers for kernel versions 2.4.x and above should always check the + return value of netif_rx(). If it returns NET_RX_DROP, the + driver's LAPB protocol must not confirm reception of the frame + to the peer. + This will reliably suppress packet loss. The LAPB protocol will + automatically cause the peer to re-transmit the dropped packet + later. + The lapb module interface was modified to support this. Its + data_indication() method should now transparently pass the + netif_rx() return value to the (lapb mopdule) caller. +(2) Drivers for kernel versions 2.2.x should always check the global + variable netdev_dropping when a new frame is received. The driver + should only call netif_rx() if netdev_dropping is zero. Otherwise + the driver should not confirm delivery of the frame and drop it. + Alternatively, the driver can queue the frame internally and call + netif_rx() later when netif_dropping is 0 again. In that case, delivery + confirmation should also be deferred such that the internal queue + cannot grow to much. + This will not reliably avoid packet loss, but the probability + of packet loss in netif_rx() path will be significantly reduced. +(3) Additionally, driver authors might consider to support + CONFIG_NET_HW_FLOWCONTROL. This allows the driver to be woken up + when a previously congested backlog queue becomes empty again. + The driver could uses this for flow-controlling the peer by means + of the LAPB protocol's flow-control service. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/x25.txt b/Documentation/networking/x25.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c91c6d7159ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/x25.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +Linux X.25 Project + +As my third year dissertation at University I have taken it upon myself to +write an X.25 implementation for Linux. My aim is to provide a complete X.25 +Packet Layer and a LAPB module to allow for "normal" X.25 to be run using +Linux. There are two sorts of X.25 cards available, intelligent ones that +implement LAPB on the card itself, and unintelligent ones that simply do +framing, bit-stuffing and checksumming. These both need to be handled by the +system. + +I therefore decided to write the implementation such that as far as the +Packet Layer is concerned, the link layer was being performed by a lower +layer of the Linux kernel and therefore it did not concern itself with +implementation of LAPB. Therefore the LAPB modules would be called by +unintelligent X.25 card drivers and not by intelligent ones, this would +provide a uniform device driver interface, and simplify configuration. + +To confuse matters a little, an 802.2 LLC implementation for Linux is being +written which will allow X.25 to be run over an Ethernet (or Token Ring) and +conform with the JNT "Pink Book", this will have a different interface to +the Packet Layer but there will be no confusion since the class of device +being served by the LLC will be completely separate from LAPB. The LLC +implementation is being done as part of another protocol project (SNA) and +by a different author. + +Just when you thought that it could not become more confusing, another +option appeared, XOT. This allows X.25 Packet Layer frames to operate over +the Internet using TCP/IP as a reliable link layer. RFC1613 specifies the +format and behaviour of the protocol. If time permits this option will also +be actively considered. + +A linux-x25 mailing list has been created at vger.kernel.org to support the +development and use of Linux X.25. It is early days yet, but interested +parties are welcome to subscribe to it. Just send a message to +majordomo@vger.kernel.org with the following in the message body: + +subscribe linux-x25 +end + +The contents of the Subject line are ignored. + +Jonathan + +g4klx@g4klx.demon.co.uk diff --git a/Documentation/networking/z8530drv.txt b/Documentation/networking/z8530drv.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2206abbc3e1b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/z8530drv.txt @@ -0,0 +1,657 @@ +This is a subset of the documentation. To use this driver you MUST have the +full package from: + +Internet: +========= + +1. ftp://ftp.ccac.rwth-aachen.de/pub/jr/z8530drv-utils_3.0-3.tar.gz + +2. ftp://ftp.pspt.fi/pub/ham/linux/ax25/z8530drv-utils_3.0-3.tar.gz + +Please note that the information in this document may be hopelessly outdated. +A new version of the documentation, along with links to other important +Linux Kernel AX.25 documentation and programs, is available on +http://yaina.de/jreuter + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + + SCC.C - Linux driver for Z8530 based HDLC cards for AX.25 + + ******************************************************************** + + (c) 1993,2000 by Joerg Reuter DL1BKE <jreuter@yaina.de> + + portions (c) 1993 Guido ten Dolle PE1NNZ + + for the complete copyright notice see >> Copying.Z8530DRV << + + ******************************************************************** + + +1. Initialization of the driver +=============================== + +To use the driver, 3 steps must be performed: + + 1. if compiled as module: loading the module + 2. Setup of hardware, MODEM and KISS parameters with sccinit + 3. Attach each channel to the Linux kernel AX.25 with "ifconfig" + +Unlike the versions below 2.4 this driver is a real network device +driver. If you want to run xNOS instead of our fine kernel AX.25 +use a 2.x version (available from above sites) or read the +AX.25-HOWTO on how to emulate a KISS TNC on network device drivers. + + +1.1 Loading the module +====================== + +(If you're going to compile the driver as a part of the kernel image, + skip this chapter and continue with 1.2) + +Before you can use a module, you'll have to load it with + + insmod scc.o + +please read 'man insmod' that comes with module-init-tools. + +You should include the insmod in one of the /etc/rc.d/rc.* files, +and don't forget to insert a call of sccinit after that. It +will read your /etc/z8530drv.conf. + +1.2. /etc/z8530drv.conf +======================= + +To setup all parameters you must run /sbin/sccinit from one +of your rc.*-files. This has to be done BEFORE you can +"ifconfig" an interface. Sccinit reads the file /etc/z8530drv.conf +and sets the hardware, MODEM and KISS parameters. A sample file is +delivered with this package. Change it to your needs. + +The file itself consists of two main sections. + +1.2.1 configuration of hardware parameters +========================================== + +The hardware setup section defines the following parameters for each +Z8530: + +chip 1 +data_a 0x300 # data port A +ctrl_a 0x304 # control port A +data_b 0x301 # data port B +ctrl_b 0x305 # control port B +irq 5 # IRQ No. 5 +pclock 4915200 # clock +board BAYCOM # hardware type +escc no # enhanced SCC chip? (8580/85180/85280) +vector 0 # latch for interrupt vector +special no # address of special function register +option 0 # option to set via sfr + + +chip - this is just a delimiter to make sccinit a bit simpler to + program. A parameter has no effect. + +data_a - the address of the data port A of this Z8530 (needed) +ctrl_a - the address of the control port A (needed) +data_b - the address of the data port B (needed) +ctrl_b - the address of the control port B (needed) + +irq - the used IRQ for this chip. Different chips can use different + IRQs or the same. If they share an interrupt, it needs to be + specified within one chip-definition only. + +pclock - the clock at the PCLK pin of the Z8530 (option, 4915200 is + default), measured in Hertz + +board - the "type" of the board: + + SCC type value + --------------------------------- + PA0HZP SCC card PA0HZP + EAGLE card EAGLE + PC100 card PC100 + PRIMUS-PC (DG9BL) card PRIMUS + BayCom (U)SCC card BAYCOM + +escc - if you want support for ESCC chips (8580, 85180, 85280), set + this to "yes" (option, defaults to "no") + +vector - address of the vector latch (aka "intack port") for PA0HZP + cards. There can be only one vector latch for all chips! + (option, defaults to 0) + +special - address of the special function register on several cards. + (option, defaults to 0) + +option - The value you write into that register (option, default is 0) + +You can specify up to four chips (8 channels). If this is not enough, +just change + + #define MAXSCC 4 + +to a higher value. + +Example for the BAYCOM USCC: +---------------------------- + +chip 1 +data_a 0x300 # data port A +ctrl_a 0x304 # control port A +data_b 0x301 # data port B +ctrl_b 0x305 # control port B +irq 5 # IRQ No. 5 (#) +board BAYCOM # hardware type (*) +# +# SCC chip 2 +# +chip 2 +data_a 0x302 +ctrl_a 0x306 +data_b 0x303 +ctrl_b 0x307 +board BAYCOM + +An example for a PA0HZP card: +----------------------------- + +chip 1 +data_a 0x153 +data_b 0x151 +ctrl_a 0x152 +ctrl_b 0x150 +irq 9 +pclock 4915200 +board PA0HZP +vector 0x168 +escc no +# +# +# +chip 2 +data_a 0x157 +data_b 0x155 +ctrl_a 0x156 +ctrl_b 0x154 +irq 9 +pclock 4915200 +board PA0HZP +vector 0x168 +escc no + +A DRSI would should probably work with this: +-------------------------------------------- +(actually: two DRSI cards...) + +chip 1 +data_a 0x303 +data_b 0x301 +ctrl_a 0x302 +ctrl_b 0x300 +irq 7 +pclock 4915200 +board DRSI +escc no +# +# +# +chip 2 +data_a 0x313 +data_b 0x311 +ctrl_a 0x312 +ctrl_b 0x310 +irq 7 +pclock 4915200 +board DRSI +escc no + +Note that you cannot use the on-board baudrate generator off DRSI +cards. Use "mode dpll" for clock source (see below). + +This is based on information provided by Mike Bilow (and verified +by Paul Helay) + +The utility "gencfg" +-------------------- + +If you only know the parameters for the PE1CHL driver for DOS, +run gencfg. It will generate the correct port addresses (I hope). +Its parameters are exactly the same as the ones you use with +the "attach scc" command in net, except that the string "init" must +not appear. Example: + +gencfg 2 0x150 4 2 0 1 0x168 9 4915200 + +will print a skeleton z8530drv.conf for the OptoSCC to stdout. + +gencfg 2 0x300 2 4 5 -4 0 7 4915200 0x10 + +does the same for the BAYCOM USCC card. In my opinion it is much easier +to edit scc_config.h... + + +1.2.2 channel configuration +=========================== + +The channel definition is divided into three sub sections for each +channel: + +An example for scc0: + +# DEVICE + +device scc0 # the device for the following params + +# MODEM / BUFFERS + +speed 1200 # the default baudrate +clock dpll # clock source: + # dpll = normal half duplex operation + # external = MODEM provides own Rx/Tx clock + # divider = use full duplex divider if + # installed (1) +mode nrzi # HDLC encoding mode + # nrzi = 1k2 MODEM, G3RUH 9k6 MODEM + # nrz = DF9IC 9k6 MODEM + # +bufsize 384 # size of buffers. Note that this must include + # the AX.25 header, not only the data field! + # (optional, defaults to 384) + +# KISS (Layer 1) + +txdelay 36 # (see chapter 1.4) +persist 64 +slot 8 +tail 8 +fulldup 0 +wait 12 +min 3 +maxkey 7 +idle 3 +maxdef 120 +group 0 +txoff off +softdcd on +slip off + +The order WITHIN these sections is unimportant. The order OF these +sections IS important. The MODEM parameters are set with the first +recognized KISS parameter... + +Please note that you can initialize the board only once after boot +(or insmod). You can change all parameters but "mode" and "clock" +later with the Sccparam program or through KISS. Just to avoid +security holes... + +(1) this divider is usually mounted on the SCC-PBC (PA0HZP) or not + present at all (BayCom). It feeds back the output of the DPLL + (digital pll) as transmit clock. Using this mode without a divider + installed will normally result in keying the transceiver until + maxkey expires --- of course without sending anything (useful). + +2. Attachment of a channel by your AX.25 software +================================================= + +2.1 Kernel AX.25 +================ + +To set up an AX.25 device you can simply type: + + ifconfig scc0 44.128.1.1 hw ax25 dl0tha-7 + +This will create a network interface with the IP number 44.128.20.107 +and the callsign "dl0tha". If you do not have any IP number (yet) you +can use any of the 44.128.0.0 network. Note that you do not need +axattach. The purpose of axattach (like slattach) is to create a KISS +network device linked to a TTY. Please read the documentation of the +ax25-utils and the AX.25-HOWTO to learn how to set the parameters of +the kernel AX.25. + +2.2 NOS, NET and TFKISS +======================= + +Since the TTY driver (aka KISS TNC emulation) is gone you need +to emulate the old behaviour. The cost of using these programs is +that you probably need to compile the kernel AX.25, regardless of whether +you actually use it or not. First setup your /etc/ax25/axports, +for example: + + 9k6 dl0tha-9 9600 255 4 9600 baud port (scc3) + axlink dl0tha-15 38400 255 4 Link to NOS + +Now "ifconfig" the scc device: + + ifconfig scc3 44.128.1.1 hw ax25 dl0tha-9 + +You can now axattach a pseudo-TTY: + + axattach /dev/ptys0 axlink + +and start your NOS and attach /dev/ptys0 there. The problem is that +NOS is reachable only via digipeating through the kernel AX.25 +(disastrous on a DAMA controlled channel). To solve this problem, +configure "rxecho" to echo the incoming frames from "9k6" to "axlink" +and outgoing frames from "axlink" to "9k6" and start: + + rxecho + +Or simply use "kissbridge" coming with z8530drv-utils: + + ifconfig scc3 hw ax25 dl0tha-9 + kissbridge scc3 /dev/ptys0 + + +3. Adjustment and Display of parameters +======================================= + +3.1 Displaying SCC Parameters: +============================== + +Once a SCC channel has been attached, the parameter settings and +some statistic information can be shown using the param program: + +dl1bke-u:~$ sccstat scc0 + +Parameters: + +speed : 1200 baud +txdelay : 36 +persist : 255 +slottime : 0 +txtail : 8 +fulldup : 1 +waittime : 12 +mintime : 3 sec +maxkeyup : 7 sec +idletime : 3 sec +maxdefer : 120 sec +group : 0x00 +txoff : off +softdcd : on +SLIP : off + +Status: + +HDLC Z8530 Interrupts Buffers +----------------------------------------------------------------------- +Sent : 273 RxOver : 0 RxInts : 125074 Size : 384 +Received : 1095 TxUnder: 0 TxInts : 4684 NoSpace : 0 +RxErrors : 1591 ExInts : 11776 +TxErrors : 0 SpInts : 1503 +Tx State : idle + + +The status info shown is: + +Sent - number of frames transmitted +Received - number of frames received +RxErrors - number of receive errors (CRC, ABORT) +TxErrors - number of discarded Tx frames (due to various reasons) +Tx State - status of the Tx interrupt handler: idle/busy/active/tail (2) +RxOver - number of receiver overruns +TxUnder - number of transmitter underruns +RxInts - number of receiver interrupts +TxInts - number of transmitter interrupts +EpInts - number of receiver special condition interrupts +SpInts - number of external/status interrupts +Size - maximum size of an AX.25 frame (*with* AX.25 headers!) +NoSpace - number of times a buffer could not get allocated + +An overrun is abnormal. If lots of these occur, the product of +baudrate and number of interfaces is too high for the processing +power of your computer. NoSpace errors are unlikely to be caused by the +driver or the kernel AX.25. + + +3.2 Setting Parameters +====================== + + +The setting of parameters of the emulated KISS TNC is done in the +same way in the SCC driver. You can change parameters by using +the kissparms program from the ax25-utils package or use the program +"sccparam": + + sccparam <device> <paramname> <decimal-|hexadecimal value> + +You can change the following parameters: + +param : value +------------------------ +speed : 1200 +txdelay : 36 +persist : 255 +slottime : 0 +txtail : 8 +fulldup : 1 +waittime : 12 +mintime : 3 +maxkeyup : 7 +idletime : 3 +maxdefer : 120 +group : 0x00 +txoff : off +softdcd : on +SLIP : off + + +The parameters have the following meaning: + +speed: + The baudrate on this channel in bits/sec + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc3 speed 9600 + +txdelay: + The delay (in units of 10 ms) after keying of the + transmitter, until the first byte is sent. This is usually + called "TXDELAY" in a TNC. When 0 is specified, the driver + will just wait until the CTS signal is asserted. This + assumes the presence of a timer or other circuitry in the + MODEM and/or transmitter, that asserts CTS when the + transmitter is ready for data. + A normal value of this parameter is 30-36. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 txd 20 + +persist: + This is the probability that the transmitter will be keyed + when the channel is found to be free. It is a value from 0 + to 255, and the probability is (value+1)/256. The value + should be somewhere near 50-60, and should be lowered when + the channel is used more heavily. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 persist 20 + +slottime: + This is the time between samples of the channel. It is + expressed in units of 10 ms. About 200-300 ms (value 20-30) + seems to be a good value. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 slot 20 + +tail: + The time the transmitter will remain keyed after the last + byte of a packet has been transferred to the SCC. This is + necessary because the CRC and a flag still have to leave the + SCC before the transmitter is keyed down. The value depends + on the baudrate selected. A few character times should be + sufficient, e.g. 40ms at 1200 baud. (value 4) + The value of this parameter is in 10 ms units. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 4 + +full: + The full-duplex mode switch. This can be one of the following + values: + + 0: The interface will operate in CSMA mode (the normal + half-duplex packet radio operation) + 1: Fullduplex mode, i.e. the transmitter will be keyed at + any time, without checking the received carrier. It + will be unkeyed when there are no packets to be sent. + 2: Like 1, but the transmitter will remain keyed, also + when there are no packets to be sent. Flags will be + sent in that case, until a timeout (parameter 10) + occurs. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 fulldup off + +wait: + The initial waittime before any transmit attempt, after the + frame has been queue for transmit. This is the length of + the first slot in CSMA mode. In full duplex modes it is + set to 0 for maximum performance. + The value of this parameter is in 10 ms units. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc1 wait 4 + +maxkey: + The maximal time the transmitter will be keyed to send + packets, in seconds. This can be useful on busy CSMA + channels, to avoid "getting a bad reputation" when you are + generating a lot of traffic. After the specified time has + elapsed, no new frame will be started. Instead, the trans- + mitter will be switched off for a specified time (parameter + min), and then the selected algorithm for keyup will be + started again. + The value 0 as well as "off" will disable this feature, + and allow infinite transmission time. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 maxk 20 + +min: + This is the time the transmitter will be switched off when + the maximum transmission time is exceeded. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc3 min 10 + +idle + This parameter specifies the maximum idle time in full duplex + 2 mode, in seconds. When no frames have been sent for this + time, the transmitter will be keyed down. A value of 0 is + has same result as the fullduplex mode 1. This parameter + can be disabled. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 idle off # transmit forever + +maxdefer + This is the maximum time (in seconds) to wait for a free channel + to send. When this timer expires the transmitter will be keyed + IMMEDIATELY. If you love to get trouble with other users you + should set this to a very low value ;-) + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 maxdefer 240 # 2 minutes + + +txoff: + When this parameter has the value 0, the transmission of packets + is enable. Otherwise it is disabled. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 txoff on + +group: + It is possible to build special radio equipment to use more than + one frequency on the same band, e.g. using several receivers and + only one transmitter that can be switched between frequencies. + Also, you can connect several radios that are active on the same + band. In these cases, it is not possible, or not a good idea, to + transmit on more than one frequency. The SCC driver provides a + method to lock transmitters on different interfaces, using the + "param <interface> group <x>" command. This will only work when + you are using CSMA mode (parameter full = 0). + The number <x> must be 0 if you want no group restrictions, and + can be computed as follows to create restricted groups: + <x> is the sum of some OCTAL numbers: + + 200 This transmitter will only be keyed when all other + transmitters in the group are off. + 100 This transmitter will only be keyed when the carrier + detect of all other interfaces in the group is off. + 0xx A byte that can be used to define different groups. + Interfaces are in the same group, when the logical AND + between their xx values is nonzero. + + Examples: + When 2 interfaces use group 201, their transmitters will never be + keyed at the same time. + When 2 interfaces use group 101, the transmitters will only key + when both channels are clear at the same time. When group 301, + the transmitters will not be keyed at the same time. + + Don't forget to convert the octal numbers into decimal before + you set the parameter. + + Example: (to be written) + +softdcd: + use a software dcd instead of the real one... Useful for a very + slow squelch. + + Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 soft on + + +4. Problems +=========== + +If you have tx-problems with your BayCom USCC card please check +the manufacturer of the 8530. SGS chips have a slightly +different timing. Try Zilog... A solution is to write to register 8 +instead to the data port, but this won't work with the ESCC chips. +*SIGH!* + +A very common problem is that the PTT locks until the maxkeyup timer +expires, although interrupts and clock source are correct. In most +cases compiling the driver with CONFIG_SCC_DELAY (set with +make config) solves the problems. For more hints read the (pseudo) FAQ +and the documentation coming with z8530drv-utils. + +I got reports that the driver has problems on some 386-based systems. +(i.e. Amstrad) Those systems have a bogus AT bus timing which will +lead to delayed answers on interrupts. You can recognize these +problems by looking at the output of Sccstat for the suspected +port. If it shows under- and overruns you own such a system. + +Delayed processing of received data: This depends on + +- the kernel version + +- kernel profiling compiled or not + +- a high interrupt load + +- a high load of the machine --- running X, Xmorph, XV and Povray, + while compiling the kernel... hmm ... even with 32 MB RAM ... ;-) + Or running a named for the whole .ampr.org domain on an 8 MB + box... + +- using information from rxecho or kissbridge. + +Kernel panics: please read /linux/README and find out if it +really occurred within the scc driver. + +If you cannot solve a problem, send me + +- a description of the problem, +- information on your hardware (computer system, scc board, modem) +- your kernel version +- the output of cat /proc/net/z8530 + +4. Thor RLC100 +============== + +Mysteriously this board seems not to work with the driver. Anyone +got it up-and-running? + + +Many thanks to Linus Torvalds and Alan Cox for including the driver +in the Linux standard distribution and their support. + +Joerg Reuter ampr-net: dl1bke@db0pra.ampr.org + AX-25 : DL1BKE @ DB0ABH.#BAY.DEU.EU + Internet: jreuter@yaina.de + WWW : http://yaina.de/jreuter |